1. 《天相应》显示巴利原文
1. Devatāsaṃyuttaṃ
1. 渡暴流经注释显示巴利原文
1. Oghataraṇasuttavaṇṇanā
对于有分类的事物,其自性的阐明,正是通过显示分类来实现的。因此,为依相应、品、经等分类,首先显示《相应阿含》的结构,而说:「其中,名为相应阿含……」等。
这里的「其中」(tattha),指的是前文「我将阐明殊胜相应阿含的义理」那句话所指的语境;又或者,在「于此注释中,应了知与相应相关的义理」这句话中,因取用了「相应」一词,其所指称的语境也是「其中」。
具有五品的,便称为「五品」(pañcavaggo)。这是以部分来作离合释的构词,而复合词真正要表达的意义是「集合」。显示巴利原文
Vibhāgavantānaṃ sabhāvavibhāvanaṃ vibhāgadassanavaseneva hotīti paṭhamaṃ tāva saṃyuttavaggasuttādivasena saṃyuttāgamassa vibhāgaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘tattha saṃyuttāgamo nāmā’’tiādimāha. Tattha tatthāti yaṃ vuttaṃ – ‘‘saṃyuttāgamavarassa atthaṃ pakāsayissāmī’’ti, tasmiṃ vacane. Tatthāti vā ‘‘etāya aṭṭhakathāya vijānātha saṃyuttanissitaṃ attha’’nti ettha yaṃ saṃyuttaggahaṇaṃ kataṃ, tattha. Pañca vaggā etassāti pañcavaggo. Avayavena viggaho, samudāyo samāsattho.
现在,尊者想从起始为其作注释,为了表明他的注释正是依第一次结集时所安立的经教次第而展开,便说:「在它的诸品中,以《有偈品》为首」等。
这里,「结集」的意思是:世尊随缘随处所宣说、施设的法与律,本是散落的,后来将它们汇集起来,一同唱诵、讲述,便称为结集。因为它涵盖的范围极其广大,且值得最高的尊崇,故称为「大结集」。第一次的大结集,即是「第一结集」;那次结集进行的时间,便称为「第一结集时」——所说的正是那第一结集的时候。显示巴利原文
Idāni taṃ ādito paṭṭhāya saṃvaṇṇetukāmo attano saṃvaṇṇanāya tassa paṭhamamahāsaṅgītiyaṃ nikkhittānukkameneva pavattabhāvaṃ dassetuṃ, ‘‘tassa vaggesu sagāthāvaggo ādī’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha yathāpaccayaṃ tattha tattha desitattā paññattattā ca vippakiṇṇānaṃ dhammavinayānaṃ saṅgahetvā gāyanaṃ kathanaṃ saṅgīti, mahāvisayattā pūjaniyattā ca mahatī saṅgīti mahāsaṅgīti. Paṭhamā mahāsaṅgīti paṭhamamahāsaṅgīti, tassā pavattitakālo paṭhamamahāsaṅgītikālo, tasmiṃ paṭhamamahāsaṅgītikāle.
'起因'的意思是:将原本不为人知的教法,依宣说的时间、因缘等,使之明了而显示出来,故称为'起因'。世间著作中所谓的'序论',在这里应理解为'如是我闻'等开篇经文,而非如'诸比丘,我宣说具因之法'等处所说、由自我意乐等引发的说法之因。因此才说:'如是我闻等,是具寿阿难在第一结集时所说的起因等'。
本来,尊者想就第一结集时所安立的次第详细作释,但在《吉祥悦意》中,自己既已详加解释,参考彼处即可;为使此注不过于庞大,故说'而那个……'等。显示巴利原文
Nidadāti desanaṃ desakālādivasena aviditaṃ viditaṃ katvā nidassetīti nidānaṃ. Yo loke ganthassa upogghātoti vuccati, svāyamettha ‘‘evaṃ me suta’’nti-ādiko gantho veditabbo, na pana ‘‘sanidānāhaṃ, bhikkhave, dhammaṃ desemī’’tiādīsu (a. ni. 3.126) viya attajjhāsayādidesanuppattihetu. Tenevāha – ‘‘evaṃ me sutanti-ādikaṃ āyasmatā ānandena paṭhamamahāsaṅgītikāle vuttaṃ nidānamādī’’ti. Kāmañcettha yassaṃ paṭhamamahāsaṅgītiyaṃ nikkhittānukkamena saṃvaṇṇanaṃ kattukāmo, sā vitthārato vattabbā, sumaṅgalavilāsiniyaṃ pana attanā vitthāritattā tattheva gahetabbāti imissā saṃvaṇṇanāya mahattaṃ pariharanto ‘‘sā panesā’’tiādimāha.
1 就这样,将外起因搁置不论,现在为从头注释内起因,便说出了'然而此'等语。在此,注释者在注释所应注释的法时,应当先显示各词的分辨和词义,之后再以总义等方式进行注释。因此,为首先显示词,即说:'evaṃ(如是)是不变词'等。此处的'词辨'指的是词的差别,并非词的分离。或者说,词与词辨合在一起,总名为'词辨'。应当理解,在义注中,词的分离与词辨别这两者,实际上是以省略的方式共同用'词辨'一词来表达的。至于词的分离,则可在复合词等例中见到,如'征服者的园林即是祇园'等。显示巴利原文
1. Evaṃ bāhiranidāne vattabbaṃ atidisitvā idāni abbhantaranidānaṃ ādito paṭṭhāya saṃvaṇṇetuṃ ‘‘yaṃ paneta’’ntiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha yasmā saṃvaṇṇanaṃ karontena saṃvaṇṇetabbe dhamme padavibhāgaṃ padatthañca dassetvā tato paraṃ piṇḍatthādidassanavasena saṃvaṇṇanā kātabbā, tasmā padāni tāva dassento ‘‘evanti nipātapada’’nti-ādimāha. Tattha padavibhāgoti padānaṃ viseso, na padaviggaho. Atha vā padāni ca padavibhāgo ca padavibhāgo. Padaviggaho ca padavibhāgo ca padavibhāgoti vā ekasesavasena padapadaviggahā padavibhāgasaddena vuttāti veditabbaṃ. Tattha padaviggaho ‘‘jetassa vanaṃ jetavana’’ntiādinā samāsapadesu daṭṭhabbo.
'从词义',即从每个词的含义角度而言。为显示词义,采取提炼义理的方式,首先解释'evaṃ'一词,便说:'evaṃ一词首先……'等。其中提到的'决定等','等'字涵盖了'此义''问''限量'等多种含义。例如,在'evaṃgatāni puthusippāyatanāni(如是种种工巧处)'、'evaṃvidho evamākāro(如是种类、如是行相)'等处,'evaṃ'一词表示'此'义。因为'gata'是'方式'的同义词,同样,'vidha''ākāra'等词也是如此;世人皆用'gata''vidha''ākāra'来表达方式之义。在'Evaṃ su te sunhātā suvilittā kappitakesamassū āmuttamālābharaṇā odātavatthavasanā pañcahi kāmaguṇehi samappitā'(他们如是沐浴、涂香,理须发,戴璎珞,着白衣,具足五欲乐)等句中……显示巴利原文
Atthatoti padatthato. Taṃ pana padatthaṃ atthuddhārakkamena paṭhamaṃ evaṃsaddassa dassento ‘‘evaṃsaddo tāvā’’tiādimāha. Avadhāraṇādīti ettha ādi-saddena idamatthapucchāparimāṇādiatthānaṃ saṅgaho daṭṭhabbo. Tathā hi ‘‘evaṃgatāni puthusippāyatanāni (dī. ni. 1.163, 165), evaṃvidho evamākāro’’ti ca ādīsu idaṃ-saddassa atthe evaṃ-saddo. Gata-saddo hi pakārapariyāyo, tathā vidhākāra-saddo ca. Tathā hi gatavidhaākārasadde lokiyā pakāratthe vadanti. ‘‘Evaṃ su te sunhātā suvilittā kappitakesamassū āmuttamālābharaṇā odātavatthavasanā pañcahi kāmaguṇehi samappitā samaṅgībhūtā paricārenti, seyyathāpi tvaṃ etarahi sācariyakoti. No hidaṃ, bho gotamā’’tiādīsu (dī. ni. 1.286) pucchāyaṃ, ‘‘evaṃ lahuparivattaṃ (a. ni. 1.48), evamāyupariyanto’’ti (pārā. 12) ca ādīsu parimāṇe.
难道不是如此吗?在“他们这样沐浴、这样涂香”“如此寿限”这些地方,是以“evaṃ”(如此/这样)一词来表达询问的方式与限定的方式,因此“evaṃ”词就只有“方式”这个意义吧?答:并非如此,因为有其特殊性存在。“evaṃ”一词只是“方式本身”的表达者,所指的即是“方式”的意义,如在“evaṃ byākho”(这样解说)等用例中,它并非用来表达“特定的方式”。正因如此,像“如是生起的凡夫”(《法句经》53)等譬喻中的用例才是恰当的。正如“yathāpi... bahu”(犹如……众多)(《法句经》53)?在此处,根据花堆的安立之处,以及转生为人、依止善士、听闻正法、如理作意、财成就等布施等福业之因的聚合,再结合其光彩、芳香等功德特质,从而显示出其与花鬘的相似性——要阐明的是:繁多的福业,必然是由必定会死的有情所造作的。因此,花堆与花鬘在这里是“譬喻”,而那些譬喻所呈现的“方式”,是由“yathā”(犹如)一词不加限定地表达出来的。所以,说“evaṃ 一词是用来归结譬喻方式的意义”是合理的。而显示巴利原文
Nanu ca ‘‘evaṃ su te sunhātā suvilittā, evamāyupariyanto’’ti ettha evaṃ-saddena pucchanākāraparimāṇākārānaṃ vuttattā ākārattho eva evaṃ-saddoti? Na, visesasabbhāvato. Ākāramattavācako hi evaṃ-saddo, ākāratthoti adhippeto yathā ‘‘evaṃ byākho’’tiādīsu, na pana ākāravisesavācako. Evañca katvā, ‘‘evaṃ jātena maccenā’’tiādīni (dha. pa. 53) upamādīsu udāharaṇāni upapannāni honti. Tathā hi ‘‘yathāpi…pe… bahu’’nti (dha. pa. 53)? Ettha puppharāsiṭṭhāniyato manussūpapattisappurisūpanissaya-saddhammassavana- yonisomanasikāra-bhogasampattiādidānādipuññakiriyahetusamudāyato sobhāsugandhatādiguṇayogato mālāguḷasadisiyo pahūtā puññakiriyā maritabbasabhāvatāya maccena sattena kattabbāti jotitattā puppharāsimālāguḷāva upamā, tesaṃ upamākāro yathā-saddena aniyamato vuttoti ‘‘evaṃ-saddo upamākāranigamanattho’’ti vatthuṃ yuttaṃ, so pana upamākāro niyamiyamāno atthato upamāva hotīti āha ‘‘upamāyaṃ āgato’’ti. Tathā ‘‘evaṃ iminā ākārena abhikkamitabba’’ntiādinā upadisiyamānāya samaṇasāruppāya ākappasampattiyā yo tattha upadisanākāro, so atthato upadeso evāti vuttaṃ, ‘‘evaṃ te…pe… upadese’’ti. Tathā ‘‘evametaṃ bhagavā, evametaṃ sugatā’’ti ettha ca bhagavatā yathāvuttamatthaṃ aviparītato jānantehi kataṃ tattha saṃvijjamānaguṇānaṃ pakārehi haṃsanaṃ udaggatākaraṇaṃ sampahaṃsanaṃ. Yo tattha sampahaṃsanākāroti yojetabbaṃ.
同样地,在“他们就这般离去”这句话里,应当结合的是“谴责的方式”这一意义。而那个“谴责的方式”,由于有“贱民”等呵斥之词的伴随出现,我们得以了知,它在此处是由“evaṃ”一词来阐明的。如同这个例子,“譬喻的方式”等,也应看作是依譬喻等而说的“花堆”等词的伴随才得以显明的。至于“是的,尊者”,这是比丘们在善于倾听、作意于法之后铭记于心,以承认自己安住于彼处的方式说出的,因此这里的“evaṃ”词被称为“认可话语的意义”。由此,“是的,尊者”就等于在说“善哉,尊者!极善,尊者!”。“你要这样说”这句话,比如“像我说的那样,去对沙门阿难说”,那个“如此说”的表达方式,是现在要说的,由“evaṃ”词来指示,因此说它是“指示的意义”。在“我们这样认为”这个例子里也是一样,对于他们如上所说的那些法,为了令他们确定那些法会导致无益与痛苦,以赞同领受的方式,通过提问:“这些是会导致呢,还是不会导致?对此你们怎么看?”之后,他们回答说:“我们对此这样认为”,由此可知,“evaṃ”词阐明了“对那种义趣的认同”显示巴利原文
Evamevaṃ panāyanti ettha garahaṇākāroti yojetabbaṃ, so ca garahaṇākāro vasalīti-ādikhuṃsanasaddasannidhānato idha evaṃ-saddena pakāsitoti viññāyati. Yathā cettha, evaṃ upamākārādayopi upamādivasena vuttānaṃ puppharāsiādisaddānaṃ sannidhānatoti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Evaṃ, bhanteti pana dhammassa sādhukaṃ savanamanasikāre sanniyojitehi bhikkhūhi attano tattha ṭhitabhāvassa paṭijānanavasena vuttattā ettha evaṃ-saddo ‘‘vacanasampaṭicchanattho’’ti vutto. Tena evaṃ, bhanteti sādhu, bhante, suṭṭhu, bhanteti vuttaṃ hoti. Evañca vadehīti yathāhaṃ vadāmi, evaṃ samaṇaṃ ānandaṃ vadehīti yo evaṃ vadanākāro idāni vattabbo, so evaṃ-saddena nidassīyatīti ‘‘nidassanattho’’ti vuttoti. Evaṃ noti etthāpi nesaṃ yathāvuttadhammānaṃ ahitadukkhāvahabhāve sanniṭṭhānajananatthaṃ anumatigahaṇavasena ‘‘saṃvattanti vā no vā, kathaṃ vo ettha hotī’’ti pucchāya katāya ‘‘evaṃ no ettha hotī’’ti vuttattā tadākārasanniṭṭhānaṃ evaṃ-saddena vibhāvitanti viññāyati. So pana tesaṃ dhammānaṃ ahitāya dukkhāya saṃvattanākāro niyamiyamāno avadhāraṇattho hotīti āha – ‘‘evaṃ no ettha hotītiādīsu avadhāraṇe’’ti.
所谓“种种理趣善巧”:“种种理趣”,指的是被称为单一与多元、无杂乱、法性如此的理趣;或者,指被称为欢喜漩涡、人狮游戏、如刺棒般的锐利眼等的、依所依等不同分类而有的种种理趣,即种种不同的理趣。或者,“理趣”是经典的导向,这些导向由于施设与随施设,杂染分等、世间等、彼二者混合等,善等,蕴等,总摄等,时解脱等,安置等,善根等,三法发趣等,而呈现出种种不同,所以称为“种种理趣”;以这些理趣达到精确、微细、精妙,便称为“种种理趣善巧”。“意乐”也就是“深意”,这些深意由于常与断等分别,以及其中有少尘垢等分别,而有种种不同;或者说,因为各自的深意等是它的生起之因,所以称为“以种种意乐为生起因”。“义与文具足”,意思是具足圆满的义与文,因为再无什么需要引入了。或者说,应当理解为,它具足了“解释、阐明、开显、分别、显了、施设”这六种“义门”,以及“字、词、文、因相、语法、释义”这六种“文门”。显示巴利原文
Nānānayanipuṇanti ekattanānattaabyāpāraevaṃdhammatāsaṅkhātā, nandiyāvaṭṭatipukkhalasīhavikkīḷitaaṅkusadisālocanasaṅkhātā vā ādhārādibhedavasena nānāvidhā nayā nānānayā. Nayā vā pāḷigatiyo tā ca paññattianupaññattiādivasena saṃkilesabhāgiyādilokiyāditadubhayavomissakādivasena kusalādivasena khandhādivasena saṅgahādivasena samayavimuttādivasena ṭhapanādivasena kusalamūlādivasena tikappaṭṭhānādivasena ca nānappakārāti nānānayā, tehi nipuṇaṃ saṇhaṃ sukhumanti nānānayanipuṇaṃ. Āsayova ajjhāsayo, te ca sassatādibhedena tattha ca apparajakkhatādibhedena aneke, attajjhāsayādayo eva vā samuṭṭhānaṃ uppattihetu etassāti anekajjhāsayasamuṭṭhānaṃ. Atthabyañjanasampannanti atthabyañjanaparipuṇṇaṃ upanetabbābhāvato, saṅkāsanapakāsanavivaraṇavibhajanauttānīkaraṇapaññattivasena chahi atthapadehi akkharapadabyañjanākāraniruttiniddesavasena chahi byañjanapadehi ca samannāgatanti vā attho daṭṭhabbo.
关于“种种神变”:此处,有人解释“神变”(pāṭihāriya)一词的词义为:“因为除去敌对者,因为除去贪等烦恼,故称神变。”然而,世尊自身并无可除去的贪等敌对者;即便对于凡夫,神变也是在远离随烦恼、具足八种功德的心中生起,且敌对者已被除去时才发生,因此不能依世俗的通称,将此处称为“神变”。不过,若以大悲悯的世尊把所化众生心中的烦恼视为敌对者、因除去它们而称为“神变”,这样说是合理的。或者,世尊及其教法的敌对者是外道,因除去他们而称为神变。因为他们通过神变、记心和教诫,在见解上被除去,并因无力阐明正见而被排除、被除去。又或者,“paṭi”一词,如同在“他进去之后,另一个婆罗门来了”等句中那样,表示“之后”的意思,因此在心得定、远离随烦恼、所作已办之后,应“之后”除去、应“之后”令生起的,称为神变;或者,在自己内心的随烦恼被第四禅和道除去之后,“之后”的除去即是神变。而神变、记心和教诫,也是由远离随烦恼、所作已办者为了利益众生而应“之后”再令生起的,并且在除去了自己内心的随烦恼之后。显示巴利原文
Vividhapāṭihāriyanti ettha pāṭihāriyapadassa vacanatthaṃ (udā. aṭṭha. 1; itivu. aṭṭha. nidānavaṇṇanā; dha. sa. mūlaṭī. 2) ‘‘paṭipakkhaharaṇato rāgādikilesāpanayanato pāṭihāriya’’nti vadanti. Bhagavato pana paṭipakkhā rāgādayo na santi ye haritabbā, puthujjanānampi vigatūpakkilese aṭṭhaguṇasamannāgate citte hatapaṭipakkhe iddhividhaṃ pavattati, tasmā tattha pavattavohārena ca na sakkā idha ‘‘pāṭihāriya’’nti vattuṃ. Sace pana mahākāruṇikassa bhagavato veneyyagatā ca kilesā paṭipakkhā, tesaṃ haraṇato ‘‘pāṭihāriya’’nti vuttaṃ, evaṃ sati yuttametaṃ. Atha vā bhagavato ca sāsanassa ca paṭipakkhā titthiyā, tesaṃ haraṇato pāṭihāriyaṃ. Te hi diṭṭhiharaṇavasena diṭṭhippakāsane asamatthabhāvena ca iddhiādesanānusāsanīhi haritā apanītā hontīti. Paṭīti vā ayaṃ saddo ‘‘pacchā’’ti etassa atthaṃ bodheti ‘‘tasmiṃ paṭipaviṭṭhamhi, añño āgañchi brāhmaṇo’’tiādīsu (su. ni. 985; cūḷani. vatthugāthā 4) viya, tasmā samāhite citte vigatūpakkilese katakiccena pacchāharitabbaṃ pavattetabbanti paṭihāriyaṃ, attano vā upakkilesesu catutthajjhānamaggehi haritesu pacchā haraṇaṃ paṭihāriyaṃ, iddhiādesanānusāsaniyo ca vigatūpakkilesena katakiccena ca sattahitatthaṃ puna pavattetabbā, haritesu ca attano upattilesesu parasattānaṃ upakkilesaharaṇāni hontīti paṭihāriyāni bhavanti, paṭihāriyameva pāṭihāriyaṃ. Paṭihāriye vā iddhiādesanānusāsanisamudāye bhavaṃ ekekaṃ pāṭihāriyanti vuccati. Paṭihāriyaṃ vā catutthajjhānaṃ maggo ca paṭipakkhaharaṇato, tattha jātaṃ, tasmiṃ vā nimittabhūte, tato vā āgatanti pāṭihāriyaṃ. Tassa pana iddhiādibhedena visayabhedena ca bahuvidhassa bhagavato desanāyaṃ labbhamānattā āha ‘‘vividhapāṭihāriya’’nti.
“并非他样”意指:从世尊面前听闻时的样态并非他样,而非指世尊开示时的样态并非他样。因为世尊的开示具有不可思议的威力。如此理解,“谁能以一切方式了知呢?”这句话便可成立,而且与展现忆持能力也不相违,因为其意在于强调听闻时的样态不失真。这里并非要舍弃义理上的差别,因为两种意义都缘取同一对象。否则就会导致长老对于世尊的教法,既能完全领受、又不能完全领受这样的矛盾。显示巴利原文
Na aññathāti bhagavato sammukhā sutākārato na aññathāti attho, na pana bhagavato desitākārato. Acinteyyānubhāvā hi bhagavato desanā. Evañca katvā ‘‘sabbappakārena ko samattho viññātu’’nti idaṃ vacanaṃ samatthitaṃ bhavati, dhāraṇabaladassanañca na virujjhati sutākāraavirajjhanassa adhippetattā. Na hettha atthantaratāparihāro dvinnampi atthānaṃ ekavisayattā. Itarathā thero bhagavato desanāya sabbathā paṭiggahaṇe samattho asamattho cāti āpajjeyyāti.
“凡不是其他者的,那个就是自我”——基于这种称为“自身内在”的自身相续而转起。因此,“me”字的三种用法虽在某种意义上都见于同一含义,但依据具格、与格、属主格的表述方式而存在差别,所以说:“me字见于三种意义中。”显示巴利原文
‘‘Yo paro na hoti, so attā’’ti evaṃ vuttāya niyakajjhattasaṅkhātāya sasantatiyā vattanato tividhopi me-saddo kiñcāpi ekasmiṃ eva atthe dissati, karaṇasampadānasāminiddesavasena pana vijjamānaṃ bhedaṃ sandhāyāha, ‘‘me-saddo tīsu atthesu dissatī’’ti.
虽然前缀能对动作的意义有所区分,但因其具有阐明作用,即使带上前缀,“suta”一词本身也仍在表达各自的意义。为了说明在提取无前缀“suta”的词义时,将带前缀的一并取用并不矛盾,才会说“有前缀与无前缀”等语。“assa”即指“suta”一词。此处,“suta”可有业格与状态格等构词意义,因此说:“意为,已忆持者,或忆持的行为。”当表达“mayā”义时,是以作者为依,将“me”用作具格;当表达“mama”义时,则是依从属关系,将其用作属格。显示巴利原文
Kiñcāpi upasaggo kiriyaṃ viseseti, jotakabhāvato pana satipi tasmiṃ suta-saddo eva taṃ taṃ attaṃ vadatīti anupasaggassa suta-saddassa atthuddhāre saupasaggassa gahaṇaṃ na virujjhatīti dassento ‘‘saupasaggo anupasaggo cā’’tiādimāha. Assāti suta-saddassa. Kammabhāvasādhanāni idha sutasadde sambhavantīti vuttaṃ ‘‘upadhāritanti vā upadhāraṇanti vā attho’’ti. Mayāti atthe satīti yadā me-saddassa kattuvasena karaṇaniddeso, tadāti attho. Mamāti atthe satīti yadā sambandhavasena sāminiddeso, tadā.
由于紧邻“suta”而用的“evaṃ”一词,理当是阐发“听闻”这一动作的,因此说:“‘evaṃ’是指示耳识等诸识的作用。”以“等”字,应知包含了领受等五门识,以及由他们所引生的意门识。又,一切语句皆带有简别意味,故从“suta”一词可得“正是所听闻的”之义,所以说:“由于遮止了‘没有听闻’这回事。”以此简别,显示出毫无疑惑的状态。进而,为了表明所听闻者应被确定为“所听闻”,方为正确的听闻,遂说:“指示的是无减、无增、无颠倒的执取。”或者,从排他语义的角度,词语是表义的,“听闻”即意味着不是“非听闻”,此即其义,所以说:“由于遮止了‘没有听闻’这回事。”以此来排除“所见”等其他来源。显示巴利原文
Suta-saddasannidhāne payuttena evaṃ-saddena savanakiriyājotakena bhavitabbanti vuttaṃ ‘‘evanti sotaviññāṇādiviññāṇakiccanidassana’’nti. Ādi-saddena sampaṭicchanādīnaṃ pañcadvārikaviññāṇānaṃ tadabhinīhaṭānañca manodvārikaviññāṇānaṃ gahaṇaṃ veditabbaṃ. Sabbesampi vākyānaṃ evakāratthasahitattā ‘‘suta’’nti etassa sutamevāti ayamattho labbhatīti āha ‘‘assavanabhāvapaṭikkhepato’’ti. Etena avadhāraṇena nirāsaṅkataṃ dasseti. Yathā ca sutaṃ sutamevāti niyametabbaṃ, taṃ sammā sutaṃ hotīti āha ‘‘anūnānadhikāviparītaggahaṇanidassana’’nti. Atha vā saddantaratthāpohanavasena saddo atthaṃ vadatīti sutanti asutaṃ na hotīti ayametassa atthoti vuttaṃ ‘‘assavanabhāvapaṭikkhepato’’ti. Iminā diṭṭhādivinivattanaṃ karoti.
此言之意是:这并非我亲眼所见,也不是以自然智亲自证得的,而是听闻到的,且是正确地听闻到的。因此他说:“指示的是无减、无增、无颠倒的执取。”或者,在表简别意义的“evaṃ”一词上,作这样的义理衔接:与此相应的“suta”一词,其义即是“由于遮止了‘没有听闻’这回事”。所以他同样说:“指示的是无减、无增、无颠倒的执取。”而此处的“听闻”一词,应理解为所闻的境,因为是“所听闻的”。显示巴利原文
Idaṃ vuttaṃ hoti – na idaṃ mayā diṭṭhaṃ, na sayambhūñāṇena sacchikataṃ, atha kho sutaṃ, tañca kho sammadevāti. Tenevāha ‘‘anūnānadhikāviparītaggahaṇanidassana’’nti. Avadhāraṇatthe vā evaṃ-sadde ayamatthayojanā karīyatīti tadapekkhassa suta-saddassa ayamattho vutto ‘‘assavanabhāvapaṭikkhepato’’ti. Tenevāha ‘‘anūnānadhikāviparītaggahaṇanidassana’’nti. Savanasaddo cettha kammattho veditabbo ‘‘suyyatī’’ti.
如此,先以听闻之因与听闻之差别,从一种角度说明三个词的意义关联后,现在为从其他角度说明,便说“同样地”等。其中,“tassā”指的是在世尊面前、以听闻法的样态而生起的那一意门识流。因为此识流能以种种方式缘取所缘而转起,所以曾有言“是顺着耳门之路转起的”。“以种种方式”,即对将要说明的种种音节与种种意义,以种种样态而执取。以此表明,在这层意义关联中,“evaṃ”一词被取为样态义。“对转起之存在的说明”,即说明转起的存在。“suta是对法的说明”——由于上述识流以种种方式在所缘上转起,那个所缘即是法,故从“法”的角度而说,并非“suta”一词本身有“法”的意思。为使已说的义理更加清晰,复说“这里,这个……”等。其中,“viññāṇavīthiyā”(依识流)是工具格,表工具;“mayā”(我)是主格,表作者。显示巴利原文
Evaṃ savanahetusavanavisesavasena padattayassa ekena pakārena atthayojanaṃ dassetvā idāni pakārantarehi taṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘tathā eva’’ntiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha tassāti yā sā bhagavato sammukhā dhammassavanākārena pavattā manodvāraviññāṇavīthi, tassā. Sā hi nānappakārena ārammaṇe pavattetuṃ samatthā. Tathā ca vuttaṃ ‘‘sotadvārānusārenā’’ti. Nānappakārenāti vakkhamānānaṃ anekavihitānaṃ byañjanatthaggahaṇānaṃ nānākārena. Etena imissā yojanāya ākārattho evaṃ-saddo gahitoti dīpeti. Pavattibhāvappakāsananti pavattiyā atthitāpakāsanaṃ. Sutanti dhammappakāsananti yasmiṃ ārammaṇe vuttappakārā viññāṇavīthi nānappakārena pavattā, tassa dhammattā vuttaṃ, na suta-saddassa dhammatthattā. Vuttassevatthassa pākaṭīkaraṇaṃ ‘‘ayaṃ hetthā’’tiādi. Tattha viññāṇavīthiyāti karaṇatthe karaṇavacanaṃ, mayāti kattuatthe.
“Evaṃ是对所指示之事的说明”——这是取了 evaṃ 的指示义而说的,因为所指示之事并非没有指示性。“nidassanatthaṃ evaṃ-saddaṃ gahetvā”意为取了 evaṃ 的指示义,“nidassetabbassa niddisitabbattābhāvābhāvato”意为因为所指示之事并非没有指示性。以此说明,藉由这个 evaṃ 词,整部经也被回照到了。由于 suta 一词是动作名词,而听闻动作系属于相续共通的识,且于此处有“人”的假名,故说“suta是对个人作用的说明”。因为在未离个人假名的诸法相续中,是得不到听闻动作的。显示巴利原文
Evanti niddisitabbappakāsananti nidassanatthamevaṃ saddaṃ gahetvā vuttaṃ nidassetabbassa niddisitabbattābhāvābhāvato. Tena evaṃ-saddena sakalampi suttaṃ paccāmaṭṭhanti dasseti. Suta-saddassa kiriyāsaddattā savanakiriyāya ca sādhāraṇaviññāṇappabandhapaṭibaddhattā tattha ca puggalavohāroti vuttaṃ ‘‘sutanti puggalakiccappakāsana’’nti. Na hi puggalavohārarahite dhammappabandhe savanakiriyā labbhatīti.
“凡他的心相续……”等,这也是取了 evaṃ 为样态义,为了显示与前面不同的另一种义理连结而说。其中,“样态的施设”,即是依诸法转起的样态而假立的施设,纯为假名施设。“suta是对境的说明”——因为成为所闻对象的法,乃是听闻动作之作者——即那个“人”——的听闻动作发生之处,故如此说。虽然在究竟义上,离开心相续并无任何所谓的作者,但随顺语言习惯、依慧所施设的差别语词,将心相续之外的某个东西安立为“具有听闻者”,从而说“依于心相续而成为那个具足听闻的人”。所闻的法作为听闻动作的境,是因为在这里,依听闻动作而转起的心相续在究竟意义上即是作者;或者说,心的转起本身即基于听闻而有,并没有离开心的听闻动作,而彼动作的作者亦有其境,故说“那个具足听闻者在作者的境上”。又因为长老对所听闻的样态作了正确的抉择,故说“执取的决定”。或者,也可将此看作取了 evaṃ 的强调义而作的义理连结,应如是理解。显示巴利原文
Yassa cittasantānassātiādipi ākāratthameva evaṃ-saddaṃ gahetvā purimayojanāya aññathā atthayojanaṃ dassetuṃ vuttaṃ. Tattha ākārapaññattīti upādāpaññatti eva dhammānaṃ pavattiākārupādānavasena tathā vuttā. Sutanti visayaniddesoti sotabbabhūto dhammo savanakiriyākattupuggalassa savanakiriyāvasena pavattiṭṭhānanti katvā vuttaṃ. Cittasantānavinimuttassa paramatthato kassaci kattu abhāvepi saddavohārena buddhiparikappitabhedavacanicchāya cittasantānato aññaṃ viya taṃsamaṅgiṃ katvā vuttaṃ ‘‘cittasantānena taṃsamaṅgīno’’ti. Savanakiriyāvisayopi sotabbadhammo savanakiriyāvasena pavattacittasantānassa idha paramatthato kattubhāvato, savanavasena cittappavattiyā eva vā savanakiriyābhāvato taṃkiriyākattu ca visayo hotīti vuttaṃ ‘‘taṃsamaṅgīno kattuvisaye’’ti. Sutākārassa ca therassa sammānicchitabhāvato āha ‘‘gahaṇasanniṭṭhāna’’nti. Etena vā avadhāraṇatthaṃ evaṃ-saddaṃ gahetvā ayamatthayojanā katāti daṭṭhabbaṃ.
对于先前所听闻的、种种不同的、被称为“经”的那些文句与意义,已忆持其行相——那个行相的显现,或是其决定的阐明,这便是“evaṃ”一词的特性。由于施设一个如此忆持行相等的“人”,乃是基于所取法的相续作用,故说“evaṃ是对个人作用的解说”。然而,即便主张有“人”的论师,其听闻作用亦不能离于识,因此特别就识的作用说“suta是对识作用的解说”。又由于“me”一词之音声生起,必以有情的领域为所缘,而识的作用亦应归属其中,故说“me是将这两种作用结合在一起的个人解说”。而“evaṃ”与“suta”这两个词的意义,次第属于“无”的施设与“有”的施设的性质;为显示它们作为如此施设,乃是依于所取法的相续作用,便这样说道:“evaṃ是对个人作用的解说,suta是对识作用的解说”。于此当知:通过显示工具、动作、作者、宾语差别的方式;通过显示个人作用的对象、个人作用的譬喻的方式;通过显示执取的行相、执取者、所取境的差别说明的方式;以及通过显示作者、工具、作用、作者说明的方式,开显示巴利原文
Pubbe sutānaṃ nānāvihitānaṃ suttasaṅkhātānaṃ atthabyañjanānaṃ upadhāritarūpassa ākārassa nidassanassa, avadhāraṇassa vā pakāsanasabhāvo evaṃ-saddoti tadākārādiupadhāraṇassa puggalapaññattiyā upādānabhūtadhammappabandhabyāpāratāya vuttaṃ ‘‘evanti puggalakiccaniddeso’’ti. Savanakiriyā pana puggalavādinopi viññāṇanirapekkhā natthīti visesato viññāṇabyāpāroti āha ‘‘sutanti viññāṇakiccaniddeso’’ti. Meti saddappavattiyā ekanteneva sattavisayattā viññāṇakiccassa ca tattheva samodahitabbato ‘‘meti ubhayakiccayuttapuggalaniddeso’’ti vuttaṃ. Avijjamānapaññattivijjamānapaññattisabhāvā yathākkamaṃ evaṃ-saddasuta-saddānaṃ atthāti te tathārūpa-paññatti-upādānabhūta-dhammappabandhabyāpārabhāvena dassento āha – ‘‘evanti puggalakiccaniddeso, sutanti viññāṇakiccaniddeso’’ti. Ettha ca karaṇakiriyākattukamma-visesappakāsanavasena puggalabyāpāravisaya-puggalabyāpāranidassanavasena gahaṇākāragāhakatabbisayavisesaniddesavasena kattukaraṇabyāpāra-kattuniddesavasena ca dutiyādayo catasso atthayojanā dassitāti daṭṭhabbaṃ.
一切借由声音而可了知的义理,都必须经由施设去通达;而一切施设都包含在“有”“无”等六种施设分类之中。为了从中确定“evaṃ”等施设词的自性,故说出“evaṃ 与 me”等。其中,“evaṃ”与“me”所表示的意义,其行相等诸法并无自相,故为“无有施设”。因此说“就真实、胜义而言,是无有施设”。此中“就真实、胜义而言”,即是从真实义、最上义的角度来说。意思是说:凡不像幻象、阳焰等那样非真实义,不像依传闻等执取的那样非最上义,而是具有色、声等自性,或具有能坏、能领纳等自性的义,方才称为真实义、胜义;而“evaṃ”“me”这些词的意义并非如此。为了令此义更加明晰,才说了“这里,什么是……”等。至于“suta”,则是针对声处,说为“有之施设”。正因为如此,才说“凡是那里由耳所领受的”。若说“顺着耳门之道而获得的”,则义、文句等一切皆可获得。这是说:因为须依于这些一一的所依而说,故对于进入耳门范围的诸法,便依他们法,以返照其被忆持的行相等方式说为“evaṃ”;依包含相续在内的诸蕴,说为“me”。而“闻”之称谓显示巴利原文
Sabbassapi saddādhigamanīyassa atthassa paññattimukheneva paṭipajjitabbattā sabbapaññattīnañca vijjamānādivasena chasu paññattibhedesu antogadhattā tesu ‘‘eva’’ntiādīnaṃ paññattīnaṃ sarūpaṃ niddhārento āha ‘‘evanti ca meti cā’’tiādi. Tattha evanti ca meti ca vuccamānassa atthassa ākārādino dhammānaṃ asalakkhaṇabhāvato avijjamānapaññattibhāvoti āha ‘‘saccikaṭṭhaparamatthavasena avijjamānapaññattī’’ti. Tattha saccikaṭṭhaparamatthavasenāti bhūtatthauttamatthavasena. Idaṃ vuttaṃ hoti – yo māyāmarīciādayo viya abhūtattho, anussavādīhi gahetabbo viya anuttamattho ca na hoti, so rūpasaddādisabhāvo, ruppanānubhavanādisabhāvo vā attho saccikaṭṭho paramattho cāti vuccati, na tathā evaṃ meti padānaṃ atthoti. Etamevatthaṃ pākaṭataraṃ kātuṃ ‘‘kiñhetthata’’ntiādi vuttaṃ. Sutanti pana saddāyatanaṃ sandhāyāha ‘‘vijjamānapaññattī’’ti. Teneva hi ‘‘yañhi taṃ ettha sotena upaladdha’’nti vuttaṃ. Sotadvārānusārena upaladdhanti pana vutte atthabyañjanādi sabbaṃ labbhatīti. Taṃ taṃ upādāya vattabbatoti sotapathamāgate dhamme upādāya tesaṃ upadhāritākārādino paccāmasanavasena evanti, sasantatipariyāpanne khandhe upādāya meti vattabbattāti attho. Diṭṭhādisabhāvarahite saddāyatane pavattamānopi sutavohāro ‘‘dutiyaṃ tatiya’’ntiādiko viya paṭhamādīni diṭṭhamutaviññāte apekkhitvā pavattoti āha ‘‘diṭṭhādīni upanidhāya vattabbato’’ti. Asutaṃ na hotīti hi sutanti pakāsitoyamatthoti.
长老以自己所通达的经之种种理趣,回顾而说“evaṃ”,故谓“此表明了不痴”。他能通达种种理趣,以此显示下面将说的经具有种种理趣且甚难通达。说“他显示了对所闻的不痴”,是因为如实地显示了所闻的行相。“以不痴”即是由于无痴,或特指由听闻时生起、其后得以成就的智慧。这里也应当说“这样,以不痴”。对于文句而言,所应通达的行相并不甚深,只需按所闻去忆持便可,故忆念的作用在此处较为突出,智慧反倒是次要的。因此说“以智慧为前导的”等,即以智慧作为前导。此中“前导性”,正如“以意为前导”等说法,是指主要性。或者,如眼识等中的转向等是从属的,“智慧是此的前导”,这样理解也合理;依此,“以智慧为前导的”等,也可按相反的思路来理解其义。“具足义与文句的”:应看做是以略说、开显、解释、分别、显明、施设这六种义句,以及以字母、词、文句、行相、辞源解说这六种文句而具备的;或者说,即是义理与文句都圆满具备的。显示巴利原文
Attanā paṭividdhā suttassa pakāravisesā evanti therena paccāmaṭṭhāti āha ‘‘asammohaṃ dīpetī’’ti. Nānappakārapaṭivedhasamattho hotīti etena vakkhamānassa suttassa nānappakārataṃ duppaṭivijjhatañca dasseti. Sutassa asammosaṃ dīpetīti sutākārassa yāthāvato dassiyamānattā vuttaṃ. Asammohenāti sammohābhāvena, paññāya eva vā savanakālasambhūtāya taduttarakālapaññāsiddhi . Evaṃ asammosenāti etthāpi vattabbaṃ. Byañjanānaṃ paṭivijjhitabbo ākāro nātigambhīro yathāsutadhāraṇameva tattha karaṇīyanti satiyā byāpāro adhiko, paññā tattha guṇībhūtāti vuttaṃ ‘‘paññāpubbaṅgamāyā’’tiādi paññāya pubbaṅgamāti katvā. Pubbaṅgamatā cettha padhānatā ‘‘manopubbaṅgamā’’tiādīsu viya. Pubbaṅgamatāya vā cakkhuviññāṇādīsu āvajjanādīnaṃ viya appadhānatte paññā pubbaṅgamā etissāti ayampi attho yujjati, evaṃ sati pubbaṅgamāyāti etthāpi vuttavipariyāyena yathāsambhavaṃ attho veditabbo. Atthabyañjanasampannassāti atthabyañjanaparipuṇṇassa , saṅkāsana-pakāsana-vivaraṇa-vibhajana-uttānīkaraṇapaññattivasena chahi atthapadehi, akkharapadabyañjanākāraniruttiniddesavasena chahi byañjanapadehi ca samannāgatassāti vā attho daṭṭhabbo.
“Evaṃ”一词显示了如理作意,因为由“evaṃ”所表示的行相显示与决定等义,是以无颠倒的正法为所缘,这是它的意图所在。它显示了不散乱,因为在像问“《渡暴流经》是在哪里说的?”等伴随教法而出现的经的听闻中,若无定便不可能,故如此说。而说“散乱心的人……”等,也是为了证明这个意义。“一切成就”,是指义理与文句、说教者、利益等的成就。正如依靠以无颠倒的正法为所缘的行相显示与决定等义,能成就如理作意,又如由听闻正法能成就不散乱,同样地,如理作意是果,而“自善立志”与“曾于过去作福德”这些的成就,是依据它们与如理作意不可分离而说出的;同样地,也应以不散乱为果,来显示听闻正法、亲近善士这些因的成就,因为没有听闻者和没有亲近善士的人,此果便不存在。不过,通过“因为散乱心的人……”这些证明性的话,显示了以作为因的不散乱和亲近善士,而成就作为果的听闻正法。但是,这里这样的意图或许更为恰当:听闻正法与亲近善士,并非绝对是不散乱的因,因为它们属于外在条件。而不散乱,就像亲近善士一样,是听闻正法的绝对之因。如此,以不散乱……显示巴利原文
Yoniso manasikāraṃ dīpeti evaṃ-saddena vuccamānānaṃ ākāranidassanāvadhāraṇatthānaṃ aviparītasaddhammavisayattāti adhippāyo. Avikkhepaṃ dīpetīti ‘‘oghataraṇasuttaṃ kattha bhāsita’’ntiādipucchāvasena pakaraṇappavattassa vakkhamānassa suttassa savanaṃ samādhānamantarena na sambhavatīti katvā vuttaṃ. Vikkhittacittassātiādi tassevatthassa samatthanavasena vuttaṃ. Sabbasampattiyāti atthabyañjanadesaka-payojanādisampattiyā. Aviparītasaddhammavisayehi viya ākāranidassanāvadhāraṇatthehi yonisomanasikārassa, saddhammassavanena viya ca avikkhepassa yathā yonisomanasikārena phalabhūtena attasammāpaṇidhipubbekatapuññatānaṃ siddhi vuttā tadavinābhāvato, evaṃ avikkhepeneva phalabhūtena kāraṇabhūtānaṃ saddhammassavanasappurisūpanissayānaṃ siddhi dassetabbā siyā assutavato sappurisūpanissayarahitassa ca tadabhāvato. ‘‘Na hi vikkhittacitto’’tiādinā samatthanavacanena pana avikkhepena kāraṇabhūtena sappurisūpanissayena ca phalabhūtassa saddhammassavanassa siddhi dassitā. Ayaṃ panettha adhippāyo yutto siyā, saddhammassavanasappurisūpanissayā na ekantena avikkhepassa kāraṇaṃ bāhiraṅgattā. Avikkhepo pana sappurisūpanissayo viya saddhammassavanassa ekantakāraṇanti, evampi avikkhepena sappurisūpanissayasiddhijotanā na samatthitāva, no na samatthitā vikkhittacittānaṃ sappurisapayirūpāsanābhāvassa atthasiddhito. Ettha ca purimaṃ phalena kāraṇassa siddhidassanaṃ nadīpūrena viya upari vuṭṭhisabbhāvassa. Dutiyaṃ kāraṇena phalassa siddhidassanaṃ daṭṭhabbaṃ ekantavassinā viya meghavuṭṭhānena vuṭṭhippavattiyā.
对世尊话语的义理与文句加以分类决断,由此展现出无余圆满利他、完整教法成就的深入行相,故说“这是善妙的行相”。“由于不存在”是语法上的关联。所谓“后二轮的成就”,是指由“自己如理立志”与“过去曾作福德”所构成的两种功德。在此,因为它们让有情在种种成就的生命形态中运转,或者有情依靠它们而运转,所以称为“轮”。这是针对经中所说“比丘们,有这四种轮,具备了它们的天与人,四轮就会转动”等而言的。此处的先后顺序,应当根据说法的次第来理解。“由于后二轮的成就”,就是指后二轮的存在。因为一个自己立志正确且过去做过福德的人,内心是清净的,而令内心不清净的种种烦恼已经远离,所以说“内心的清净得以成就”。正如经中所说:“心若如理立志,必将依此成就殊胜”以及“阿难,你过去曾做福德,应当精勤修持,很快就能成为无漏者”。正因为如此,才说“由于内心清净,便成就了证悟与通达”。所谓“由于加行清净”,是指以如理作意为先导的听法加行变得明净。由此也说“成就了教理与通达”,或者也指一切身行、语行都没有瑕疵。因为身语加行清……显示巴利原文
Bhagavato vacanassa atthabyañjanapabheda-paricchedavasena sakalasāsanasampatti-ogāhanākāro niravasesaparahita-pāripūrikāraṇanti vuttaṃ ‘‘evaṃ bhaddako ākāro’’ti. Yasmā na hotīti sambandho . Pacchimacakkadvayasampattinti attasammāpaṇidhi-pubbekatapuññatā-saṅkhātaṃ guṇadvayaṃ. Aparāparavuttiyā cettha cakkabhāvo, caranti etehi sattā, sampattibhavesūti vā . Ye sandhāya vuttaṃ ‘‘cattārimāni, bhikkhave, cakkāni, yehi samannāgatānaṃ devamanussānaṃ catucakkaṃ vattatī’’tiādi (a. ni. 4.31). Purimapacchimabhāvo cettha desanakkamavasena daṭṭhabbo. Pacchimacakkadvayasiddhiyāti pacchimacakkadvayassa ca atthitāya. Sammāpaṇihitatto pubbe ca katapuñño suddhāsayo hoti tadasuddhihetūnaṃ kilesānaṃ dūrībhāvatoti āha ‘‘āsayasuddhi siddhā hotī’’ti. Tathā hi vuttaṃ – ‘‘sammāpaṇihitaṃ cittaṃ, seyyaso naṃ tato kare’’ti (dha. pa. 43) ‘‘katapuññosi, tvaṃ ānanda, padhānamanuyuñja, khippaṃ hohisi anāsavo’’ti (dī. ni. 2.207) ca. Tenevāha ‘‘āsayasuddhiyā adhigamabyattisiddhī’’ti. Payogasuddhiyāti yonisomanasikārapubbaṅgamassa dhammassavanapayogassa visadabhāvena. Tathā cāha ‘‘āgamabyattisiddhī’’ti, sabbassa vā kāyavacīpayogassa niddosabhāvena. Parisuddhakāyavacīpayogo hi vippaṭisārābhāvato avikkhittacitto pariyattiyaṃ visārado hotīti.
通过“以展现种种通达”等方式,说明长老对于义理和文句中的“evaṃ(如是)”与“suta(所闻)”二词,从不会混淆与不会忘记的角度,依四无碍解来展示其义理关联。其中,“展现对所闻差别的通达”这句话,是为了说明:这个“suta”词因为紧挨着“evaṃ”词,或者从将要说明的内容来看,概括性地指向了所闻之法的种种不同特征。由于以意与见对教法极好地审察与通达,这特别与作意相关联,所以依照前述方式,将其与显示“如理作意”的“evaṃ”词加以关联;而听闻、忆持、言辞上的熟悉,则特别与专注地听法相关联,所以依照前述方式,将其与显示“不散乱”的“suta”词加以关联。如此展示,是为了激励人们为了教法的成就而勤奋听法。在此,“法”是指教法。“以意审察”,就是通过这样的方式:如“这里讲的是戒,这里讲的是定,这里讲的是慧,这里面有如此多的主题衔接”等,在心里进行审察。“以见善通达”,就是以成为“审察认可”或称为“知遍知”的正见,对处处所说的粗显和微细的诸法,按照“这是色,色有这么多”等方式,善加确定从而彻……显示巴利原文
Nānappakārapaṭivedhadīpakenātiādinā atthabyañjanesu therassa evaṃ-saddasuta-saddānaṃ asammohāsammosadīpanato catupaṭisambhidāvasena atthayojanaṃ dasseti. Tattha sotabbabhedapaṭivedhadīpakenāti etena ayaṃ suta-saddo evaṃ-saddasannidhānato, vakkhamānāpekkhāya vā sāmaññeneva sotabbadhammavisesaṃ āmasatīti dīpeti. Manodiṭṭhīhi pariyattidhammānaṃ anupekkhanasuppaṭivedhā visesato manasikārapaṭibaddhāti te vuttanayena yonisomanasikāradīpakena evaṃ saddena yojetvā, savanadhāraṇavacīparicayā pariyattidhammānaṃ visesena sotāvadhānapaṭibaddhāti te vuttanayena avikkhepadīpakena suta-saddena yojetvā dassento sāsanasampattiyā dhammassavane ussāhaṃ janeti. Tattha dhammāti pariyattidhammā. Manasā anupekkhitāti ‘‘idha sīlaṃ kathitaṃ, idha samādhi, idha paññā, ettakā ettha anusandhiyo’’tiādinā nayena manasā anupekkhitā. Diṭṭhiyā suppaṭividdhāti nijjhānakkhanti bhūtāya, ñātapariññāsaṅkhātāya vā diṭṭhiyā tattha tattha vuttarūpārūpadhamme ‘‘iti rūpaṃ, ettakaṃ rūpa’’ntiādinā suṭṭhu vavatthapetvā paṭividdhā.
所谓“以完整的话语”,是因前文已分别与三个词语关联,故如此说。“不据为己有”,即不将“这是我的”这一观念安立在自己身上,此处的属格意义同于处格。“非善士的境地”,指的是不知恩。如经中所说:“此处若有某个恶比丘,学习了如来所宣说的法与律之后,便将其据为己有”,这便是在描述卑劣行止的依处;此卑劣行止的依处,本身即是非正法。那么,阿难长老心中并无“此乃我话语”的慢心,大迦叶等长老对此也绝无疑虑,如此说来,关于超越非善士境地等的说法,岂不成了毫无意义?并非如此。因为当“如是我闻”一语被说出时,这一义理也就得以彰显了。又有人言:“这其实是考虑到天众们的思虑才如此说法,因此这类责难并不成立。”据说在那一刻,有些天众心中生起这样的念头:“世尊已般涅槃,而这位尊者善于说法,如今正在教导佛法。他身为释迦族,是如来的堂弟、叔父之子,究竟是在教导自己亲证的佛法,还是仅仅依据听闻,在转述世尊的话语呢?”正是为了消除他们这一样的疑虑,超越非善士境地等义理才得以彰显。显示巴利原文
Sakalena vacanenāti pubbe tīhi padehi visuṃ visuṃ yojitattā vuttaṃ. Attano adahantoti ‘‘mameda’’nti attani aṭṭhapento. Bhummatthe cetaṃ sāmivacanaṃ. Asappurisabhūminti akataññutaṃ. ‘‘Idhekacco pāpabhikkhu tathāgatappaveditaṃ dhammavinayaṃ pariyāpuṇitvā attano dahatī’’ti (pārā. 195) evaṃ vuttaṃ anariyavohārāvatthaṃ, sā eva anariyavohārāvatthā asaddhammo . Nanu ca ānandattherassa ‘‘mamedaṃ vacana’’nti adhimānassa, mahākassapattherādīnañca tadāsaṅkāya abhāvato asappurisabhūmi-samatikkamādivacanaṃ niratthakanti? Nayidamevaṃ. ‘‘Evaṃ me suta’’nti vadantena ayampi attho vibhāvitoti dassanato. Keci pana ‘‘devatānaṃ parivitakkāpekkhaṃ tathāvacananti edisī codanā anavakāsā’’ti vadanti. Tasmiṃ kira khaṇe ekaccānaṃ devatānaṃ evaṃ cetaso parivitakko udapādi ‘‘bhagavā ca parinibbuto, ayañca āyasmā desanākusalo idāni dhammaṃ deseti, sakyakulappasuto tathāgatassa bhātā cūḷapituputto. Kiṃ nu kho sayaṃ sacchikataṃ dhammaṃ deseti? Udāhu bhagavato eva vacanaṃ yathāsuta’’nti, evaṃ tadāsaṅkitappakārato asappurisabhūmisamokkamādito atikkamādi vibhāvitanti. Appetīti nidasseti. Diṭṭhadhammika-samparāyika-paramatthesu yathārahaṃ satte netīti netti, dhammo eva netti dhammanetti.
坚固深植的怀疑,称为“vicikicchā(疑)”;不至于过度流散、仅停留于见解分歧层面的,称为“vimati(犹豫)”。“能破除不信”,这是因为此语为世尊亲口所说,是自己当面从佛前领受而来,且不存在遗忘、错谬等领受上的过失。在此处应当理解:前三项义理的联结,是紧扣“evaṃ”一词在行相等意义中没有被特别强调的方面来显示的;之后的四项义理联结,则是纯粹紧扣“evaṃ”一词中“行相”的意义来阐明;而最后三项义理联结,则应视为依次为了展示“行相”义及决定“行相”义,而紧扣“evaṃ”一词来建立关联。显示巴利原文
Daḷhataraniviṭṭhā vicikicchā kaṅkhā, nātisaṃsappanā matibhedamattā vimati. Assaddhiyaṃ vināsetīti bhagavatā bhāsitattā sammukhāvassa paṭiggahitattā khalitaduruttādigahaṇadosābhāvato ca. Ettha ca paṭhamādayo tisso atthayojanā ākārādiatthesu aggahitavisesameva evaṃ-saddaṃ gahetvā dassitā, tato parā catasso ākāratthameva evaṃ-saddaṃ gahetvā vibhāvitā. Pacchimā pana tisso yathākkamaṃ ākāratthaṃ nidassanatthaṃ avadhāraṇatthañca evaṃ-saddaṃ gahetvā yojitāti daṭṭhabbaṃ.
“一”这个词,可见于“其他”“最胜”“无伴侣”“灭尽”等意义中。正如这个词在“我与世间是常,唯此为真,余皆虚妄——有些论者如是宣称”等经文中,可见其“其他”义;在“心一境性”等中,可见“最胜”义;在“一人独处、远离愦闹”等中,可见“无伴侣”义;在“诸比丘,梵行唯住于刹那,唯住于时节”等中,可见“灭尽”义。为了显示此处也取“灭尽”义,故说“这是唯作计数之限定的解说”。“时与时节”,即适当的时机与因缘的和合。“刹那”,意为机会。因为诸如来出世等,正是成就道与梵行的机会,是获得彼果的因。而那被称为“刹那”与“时节”的,实为唯一无二,这便是其义。“大集会”,即大众的云集。“亦是时节”,意为这也是圆满学处的因由。“讲说自宗者”,指讲说邪见之人。因为坐在那里时,诸外道各自宣扬自宗的教义。“义现观”,即证得利益。“应被现观者”被称为“现观”;以现观为义,称为“现观义”——这是将逼迫等以“应被现观的状态”统合为一而说。或者,成为现观即证悟之对象的义,称为“现观义”,他们亦如此合一而说。其中,“逼迫”即是苦圣谛,它伤害具苦者,令其不得安宁。显示巴利原文
Eka-saddo aññaseṭṭhaasahāyasaṅkhayādīsu dissati. Tathā hesa ‘‘sassato attā ca loko ca, idameva saccaṃ moghamaññanti ittheke abhivadantī’’tiādīsu (ma. ni. 3.27) aññatthe dissati. ‘‘Cetaso ekodibhāva’’ntiādīsu (dī. ni. 1.228; pārā. 11) seṭṭhe, ‘‘eko vūpakaṭṭho’’tiādīsu (dī. ni. 1.405) asahāye, ‘‘ekova kho, bhikkhave, khaṇo ca samayo ca brahmacariyavāsāyā’’tiādīsu (a. ni. 8.29) saṅkhayāyaṃ. Idhāpi saṅkhayāyanti dassento āha ‘‘ekantigaṇanaparicchedaniddeso’’ti. Kālañca samayañcāti yuttakālañca paccayasāmaggiñca. Khaṇoti okāso. Tathāgatuppādādiko hi maggabrahmacariyassa okāso tappaccayassa paṭilābhahetuttā. Khaṇo eva ca samayo, yo khaṇoti ca samayoti ca vuccati, so eko evāti hi attho. Mahāsamayoti mahāsamūho. Samayopi khoti sikkhāpadapūraṇassa hetupi. Samayappavādaketi diṭṭhippavādake. Tattha hi nisinnā titthiyā attano attano samayaṃ pavadanti. Atthābhisamayāti hitapaṭilābhā. Abhisametabboti abhisamayo, abhisamayo attho abhisamayatthoti pīḷanādīni abhisametabbabhāvena ekībhāvaṃ upanetvā vuttāni. Abhisamayassa vā paṭivedhassa visayabhūto attho abhisamayatthoti tāneva tathā ekattena vuttāni. Tattha pīḷanaṃ dukkhasaccassa taṃsamaṅgino hiṃsanaṃ avipphārikatākaraṇaṃ, santāpo dukkhadukkhatādivasena santāpanaṃ paridahanaṃ.
其中,“辅助性的原因共同审察、一同会合”,故称为“samaya”,即合会。道与梵行及依此而住之人,于此会合、聚集,故称为“samaya”,即刹那。有情或自性法,依此而会合,或以此与俱生等、生起等会合,故称为“samaya”,即时。因为,尽管从义理上说,时间并非真实存在,仅作为法运转的所依,如同工具一般,是以假想施设的形态而被言说。诸部分平等地、或一起地运行、转起、安住,故称为“samaya”,即集合,如说“集起”。部分的共同安住即是集合。于其余诸缘的会合中,果从此生起、转起,故称为“samaya”,即因,如说“集”。以结缚的状态,意义在其境中运行;或以牢牢执取的状态,众生依此随执著而运行、转起,故称为“samaya”,即见。因为,众生以见结而被极度系缚。相遇、相会、合为一体,故称为“samaya”,即获得。通向平等的寂灭,或正确地通向寂灭的乘、出离、止息,故称为“samaya”,即断除。应以智正确地面对、通达、证得者,为“abhisamaya”,即诸法无颠倒的自性。以面对面的方式正确地进入、到达、觉悟,为显示巴利原文
Tattha sahakārikāraṇaṃ sannijjhaṃ sameti samavetīti samayo, samavāyo. Sameti samāgacchati ettha maggabrahmacariyaṃ tadādhārapuggalehīti samayo, khaṇo. Sameti ettha, etena vā saṃgacchati satto, sabhāvadhammo vā sahajātādīhi, uppādādīhi vāti samayo, kālo. Dhammappavattimattatāya atthato abhūtopi hi kālo dhammappavattiyā adhikaraṇaṃ karaṇaṃ viya ca parikappanāmattasiddhena rūpena voharīyatīti. Samaṃ, saha vā avayavānaṃ ayanaṃ pavatti avaṭṭhānanti samayo, samūho yathā ‘‘samudāyo’’ti. Avayavasahāvaṭṭhānameva hi samūhoti. Avasesapaccayānaṃ samāgame eti phalaṃ etasmā uppajjati pavattati cāti samayo, hetu yathā ‘‘samudayo’’ti. Sameti saṃyojanabhāvato sambandho eti attano visaye pavattati, daḷhaggahaṇabhāvato vā saṃyuttā ayanti pavattanti sattā yathābhinivesaṃ etenāti samayo, diṭṭhi. Diṭṭhisaṃyojanena hi sattā ativiya bajjhantīti. Samiti saṃgati samodhānanti samayo, paṭilābho. Samassa nirodhassa yānaṃ, sammā vā yānaṃ apagamo apavatti samayo, pahānaṃ. Abhimukhaṃ ñāṇena sammā etabbo adhigantabboti abhisamayo, dhammānaṃ aviparīto sabhāvo. Abhimukhabhāvena sammā eti gacchati bujjhatīti abhisamayo, dhammānaṃ aviparītasabhāvāvabodho . Evaṃ tasmiṃ tasmiṃ atthe samayasaddappavatti veditabbā. Samayasaddassa atthuddhāre abhisamayasaddassa udāharaṇaṃ vuttanayeneva veditabbaṃ. Assāti samayasaddassa. Kālo attho samavāyādīnaṃ atthānaṃ idha asambhavato desadesakaparisānaṃ viya suttassa nidānabhāvena kālassa apadisitabbato ca.
然而,为何此处不加以限定地指出“时”呢?因为它并非以季节、年等来限定,故说“其中,虽……”等。为了显示:即使不以季节、年等作限定,仅用“时”一词,也能获得此功德,故说“或他们……”等。因为总括性的说明,亦能涵盖特殊之处。其中,“现法乐住之时”,即日复一日以禅那与果等至度过之时,特别是七个七天。“极显赫”,即因震动一万世界、放大光明等而显著。为了以其他方式含摄前述种种时中的一个部分而作显示,故说“而此……”等。确实,智作用之时、自利修行之时,即是正等觉之时;圣默然之时;现法乐住之时;悲悯作用、利他修行、法谈之时,即是说法之时。显示巴利原文
Kasmā panettha aniyamitavaseneva kālo niddiṭṭho? Na utusaṃvaccharādivasena niyamitoti āha ‘‘tattha kiñcāpī’’tiādi. Utusaṃvaccharādivasena niyamaṃ akatvā samayasaddassa vacane ayampi guṇo laddho hotīti dassento ‘‘ye vā ime’’tiādimāha. Sāmaññajotanā hi visese avatiṭṭhatīti. Tattha diṭṭhadhammasukhavihārasamayo devasikaṃ jhānaphalasamāpattīhi vītināmanakālo, visesato sattasattāhāni. Suppakāsāti dasasahassilokadhātupakampana-obhāsapātubhāvādīhi pākaṭā. Yathāvuttappabhedesu eva samayesu ekadesaṃ pakārantarehi saṅgahetvā dassetuṃ ‘‘yo cāya’’ntiādimāha. Tathā hi ñāṇakiccasamayo, attahitapaṭipattisamayo ca abhisambodhisamayo, ariyatuṇhībhāvasamayo, diṭṭhadhammasukhavihārasamayo, karuṇākiccaparahitapaṭipattidhammīkathāsamayā, desanāsamayo eva.
“以具格作说明”,这是建立了语法关联。其中,“在其中”,是指在阿毗达摩及其他相应的经、律语句中。“同样地”,是通过处格和具格来进行。所谓“摄受义”,就是“所依义”。所谓“有”,指的是作用、行为;通过那种作用,以另一种作用为特征,这就是“以有来显示有的特征”。在这当中,就如同“时间”,虽然以自性法来划分,在究竟意义上并不存在,却仍被认知为一种所依,例如在“上午出生,傍晚去世”等说法中;又如同“集合”,虽然离开组成部分、单独地并不存在,仅仅是依于施设而成立,却被认知为各个组成部分的所依,例如在“树上的树枝”、“从麦堆里长出来”等说法中。为了显示在这里也是如此,所以说:“因为摄受……诸法”。在某个时间,或者在某个法聚之中,有欲界的善心生起了,在同样的那个时间、同样的那个法聚中,触等相关法也存在,这就是这里所要表达的意思。而且,就像“当母牛正在被挤奶的时候他走了,挤完奶的时候他回来了”这句话,是用挤奶这个行为来标指来、去的行为。同样地,在这里,当说出“在某个时候,在那个时候”时,其中“存在着”这个意义显示巴利原文
Karaṇavacanena niddeso katoti sambandho. Tatthāti abhidhammatadaññasuttapadavinayesu. Tathāti bhummakaraṇehi. Adhikaraṇattho ādhārattho. Bhāvo nāma kiriyā, tāya kiriyantaralakkhaṇaṃ bhāvenabhāvalakkhaṇaṃ. Tattha yathā kālo sabhāvadhammaparicchinno sayaṃ paramatthato avijjamānopi ādhārabhāvena paññāto taṅkhaṇappavattānaṃ tato pubbe parato ca abhāvato ‘‘pubbaṇhe jāto, sāyanhe gacchatī’’ti ca ādīsu, samūho ca avayavavinimutto visuṃ avijjamānopi kappanāmattasiddho avayavānaṃ ādhārabhāvena paññāpīyati yathā ‘‘rukkhe sākhā, yavarāsiyaṃ sambhūto’’tiādīsu, evaṃ idhāpīti dassento āha ‘‘adhikaraṇañhi…pe… dhammāna’’nti. Yasmiṃ kāle, dhammapuñje vā kāmāvacaraṃ kusalaṃ cittaṃ uppannaṃ hoti, tasmiṃ eva kāle dhammapuñje ca phassādayopi hontīti ayaṃ hi tattha attho. Yathā ca ‘‘gāvīsu duyhamānāsu gato, duddhāsu āgato’’ti dohanakiriyāya gamanakiriyā lakkhīyati, evaṃ idhāpi yasmiṃ samaye, tasmiṃ samayeti ca vutte ‘‘satī’’ti ayamattho viññāyamāno eva hoti padatthassa sattāvirahābhāvatoti samayassa sattākiriyāya cittassa uppādakiriyā phassādibhavanakiriyā ca lakkhīyati. Yasmiṃ samayeti yasmiṃ navame khaṇe, yasmiṃ yonisomanasikārādihetumhi, paccayasamavāye vā sati kāmāvacaraṃ kusalaṃ cittaṃ uppannaṃ hoti, tasmiṃyeva khaṇe, hetumhi, paccayasamavāye vā phassādayopi hontīti ubhayattha samayasadde bhummaniddeso kato lakkhaṇabhūtabhāvayuttoti dassento āha ‘‘khaṇa…pe… lakkhīyatī’’ti.
“因”的含义与“工具”的含义,可以像“依食而住”“依明而住”“以斧砍”“以锹掘”等例子那样成立。因为世尊在听闻犯戒事件后,便召集比丘僧团,询问当事者并加以呵责,不令迁延,就在犯戒发生的当下,为藉此事缘而制立学处,正如第三波罗夷等戒中所作。显示巴利原文
Hetuattho karaṇattho ca sambhavati ‘‘annena vasati, vijjāya vasati, pharasunā chindati, kudālena khaṇatī’’tiādīsu viya. Vītikkamañhi sutvā bhikkhusaṅghaṃ sannipātāpetvā otiṇṇavatthukaṃ puggalaṃ paṭipucchitvā vigarahitvā ca taṃ taṃ vatthuotiṇṇakālaṃ anatikkamitvā teneva kālena sikkhāpadāni paññapento bhagavā viharati sikkhāpadapaññattihetuñca apekkhamāno tatiyapārājikādīsu viya.
从始至终,直至说法完毕,整个过程完完全全是世尊安住于名为利他行道的悲心之中。作此解说,是为了阐明彻底联结的意义。此处以受格表述,就如说“念诵一个月”那样。“古师”即指注释书的老师们。“唯言语之差别”是指这仅是措辞上的不同。由此表明,在经与律当中,格的用法可以有所变化。显示巴利原文
Accantameva ārambhato paṭṭhāya yāva desanāniṭṭhānaṃ. Parahitapaṭipattisaṅkhātena karuṇāvihārena. Tadatthajotanatthanti accantasaṃyogatthajotanatthaṃ. Upayoganiddeso kato yathā ‘‘māsaṃ sajjhāyatī’’ti . Porāṇāti aṭṭhakathācariyā. Abhilāpamattabhedoti vacanamattena viseso. Tena suttavinayesu vibhattibyattayo katoti dasseti.
“最胜”一词表最胜之意,因其与最胜的功德相伴,故说“最胜”;“最高”也是如此。“应受恭敬”:即具足尊贵之相,因与尊贵功德相应,或因值得受到恭敬对待的缘故。前面已经说过的道理,此处不再重复,因为这部注释书只是《清净道论》的一部分。显示巴利原文
Seṭṭhanti seṭṭhavācakaṃ vacanaṃ ‘‘seṭṭha’’nti vuttaṃ seṭṭhaguṇasahacaraṇato, tathā ‘‘uttama’’nti etthāpi. Gāravayuttoti garubhāvayutto garuguṇayogato, garukaraṇārahatāya vā gāravayutto. Vuttoyeva, na pana idha vattabbo visuddhimaggassa imissā aṭṭhakathāya ekadesabhāvatoti adhippāyo.
另一种解释是:「具有分」,故称世尊;「已破坏」,故称世尊;「于分中推向」,故称世尊;「于分推向」,故称世尊;「已食」,故称世尊;「于分中呕吐」,故称世尊;「于分呕吐」,故称世尊。显示巴利原文
Aparo nayo (itivu. aṭṭha. nidānavaṇṇanā; sārattha. ṭī. 1.1.verañjakaṇḍavaṇṇanā; visuddhi. mahāṭī. 1.144) – bhāgavāti bhagavā, bhatavāti bhagavā, bhāge vanīti bhagavā, bhage vanīti bhagavā, bhattavāti bhagavā, bhage vamīti bhagavā, bhāge vamīti bhagavā.
具有分、已破坏,于分中、于分上,曾推向、已食;
于分上呕吐,亦于分中呕吐,即此称为世尊、胜者。
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Bhāgavā bhatavā bhāge, bhage ca vani bhattavā; Bhage vami tathā bhāge, vamīti bhagavā jino’’.
其中,如何以‘具有诸分’之义而称为世尊?那些名为戒等的法蕴,也就是功德之分、功德之聚,唯如来独具、无与伦比,于如来身中存在并可得证。即:戒、定、慧、解脱、解脱知见;惭、愧;信、精进;念、正知;戒清净、见清净;止、观;三善根、三善行、三正思惟;三无过失想、三界;四念处、四正勤、四神足、四圣道、四圣果;四无碍解、四辨别生处智、四圣种、四无畏智;五勤支、五支正定、五智正定、五根、五力、五出离界、五解脱处智、五令解脱成熟想;六随念处、六恭敬、六出离界、六常住、六无上法、六抉择分想、六神通、六不共智;七不退法、七圣法、七圣财、七觉支、七善士法、七清澄事、七想、七应供人分别说、七漏尽者力分别说;八种得慧因分别说、八正道、八世法超越、八发勤事、八非时分别说、八大人思惟、八胜处分别说、八解脱;九种如理作意根法、九清净勤支、九众生居分别说、九害心调伏、九想、九异门、九次第住;十作拥护法、十遍处、十善业道、十正行、十圣居、十无学法、十如来力;十一慈心功德、十二法轮行相、十三头陀功德、十四佛智、十五令……显示巴利原文
Tattha kathaṃ bhāgavāti bhagavā? Ye te sīlādayo dhammakkhandhā guṇabhāgā guṇakoṭṭhāsā, te anaññasādhāraṇā niratisayā tathāgate atthi upalabbhanti. Tathā hissa sīlaṃ samādhi paññā vimutti vimuttiñāṇadassanaṃ, hirī ottappaṃ, saddhā vīriyaṃ, sati sampajaññaṃ, sīlavisuddhi diṭṭhivisuddhi, samatho vipassanā, tīṇi kusalamūlāni, tīṇi sucaritāni, tayo sammāvitakkā, tisso anavajjasaññā, tisso dhātuyo, cattāro satipaṭṭhānā, cattāro sammappadhānā, cattāro iddhipādā, cattāro ariyamaggā, cattāri ariyaphalāni, catasso paṭisambhidā, catuyoniparicchedakañāṇāni, cattāro ariyavaṃsā, cattāri vesārajjañāṇāni, pañca padhāniyaṅgāni, pañcaṅgiko sammāsamādhi, pañcañāṇiko sammāsamādhi, pañcindriyāni, pañca balāni, pañca nissāraṇīyā dhātuyo, pañca vimuttāyatanañāṇāni, pañca vimuttiparipācanīyā saññā, cha anussatiṭṭhānāni, cha gāravā, cha nissāraṇīyā dhātuyo, cha satatavihārā, cha anuttariyāni, cha nibbedhabhāgiyā saññā, cha abhiññā, cha asādhāraṇañāṇāni, satta aparihāniyā dhammā, satta ariyadhammā, satta ariyadhanāni, satta bojjhaṅgā, satta sappurisadhammā, satta nijjaravatthūni, satta saññā, sattadakkhiṇeyyapuggaladesanā, sattakhīṇāsavabaladesanā, aṭṭhapaññāpaṭilābhahetudesanā aṭṭha sammattāni, aṭṭhalokadhammātikkamo, aṭṭha ārambhavatthūni, aṭṭhaakkhaṇadesanā, aṭṭha mahāpurisavitakkā, aṭṭhaabhibhāyatanadesanā, aṭṭha vimokkhā, nava yonisomanasikāramūlakā dhammā, nava pārisuddhipadhāniyaṅgāni, navasattāvāsadesanā, nava āghātapaṭivinayā, nava saññā, navanānattā, nava anupubbavihārā, dasa nāthakaraṇā dhammā, dasa kasiṇāyatanāni, dasa kusalakammapathā, dasa sammattāni, dasa ariyavāsā, dasa asekkhadhammā, dasa tathāgatabalāni, ekādasa mettānisaṃsā, dvādasa dhammācakkākārā, terasa dhutaguṇā, cuddasa buddhañāṇāni, pañcadasa vimuttiparipācanīyā dhammā, soḷasavidhā ānāpānassati, soḷasa aparantapanīyā dhammā, aṭṭhārasa buddhadhammā, ekūnavīsati paccavekkhaṇañāṇāni, catucattālīsa ñāṇavatthūni, paññāsa udayabbayañāṇāni, paropaññāsa kusalā dhammā, sattasattati ñāṇavatthūni, catuvīsatikoṭisatasahassasaṅkhasamāpattisañcārimahāvajirañāṇaṃ , anantanayasamantapaṭṭhāna-pavicaya-paccavekkhaṇadesanāñāṇāni, tathā anantāsu lokadhātūsu anantānaṃ sattānaṃ āsayādivibhāvanañāṇāni cāti evamādayo anantāparimāṇabhedā anaññasādhāraṇā niratisayā guṇabhāgā guṇakoṭṭhāsā saṃvijjanti upalabbhanti, tasmā yathāvuttavibhāgā guṇabhāgā assa atthīti ‘‘bhāgavā’’ti vattabbe ākārassa rassattaṃ katvā ‘‘bhagavā’’ti vutto. Evaṃ tāva bhāgavāti bhagavā.
因为戒等一切功德之分,毫无遗余,
悉存在于善逝,故被称为世尊。
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Yasmā sīlādayo sabbe, guṇabhāgā asesato; Vijjanti sugate tasmā, bhagavāti pavuccati’’.
何以说世尊即是‘已具备者’?那些为利益一切世间而发心精勤,在人间等生命形态中圆满八种法,并依正等正觉发起大誓愿的大菩萨,所应圆满的法即是:布施巴拉密、持戒巴拉密、出离巴拉密、智慧巴拉密、精进巴拉密、忍耐波罗蜜、真实巴拉密、决意波罗蜜、慈爱巴拉密、舍巴拉密——此十波罗蜜、十近波罗蜜、十最上波罗蜜,合为三十波罗蜜;布施等四种摄事,真实等四种决意;肢节施、生命施、王国施、子女施、妻子施,此五种大布施;以及前际精勤、前际修行、宣说法、了义行、世间义利行、佛陀义利行等。简言之,即是一切福德与智慧的资粮,也就是成佛之法。从大誓愿开始,历经四不可数又十万大劫,这些成佛之法并非趋向退堕、染污或停滞,而是持续不断地趋于殊胜。如是他恭敬地、无间断地、尽无余地具足、圆满具足了这些法。是故,当说‘bhatavā’时,依语源规律将ta音转为ga音,而说为‘bhagavā’。或者,‘bhatavā’之义即是:如前所说,承载、圆满承载了那些成佛之法。如此,称为‘世尊’。显示巴利原文
Kathaṃ bhatavāti bhagavā? Ye te sabbalokahitāya ussukkamāpannehi manussattādike aṭṭha dhamme samodhānetvā sammāsambodhiyā katamahābhinīhārehi mahābodhisattehi paripūritabbā dānapāramī, sīla, nekkhamma, paññā, vīriya, khanti, sacca, adhiṭṭhāna, mettā, upekkhāpāramīti dasa pāramiyo, dasa upapāramiyo, dasa paramatthapāramiyoti samatiṃsa pāramiyo, dānādīni cattāri saṅgahavatthūni, saccādīni cattāri adhiṭṭhānāni, aṅgapariccāgo, jīvita, rajja, putta, dārapariccāgoti pañca mahāpariccāgā, pubbayogo, pubbacariyā, dhammakkhānaṃ, ñātatthacariyā, lokatthacariyā, buddhicariyāti evamādayo, saṅkhepato vā sabbe puññañāṇasambhārā buddhakaradhammā, te mahābhinīhārato paṭṭhāya kappānaṃ satasahassādhikāni cattāri asaṅkhyeyyāni yathā hānabhāgiyā saṃkilesabhāgiyā ṭhitibhāgiyā vā na honti, atha kho uttaruttari visesabhāgiyāva honti, evaṃ sakkaccaṃ nirantaraṃ anavasesato bhatā sambhatā assa atthīti ‘‘bhatavā’’ti vattabbe ‘‘bhagavā’’ti vutto niruttinayena ta-kārassa ga-kāraṃ katvā . Atha vā bhatavāti teyeva yathāvutte buddhakaradhamme vuttanayeneva bhari, sambhari, paripūresīti attho. Evampi bhatavāti bhagavā.
为成就正等正觉,布施巴拉密等一切资粮,
皆已具备,故称导师,是故名为世尊。
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Sammāsambodhiyā sabbe, dānapāramiādike; Sambhāre bhatavā nātho, tasmāpi bhagavā mato’’.
如何理解‘于福分中希求’(bhāge vanī)即是世尊?那些数目达二十四万亿十万、日常受用的等至福分,他为了利益世间,也为了自己现法安乐住,恒常地希求、受用、修习、多作,因此称为‘于福分中希求’的世尊。或者,对于应证知之法(如善等)及应遍知之法(如蕴等),简言之有四类现观福分;详言之,如‘眼应遍知……乃至老死应遍知’等,有众多应遍知的福分;如‘眼之集应断除……乃至老死之集应断除’等,有众多应断除的福分;如‘眼之灭应作证……乃至老死之灭应作证’等,有众多应作证的福分;如‘导向眼灭之道迹’等以及四念处等,有众多分类的应修习法。对于这些法,他依行境力、修习力与亲近力,全面地希求、受用、如理修习。如此,‘于福分中希求’即是世尊。或者,他怀着大悲心想:‘这些戒等法蕴是诸声闻所共的功德聚、功德福分,我怎样才能将它们安立于所化众生的相续中呢?’他这样希求、发愿,而他的这种希求也确实产生了所期之果。显示巴利原文
Kathaṃ bhāge vanīti bhagavā? Ye te catuvīsatikoṭisatasahassasaṅkhā devasikaṃ vaḷañjanakasamāpattibhāgā, te anavasesato lokahitatthaṃ attano ca diṭṭhadhammasukhavihāratthaṃ niccakappaṃ vani, bhaji, sevi, bahulamakāsīti bhāge vanīti bhagavā. Atha vā abhiññeyyadhammesu kusalādīsu khandhādīsu ca ye te pariññeyyādivasena saṅkhepato vā catubbidhā abhisamayabhāgā, vitthārato pana ‘‘cakkhu pariññeyyaṃ sotaṃ…pe… jarāmaraṇaṃ pariññeyya’’ntiādinā (paṭi. ma. 1.21) aneke pariññeyyabhāgā, ‘‘cakkhussa samudayo pahātabbo…pe… jarāmaraṇassa samudayo pahātabbo’’tiādinā pahātabbabhāgā, ‘‘cakkhussa nirodho…pe… jarāmaraṇassa nirodho sacchikātabbo’’tiādinā sacchikātabbabhāgā, ‘‘cakkhunirodhagāminīpaṭipadā’’tiādinā, ‘‘cattāro satipaṭṭhānā’’tiādinā ca anekabhedā bhāvetabbabhāgā ca dhammā, te sabbe vani, bhaji, yathārahaṃ gocarabhāvanāsevanānaṃ vasena sevi. Evampi bhāge vanīti bhagavā. Atha vā ‘‘ye ime sīlādayo dhammakkhandhā sāvakehi sādhāraṇā guṇakoṭṭhāsā guṇabhāgā, kinti nu kho te vineyyasantānesu patiṭṭhapeyya’’nti mahākaruṇāya vani abhipatthayi, sā cassa abhipatthanā yathādhippetaphalāvahā ahosi. Evampi bhāge vanīti bhagavā.
由于如来对于所知、等至与功德福分,
为利众生而受用、希求,故称世尊。
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Yasmā ñeyyasamāpatti-guṇabhāge tathāgato; Bhaji patthayi sattānaṃ, hitāya bhagavā tato’’.
如何理解“于福德中希求”(bhage vanī)即是世尊呢?简而言之:已造福德、具足精勤者,随其福德所受用的种种成就,称为“诸福德”(bhagā),即世间与出世间成就。其中,在世间成就方面,如来于正自觉之前为菩萨时,曾希求、受用、亲近最顶级的世间成就,并以此为立足,无遗地圆满成佛之法;成正自觉之后,又对那些无过失、内摄于心、不共的出世成就,加以希求、受用、亲近。广而言之,对于一方王权、自在转轮王成就、天王成就,以及禅那、解脱、定、等至、智见、道之修习、果之作证等诸多不共的福德,他都希求、受用、亲近。如此,“于福德中希求”(bhage vanī)即是世尊。显示巴利原文
Kathaṃ bhage vanīti bhagavā? Samāsato tāva katapuññehi payogasampannehi yathāvibhavaṃ bhajīyantīti bhagā, lokiyalokuttarasampattiyo. Tattha lokiye tāva tathāgato sammāsambodhito pubbe bodhisattabhūto paramukkaṃsagate, vani, bhaji, sevi, yattha patiṭṭhāya niravasesato buddhakaradhamme samannānento buddhadhamme paripācesi, buddhabhūto pana te niravajjesu upasaṃhite anaññasādhāraṇe lokuttarepi, vani, bhaji, sevi, vitthārato pana padesarajja-issariyacakkavattisampatti-devarajjasampattiādivasena jhāna-vimokkha-samādhisamāpatti-ñāṇadassana-maggabhāvanā-phalasacchi-kiriyādi-uttarimanussadhammavasena ca anekavihite anaññasādhāraṇe, bhage, vani, bhaji, sevi. Evampi bhage vanīti bhagavā.
世间中的那些成就,以及种种出世间成就;
正自觉者受用了这一切成就,因此也被称为世尊。
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Yā tā sampattiyo loke, yā ca lokuttarā puthu; Sabbā tā bhaji sambuddho, tasmāpi bhagavā mato’’.
世尊为何称为“有供养者”(bhattavā)?若有许多人是他的坚定供养者,他便称为有供养者。如来具足大悲、一切知智等无量无伦的威德与功德殊胜,故于一切众生中为至上。他以先去除一切不利为前导,以无余地建立利益与安乐为终极,以无上的修行成就,为天与人带来究竟的饶益。他具足三十二大人相、八十种好、一寻光环等不与世人共的殊胜庄严色身。依凭如实证得的功德,他有“此世尊乃是……”等遍满三界、广大而清净的称赞之声。于少欲、知足等,他已达到最上圆满,且能安稳而住。他具足十力、四无畏等无上功德殊胜。是故,在以外表为衡量的众人中,他对色身令生极净信;在依声音衡量的众人中,他对音声令生极净信;在依粗朴衡量的众人中,他对粗朴令生极净信;在依法衡量的众人中,他对法令生极净信。于这四种衡量方式的世间众中,他于一切时处皆能引发净信,故为一切处极清净。因此,无量的众生与天人,对他以恭敬、尊重、崇敬而行,他便成为他们崇高爱敬的所依。那些依止其教诫、具足不坏净信的人,他们的净信与供养,不为任何沙门、显示巴利原文
Kathaṃ sattavāti bhagavā? Bhattā daḷhabhattikā assa bahū atthīti bhattavā. Tathāgato hi mahākaruṇāsabbaññutaññāṇādi-aparimitanirupamappabhāva-guṇavisesasamaṅgibhāvato sabbasattuttamo, sabbānatthaparihārapubbaṅgamāya niravasesahitasukhavidhānatapparāya niratisayāya payogasampattiyā sadevamanussāya pajāya accantupakāritāya dvattiṃsamahāpurisalakkhaṇaasīti anubyañjanabyāmappabhādi anaññasādhāraṇavisesapaṭimaṇḍitarūpakāyatāya yathābhuccaguṇādhigatena ‘‘itipi so bhagavā’’tiādinayappavattena lokattayabyāpinā suvipulena suvisuddhena ca thutighosena samannāgatattā ukkaṃsapāramippattāsu appicchatāsantuṭṭhiādīsu suppatiṭṭhitabhāvato dasabalacatuvesārajjādi-niratisayaguṇavisesa-samaṅgībhāvato ca rūpappamāṇo rūpappasanno, ghosappamāṇo ghosappasanno, lūkhappamāṇo lūkhappasanno, dhammappamāṇo dhammappasannoti evaṃ catuppamāṇike lokasannivāse sabbathāpi pasādāvahabhāvena samantapāsādikattā aparimāṇānaṃ sattānaṃ sadevamanussānaṃ ādarabahumānagāravāyatanatāya paramapemasambhattiṭṭhānaṃ. Ye tassa ovāde patiṭṭhitā aveccappasādena samannāgatā honti, kenaci asaṃhāriyā tesaṃ pasādabhatti samaṇena vā brāhmaṇena vā devena vā mārena vā brahmunā vā. Tathā hi te attano jīvitapariccāgepi tattha pasādaṃ na pariccajanti, tassa vā āṇaṃ daḷhabhattibhāvato.
知恩、感恩的智者,
他是善友,亦是坚定的供养者。(《本生经》2.17.78)
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Yo ve kataññū katavedi dhīro; Kalyāṇamitto daḷhabhatti ca hotī’’ti. (jā. 2.17.78);
“比丘们,犹如大海安住于法,不越海岸;同样地,比丘们,凡我为弟子们所制学处,弟子们纵为生命之故也不违越。”(《优陀那》45;《小品》385)显示巴利原文
‘‘Seyyathāpi, bhikkhave, mahāsamuddo ṭhitadhammo velaṃ nātivattati, evameva kho, bhikkhave, yaṃ mayā sāvakānaṃ sikkhāpadaṃ paññattaṃ, taṃ mama sāvakā jīvitahetupi nātikkamantī’’ti (udā. 45; cūḷava. 385) ca. –
因此,‘有供养者’(bhattavā)一词即指世尊,依词源学的方法,省去一个‘t’音,并将另一‘t’音转为‘g’音。显示巴利原文
Evaṃ bhattavāti bhagavā niruttinayena ekassa ta-kārassa lopaṃ katvā itarassa ga-kāraṃ katvā.
因具足殊胜功德,为世间谋求利益,
众人爱戴敬仰导师,故称世尊。
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Guṇātisayayuttassa, yasmā lokahitesino; Sambhattā bahavo satthu, bhagavā tena vuccatī’’ti.
如何以“吐弃庄严者”解释世尊?如来于菩萨地的无数生中,圆满诸波罗蜜时,将依止于“庄严”的祥瑞、自在与称誉等,犹如唾沫一般毫无恋着地舍弃了。在他最后一生,纵使转轮圣王的荣华已在掌中,那如同天王般的四洲自在,以及依转轮王成就而荣显七宝的盛名,他也看作如同草芥,无有顾恋地舍之而出家,证得正自觉。因此,他吐弃了这些以吉祥为首的“庄严”,故被称为世尊。另一种说法:名为“星宿”者,依其共行而称为“庄严”;须弥山、持轴山、北俱卢洲、雪山等器世间殊胜所依的光辉,虽能住世整整一劫,世尊亦予以吐弃:超越住于其中的众生之处所,舍断对它的一切欲贪,如是弃舍。如此,“吐弃庄严者”即是世尊。显示巴利原文
Kathaṃ bhage vamīti bhagavā? Yasmā tathāgato bodhisattabhūtopi aparimāṇāsu jātīsu pāramiyo paripūrento bhagasaṅkhātaṃ siriṃ issariyaṃ yasañca vami uggiri, kheḷapiṇḍaṃ viya anapekkho chaḍḍayi, carimattabhāvepi hatthagataṃ cakkavattisiriṃ devalokādhipaccasadisaṃ catudīpissariyaṃ cakkavattisampattisannissayaṃ sattaratanasamujjalaṃ yasañca tiṇāyapi amaññamāno nirapekkho pahāya abhinikkhamitvā sammāsambodhiṃ abhisambuddho, tasmā ime sirīādike bhage vamīti bhagavā. Atha vā bhāni nāma nakkhattāni, tehi samaṃ gacchanti pavattantīti bhagā, sineruyugandharauttarakuruhimavantādibhājanalokavisesasannissayā sobhā kappaṭṭhiyabhāvato, tepi bhagavā vami tannivāsisattāvāsasamatikkamato tappaṭibaddhachandarāgappahānena pajahīti. Evampi bhage vamīti bhagavā.
转轮王的吉祥、声誉、自在与安乐,
以及世间心,善逝世尊悉已断舍,是故名为世尊。
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Cakkavattisiriṃ yasmā, yasaṃ issariyaṃ sukhaṃ; Pahāsi lokacittañca, sugato bhagavā tato’’.
何以称世尊为“弃分者”?“分”即同类的法聚,依蕴、处、界等而分类,其中又依色、受等,依地等,依过去等,而有种种差别。世尊断尽一切戏论、一切轭、一切缚、一切结,证得不死界,便将这些法聚完全吐弃、呕出,无恋无顾地舍弃,再不复取。正如经中所说:“地、水、火、风……眼、耳、鼻、舌、身、意……色、声、香、味、触、法……眼识……乃至意识……眼触……乃至意触……眼触所生受……乃至意触所生受……眼触所生想……乃至意触所生想……眼触所生思……乃至意触所生思……色爱……乃至法爱……色寻……乃至法寻……色伺……乃至法伺”——如此,随顺法门分别,世尊无余地吐弃、呕出了一切法聚,以无恋无顾的舍离而舍弃。这正是所说的:“阿难,凡是如来已舍断、吐出、弃除、舍离、遣除的,绝不可能再取回,这是不可能的。”(长部2.183)因此,世尊也称为“弃分者”。又或者说,“弃分者”是指:世尊以圣道智之门,吐弃、呕出了一切善与不善、有罪与无罪、劣与胜、黑白相对的诸法,无顾恋地舍断、断除,并为使他人也能如此而开示正法。这也如所说:“诸比丘”显示巴利原文
Kathaṃ bhāge vamīti bhagavā? Bhāgā nāma sabhāgadhammakoṭṭhāsā, te khandhāyatanadhātādivasena, tatthāpi rūpavedanādivasena pathaviyādivasena atītādivasena ca anekavidhā, te ca bhagavā sabbaṃ papañcaṃ sabbaṃ yogaṃ sabbaṃ ganthaṃ sabbaṃ saṃyojanaṃ samucchinditvā amatadhātuṃ samadhigacchanto vami uggiri, anapekkho chaḍḍayi na paccāvami. Tathā hesa ‘‘sabbatthakameva pathaviṃ āpaṃ tejaṃ vāyaṃ, cakkhuṃ sotaṃ ghānaṃ jivhaṃ kāyaṃ manaṃ, rūpe sadde gandhe rase phoṭṭhabbe dhamme, cakkhuviññāṇaṃ…pe… manoviññāṇaṃ, cakkhusamphassaṃ…pe… manosamphassaṃ, cakkhusamphassajaṃ vedanaṃ…pe… manosamphassajaṃ vedanaṃ, cakkhusamphassajaṃ saññaṃ…pe… manosamphassajaṃ saññaṃ, cakkhusamphassajaṃ cetanaṃ…pe… manosamphassajaṃ cetanaṃ, rūpataṇhaṃ…pe… dhammataṇhaṃ, rūpavitakkaṃ…pe… dhammavitakkaṃ, rūpavicāraṃ…pe… dhammavicāra’’ntiādinā anupadadhammavibhāgavasenapi sabbeva dhammakoṭṭhāse anavasesato vami uggiri, anapekkhapariccāgena chaḍḍayi. Vuttañhetaṃ ‘‘yaṃ taṃ, ānanda, cattaṃ vantaṃ muttaṃ pahīnaṃ paṭinissaṭṭhaṃ, taṃ tathāgato puna paccāvamissatīti netaṃ ṭhānaṃ vijjatī’’ti (dī. ni. 2.183). Evampi bhāge vamīti bhagavā. Atha vā bhāge vamīti sabbepi kusalākusale sāvajjānavajje hīnapaṇīte kaṇhasukkasappaṭibhāge dhamme ariyamaggañāṇamukhena vami uggiri, anapekkho pariccaji pajahi, paresañca tathattāya dhammaṃ desesi. Vuttampi cetaṃ ‘‘dhammāpi vo, bhikkhave, pahātabbā, pageva adhammā (ma. ni. 1.240). Kullūpamaṃ vo, bhikkhave, dhammaṃ desessāmi nittharaṇatthāya, no gahaṇatthāyā’’tiādi (ma. ni. 1.240). Evampi bhāge vamīti bhagavā.
大仙已将蕴、处、界等法类吐弃;
既然黑白诸法都已吐弃,由此也称为世尊。
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Khandhāyatanadhātādi-dhammabhāgā-mahesinā; Kaṇhasukkā yato vantā, tatopi bhagavā mato’’.
“世尊”一词,可解为具分者、具持者、在诸分中、在庄严中、如林、具饭食者;又因他在庄严中弃吐,亦在分中弃吐,故而胜利者、世尊被称作弃吐者。
他在庄严中弃吐,同样在分中弃吐,由此被称为弃吐者;这位世尊便是胜利者。
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Bhāgavā bhatavā bhāge, bhage ca vani bhattavā; Bhage vami tathā bhāge, vamīti bhagavā jino’’ti.
所谓“证知法身”,即直接体证法身。因为世尊说过:“阿难,我所开示、施设的法和律,在我灭后便是你们的导师。”此言表明,法具有导师的意义,亦即同义语,故如此说。世尊的色身犹如金刚聚合,他人无法破坏;实际上,没有任何人能对佛陀的色身造成障碍。“如是我闻”中的“如”字,标示出随后所要讲述的完整经典,由此显示说法成就。“这是由我——被世尊于五方面立为第一、已得无碍解的大声闻——亲自听闻,确是我亲耳听闻,非未曾闻,非辗转传闻而来”这句话,则显示声闻成就。“时”一词与“世尊”结合使用,标示佛陀出世时节的庄严,由此显示时成就。佛陀出世,即是无上的时成就。以此而说:显示巴利原文
Dhammasarīraṃ paccakkhaṃ karotīti ‘‘yo vo, ānanda, mayā dhammo ca vinayo ca desito paññatto, so vo mamaccayena satthā’’ti vacanato dhammassa satthubhāvapariyāyo vijjatīti katvā vuttaṃ. Vajirasaṅghātasamānakāyo parehi abhejjasarīrattā. Na hi bhagavato rūpakāye kenaci sakkā antarāyaṃ kātunti. Desanāsampattiṃ niddisati vakkhamānassa sakalassa suttassa ‘‘eva’’nti nidassanato. Sāvakasampattiṃ niddisati paṭisambhidāppattena pañcasu ṭhānesu bhagavatā etadagge ṭhapitena mayā mahāsāvakena sutaṃ, tañca kho mayāva sutaṃ, na anussutaṃ na paraṃparābhatanti imassatthassa dīpanato. Kālasampattiṃ niddisati bhagavāsaddasannidhāne payuttassa samayasaddassa buddhuppādapaṭimaṇḍitabhāvadīpanato. Buddhuppādaparamā hi kālasampadā. Tenetaṃ vuccati –
‘‘Kappakasāye kaliyuge, buddhuppādo aho mahacchariyaṃ; Hutāvahamajjhe jātaṃ, samuditamakarandamaravinda’’nti.
“世尊”一词,即指说法者的成就:它既显示了具足功德的最胜众生之最上状态,也是表达尊重与恭敬的尊称。显示巴利原文
Bhagavāti desakasampattiṃ niddisati guṇavisiṭṭhasattuttamabhāvadīpanato garugāravādhivacanabhāvato.
“无差别地”:并非依差别,而是依住处的共通性而言,这是其含义。“于威仪……等诸住”:指威仪住、天住、梵住、圣住这四种住。“具足者的说明”:即对具足状态的说明。“此”字,即“他住”(viharati)这个词。实际上,该词出现在以下地方:在威仪住中,如“在此,有某人与在家人结交而住,同乐同忧”等(《相应部》4.241)。在天住中,如“比丘们,当比丘确实远离诸欲……具足初禅而住时”(《法集论》160;《分别论》624)。在梵住中,如“他以慈俱行之心遍满一方而住”等(《长部》1.556;3.308;《中部》1.77;2.309;3.230)。在圣住中,如“阿耆毗舍那,我在那场谈论结束时,就于先前那个定相,内在地将心确立、安定、专一、集中,我因此而常常那样住”等(《中部》1.387)。显示巴利原文
Avisesenāti na visesena, vihārabhāvasāmaññenāti attho. Iriyāpatha…pe… vihāresūti iriyāpathavihāro, dibbavihāro, brahmavihāro, ariyavihāroti etesu catūsu vihāresu. Samaṅgīparidīpananti samaṅgībhāvaparidīpanaṃ. Etanti ‘‘viharatī’’ti etaṃ padaṃ. Tathā hi taṃ ‘‘idhekacco gihīhi saṃsaṭṭho viharati sahanandī sahasokī’’tiādīsu (saṃ. ni. 4.241) iriyāpathavihāre āgataṃ. ‘‘Yasmiṃ, bhikkhave, samaye bhikkhu vivicceva kāmehi…pe… paṭhamaṃ jhānaṃ upasampajja viharatī’’ti (dha. sa. 160; vibha. 624) ettha dibbavihāre. ‘‘So mettāsahagatena cetasā ekaṃ disaṃ pharitvā viharatī’’tiādīsu (dī. ni. 1.556; 3.308; ma. ni. 1.77; 2.309; 3.230) brahmavihāre. ‘‘So kho ahaṃ, aggivessana, tassāyeva kathāya pariyosāne tasmiṃ eva purimasmiṃ samādhinimitte ajjhattameva cittaṃ saṇṭhapemi sannisādemi ekodiṃ karomi samādahāmi, yena sudaṃ niccakappaṃ viharāmī’’tiādīsu (ma. ni. 1.387) ariyavihāre.
在此,iriyanā(行动、运转)即是“威仪”,指身体的动作。由于它是威仪持续的方法,所以站立等就是“威仪路”。或者,具有站立状态的人可以用身体做某些事;具有行走等某一状态的人也是如此。另一种解释:iriyati(行动、运转)——身体或身体的动作依此而运转,所以称为“威仪”;因为它是威仪持续的方法,所以“威仪”也是“路”,合称“威仪路”,也就是站立等本身。从意义上说,它其实就是以色法相续的四类呈现,以走动、停住等方式而显现。viharaṇa(停留)或viharati(他住)的依止,就是“住”。威仪路本身就是住,所以称为“威仪住”。“天”(divi)中的存在,就是“天”(dibba)。由于大多持续存在于梵众等天界,所以有“存在于天界”的意思。在那里有天威神力,因为它能带来那样的利益,故称为“天”;或者依神通引导而有大行境,故为“天”。“天”并且是“住”,就是“天住”,指四种色界等至。无色显示巴利原文
Tattha iriyanaṃ vattanaṃ iriyā, kāyappayogo. Tassā pavattanupāyabhāvato ṭhānādi iriyāpatho. Ṭhānasamaṅgī vā hi kāyena kiñci kareyya gamanādīsu aññatarasamaṅgī vā. Atha vā iriyati pavattati etena attabhāvo kāyakiccaṃ vāti iriyā, tassā pavattiupāyabhāvato iriyā ca so patho cāti iriyāpatho, ṭhānādi eva. So ca atthato gatinivattiādiākārena pavatto catusantatirūpapabandho eva. Viharaṇaṃ, viharati etenāti vā vihāro, iriyāpatho eva vihāro iriyāpathavihāro. Divi bhavo dibbo, tattha bahulappavattiyā brahmapārisajjādidevaloke bhavoti attho. Tattha yo dibbānubhāvo, tadatthāya saṃvattatīti vā dibbo, abhiññābhinīhāravasena mahāgatikattā vā dibbo, dibbo ca so vihāro cāti dibbavihāro, catasso rūpāvacarasamāpattiyo. Āruppasamāpattiyopi ettheva saṅgahaṃ gacchanti. Brahmūnaṃ, brahmāno vā vihārā brahmavihārā, catasso appamaññāyo. Ariyānaṃ, ariyā vā vihārā ariyavihārā, cattāri sāmaññaphalāni. So hi ekaṃ iriyāpathabādhanantiādi yadipi bhagavā ekenapi iriyāpathena cirataraṃ kālaṃ attabhāvaṃ pavattetuṃ sakkoti, tathāpi upādinnakasarīrassa nāma ayaṃ sabhāvoti dassetuṃ vuttaṃ . Yasmā vā bhagavā yattha katthaci vasanto vineyyānaṃ dhammaṃ desento, nānāsamāpattīhi ca kālaṃ vītināmento vasatīti sattānaṃ attano ca vividhaṃ hitasukhaṃ harati upaneti uppādeti, tasmā vividhaṃ haratīti evamettha attho veditabbo.
“他战胜敌人”,所以称为“祇陀”。因为“jeta”一词,就像“sota”一样,也有行为主体(战胜者)的意思。或者,因为是在国王战胜敌人时出生的,所以取名为祇陀。据说,国王把自己的胜利寄托于他,认为“已经胜利了”,因此王子被称为祇陀。又或者,因希求吉祥而为他取名祇陀,所以在“应当被战胜”的意义上称为祇陀,应当这样理解。那就是祇陀王子的。为了显示那片林园从一开始就是他的所有物,所以说“因为那……”。由于一切欲乐都已成就,离垢无悭,具足慈等功德,恒常为无依者准备食物(布施),所以名为“给孤独”。那就是给孤独长者的园。如果说那是祇园,为什么又说是给孤独长者的园?于是回答说:“由给孤独……”等。因为具足五种坐卧具的条件,出家人在这里感到愉悦,所以称为“园”。就在那个园中。虽然那片土地被大富翁用铺满一亿钱币的代价买下,但树木未被祇陀卖出,所以仍然得到“祇园”的名称,有人这样说。又或者,为了彰显两人在其…显示巴利原文
Paccatthike jinātīti jeto. Jeta-saddo hi sota-saddo viya kattusādhanopi atthīti. Rañño vā paccatthikānaṃ jitakāle jātattā jeto. Rañño hi attano jayaṃ tattha āropetvā jitavāti jetoti kumāro vutto. Maṅgalakāmatāya vā jetotissa nāmaṃ kataṃ, tasmā ‘‘jeyyo’’ti etasmiṃ atthe ‘‘jeto’’ti vuttanti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Tassa jetassa rājakumārassa. Vanetiādito paṭṭhāyeva taṃ tassa santakanti dassetuṃ ‘‘taṃ hī’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Sabbakāmasamiddhitāya vigatamalamaccheratāya karuṇādiguṇasamaṅgitāya ca niccakālaṃ upaṭṭhapito anāthānaṃ piṇḍo etassa atthīti anāthapiṇḍiko, tassa anāthapiṇḍikassa. Yadi jetavanaṃ, kathaṃ anāthapiṇḍikassa ārāmoti āha ‘‘anāthapiṇḍikenā’’tiādi. Pañcavidhasenāsanaṅgasampattiyā āramanti ettha pabbajitāti ārāmo, tasmiṃ ārāme. Yadipi so bhūmibhāgo koṭisantharena mahāseṭṭhinā kīto, rukkhā pana jetena na vikkītāti taṃ ‘‘jetavana’’nti vattabbataṃ labhatīti vadanti. Ubhinnampi vā tattha pariccāgavisesakittanatthaṃ ubhayavacanaṃ, jetenapi hi bhūmibhāgavikkayena laddhadhanaṃ tattha dvārakoṭṭhakakaraṇavasena viniyuttaṃ. Sāvatthijetavanānaṃ bhūmibhāgavasena bhinnattā vuttaṃ ‘‘na hi sakkā ubhayattha ekaṃ samayaṃ viharitu’’nti.
“未知者”:指那些未以“帝释”“善耶摩”等名而为人所知的天众。即便是已知者,因属同类,也会使用“某一位”这样的词,为显示此义,故有“他识别……不……”等解说。“ahu”即“今”“现在”。“成共称语”:即涵摄“天”的属性。由于“天神”即是“天”,故“deva”也可用于指人。因此有言:“然于此义……”等。有人问:色界众生并无男根,如何能称为“人”或“补特伽罗”?虽无男根,然具男性形貌与服饰,以其男性本性故,仍名“男性补特伽罗”。显示巴利原文
Apākaṭāti sakko suyāmotiādinā anabhiññātā. Abhiññātānampi aññatarasaddo dissateva ekasadisāyattattāti dassetuṃ ‘‘abhijānāti no’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Ahunā idāneva. Sādhāraṇavacanaṃ dibbataṃ antonītaṃ katvā. Devo eva devatā purisepi vattanato. Tenevāha ‘‘imasmiṃ panatthe’’tiādi. Nanu ca rūpāvacarasattānaṃ purisindriyaṃ natthi, yena te purisāti vucceyyuṃ? Yadipi purisindriyaṃ natthi, purisasaṇṭhānassa pana purisavesassa ca vasena purisapuggalātveva vuccanti purisapakatibhāvato.
“已过”(abhikkantā):意为已过去、已离去,故于“灭尽”义上使用,因此下文说“第一夜分已过去”。“更胜妙”(abhikkantataro):极其令人喜爱。如此即美丽、善妙,故在“美妙”义上使用。“何等”(ko):在天、龙、夜叉、乾闼婆等中,指哪一类?“我”(me):即“我的”。“足”(pādāni):即脚。“以神通”(iddhiyā):以那样的天神通。“以名声”(yasasā):以如是的随从与资具。“照耀”(jalanti):正在闪耀。“以胜妙”(abhikkantena):以极其可爱、可意、端正的。“以色”(vaṇṇena):以肤色、身色的光辉。“照亮一切方”(sabbā obhāsayaṃ disā):犹如月亮、太阳,令一切方处悉皆光明、一片光亮——这便是偈颂的意思。“具足荣色而光辉的”:拥有优胜的身色,成就妙色。显示巴利原文
Abhikkantāti atikkantā, vigatāti atthoti āha ‘‘khaye dissatī’’ti. Teneva hi ‘‘nikkhanto paṭhamo yāmo’’ti upari vuttaṃ. Abhikkantataroti ativiya kantataro. Tādiso ca sundaro bhaddako nāma hotīti āha ‘‘sundare dissatī’’ti. Koti devanāgayakkhagandhabbādīsu ko katamo? Meti mama. Pādānīti pāde. Iddhiyāti imāya evarūpāya deviddhiyā. Yasasāti iminā edisena parivārena paricchadena ca. Jalanti vijjotamāno. Abhikkantenāti ativiya kantena kamaniyena abhirūpena. Vaṇṇenāti chavivaṇṇena sarīravaṇṇanibhāya. Sabbā obhāsayaṃ disāti sabbāpi disā pabhāsento cando viya sūriyo viya ca ekobhāsaṃ ekālokaṃ karontoti gāthāya attho. Abhirūpeti uḷārarūpe sampannarūpe.
“金色”(suvaṇṇavaṇṇa):“金色”一词已包含“肤如黄金”之义,他即依此意趣说“于皮肤”(chaviyaṃ)。而另有说者认为,皮肤所具有的色元素,在“金色”一词中正是以“色”来统摄的。“称赞、称誉、高唱”——这是“vaṇṇa”(赞誉);“依不混杂而分别确定”——这是“vaṇṇa”(种姓、族类);“由此果得以如实了知”——这是“vaṇṇa”(理由、原因);“依长短等而安立描述”——这是“vaṇṇa”(形状、相貌);“依粗细等而量知”——这是“vaṇṇa”(尺度、度量);“当发生变化时,能显示令心领受的相状”——这是“vaṇṇa”(色处,即颜色)。当知“vaṇṇa”一词即依这些不同起因,用于各别意义。“化现神通之后”:即通过衣服、严饰、身体等放出光明等方式,化作出天神通之变。欲界天神即便不刻意化现,亦能前来,因其具有粗重色身,何以故?因他们食用段食。色界天神则不能如此(不化现而前来),以其色身更为微细,故说“于他们而言”(需化现后方可前来)。显示巴利原文
Kañcanasannibhattacatā suvaṇṇavaṇṇaggahaṇena gahitāti adhippāyenāha ‘‘chaviya’’nti. Chavigatā pana vaṇṇadhātu eva ‘‘suvaṇṇavaṇṇo’’ti ettha vaṇṇaggahaṇena gahitāti apare. Vaṇṇanaṃ kittiyā ugghosananti vaṇṇo, thuti. Vaṇṇīyati asaṅkarato vavatthapīyatīti vaṇṇo, kulavaggo. Vaṇṇīyati phalaṃ etena yathāsabhāvato vibhāvīyatīti vaṇṇo, kāraṇaṃ. Vaṇṇanaṃ dīgharassādivasena saṇṭhahananti vaṇṇo, saṇṭhānaṃ. Vaṇṇīyati aṇumahantādivasena pamīyatīti vaṇṇo, pamāṇaṃ. Vaṇṇeti vikāraṃ āpajjamānaṃ hadayaṅgatabhāvaṃ pakāsetīti vaṇṇo, rūpāyatanaṃ. Evaṃ tena tena pavattinimittena vaṇṇasaddassa tasmiṃ tasmiṃ atthe pavatti veditabbā. Iddhiṃ māpetvāti vatthālaṅkārakāyādīhi obhāsamuñcanādivasena dibbaṃ iddhānubhāvaṃ nimminitvā. Kāmāvacarā anabhisaṅkhatenapi āgantuṃ sakkonti oḷārikarūpattā. Tathā hi te kabaḷīkārabhakkhā. Rūpāvacarā na sakkonti tato sukhumatararūpattā. Tenāha ‘‘tesaṃ hī’’tiādi. Tattha ‘‘atisukhumo’’ti mūlapaṭisandhirūpaṃ sandhāya vadati. Na tena iriyāpathakappanaṃ hotīti etena brahmalokepi brahmāno yebhuyyena nimmitarūpeneva pavattantīti dasseti. Itarañhi ativiya sukhumaṃ rūpaṃ kevalaṃ cittuppādassa nissayādhiṭṭhānabhūtaṃ saṇṭhānavantaṃ hutvā tiṭṭhati.
“无余”是指完整、没有剩余。“多数”是指普遍地存在。“不混杂”是指不与不同种类的事物混淆;在此处,它指与快乐不相离散。“不超越”是指以此为极限,再无更殊胜之处。“Kevalakappa”意为‘完全、坚固’。“为了破僧”是指在僧团中制造争论、引发诤斗。“完全”(kevalaṃ)是指涅槃,因为它远离一切有为法;拥有此涅槃者便称为“完全者”(kevalī),即亲身证得灭谛的漏尽者。因此他说:“‘离系’是这个意思。”然而,“劫”这个词有带前缀与不带前缀两种情况,为了表明此意,他举出其部分用法,正如在“可信”等词中所见;否则,“劫”这个词就无法成为示例了。“以沙门仪法”指依戒律所成就的沙门称谓。“常劫”指恒常的时间。“概念”即是名称。这其实是那位尊者的名字,也就是所谓的“劫”。“剃除须发者”指以剃刀剃除须发之人。“二指劫”指正午过后,日影有两指宽的征兆。“缘”指借口。虽然光明有能力无余地遍满一切,但或许因某些缘由,也可能只遍满一部分;为了显示显示巴利原文
Anavasesattaṃ sakalatā. Yebhuyyatā bahulabhāvo. Abyāmissatā vijātiyena asaṅkaro. Sukhena hi avokiṇṇatā tattha adhippetā . Anatirekatā taṃparamatā visesābhāvo. Kevalakappanti kevalaṃ daḷhaṃ katvāti attho. Saṅghabhedāyāti saṅghe vivādāya, vivāduppādāyāti attho. Kevalaṃ vuccati nibbānaṃ sabbasaṅkhatavivittattā, etassa taṃ atthīti kevalī, sacchikatanirodho khīṇāsavo. Tenāha ‘‘visaṃyogo attho’’ti.
“劫”这个词有带前缀与不带前缀的情况,为了显示此意图,他举出了在“可信”等词中可见的“劫”字的部分用法;否则,“劫”这个词便无法成为示例了。“以沙门仪法”指依戒律成就的沙门称谓。“常劫”指恒常的时间。“概念”即是名称。这其实是那位尊者的名字,也就是所谓的“劫”。“剃除须发者”指用剃刀剃除须发之人。“二指劫”指正午过后,日影有两指宽的征兆。“缘”指借口。虽然光明有能力无余地遍满一切,但或许因某些缘由,也可能只遍满一部分;为了显示此光明实则遍满一切,故采“周围”之义,即采用“劫”这个词来表示“无余地遍一切处”。“稍欠完全”即是不完全,或是“完全”,又或是“全然的劫”。世尊光明未照亮之处,天神们便以自身光明去照亮。因为世尊的光明不为任何其他光明所压制,它甚至能制伏日、月等光明而恒常存在。显示巴利原文
Kappasaddo panāyaṃ saupasaggo anupasaggo cāti adhippāyena okappaniyapade labbhamānaṃ kappasaddamattaṃ dasseti, aññathā kappapadaṃ anidassanameva siyā. Samaṇakappehīti vinayasiddhehi samaṇavohārehi. Niccakappanti niccakālaṃ. Paññattīti nāmaṃ. Nāmañhetaṃ tassa āyasmato, yadidaṃ kappoti. Kappitakesamassūti kattarikāya cheditakesamassu. Dvaṅgulakappoti majjhanhikavelāya vītikkantāya dvaṅgulatāvikappo. Lesoti apadeso. Anavasesaṃ pharituṃ samatthassapi obhāsassa kenacipi kāraṇena ekadesapharaṇampi siyā, ayaṃ pana sabbasova pharatīti dassetuṃ samantattho kappa-saddo gahitoti āha ‘‘anavasesaṃ samantato’’ti. Īsaṃ asamattaṃ, kevalaṃ vā kevalakappaṃ. Bhagavato ābhāya anobhāsitameva hi padesaṃ devatā attano pabhāya obhāsenti. Na hi bhagavato pabhā kāyaci pabhāya abhibhuyyati, sūriyādīnampi pabhaṃ sā abhibhuyya tiṭṭhatīti.
“以任何因由故”(yenavā kāraṇenā)——这是表示原因(hetu)时的具格语词。因为“原因”是行为的根据(kāraṇa),而不像工具(karaṇa)那样是行为的直接意义,因此,为了证得种种殊胜功德,这里的“前往”行为,就如“依食物而住,依明而住”等例,该具格语词只适合表示“原因”义,不适合表示“工具”义,因为工具义在此并不适用,所以说“以任何因由故”等。世尊拥有恒常运转、无上、美妙、广大的最胜正法果,因此世尊被比喻为一棵常结甜美果实的大树。正因把握了“想要享用甜美果实”的意图,也就把握了大悲世尊拥有甜美果实这一性质。“前往”(upasaṅkamī)即已到达。因为怀着希求之心前往某处,越过各个地方而前行,在到达时,便可称为“已前往”。因此说“意思是已去”(gatāti vuttaṃ hoti),其意义是“已接近”。“前往后”(upasaṅkamitvā)是指示先前的动作,所以说“表明前往的完成”(upasaṅkama)显示巴利原文
Yenavā kāraṇenāti hetumhi idaṃ karaṇavacanaṃ. Hetuattho hi kiriyāya kāraṇaṃ, na karaṇaṃ viya kiriyattho, tasmā nānappakāra-guṇavisesādhigamanatthā idha upasaṅkamanakiriyāti ‘‘annena vasati, vijjāya vasatī’’tiādīsu viya hetuatthameva taṃ karaṇavacanaṃ yuttaṃ na karaṇatthaṃ tassa ayujjamānattāti vuttaṃ ‘‘yena vā kāraṇenā’’tiādi. Bhagavato satatappavattaniratisaya-sāduvipulamatarasa-saddhammaphalatāya sāduphalaniccaphalitamahārukkhena bhagavā upamito. Sāduphalūpabhogādhippāyaggahaṇeneva hi mahākāruṇikassa sāduphalatā gahitāti. Upasaṅkamīti upasaṅkantā. Sampattakāmatāya hi kiñci ṭhānaṃ gacchanto taṃtaṃpadesātikkamanena upasaṅkami, upasaṅkantoti vattabbataṃ labhati. Tenāha ‘‘gatāti vuttaṃ hotī’’ti, upagatāti attho. Upasaṅkamitvāti pubbakālakiriyāniddesoti āha ‘‘upasaṅkamanapariyosānadīpana’’nti. Tatoti yaṃ ṭhānaṃ pattā ‘‘upasaṅkamī’’ti vuttā, tato upagataṭṭhānato.
从止步之义与共通义来说,座位亦由‘站立处’的把握而被涵盖,因此说‘善巧于座位,立于一旁’。即便坐着,也由于已从行走中返回,而可称为止步;必须先站立而后坐下,是故前文所述的站立等,亦摄于座位之中。藉由遮止过远与过近,便确立了‘不近不远’。这应理解为两人伸展手臂可互相碰触的距离。‘伸出脖颈’:转动头颈而探出。显示巴利原文
Gatinivattiatthato sāmaññato āsanampi ṭhānaggahaṇena gayhatīti vuttaṃ ‘‘āsanakusalatāya ekamantaṃ tiṭṭhantī’’ti. Nisinnāpi hi gamanato nivattā nāma honti ṭhatvā nisīditabbattā, yathāvuttaṭṭhānādayopi āsaneneva saṅgahitāti. Atidūraaccāsannapaṭikkhepena nātidūranaccāsannaṃ nāma gahitaṃ. Taṃ pana avakaṃsato ubhinnaṃ pasāritahatthasaṅghaṭṭanena daṭṭhabbaṃ. Gīvaṃ pasāretvāti gīvaṃ parivattanavasena pasāretvā.
‘如何呢?’虽是对方式的询问,但此处所问的是度越的方式。而度越的方式,从义理上说即是其原因,因此他解释说‘如何呢?是对原因的询问’。于正等正觉时,大地震动等诸多神变显现的因缘,极为显著。显示巴利原文
Kāmaṃ ‘‘katha’’nti ayamākārapucchā, taraṇākāro idha pucchito. So pana taraṇākāro atthato kāraṇamevāti āha ‘‘kathaṃ nūti kāraṇapucchā’’ti? Pākaṭo abhisambodhiyaṃ mahāpathavīkampanādianekacchariyapātubhāvādinā.
由于能消除诸恶及疾病等无益之事,能加以摧伏,故为‘离苦者’,即远离痛苦之义。因此说‘意为无苦’。就地狱而言,此乃借由爱语而施设的习惯用语,正如‘诸天所爱’一般。因而说‘若是如此’等。‘以桩与桩’:从头顶锤入一桩,贯穿至心脏区域;从脚掌锤入一桩,向上贯穿至心脏,当两桩在心脏处相会的同一刹那,你便能了知那超越桩的造作时间。对于某一词,基于某种特征而用于某一意义,即便该特征不复存在,也依旧沿袭其用,这便是所谓的‘假借’,如同‘牛’这个词,离开行走的动作后,仍用以指称教导等事物。显示巴利原文
Marisanaṭṭhena pāpānaṃ rogādianatthānaṃ abhibhavanaṭṭhena māriso, dukkharahito. Tenāha ‘‘niddukkhāti vuttaṃ hotī’’ti. Nirayapakkhe piyālapanavacanavasena upacāravacanañcetaṃ yathā ‘‘devānaṃ piyā’’ti. Tenevāha ‘‘yadi eva’’ntiādi. Saṅkunā saṅkūti matthakato samakoṭṭitena yāva hadayapadesā nibbijjhitvā otiṇṇena saṅkunā pādatalato samakoṭṭito saṅku nibbijjhitvā ārohanto hadaye hadayassa padese samāgaccheyya, atha nesaṃ saṅkūnaṃ samāgamasamakāle naṃ yathātikkantasaṅkukaraṇakālaṃ jāneyyāsi. Kiñci nimittaṃ upādāya kismiñci atthe pavattassa saddassa tannimittarahite pavatti ruḷhī nāma gamanakiriyārahite sāsanādimati paṭipiṇḍe yathā gosaddassa.
“他度越了暴流”:为说明所问度越的暴流有哪些、数目多少及其自相如何,故说“四”等。为什么这里只说四种暴流,而且就是欲等呢?对此不应质疑,因为彻知诸法自性与作用差别的世尊,如实觉悟一切所知后,只教导了这些暴流,而且只教导这几种。在轮回中,它们淹没众生、令其沉没,所以称为“暴流”;“淹没”即向下打击、使人下沉,由此令有情下堕。后文注释中也将以“这一切也”等字样出现此义。以欲乐为义者称为“欲”,而此欲依前述之义也是“暴流”,或是在诸欲中的暴流,所以叫“欲流”。为显示“有流”即是有贪,故说“对色、无色界有的欲贪及对禅那的喜爱”。但在《善吉祥光》等注释中说:“与常见俱行的贪”。其中,第一个是对生有的贪,第二个是对业有的贪,因为脱离了有见,恶见便不存在。说“见流”是六十二种邪见。由于一切所知悉皆摄入四谛中,故说“无明流”即是“于四谛的无明”。显示巴利原文
Oghamatarīti yesaṃ oghānaṃ taraṇaṃ pucchitaṃ, te gaṇanaparicchedato sarūpato ca dassetuṃ ‘‘cattāro’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Kasmā panettha cattāro eva oghā vuttā, te ca kāmādayo evāti? Na codetabbametaṃ, yasmā dhammānaṃ sabhāvakiccavisesaññunā bhagavatā sabbaṃ ñeyyaṃ yāthāvato abhisambujjhitvā ettakāva oghā desitā, ime eva ca desitāti. Vaṭṭasmiṃ ohananti osīdāpentīti oghā, ohananti heṭṭhā katvā hananti gāmenti, tathābhūtā satte adho gāmenti nāma. Ayañca attho ‘‘sabbopi cesā’’tiādinā parato aṭṭhakathāyameva āgamissati. Kāmanaṭṭhena kāmo, kāmo ca so yathāvuttenatthena ogho cāti, kāmesu oghoti vā kāmogho. Bhavogho nāma bhavarāgoti dassetuṃ ‘‘rūpārūpabhavesu chandarāgo jhānanikanti cā’’ti vuttaṃ. Sumaṅgalavilāsinīādīsu (dī. ni. aṭṭha. 3.312) pana ‘‘sassatadiṭṭhisahagatarāgo cā’’ti vuttaṃ. Tattha paṭhamo upapattibhavesu rāgo, dutiyo kammabhave. Bhavadiṭṭhivinimuttassa diṭṭhigatassa abhāvato. ‘‘Dvāsaṭṭhidiṭṭhiyo diṭṭhogho’’ti vuttaṃ, catusaccantogadhattā sabbassa ñeyyassa ‘‘catūsu saccesu aññāṇaṃ avijjogho’’ti āha.
现在,为说明这些名为暴流的恶法生起之处,而说“在那里”等;至于它们的转起之处,则已显示为五欲功德等。“在五种欲功德中的欲贪是欲流”:此处,除有流之外,一切贪都应属于欲流,这合乎道理。注释中说与常见俱行的贪因与有见相应而称为有流,但本经中却说有流只在脱离见的情况下生起。因此他说:“有流在四种与见不相应、与贪俱行的心识中生起。”所以,与见俱行的贪也应是欲流,这才合理。因为作为现法苦与后世苦之因的欲漏等也分为二种,而漏也就是暴流。在欲漏的解释中,“在诸欲中”的意思是:作为欲贪、见贪等所缘、遍布三地的事欲,这个意义是成立的。因为在那些事欲中生起的贪爱,并非全都获得欲贪等名称。显示巴利原文
Idāni tesaṃ oghasaṅkhātānaṃ pāpadhammānaṃ uppattiṭṭhānaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘tatthā’’tiādi vuttaṃ, pavattiṭṭhānaṃ pana kāmaguṇādayo dassitā eva. ‘‘Pañcasu kāmaguṇesu chandarāgo kāmogho’’ti ettha bhavoghaṃ ṭhapetvā sabbo lobho kāmoghoti yuttaṃ siyā. Sassatadiṭṭhisahagato rāgo bhavadiṭṭhisampayuttattā bhavoghoti aṭṭhakathāsu vutto, bhavogho pana diṭṭhigatavippayuttesu eva uppajjatīti pāḷiyaṃ vutto. Tenevāha – ‘‘bhavogho catūsu diṭṭhivippayuttalobhasahagatacittuppādesu uppajjatī’’ti. Tasmā diṭṭhisahagatalobhopi kāmoghoti yuttaṃ siyā. Diṭṭhadhammikasamparāyikadukkhānañhi kāraṇabhūtā kāmāsavādayopi dvidhā vuttā, āsavā eva ca oghā. Kāmāsavaniddese ca kāmesūti kāmarāgadiṭṭhirāgādīnaṃ ārammaṇabhūtesu tebhūmakesu vatthukāmesūti attho sambhavati. Tattha hi uppajjamānā sāyaṃ taṇhā sabbāpi na kāmacchandādināmaṃ na labhatīti.
然而,若因说与五种欲功德相应的贪是欲流,便否定对梵天宫殿等处的贪以及见贪也是欲流,那么便应当存在既非欲流亦非有流的贪。当它在离见相应中生起时,与之相应的无明流,是流相应还是不相应?如同与忧、疑、掉举相应的心那样,对它也应说流不相应。因为“在四种离见相应、与贪俱行的心识中生起的痴,可能流相应,也可能流不相应”。但是,由于有“欲流在八种与贪俱行的心识中生起”以及“缘于欲流而有见流、无明流”的说法,因此不能说没有与见相应的欲流。因为这里只说了“对色、无色界有的欲贪及对禅那的喜爱称为有流”,而未说与常见俱行的贪。显示巴利原文
Yadi pana pañcakāmaguṇiko ca rāgo kāmoghoti vuttoti katvā brahmānaṃ vimānādīsu rāgassa diṭṭhirāgassa ca kāmoghabhāvo paṭisedhitabbo siyā, evaṃ sati kāmoghabhavoghavinimuttena nāma lobhena bhavitabbaṃ . So yadā diṭṭhigatavippayuttesu uppajjati, tadā tena sampayutto avijjogho oghavippayuttoti domanassavicikicchuddhaccasampayuttassa viya tassapi oghavippayuttatā vattabbā siyā ‘‘catūsupi diṭṭhigatavippayuttalobhasahagatesu cittuppādesu uppanno moho siyā oghasampayutto siyā oghavippayutto’’ti. ‘‘Kāmogho aṭṭhasu lobhasahagatesu cittuppādesu uppajjatī’’ti, ‘‘kāmoghaṃ paṭicca diṭṭhogho avijjogho’’ti ca vacanato diṭṭhisahagato kāmogho na hotīti na sakkā vattuṃ. Tathā hettha ‘‘rūpārūpabhavesu chandarāgo jhānanikanti ca bhavogho nāmāti ettakameva vuttaṃ, na vuttaṃ sassatadiṭṭhisahagato rāgo’’ti.
「向下流去」:意思是向下转。此处所说向下转,不仅指堕入恶趣,也指困在轮回的牢笼里。为了说明这一点,而说“以及上方的有”等。涅槃虽无形色、非方位可指,然而由于它超越一切有为法,故而称为“上方的有”,即涅槃。在“大洪水”等经文中,“暴流”一词有聚集的含义,因此说“这确实是巨大的烦恼聚集”,其余的(有流等)也是如此。显示巴利原文
Adhogamanaṭṭhenāti heṭṭhāpavattanaṭṭhena. Heṭṭhāpavattanañcettha na kevalaṃ apāyagamaniyabhāvena, atha kho saṃsāratarakāvarodhanenapīti dassetuṃ ‘‘uparibhavañcā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Kāmaṃ nibbānaṃ arūpibhāvā adesaṃ, na tassa ṭhānavasena uparigahaṇaṃ, sabbasaṅkhatavinissaṭattā pana sabbassapi bhavassa uparīti vattabbataṃ arahatīti katvā vuttaṃ ‘‘uparibhavaṃ nibbāna’’nti. ‘‘Mahāudakogho’’tiādīsu rāsaṭṭho ogha-saddoti ‘‘mahā heso kilesarāsī’’ti vuttaṃ sesesupīti bhavoghādīsupi.
「不站立」:不因烦恼等而停滞,即不沉没。「不前冲」:不因造作等而向前冲奔,而是逾越中道、趋向解脱,因此说“不努力”,意即不以邪精进的方式努力。「隐藏」:封闭。「隐秘」:与隐藏同义。或者,就含义而言,封闭即是隐藏;就名相而言,不明显即是隐秘,指洲、岛等可作为立足之处的地方。「前冲者」:以手脚奋力前冲的人。这便是所阐述的义理,也就是回答。显示巴利原文
Appatiṭṭhahantoti kilesādīnaṃ vasena asantiṭṭhanto, asaṃsīdantoti attho. Anāyūhantoti abhisaṅkhārādivasena na āyūhanto majjhimaṃ paṭipadaṃ vilaṅghitvā nibbuyhanto. Tenāha – ‘‘avāyamanto’’ti, micchāvāyāmavasena avāyamantoti adhippāyo. Gūḷhanti saṃvutaṃ. Paṭicchannanti tasseva vevacanaṃ. Atthavasena vā saṃvuttaṃ gūḷhaṃ, saddavasenapi apākaṭaṃ paṭicchannaṃ antaradīpādike ṭhātabbaṭṭhāne. Āyūhantāti hatthehi ca pādehi ca vāyamantā. Etaṃ atthajātaṃ, etaṃ vā vissajjanaṃ.
现在,为说明世尊以何种用意如此隐晦地提出此问题,而说“那么为何?”等。「以呵斥为门」:即以呵斥作为调伏可教化有情的方便。因此他说“那些自命为智者的人”等。「Pavayha pavayhāti」:即抖落又抖落。显示巴利原文
Idāni yenādhippāyena bhagavatā tathāgūḷhaṃ katvā pañho kathito, taṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘kiṃ panātiādi vuttaṃ. Niggahamukhenāti veneyyānaṃ vinayaupāyabhūtaniggahavasena. Tenāha ye paṇḍitamānino’’tiādi. Pavayha pavayhāti ophuṇitvā ophuṇitvā.
「他」即那位天子,因未能理解所答之义而心生沮丧。「如同」本是不确定之言,于此用作确定之义;而「如何」则为询问之词。为明此二者之意,故说此言:“如我所知,请如此对我说。”显示巴利原文
Soti devaputto nihatamāno ahosi yathāvissajjitassa atthassa ajānanto. Yathāti aniyamavacanaṃ niyamaniddiṭṭhaṃ hoti, taṃsambandhañca kathanti pucchāvacananti tadubhayassa atthaṃ dassento ‘‘yathāhaṃ jānāmi, evaṃ me kathehī’’ti āha.
「Yadāsvāhaṃ」(当我有)即“yadā su ahaṃ”,其中“su”仅为小品词,如“yadidaṃ kathaṃ sū”等处的用法。「于一切处」指“那时我沉没”等三处而言。「Ataranto」(不渡),即为了渡越瀑流,却未作出渡越的努力。「Tattheva」(就在那里),指于瀑流及瀑流所缘之境中。「Osīdāmī」(沉没),即沉入其中,被瀑流所淹没。「Nibbuyhāmī」(被冲走),即被瀑流所卷走。既不驻立,也非沉没。「Ativattāmī」(越过),即不以真实的努力去超越,因错误的作意而偏离了正道,其义在此。关于「驻立」与「精勤」:正如后文所分别,在寻求驻立与精勤时,见到了其中的过患——由于在驻立与精勤中,沉没与被冲走构成了渡越的障碍,因而见到了如是之过患。这是世尊于菩提树下,依其过去曾运作的先前作意而宣说的。「Atiṭṭhanto avāyamanto」(不驻立、不精勤),即通过回避那些导致驻立与精勤的烦恼等,从而做到不沉没、不被显示巴利原文
Yadāsvāhanti yadā su ahaṃ, su-kāro nipātamattaṃ ‘‘yadidaṃ kathaṃ sū’’tiādīsu viya. Sabbapadesūti ‘‘tadāssu saṃsīdāmī’’tiādīsu tīsupi padesu. Atarantoti oghānaṃ atikkamanatthaṃ taraṇappayogaṃ akaronto. Tatthevāti oghaniyaoghesu eva. Osīdāmīti nimujjāmi oghehi ajjhotthaṭo homi. Nibbuyhāmīti oghehi nibbūḷho homi. Ṭhātuṃ asakkonto asaṃsīdanto. Ativattāmīti anupayogaṃ atikkamāmi, apanidhānavasena sammāpaṭipattiṃ virādhemīti attho. Ṭhāne ca vāyāme cāti vakkhamānavibhāge patiṭṭhahane vāyāme ca dosaṃ disvāti patiṭṭhānāyūhanesu saṃsīdananibbuyhanasaṅkhātaṃ taraṇassa vibandhanabhūtaṃ ādīnavaṃ disvāna. Idaṃ bhagavatā bodhimūle attanā pavattita-pubbabhāga-manasikāravasena vuttaṃ. Atiṭṭhanto avāyamantoti patiṭṭhānāyūhanakaraṇakilesādīnaṃ parivajjanena asaṃsīdanto anibbuyhanto. Devatāyapi paṭividdho tadattho upanissayasampannatāya vimuttiparipācanīyadhammānaṃ paripakkattā. Na pana pākaṭo vipañcitaññūādīnaṃ, ugghaṭitaññūnaṃ pana yathā tassā devatāya, tathā pākaṭo evāti. Satta dukā idāni vuccamānarūpā dassitā porāṇaṭṭhakathāyaṃ. Kilesavasena santiṭṭhantoti lobhādīhi abhibhūtatāya saṃsāre patiṭṭhahanto sammā appaṭipajjanena tattheva saṃsīdati nāma. Abhisaṅkhāravasenāti tatthevābhisaṅkhāracetanāya cetento sammāpaṭipattiyogyassa khaṇassa ativattanena nibbuyhati nāma. Iminā nayena sesadukesupi attho veditabbo.
于此,轮回的根本乃是烦恼,即因他们烦恼,众生方于轮回中存续,依种种业而在各各生处结生;然而,烦恼仅是那些业的缘。在各各生处辗转结生者,即称为于轮回中沉没。为明此义,故说第一组二法。这些流转于轮回的众生,可分两类:渴爱行者与见行者。为明那些作为他们轮回引导者的法如何形成‘住立’,以及其余作为转起缘的法如何形成‘精勤’,故说第二组二法。于可结缚之法,彼以见乐味为自性的渴爱,特为‘住立’之因;而由执取非解脱道为解脱道,依于‘见’,同样形成‘精勤’。为明此义,故说第三组二法。第四组二法的意趣,注释书中已作阐明。因为执著‘我是常’者,执取无色贪或执取无想等,将非解脱视为解脱,便只是在轮回中沉滞,故说:‘沉滞与执著即是“有见”’。然而,执著‘于欲有等中,不论投生何有,自我即断灭、毁坏,死后不存在’者,由于不修习能带来有之解脱的正行道,而越过了它,故说:‘超越与执著即是“无有见”’。显示巴利原文
Ettha ca vaṭṭamūlakā kilesāti tesaṃ vasena saṃsāre avaṭṭhānaṃ taṃtaṃkammunā tattha tattha bhave abhinibbatti, kilesā pana tesaṃ paccayamattaṃ. Tattha tattha bhave aparāparaṃ nibbattento saṃsāre nibbuyhati nāmāti imassa atthassa dassanavasena paṭhamaduko vutto. Ime sattā saṃsāre paribbhamantā duvidhā taṇhācaritā diṭṭhicaritā cāti tesaṃ saṃsāranāyikabhūtānaṃ dhammānaṃ vasena santiṭṭhanaṃ, tadaññesaṃ pavattipaccayānaṃ vasena āyūhananti imassa atthassa dassanavasena dutiyaduko vutto. Saṃyojaniyesu dhammesu assādadassanasabhāvāya taṇhāya vasena visesato patiṭṭhānaṃ, amuttimagge muttimaggaparāmāsato tathā āyūhanampi diṭṭhiyā vasena hotīti dassetuṃ tatiyaduko vutto. Catutthaduke pana adhippāyo aṭṭhakathāya eva vibhāvito. Yasmā ‘‘sassato attā’’ti abhinivisanto arūparāgaṃ, asaññūpagaṃ vā avimokkhaṃyeva vimokkhoti gahetvā saṃsāre eva olīyati. Tenāha ‘‘olīyanābhinivesā hi bhavadiṭṭhī’’ti. Yasmā pana kāmabhavādīsu yaṃ vā taṃ vā bhavaṃ patvā attā ucchijjati vinassati, na hoti paraṃ maraṇāti abhinivisanto bhavavippamokkhāvahāya sammāpaṭipattiyā appaṭipajjanena taṃ ativattati. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘atidhāvanābhinivesā vibhavadiṭṭhī’’ti.
“以沉滞而住立”:指因懈怠等而退缩,不能正确行道者。“以掉举而策进”:指因无正定而以散乱为性者,这是第五类二法。正如沉溺欲乐者,因其心染污而无有定;同样,从事自我折磨者,因其身染污而无有定。如此,使心与身染污的两个极端,由于依止渴爱与见,便成为沉没与被冲走之相,这在第六类二法中已说。先前曾以有伴的方式将染污法显示为“沉没之相”,现在为了以无伴的方式显示;先前又曾以共通的方式将诸行法显示为“被冲走之相”,现在为了显示唯有福行与不动行才是“策进之相”,故宣说第七类二法。如此,便依恶趣与善趣的转生情形,分别显示了沉没与被冲走。因此才说:“这也被说……”等。“导向下分”:即导向低下的恶趣,未作随音省略。同样,“导向上分”:即导向高尚的善趣。显示巴利原文
Līnavasena santiṭṭhantoti kosajjādivasena saṃkocāpajjanena sammā appaṭipajjanto. Uddhaccavasena āyūhantoti sammāsamādhino abhāvena vikkhepavasena pañcamo duko vutto. Yathā kāmasukhaṃ paviṭṭhassa samādhānaṃ natthi cittassa upakkiliṭṭhattā, evaṃ attaparitāpanamanuyuttassa kāyassa upakkiliṭṭhattā. Iti cittakāyaparikkilesakarā dve antā taṇhādiṭṭhinissayatāya saṃsīdananibbuyhananimittā vuttā chaṭṭhaduke. Pubbe sappadesatova saṃkilesadhammā ‘‘saṃsīdananimitta’’nti dassitāti idāni nippadesato dassanavasena, pubbe ca sādhāraṇato abhisaṅkhāradhammā ‘‘nibbuyhananimitta’’nti dassitāti idāni puññāneñjābhisaṅkhāre eva ‘‘āyūhananimitta’’nti dassanavasena sattamaduko vutto. Evañhi duggatisugatūpapattivasena saṃsīdananibbuyhanāni vibhajja dassitāni hontīti. Tenevāha ‘‘vuttampi ceta’’ntiādi. Adhobhāgaṃ duggatiṃ gamentīti adhobhāgaṅgamanīyā anunāsikalopaṃ akatvā. Tathā uparibhāgaṃ gamentīti uparibhāgaṅgamanīyā.
在此,当被问及渡越瀑流时,世尊说‘不驻立、不策进’,难道这只是显示了它们的断除,而非显示了与断除相应之道吗?不应如此看待。凡有驻立之处,及有策进之处,通过遮止此二者,即显示了与它们对立的法。因为此‘不’字并非仅仅用于遮止,而是如‘不善法、无益、非法’等中那样,用于对立。因此,‘不驻立、不策进’是作为驻立与策进的对立面而转起的,也是那样转起之因,这就是此处的含义。而‘kho’是决定义的虚词,如‘assosi kho’等中那样。由此显示‘不驻立’是决定性的。此‘kho’字亦应引用于‘不策进’处。不策进同样也是决定性的。它的对立面即是与观相伴的圣道。因为唯依此而非其他,方能渡越瀑流。如是,这是随顺交谈脉络的教导,而那位天女通达了与观相伴之道,安住于初果。因此说:‘此问题之解答’等。显示巴利原文
Ettha ca oghataraṇaṃ pucchitena bhagavatā ‘‘appatiṭṭhaṃ anāyūha’’nti tassa pahānaṅgameva dassitaṃ, na sampayogaṅganti? Na evaṃ daṭṭhabbaṃ, yāvatā yena patiṭṭhānaṃ hoti, yena ca āyūhanaṃ, tadubhayapaṭikkhepamukhena tappaṭipakkhadhammadassanametanti. Na hesa a-kāro kevalaṃ paṭisedhe, atha kho paṭipakkhe ‘‘akusalā dhammā, ahito, adhammo’’tiādīsu viya, tasmā appatiṭṭhaṃ anāyūhanti patiṭṭhānāyūhanānaṃ paṭipakkhavasena pavattamāno tathāpavattihetūvāti ayamettha attho. Khoti ca avadhāraṇatthe nipāto ‘‘assosi kho’’tiādīsu (pārā. 1) viya. Tena appatiṭṭhānassa ekaṃsikataṃ dasseti. Soyaṃ kho-saddo ‘‘anāyūha’’nti etthāpi ānetvā vattabbo. Anāyūhanampi hi ekaṃsikamevāti tassa paṭipakkho saha vipassanāya ariyamaggo. Tena hi oghataraṇaṃ hoti, na aññathā. Evamayaṃ yathānusandhidesanā katā, devatā ca sahavipassanaṃ maggaṃ paṭivijjhīti paṭhamaphale patiṭṭhāsi. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘imaṃ pañhavissajjana’’ntiādi.
‘Cirassa’(久矣)一词,有同义词,故说‘cirassa kālassa’(很久的时间),正如‘mamaṃ vā, bhikkhave’(比丘们,我的)中,‘mama’的同义词是‘mamaṃ’。‘Na diṭṭhapubbā’(未曾见)即未曾见者。而未曾见,应理解为因未见而应作之事未成就。否则,哪一位天女会未曾见过世尊呢?因此说:‘为何这位天女……’等。‘依于见而这样说’是成立的:即无论何时,见到任何可爱之人,依于那次见而说‘我们确实很久才见到尊者’,无论对方是未曾见者或曾见者,这样说都是合适的,这显示了世间通行的习惯。或者,‘梵’是指圣道,因远离其债务、了知、通达而称为婆罗门。‘以烦恼灭尽’:即以诸烦恼的彻底断除之灭尽,正确地止息了一切烦恼躁动与热恼。‘以迷恋、执著等’:此‘等’字含摄散布等状态。对此曾如是说:显示巴利原文
‘‘Cirassā’’ti iminā samānatthaṃ padantarametanti āha ‘‘cirassa kālassā’’ti yathā ‘‘mamaṃ vā, bhikkhave’’ti (dī. ni. 1.5-6) ettha ‘‘mamā’’ti iminā samānatthaṃ padantaraṃ mamanti. Na diṭṭhapubbāti adassāvī. Adassāvitā ca disvā kattabbakiccassa asiddhatāya veditabbā. Aññathā kā nāma sā devatā, yā bhagavantaṃ na diṭṭhavatī? Tenāha ‘‘kiṃ panimāyā’’tiādi. Dassanaṃ upādāya evaṃ vattuṃ vattatīti yadā kadāci kañci piyajātikaṃ disvā taṃ dassanaṃ upādāya ‘‘cirena vata mayaṃ āyasmantaṃ passāmā’’ti adiṭṭhapubbaṃ diṭṭhapubbaṃ vā evaṃ vattuṃ yujjati, ayaṃ loke niruḷhe samudācāroti dasseti. Brahmaṃ vā vuccati ariyamaggo, tassa aṇanato jānanato paṭivijjhanato brāhmaṇo. Kilesanibbānenāti kilesānaṃ accantasamucchedasaṅkhātena nibbānena nibbutaṃ sammadeva vūpasanta-sabbakilesadaratha-pariḷāhaṃ. Āsattavisattādīhīti ādi-saddena visatādiākāre saṅgaṇhāti. Vuttañhetaṃ –
“散布”(visatā)故称visattikā,“广散”(visaṭā)故称visattikā,“广大”(visālā)故称visattikā,“行不平等”(visakkatī)故称visattikā,“欺诳”(visaṃvādikā)故称visattikā,“持毒”(visaṃ harati)故称visattikā,“毒根”(visamūlā)故称visattikā,“毒果”(visaphalā)故称visattikā,“毒受用”(visaparibhogo)故称visattikā;又,彼渴爱于色、声、香、味、触、法、家族、群众中散布、扩散,故称visattikā。显示巴利原文
‘‘Visatāti visattikā, visaṭāti visattikā, visālāti visattikā, visakkatīti visattikā, visaṃvādikāti visattikā, visaṃ haratīti visattikā, visamūlāti visattikā, visaphalāti visattikā, visaparibhogoti visattikā, visālā vā pana sā taṇhā rūpe sadde gandhe rase phoṭṭhabbe dhamme kule gaṇe visatā vitthatāti visattikā’’ti (mahāni. 3).
此处,“visatā”意为广布:即在色等三界法中,以遍满为性而广布;“visaṭā”实为同一词,仅将ta转为ṭa而说出。“visālā”意为广大。“visakkatī”指奋力、或容忍:因为染著者即使被所贪境以足踢打,也能容忍。另有些人将退却或悸动称为“visakkana”。它执取无常等为常等,故成欺诳。“持毒”(visaṃ harati):那在诸欲中见到功德的渴爱,以种种方式将心从趣向出离的运转中收回、摄持;或者,毒即是苦,持此毒,即携带之意。由于它是产生苦之业的原因,故为毒根(visamūlā)。另一种说法:毒是被苦所征服的受,那是它的根,故为毒根。因为苦的生起,毒是它的果,故为毒果(visaphalā)。由渴爱,对色等的受用唯是苦而非不死,故称毒受用(visaparibhogā)。于一切处,应依语源学理解词义。而此处的主要义理,为加以显示而再说:“又或者说广大……”等。如是,于此应知visattikā一词之义。“已渡越者”指以初道与第二道渡越者。“善……显示巴利原文
Tattha visatāti vitthatā rūpādīsu tebhūmakadhammesu abhibyāpanavasena visaṭāti purimavacanameva ta-kārassa ṭa-kāraṃ katvā vuttaṃ. Visālāti vipulā. Visakkatīti parisakkati, sahati vā. Ratto hi rāgavatthunā pādena tāḷiyamānopi sahatīti. Osakkanaṃ vipphandanaṃ vā ‘‘visakkana’’ntipi vadanti. Aniccādiṃ niccādito. Gaṇhātīti visaṃvādikā hoti. Visaṃ haratīti tathā tathā kāmesu ānisaṃsaṃ passantī vividhehi ākārehi nekkhammābhimukhappavattito cittaṃ saṃharati saṃkhipati, visaṃ vā dukkhaṃ, taṃ harati, vahatīti attho. Dukkhanibbattakakammassa hetubhāvato visamūlā. Visaṃ vā dukkhābhibhūtā vedanā mūlaṃ etissāti visamūlā. Dukkhasamudayattā visaṃ phalaṃ etissāti visaphalā. Taṇhāya rūpādikassa dukkhasseva paribhogo hoti, na amatassāti visaparibhogoti vuttā, sabbattha niruttivasena padasiddhi veditabbā. Yo panettha padhāno attho, taṃ dassetuṃ puna ‘‘visālā vā panā’’tiādi vuttanti evamettha visattikāpadassa attho veditabbo. Tiṇṇaṃ paṭhamadutiyamaggehi. Nittiṇṇaṃ tatiyamaggena. Uttiṇṇaṃ catutthamaggena.
“Samanuñño”(完全同意)意为正确地给予同意,故说“成为同一意欲”。“Antaradhāyī”(隐没)即归于不可见。为显示如何隐没,而说“由化作之身”等。“以花鬘”(mālehi)是语法性的颠倒,有人读作“mālāhi”,应说“malyehi”,此处省略了ya来表达。以上是注疏的字面义注释。显示巴利原文
Samanuññoti sammadeva katānuñño. Tenāha ‘‘ekajjhāsayo ahosī’’ti. Antaradhāyīti adassanaṃ agamāsi. Yathā pana antaradhāyi, taṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘abhisaṅkhatakāya’’ntiādi vuttaṃ. Mālehīti liṅgavipallāsena vuttaṃ, ‘‘mālāhī’’ti keci paṭhanti, ‘‘malyehī’’ti vattabbe ya-kāralopaṃ katvā niddeso. Ayaṃ tāva aṭṭhakathāya līnatthavaṇṇanā.
导向理趣注释显示巴利原文
Nettinayavaṇṇanā
现在,我们将依据本论的方法,解释经文的义理。然而,这义理的解释,只有在教说的缘起、目的、所化众及义理纲要被确定之后,才容易进行并易于理解。因此,我们首先确定这部经教说的缘起等。其中,缘起便是教说的因缘,它有共与不共两种。共同缘起又分为内在与外在两种。共同的内在缘起,便是世间怙主——世尊的大悲心。因为被大悲心所策励,世尊生起了为诸应度众生说法的意欲,即如所说:‘缘于对众生的悲悯,以佛眼观察世间’等。在这里,即使是在因位阶段的大悲,也应视为已被摄受;它的生起,只是为了以正法教说之手,将众生从轮回的大瀑流中救度出来。正如大悲心一样,一切知智、十力智等也应视为教说的内在缘起。因为世尊如实了知一切所知法、所应教授的品类,以及众生的意乐、随眠等,便运用处非处等善巧,随应度者的意乐,开示了种种理趣的教说。而共同的外在缘起,则是由一万梵天围绕的娑婆主大梵天的劝请。因为受到劝请之后,世尊平息了由观察法之甚深所产生的不活跃状态,成为法主,生起了说法的意乐。不共的缘起也分为内在与外在两种。其中,内在缘起是由哪种大显示巴利原文
Idāni pakaraṇanayena pāḷiyā atthavaṇṇanaṃ karissāma. Sā pana atthavaṇṇanā yasmā desanāya samuṭṭhānappayojanabhājanesu piṇḍatthesu ca niddhāritesu sukarā hoti suviññeyyā ca, tasmā suttadesanāya samuṭṭhānādīni paṭhamaṃ niddhārayissāma. Tattha samuṭṭhānaṃ tāva desanānidānaṃ, taṃ sādhāraṇaṃ asādhāraṇanti duvidhaṃ. Tattha sādhāraṇampi abbhantarabāhirabhedato duvidhaṃ. Tattha sādhāraṇaṃ abbhantarasamuṭṭhānaṃ nāma lokanāthassa mahākaruṇā. Tāya hi samussāhitassa bhagavato veneyyānaṃ dhammadesanāya cittaṃ udapādi, yaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ – ‘‘sattesu ca kāruññataṃ paṭicca buddhacakkhunā lokaṃ volokesī’’tiādi (ma. ni. 1.283; saṃ. ni. 1.172; mahāva. 9). Ettha ca hetuavatthāyapi mahākaruṇāya saṅgaho daṭṭhabbo yāvadeva saṃsāramahoghato saddhammadesanāhatthadānehi sattasantāraṇatthaṃ taduppattito. Yathā ca mahākaruṇā, evaṃ sabbaññutaññāṇaṃ dasabalañāṇādīni ca desanāya abbhantarasamuṭṭhānabhāvena vattabbāni. Sabbañhi ñeyyadhammaṃ tesaṃ desetabbappakāraṃ sattānañca āsayānusayādiṃ yāthāvato jānanto bhagavā ṭhānāṭṭhānādīsu kosallena veneyyajjhāsayānurūpaṃ vicittanayadesanaṃ pavattesīti. Bāhiraṃ pana sādhāraṇaṃ samuṭṭhānaṃ dasasahassamahābrahmaparivāra-sahampatimahābrahmuno ajjhesanaṃ. Tadajjhesanuttarakālañhi dhammagambhīratāpaccavekkhaṇājanitaṃ appossukkataṃ paṭippassambhetvā dhammassāmī dhammadesanāya ussāhajāto ahosi. Asādhāraṇampi abbhantarabāhirabhedato duvidhameva. Tattha abbhantaraṃ yāya mahākaruṇāya yena ca desanāñāṇena idaṃ suttaṃ pavattitaṃ, tadubhayaṃ veditabbaṃ bāhiraṃ pana tassā devatāya pucchā, pucchāvasiko hesa suttanikkhepo. Tayidaṃ pāḷiyaṃ āgatameva.
目的也可分为共同与不共两种。其中,共同的目的,是由于世尊的教法具有‘解脱味’,因此循序渐进,直至无余依涅槃为止。正如他所说:‘为此目的而说,为此目的而论议’等(pari. 366)。不共的目的,则是那位天神证得见道果位的成就;这两者都是外在的。然而,若将那些在应调伏者的心流中生起、并被称为‘说法力成就’的目的,也视为由于意愿达成而成就所期之义的大悲世尊的目的,那么从这一角度说,这对世尊也可以具有内在性。显示巴利原文
Payojanampi sādhāraṇāsādhāraṇato duvidhaṃ. Tattha sādhāraṇaṃ anukkamena yāva anupādāparinibbānaṃ vimuttirasattā bhagavato desanāya. Tenevāha ‘‘etadatthā kathā, etadatthā mantanā’’tiādi (pari. 366). Asādhāraṇaṃ pana tassā devatāya dassanamaggasamadhigamo, ubhayampetaṃ bāhirameva. Sace pana veneyyasantānagatampi desanābalasiddhisaṅkhātaṃ payojanaṃ adhippāyasamijjhanabhāvato yathādhippetatthasiddhiyā mahākāruṇikassa bhagavatopi payojanamevāti gaṇheyya, iminā pariyāyenassa abbhantaratāpi siyā.
再者,那位天神对渡越暴流的真实方法未能如实了知,是此教说的缘起;而对此的如实了知便是目的。因为世尊以此教说,将这一点作为目标,并使教说致力于达成它。所谓‘目的’,是因为教说所要成就的果是可希求的,所以说它促使说法者进行说法。同样地,令那位天神及其他应调伏者得以安立、积聚与放下,也是此处的目的。同样地,令轮回之轮停转、令正法之轮转动、破除常见等邪行、以正说为先导、拔除不善根、栽培善根、关闭恶趣之门、开启通往天界与解脱之门、平息现行的烦恼、彻底断除随眠烦恼、使‘我已解脱,将去度脱他人’的先前誓愿不成为虚诳、令与之相对的魔罗期望落空、摧破外道宗义、建立佛陀教法——凡此种种,也应知是此处的目的。显示巴利原文
Apica tassā devatāya oghataraṇākārassa yāthāvato anavabodho imissā desanāya samuṭṭhānaṃ, tadavabodho payojanaṃ. So hi imāya desanāya bhagavantaṃ payojeti tannipphādanaparāyaṃ desanāti katvā. Yañhi desanāya sādhetabbaṃ phalaṃ, taṃ ākaṅkhitabbattā desakaṃ desanāya payojetīti payojananti vuccati. Tathā devatāya tadaññesañca vineyyānaṃ patiṭṭhānāyūhanavissajjanañcettha payojanaṃ . Tathā saṃsāracakkanivatti-saddhammacakkappavattisassatādimicchācāra-nirākaraṇaṃ sammāvādapurekkhāro akusalamūlasamūhananaṃ kusalamūlasamāropanaṃ apāyadvārapidahanaṃ saggamokkhadvāravivaraṇaṃ pariyuṭṭhānavūpasamanaṃ anusayasamugghātanaṃ ‘‘mutto mocessāmī’’ti purimapaṭiññāavisaṃvādanaṃ tappaṭipakkhamāramanorathavisaṃvādanaṃ titthiyasamayanimmathanaṃ buddhadhammapatiṭṭhāpananti evamādīnipi payojanāni idha veditabbāni.
如同那位天神在渡越暴流时陷入疑惑一般,另一些不了知诸所造作之法与正自觉者修行方式的应调伏者也是如此:他们由于对非法的听闻、受持、熟习与作意而颠倒其心,又背离了对正法的听闻、受持与熟习。这些寻求从有中解脱的应调伏者,正是此说法的器皿。显示巴利原文
Yathā devatā oghataraṇe saṃsayapakkhandā, tādisā aññe ca saṅkhātadhammānaṃ sammāsambuddhassa ca paṭipattiṃ ajānantā asaddhammassavana-dhāraṇa-paricaya-manasikāravipallatthabuddhikā saddhammassavana-dhāraṇa-paricayavimukhā ca bhavavimokkhesino vineyyā imissā desanāya bhājanaṃ.
概括义如下:于“无住立、无积聚”这两个词中,应知:通过致力于四圣谛相关的业处而多修习如理作意,与善根相结合,放下沉滞与狂奔,破除执取的系缚,远离邪执,净化渴爱与无明,这是断除三有轮回之方;与漏、暴流、轭、缚、趣、渴爱的生起、取着相分离,涤除心之荒芜,遮止欣求,超越交结,彻底舍弃争论的根源,摧毁不善业道,超越邪性,断除随眠之根,令一切烦恼的躁动、热恼与忿懑平息,开示所见所闻,如闪电、如金刚般的恶法对治,显示趋向损减之法,阐明三断,致力于三学,实践止与观,修习、作证与成就,令戒蕴等完全清净——如是等等,皆应了知。显示巴利原文
Piṇḍatthā pana ‘‘appatiṭṭhaṃ anāyūha’’nti padadvaye catusaccakammaṭṭhānānuyogavasena yonisomanasikārabahulīkāro kusalamūlasamāyogo olīyanātidhāvanāvissajjanaṃ upāyavinibandhavidhamanaṃ micchābhinivesadūrībhāvo taṇhāvijjāvisodhanaṃ vaṭṭattayavicchedanupāyo āsavogha-yoga-ganthāgati-taṇhuppādupādānaviyogo cetokhilavivecanaṃ abhinandananivāraṇaṃ saṃsaggātikkamo vivādamūlapariccāgo akusalakammapathaviddhaṃsanaṃ micchattātivattanaṃ anusayamūlacchedo. Sabbakilesa-darathapariḷāha-sārambhapaṭippassambhanaṃ dassanasavananiddeso vijjūpamavajirūpamadhammāpadeso apacayagāmidhammavibhāvanā pahānattayadīpanā sikkhattayānuyogo samathavipassanānuṭṭhānaṃ bhāvanāsacchikiriyāsiddhi sīlakkhandhādipārisuddhīti evamādayo veditabbā.
其中,依那些烦恼等而住立、沉没,以及依那些造作等而积聚、被冲走——此二者即是集谛;由彼所生、依于彼二者的诸蕴,则是苦谛。此二者的真实义趣,以“无住立、无积聚”所蕴含之义覆藏而说,即为方便。为了制伏那天神的慢心,由于此方便成为她现观圣谛之因,故通过遮止住立与积聚的教导,对欲渡四暴流者开示了应修习远离两端的中道——这便是此处世尊的教令。此即说法摄。显示巴利原文
Tattha yesaṃ kilesādīnaṃ vasena patiṭṭhāti saṃsīdati, yesañca abhisaṅkhārādīnaṃ vasena āyūhati nibbuyhati, ubhayametaṃ samudayasaccaṃ, tappabhāvitā tadubhayanissitā ca khandhā dukkhasaccaṃ, tadubhayamattho, ‘‘appatiṭṭhaṃ anāyūha’’nti adhippetassa atthassa paṭicchannaṃ katvā desanā upāyo mānaniggaṇhanavasena tassā devatāya saccābhisamayakāraṇabhāvato patiṭṭhānāyūhanapaṭikkhepopadesena caturoghanirattharaṇatthikehi antadvayarahitā majjhimā paṭipatti paṭipajjitabbāti ayamettha bhagavato āṇattīti ayaṃ desanāhāro.
因陷于他人疑惑且欲了知,故以提问的方式说“如何”。因面对面同是一个人,故说“你”。为彰显那趋入最胜、具尊贵性、不可替代、正法之重的地位,以其具仁慈等德故,说“仁者”。因能冲走且成堆,故说“暴流”。对所想要了解的义理,因已作已终,故说“这样”。对于具有下沉特征的住立,因不应作且完全未作,故说“无住立”。而此“不作”是决定性的,故以决定之义说“确实”。因那无住立存在于自相续中,又因被问“你”,故说“我”。因是对天神的呼唤及亲昵语,故说“贤友”。对于具有被冲走特征的积聚,因不应作且完全未作,故说“无积聚”。因对已渡暴流的三种行相不再欲求,且疑惑未除,又因渡暴流无差别,故说“然而如何”。如是,具下沉特征的住立与轮回中的站定,因义无别而不分时节;同样,具被冲走特征的积聚与正修行中的超越,因义无别而不分时节,所以说“当我如此……那时我被冲走”。由于对治与遮止了这二者,故说“已渡暴流”,即“如此我……渡过暴流”。显示巴利原文
Parasaṃsayapakkhandanatāya ñātukāmatāya ca kathaṃ nūti pucchāvasena vuttaṃ? Abhimukhabhāvato ekapuggalabhāvato ca ‘‘tva’’nti vuttaṃ. Paramukkaṃsagatassa garubhāvassa anaññayogyassa saddhammadhurassa paridīpanato sādhūti marisasīlādiguṇatāya ‘‘mārisā’’ti vuttaṃ . Avahananato rāsibhāvato ca ‘‘ogha’’nti vuttaṃ. Ñātuṃ icchitassa atthassa katattā pariyosāpitattā ‘‘itī’’ti vuttaṃ. Saṃsīdanalakkhaṇassa patiṭṭhānassa akātabbato sabbaso ca akatattā. ‘‘Appatiṭṭha’’nti vuttaṃ. Tayidaṃ akaraṇaṃ ekaṃsikanti khoti avadhāraṇavasena vuttaṃ. Tassa ca appatiṭṭhānassa sasantatigatattā ‘‘tva’’nti ca pucchitattā ‘‘aha’’nti vuttaṃ. Devatāya sambodhanato piyālapanato ca, ‘‘āvuso’’ti vuttaṃ. Nibbuyhanalakkhaṇassa āyūhanassa akātabbato sabbaso ca akatattā anāyūhanti vuttaṃ. Tiṇṇākārassa oghānaṃ anicchitabhāvato eva tattha saṃsayassa anapagatattā oghataraṇassa ca avisesattā ‘‘yathā kathaṃ panā’’ti vuttaṃ. Tathā saṃsīdanalakkhaṇaṃ patiṭṭhānaṃ saṃsāre ca saṇṭhānanti anatthantarattā abhinnakālikaṃ. Tathā nibbuyhanalakkhaṇaṃ āyūhanaṃ sammāpaṭipattiyā ativattananti anatthantarattā abhinnakālikanti vuttaṃ ‘‘yadā svāhaṃ…pe… tadāssu nibbuyhāmī’’ti. Tadubhayassa paṭipakkhabhāvato paṭibāhanato ca oghātiṇṇāti vuttaṃ ‘‘evaṃ khvāhaṃ…pe… oghamatari’’nti.
因中间隔了一佛,时间极其久远,故说“很久”。因期间未曾得见,且令人惊异,故说“确实”。因当时现前、亲自现证,故说“我见”。因已摒弃诸恶,是为梵行,又通达圣道而无欠负,故说“婆罗门”。因烦恼之烧恼止息,苦之烧恼止息,一切皆寂灭,故说“般涅槃”。因渡越的勤策已生起,且更无所应渡,故说“已渡”。因当以智眼观察,且会破碎坏灭,故说“世间”。因于诸境中粘着生起,故说“渴爱”。因智是现前的,且为结归,故说“此”。因已说且语圆满,故说“说”。因最初已持取,且为随念,故说“那天神”。因无反对,其义应随喜,故说“赞同”。因调伏应调伏者,成就究竟义,故说“大师”。因越过眼道而隐没不现,故说“消失”。这是由逐词审察所得的审察摄。显示巴利原文
Ekabuddhantarantarikattā sudūrakālikatāya ‘‘cirassa’’nti vuttaṃ. Antarā adiṭṭhapubbatāya vimhayanīyatāya ca ‘‘vatā’’ti vuttaṃ. Tadā upalabbhamānatāya attapaccakkhatāya ca ‘‘passāmī’’ti vuttaṃ. Bāhitapāpato brahmassa ca ariyamaggassa aṇanato paṭivijjhanato ‘‘brāhmaṇa’’nti vuttaṃ. Kilesasantāpavūpasamanato dukkhasantāpavūpasamanato ca sabbaso nibbutattā ‘‘parinibbuta’’nti vuttaṃ. Taraṇapayogassa nibbattitattā upari taritabbābhāvato ca ‘‘tiṇṇa’’nti vuttaṃ. Ñāṇacakkhunā oloketabbato lujjanato palujjanato ca ‘‘loke’’ti vuttaṃ. Visayesu sañjanato jātabhāvato ‘‘visattika’’nti vuttaṃ. Ñāṇassa paccakkhabhāvato nigamanato ca ‘‘ida’’nti vuttaṃ. Bhāsitattā parisamattattā ca ‘‘avocā’’ti vuttaṃ. Paṭhamaṃ gahitattā paccāmasanato ca ‘‘sā devatā’’ti vuttaṃ. Paṭikkhepassa abhāvato atthassa anumoditabbato ‘‘samanuñño’’ti vuttaṃ. Vineyyānaṃ sāsanato paramatthasampattito ca ‘‘satthā’’ti vuttaṃ. Cakkhupathātikkamena tirobhāvūpagamanato ‘‘antaradhāyī’’ti vuttanti ayaṃ anupadavicayato vicayahāro.
以“无住立”与“无积聚”渡越暴流,这是合理的,因为通过舍断烦恼与诸行,得以成就彼岸。若因一切烦恼、渴爱、邪见、渴爱之处、常见等而住立,则会在轮回中沉没,这是合理的,因其理由极为坚固。当负责造作的烦恼诸行尚存时,一个人依一切邪见执著、狂奔执著等而积聚,便会被轮回的大暴流冲走,这是合理的,因为那已超越了正行道。由于圣道已无梵行之欠,且已通达,故“婆罗门性”是合理的,因为他已摒弃诸恶。由于正确证得了寂静的法,故“般涅槃性”是合理的,因为一切烦恼连同习气都已彻底断除。同样地说“已渡越渴爱”也是合理的:因为通过最高的圣道完全断除了它,乃至连一丝一毫的影子都看不见,如此才算真正渡越。这是合理摄(yuttihāro)。显示巴利原文
Appatiṭṭhānānāyūhanehi oghataraṇaṃ yujjati kilesābhisaṅkhāravijahanena pārasampattisamijjhanato. Sabbakilesa-taṇhādiṭṭhi-taṇhāyatana-sassatādivasena santiṭṭhato saṃsāre saṃsīdanaṃ hotīti yujjati kāraṇassa suppatiṭṭhitabhāvato. Abhisaṅkharaṇakicce kilesābhisaṅkhāre vijjamāne sabbadiṭṭhābhinivesa-atidhāvanābhinivesādīnaṃ vasena āyūhantassa saṃsāramahoghena nibbuyhanaṃ hotīti yujjati sammāpaṭipattiyā ativattanato. Brahmassa ariyamaggassa aṇanato paṭivijjhanato brāhmaṇabhāvo yujjjati bāhitapāpattā. Sammadeva santadhammasamadhigamato parinibbutabhāvo yujjati sabbaso savāsanapahīnakilesattā. Tathā ca visattikāya tiṇṇabhāvo yujjati yathā yāya lesopi na dissati, evaṃ aggamaggena tassā samucchinnattāti ayaṃ yuttihāro.
就烦恼轮转而言,“住立”是业轮转的足处;从诸行来说,“积聚”是果报轮转的足处。“无住立”与“无积聚”是渡越暴流的足处,渡越暴流则是无余涅槃的足处。就渴爱而言,“住立”的足处是于可意境随观味。因此世尊说:“诸比丘,于结法随观味者,渴爱便增长。”显示巴利原文
Kilesavaṭṭavasena patiṭṭhānaṃ visesato kammavaṭṭassa padaṭṭhānaṃ. Abhisaṅkhāravasena āyūhanañca vipākavaṭṭassa padaṭṭhānaṃ. Appatiṭṭhānānāyūhanāni oghataraṇassa padaṭṭhānaṃ, oghataraṇaṃ anupādisesanibbānassa. Taṇhāvasena patiṭṭhānassa assādānupassitā padaṭṭhānaṃ. Tenāha bhagavā – ‘‘saṃyojaniyesu, bhikkhave, dhammesu assādānupassino taṇhā pavaḍḍhatī’’ti (saṃ. ni. 2.52, 56).
从“见”的角度,“住立”的足处为:蕴、无明、触、想、寻(思惟)、不如理作意、恶友及随闻邪说。如《无碍解道》(《无碍解道》1.124)所说:“蕴是见的依处,无明也是见的依处”等等。从渴爱、邪见的欢喜,及其余烦恼与诸行的角度,这些是“积聚”的足处。依此理趣,当随应说明了渴爱、邪见等如何成为“住立”与“积聚”的足处。其余内容依经文即能明了。此即足处摄。显示巴利原文
Khandhāvijjā-phassa-saññā-vitakkāyonisomanasikāra-pāpamittaparatoghosā diṭṭhivasena patiṭṭhānassa padaṭṭhānaṃ. Yathāha – paṭisambhidāmagge (paṭi. ma. 1.124) ‘‘khandhāpi diṭṭhiṭṭhānaṃ, avijjāpi diṭṭhiṭṭhāna’’ntiādi. Taṇhādiṭṭhābhinandanaavasesakilesābhisaṅkhāravasena āyūhanassa padaṭṭhānaṃ. Iminā nayena yathārahaṃ taṇhādiṭṭhādivasena patiṭṭhānāyūhanānaṃ padaṭṭhānabhāvo vattabbo. Sesamettha pāḷito eva suniddhāriyaṃ. Ayaṃ padaṭṭhānahāro.
以“不住立、不积聚”遮止住立与积聚来回答,便获得了导向出离的正行,因为它必然是度脱暴流的方法。而由于把握了此句,三十七菩提分法也全部被把握,因为它们以出离为相,同一相故。此即相摄。显示巴利原文
Appatiṭṭhaṃ anāyūhanti patiṭṭhānāyūhanapaṭikkhepena vissajjentena niyyānāvahā sammāpaṭipatti gahitā ekantato oghanittharaṇūpāyabhāvato. Taggahaṇena ca sabbepi sattatiṃsa bodhipakkhiyadhammā gahitā honti niyyānalakkhaṇena ekalakkhaṇattāti ayaṃ lakkhaṇahāro.
之所以说这教法的起因是那位天神未能如实了知渡越瀑流的方式,正是此义。其他那些依此教说而通达渡越瀑流方法的人,也应当知是此教说的起因。此处世尊的意趣乃是:「如何依此教说,如实通达、渡越四种瀑流,从一切轮回的大瀑流中解脱出来,并令他人安立其中?」关于「如是」等起因词与「如何」等经文中的词源解释,依义注及其略义注释所说的方法极易了知,为免过于冗长,在此不作详释。显示巴利原文
Nidānamassā devatāya oghataraṇākārassa yāthāvato anavabodhoti vuttovāyamattho. Aññepi ye imaṃ desanaṃ nissāya oghataraṇūpāyaṃ paṭivijjhanti, tepi imissā desanāya nidānanti daṭṭhabbā. ‘‘Kathaṃ nu kho imaṃ desanaṃ nissāya sammadeva paṭivijjhantā catubbidhampi oghaṃ tarantā sakalasaṃsāramahoghato nitthareyyuṃ, pare ca tattha patiṭṭhapeyyu’’nti ayamettha bhagavato adhippāyo. Padanibbacanaṃ niruttaṃ, taṃ ‘‘eva’’ntiādinidānapadānaṃ ‘‘katha’’ntiādipāḷipadānañca aṭṭhakathāya tassā līnatthavaṇṇanāya ca vuttanayānusārena sukarattā ativitthārabhayena na vitthārayimha.
连接(sandhi)依词、词义、开示、安置、经而有五种。其中,词连接:指一词与他词之间的关联。同样,词义连接:指一词义与他词义之间的关联,亦即通常所说的“动作与作者的关系”。开示连接:对于含有多重连贯主题的,指各主题之间的连接;对于仅有单一连贯主题的,则指前后文之间的连接。在义注中,它又被分为三种:“问连接”“意趣连接”“随宜连接”。此处的“意趣”应知有自身的意趣与他人的意趣两种。安置连接:应通过四种经的安置方式来了解。至于此处应说的更详细内容,可依《破除广论》复注中的方法来理解。而此处的经连接:应通过第一安置来了知。显示巴利原文
Pada-padattha-desanā-nikkhepa-suttasandhi-vasena pañcavidhā sandhi. Tattha padassa padantarena sambandho padasandhi. Tathā padatthassa padatthantarena sambandho padatthasandhi, yo ‘‘kiriyākārakasambandho’’ti vutto. Nānānusandhikassa taṃtaṃanusandhīti sambandho, ekānusandhikassa pana pubbāparasambandho desanāsandhi, yā aṭṭhakathāyaṃ ‘‘pucchānusandhi ajjhāsayānusandhi yathānusandhī’’ti tidhā vibhattā. Ajjhāsayo cettha attajjhāsayo parajjhāsayoti dvidhā veditabbo. Nikkhepasandhi catunnaṃ suttanikkhepānaṃ vasena veditabbā. Yaṃ panettha vattabbaṃ, taṃ papañcasūdanīṭīkāyaṃ vuttanayena gahetabbaṃ. Suttasandhi idha paṭhamanikkhepavasena veditabbā.
然而,难道不会有人这样追问:“为何在此处最先放置《渡瀑流经》呢?”实际上,通过“无住著、无追求”而渡越瀑流,以此遮止了住著与追求,从而远离二边、彰显中道,因此这部经被首先置于此处。不趋近任何一端而显明中道的行持,正是诸佛的教法。此外,一个开示与另一个开示之间的相互连接,也属于开示连接。在此应这样理解:显示巴利原文
‘‘Kasmā panettha oghataraṇasuttameva paṭhamaṃ nikkhitta’’nti nāyamanuyogo katthaci na pavattati? Apica ‘‘appatiṭṭhaṃ anāyūhaṃ oghamatari’’nti patiṭṭhānāyūhanapaṭikkhepavasena antadvayavivajjanamukhena vā majjhimāya paṭipadāya vibhāvanato sabbapaṭhamamidaṃ suttaṃ idha nikkhittaṃ. Antadvayaṃ anupagamma majjhimāya paṭipattiyā saṅkāsanaparañhi buddhānaṃ sāsananti. Yaṃ pana ekissā desanāya desanantarena saddhiṃ saṃsandanaṃ, ayampi desanāsandhi. Sā idha evaṃ veditabbā –
“无住著……无追求,已渡暴流”这一开示——显示巴利原文
‘‘Appatiṭṭhaṃ…pe… anāyūhaṃ oghamatari’’nti ayaṃ desanā –
恒常具足戒,有慧善入定;
精进已策励,意志坚定,渡越难渡之暴流。
「应断五」即应断除五种下分结;「应舍五」即应舍弃五种烦恼;「应修习五上分」即应修习五种上分法。
「超越五种执著的比丘」:一位比丘超越了色、声、香、味、触五种执著,便被称为「渡越瀑流者」,也就是已渡四种烦恼瀑流的人。
因此,「众生应恒具正念」是说有情应当恒时保持正念,从而完全避离种种感官欲乐。
“舍断它们”:犹如先造好坚固的船,凭借它渡过河流、到达彼岸;同样,修行者舍断那些烦恼后,便能渡过轮回的瀑流,成为到达涅槃彼岸的人。
“见生灭尽者”,指彻底照见诸行生灭、已穷尽生死之人,也就是世尊;他出于对众生的利益与悲悯,如实了知并开示了这条直接趣向目标的“一乘道”。
“过去依此道渡越”:过去的渡越者依此道渡越,未来的渡越者亦将依此道渡越,现在的渡越者正依此道渡越瀑流。
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Sabbadā sīlasampanno, paññavā susamāhito; Āraddhavīriyo pahitatto, oghaṃ tarati duttaraṃ. ‘‘Virato kāmasaññāya, rūpasaṃyojanātigo; Nandīrāgaparikkhīṇo, so gambhīre na sīdati; (Saṃ. ni. 1.96); Saddhāya tarati oghaṃ, appamādena aṇṇavaṃ. (saṃ. ni. 1.246; su. ni. 186); ‘‘Pañca chinde pañca jahe, pañca cuttari bhāvaye; Pañcasaṅgātigo bhikkhu, oghatiṇṇoti vuccati. (saṃ. ni. 1.5; dha. pa. 370); ‘‘Tasmā jantu sadā sato, kāmāni parivajjaye; Te pahāya tare oghaṃ, nāvaṃ sitvāva pāragū. (su. ni. 777; mahāni. 6; netti. 5); ‘‘Ekāyanaṃ jātikhayantadassī, maggaṃ pajānāti hitānukampī; Etena maggena tariṃsu pubbe, tarissanti ye ca taranti ogha’’nti. (saṃ. ni. 5.384, 409; mahāni. 191; cūḷani. pārāyanānugītigāthāniddesa 107; paṭhamavagga 121; netti. 170) –
以上述种种开示彼此相应,此即「四阵列之范畴」。显示巴利原文
Evamādīhi desanāhi saṃsandatīti ayaṃ catubyūho hāro.
于「无住立、无积聚」句中,「住立」与「积聚」是从染污边说的;以此点明「非理作意」,而以「无积聚」从烦恼止息边,点明「如理作意」。其中,若人持续以非理作意运作,则渴爱与无明增长。由执取「渴爱」这一环节,以渴爱为根本的诸法便随之轮转;由执取「无明」这一环节,以无明为根本的全部有轮便随之轮转。反之,由把握「如理作意」这一关键,以如理作意为根本的诸法,以及四种成就之轮,便随之轮转。再者,透过遮止「住立」与「积聚」,便阐明了正行道;而此正行道,简言之,即含摄于戒、定、慧三学之中。其中,由把握「戒」这一环节,十一种持戒利益便随之轮转;由把握「定」这一环节,具足五支的正定、具足五种智慧的正定及定的诸资具便随之轮转;由把握「慧」这一环节,慧与正见——即称作「正见善见」的观智,乃至一切圣道法,便随之轮转。此即「转起之范畴」。显示巴利原文
Appatiṭṭhaṃ anāyūhanti ettha saṃkilesavasena patiṭṭhānaṃ āyūhanañca. Tena ayonisomanasikāro dīpito, santakilesavasena anāyūhanena yonisomanasikāro. Tattha ayonisomanasikaroto taṇhāvijjā pavaḍḍhati. Tesu taṇhāgahaṇena ca taṇhāmūlakā dhammā āvattanti. Avijjāgahaṇena avijjāmūlakaṃ sabbaṃ bhavacakkaṃ āvattati. Yonisomanasikāraggahaṇena ca yonisomanasikāramūlakā dhammā āvattanti catubbidhañca sampatticakkaṃ. Patiṭṭhānāyūhanapaṭikkhepena pana sammāpaṭipatti dīpitā, sā ca saṅkhepato sīlādisaṅgahā. Tattha sīlaggahaṇena ekādasa sīlānisaṃsā āvattanti, samādhiggahaṇena pañcaṅgiko sammāsamādhi pañcaññāṇiko sammāsamādhi samādhiparikkhārā ca āvattanti. Paññāgahaṇena paññā ca sammādiṭṭhīti sammādiṭṭhisudassanā sabbepi ariyamaggadhammā āvattantīti ayaṃ āvatto hāro.
「住立」依烦恼等而有七种,「积聚」依造作等而有七种;同样地,从其对立面则有「无住立」与「无积聚」。这是此处法的分别。至于处所、地的分别,应依前文所说道理而知。此即「分别之范畴」。显示巴利原文
Patiṭṭhānaṃ kilesādivasena sattavidhaṃ. Āyūhanaṃ abhisaṅkhārādivasena sattavidhaṃ. Tathā tappaṭipakkhato appatiṭṭhānaṃ anāyūhanañca. Ayamettha dhammavibhatti. Padaṭṭhānabhūmivibhattiyo pana heṭṭhā vuttanayānusārena veditabbā. Ayaṃ vibhattihāro.
正确完成前行道之后,他将止与观结合并行,精勤修习。由于远离了烦恼等,他既不因这些烦恼而沉没,也不被冲走,达到“无住立”“无积聚”而渡过瀑流。反之,若因烦恼等而沉没、被冲走,便在轮回中有所住立,将来就会有后有的积聚,无法渡过瀑流。这就是回转的范畴。显示巴利原文
Pubbabhāgappaṭipadaṃ sammadeva sampādetvā samathavipassanaṃ yuganaddhaṃ katvā bhāvanaṃ ussakkento kilesādīnaṃ dūrīkaraṇato tesaṃ vasena asaṃsīdanto anibbuyhanto appatiṭṭhaṃ anāyūhaṃ oghaṃ tarati. Kilesādīnaṃ vasena pana saṃsīdanto nibbuyhanto saṃsāre patiṭṭhānato āyatiṃ punabbhavābhinibbattiyā āyūhanato oghaṃ na taratīti ayaṃ parivatto hāro.
“无住立”即不停止、不沉没、不依附、不固执,这些是其同义词。“无积聚”即不造作、不催促、不思惟、不筹划,这些是其同义词。“暴流”即烦恼的大海,这是其同义词。“渡越”即已经越过、已经渡过、已经超越,这些是其同义词。依此道理,其余文句中的同义词也应如此理解。这是“同义语之范畴”。显示巴利原文
Appatiṭṭhaṃ asantiṭṭhanto asaṃsīdanto anibbisaṃ anavinibbisanti pariyāyavacanaṃ, anāyūhaṃ anibbuyhanto acetento apakappentoti pariyāyavacanaṃ, oghaṃ kilesasamuddanti pariyāyavacanaṃ, atari atikkami accavāyīti pariyāyavacanaṃ. Iminā nayena sesapadesupi pariyāyavacanaṃ veditabbanti ayaṃ vevacano hāro.
所谓“无住立、无积聚”,在此处,“住立”与“积聚”是对烦恼起作用的一种概念施设;是对烦恼现行状态的分明施设;是对诸行增长的一种施设;是对渴爱的乐味施设;是对邪见固执的施设;是对“常见”执取于“有”的施设;是对“断见”颠倒的施设;是对沉溺于欲乐者的贪求施设;是对沉溺于自我折磨的苦行者之自我烧灼的施设。而“无住立、无积聚”则是对应证知法的证知施设,是对应遍知法的遍知施设。再者,“渡越了暴流”是对应断除法的断除施设,是对道的修习施设,是对灭的证悟施设。这是“施设之范畴”。显示巴利原文
Appatiṭṭhaṃ anāyūhanti ettha patiṭṭhaṃ āyūhanti kilesānaṃ kiccakaraṇapaññatti. Pariyuṭṭhānānaṃ vibhāvanapaññatti. Abhisaṅkhārānaṃ viruhanapaññatti. Taṇhāya assādapaññatti. Diṭṭhiyā parinipphandanapaññatti. Bhavadiṭṭhiyā bhavābhinivesapaññatti. Vibhavadiṭṭhiyā vipallāsapaññatti. Kāmasukhānuyogassa kāmesu anugijjhanapaññatti. Attakilamathānuyogassa attaparitāpanapaññatti. Appatiṭṭhaṃ anāyūhanti pana abhiññeyyadhammānaṃ abhiññāpaññatti. Pariññeyyadhammānaṃ pariññāpaññatti. Oghamatarinti pahātabbadhammānaṃ pahānapaññatti. Maggassa bhāvanāpaññatti. Nirodhassa sacchikiriyāpaññattīti ayaṃ paññattihāro.
所谓“无住立、无积聚”,此处由把握“住立”与“积聚”以及把握“暴流”,即把握了集谛。而由“无住立、无积聚、已渡越”此三句,把握了道谛;由于把握了因,自然也就把握了因所生的果,故苦谛与灭谛在意义上已被把握。这是以四圣谛为导入。其中,世间五蕴依之而成立了“住立”与“积聚”;出世间四蕴依之而成立了“渡越暴流”。这是以“蕴”为入口的导入。同样,世间五蕴即是十二处、十八界,出世间四蕴即是两处、两界。这是以“处”和“界”为入口的导入。同样,在“无住立、无积聚”中,由把握“住立”与“积聚”,即把握了烦恼、诸行等。而烦恼、诸行等以及“暴流”,属于行蕴、法处、法界;由把握“无住立、无积聚”并说出“渡越暴流”,便说明了与观相应的道。如是,行蕴、法处、法界即被把握。这也是以“蕴”、“处”、“界”为入口的导入。若那观是无常随观,则它通过“无相”这一入口成为解脱门;若是苦随观,则为“无愿”。显示巴利原文
Appatiṭṭhaṃ anāyūhanti ettha patiṭṭhānāyūhanaggahaṇena oghaggahaṇena ca samudayasaccaṃ gahitaṃ. Appatiṭṭhaṃ anāyūhaṃ atarinti pana padattayena maggasaccaṃ gahitaṃ, hetugahaṇena ca hetumato gahaṇaṃ siddhamevāti dukkhanirodhasaccāni atthato gahitānevāti ayaṃ saccehi otaraṇā. Tattha ye lokiyā pañcakkhandhā, yesaṃ vasena patiṭṭhānāyūhanasiddhi. Ye lokuttarā cattāro khandhā, yesaṃ vasena oghataraṇasiddhi. Ayaṃ khandhamukhena otaraṇā. Ye eva pañcakkhandhā dvādasāyatanāni aṭṭhārasa dhātuyo, te cattāro khandhā dvāyatanāni dve dhātuyoti ayaṃ āyatanamukhena dhātumukhena ca otaraṇā. Tathā appatiṭṭhaṃ anāyūhanti ettha patiṭṭhānāyūhanaggahaṇena kilesābhisaṅkhārādīnaṃ gahaṇaṃ. Kilesābhisaṅkhārādayo oghā ca saṅkhārakkhandhā dhammāyatanaṃ dhammadhātu ca, appatiṭṭhānānāyūhanaggahaṇena oghataraṇavacanena ca saha vipassanāya maggo kathito. Evañca saṅkhārakkhandho dhammāyatanaṃ dhammadhātu ca gahitāti evampi khandhamukhena āyatanamukhena dhātumukhena otaraṇā. Vipassanā ce aniccānupassanā, animittamukhena vimokkhamukhaṃ, dukkhānupassanā ce, appaṇihitavimokkhamukhaṃ, anattānupassanā ce, suññatavimokkhamukhanti evaṃ vimokkhamukhena otaraṇaṃ. Magge sekkhā sīlakkhandhādayo dhammāyatanadhammadhātū anāsavā ca evampi kho khandhādimukhena otaraṇāti ayaṃ otaraṇo hāro.
“无住立”为开端。“无积聚”为文句清净,而非开端清净;同样,“暴流”亦唯是文句清净。而“已渡越”则既是文句清净,亦是开端清净。这就是“净化之范畴”。显示巴利原文
Appatiṭṭhanti ārambho. Anāyūhanti padasuddhi, no ārambhasuddhi, tathā oghanti. Atarinti pana padasuddhi ceva ārambhasuddhi cāti ayaṃ sodhano hāro.
“无住立、无积聚”是从通称的角度,因住立与积聚(依爱、见等)共通于(依爱、见等而有的)住立与积聚,故作为遮止的教示;而“已度越流”则是分别说明,为特别的表述。因为度越流即是四圣道。其中,初道与第二道不加以区分地度越见流,第三道度越欲流,最上道度越其余诸流。这就是增上论。显示巴利原文
Appatiṭṭhaṃanāyūhanti sāmaññato adhiṭṭhānaṃ taṇhādiṭṭhiādivasena patiṭṭhānāyūhanānaṃ sādhāraṇato paṭikkhepacodanāti katvā oghamatarinti taṃ vikappetvā visesavacanaṃ. Oghataraṇañhi cattāro ariyamaggā. Tattha paṭhamadutiyamaggā avisesena diṭṭhoghataraṇaṃ, tatiyamaggo kāmoghataraṇaṃ, aggamaggo sesoghataraṇanti ayaṃ adhiṭṭhāno hāro.
由烦恼而生的执取,以不如理作意为因。由诸行而生的积聚,则以烦恼为因。无执取与无积聚,则依次以如理作意与断除为因。于可结缚之法中观察乐味,随其所应,以爱为因。是故世尊说:“诸比丘,于可结缚之法观察乐味者,爱便增长。”蕴、无明、触、想、寻、不如理作意、恶友及从他处听闻的邪说等,是依见而生执取的因。故《无碍解道》说:“蕴为见之依处,无明为见之依处”等。由爱所生的欢喜,及其他烦恼与诸行,则是积聚的因。依此道理,应相应地抉择依爱与依见而有的执取与积聚之因的差别;反之,亦抉择无执取与无积聚之因。当烦恼生起时,如实见其过患,此即无执取的因;于造作中见过患,此即无积聚的因;策励修观,此即度越流的因。此即庄严论。显示巴利原文
Kilesavasena patiṭṭhānassa ayonisomanasikāro hetu. Abhisaṅkhāravasena āyūhanassa kilesā hetū. Appatiṭṭhānānāyūhanānaṃ pana yathākkamaṃ yonisomanasikārapahānāni hetū. Saṃyojaniyesu dhammesu assādānupassanā taṇhāvasena yathārahaṃ tassa hetū. Tenāha bhagavā – ‘‘saṃyojaniyesu, bhikkhave, dhammesu assādānupassino taṇhā pavaḍḍhatī’’ti. Khandhāvijjāphassasaññāvitakkāyonisomanasikārapāpamittaparatoghosā diṭṭhivasena patiṭṭhānassa hetū. Tenāha – paṭisambhidāmagge ‘‘khandhāpi diṭṭhiṭṭhānaṃ, avijjāpi diṭṭhiṭṭhāna’’ntiādi. Taṇhābhinandanā avasesakilesābhisaṅkhāravasena āyūhanassa hetū. Iminā nayena yathārahaṃ taṇhādiṭṭhivasena patiṭṭhānāyūhanānaṃ hetuvibhāgo niddhāretabbo, tabbipariyāyena appatiṭṭhānānāyūhanānaṃ. Kilesuppādane hi sammadeva ādīnavadassanaṃ appatiṭṭhānassa hetū, abhisaṅkharaṇe ādīnavadassanaṃ anāyūhanassa hetū, vipassanāya ussukkāpanaṃ oghataraṇassa hetūti ayaṃ parikkhāro hāro.
依前所述之区分,因执取与积聚故,四流即不清净;若无执取与无积聚,则是对诸流的防护与完全关闭,亦即特别关闭四流,令不复起。由修习圣道,依烦恼之执取与依行之积聚已断,于彼,一切流已度越、善度越、彻底断除。此即相摄论。显示巴利原文
Yathāvuttavibhāgehi patiṭṭhānāyūhanehi catubbidhassapi oghassa parisuddhi. Appatiṭṭhānānāyūhanehi pana sotānaṃ saṃvaro sabbaso pidhānañcāti catubbidhassapi oghassa visesato pidhānaṃ appavattikaraṇaṃ. Ariyamaggassa bhāvanāya hi kilesavasena patiṭṭhānaṃ abhisaṅkhāravasena āyūhanaṃ upacchinnaṃ, tassa sabbepi oghā tiṇṇā sammatiṇṇā pahīnā hontīti ayaṃ samāropano hāro.
“无执取、无积聚”一语中,由执取这一含义已摄受了爱与无明。因为有情依爱与无明之力,而执取于处处之“有”。由积聚这一含义,则摄受了以爱、无明为缘而造作的诸行。其中,于爱,特以色法为所依;于无明,特以无色法为所依。与他们相对治的,依次即是止与观,此义由“无执取、无积聚、度越流”等语所显示;其中,修止之果为心解脱,修观之果为慧解脱。正因如此,慧解脱特被说为“离贪、离无明”。此处,爱、无明及诸行是集谛;作为他们所依的色法、无色法是苦谛;其彻底止息是灭谛;经由“度越流”的同义语所宣说、了知灭的修行之道,即是道谛。此中,由爱的含义,应将谄、诳、慢、过慢、骄、放逸、恶欲、恶友、无惭、无愧等归入不善一方。由无明的含义,应将颠倒作意、忿、恨、覆、恼、嫉、悭、怒、难劝、有见等归入不善一方。反之,以他们所说的相反一面,即无谄、无诳等,及无颠倒作意等,则可归入善的一方。同样地,以属于止一类的信根等,及属于观一类的法,亦归入善的一方。显示巴利原文
Appatiṭṭhaṃ anāyūhanti ettha patiṭṭhāgahaṇena taṇhāvijjā gahitā. Tāsaṃ hi vasena satto tattha tattha bhave patiṭṭhāti. Āyūhanaggahaṇena tappaccayā abhisaṅkhāradhammā gahitā. Tattha taṇhāya visesato rūpadhammā adhiṭṭhānaṃ, avijjāya arūpadhammā. Tesaṃ yathākkamaṃ samatho ca vipassanā ca paṭipakkhā, te ‘‘appatiṭṭhaṃ anāyūhaṃ oghamatari’’nti padehi pakāsitā honti, tesu samathassa cetovimutti phalaṃ, vipassanāya paññāvimutti. Tathā hi sā ‘‘rāgavirāgā avijjāvirāgā’’ti visesetvā vuccati. Tattha taṇhāvijjā abhisaṅkhāro ca samudayasaccaṃ, tesaṃ adhiṭṭhānabhūtā rūpārūpadhammā dukkhasaccaṃ, tesaṃ appavatti nirodhasaccaṃ, nirodhapajānanā paṭipadā oghataraṇapariyāyena vuttā maggasaccaṃ. Taṇhāgahaṇena cettha māyā-sāṭheyyamānātimāna-madappamāda-pāpicchatā-pāpamittatā-ahirikānottappādivasena akusalapakkho netabbo. Avijjāgahaṇena viparītamanasikāra-kodhūpanāha-makkhapaḷāsa-issāmacchariya-sārambha- dovacassatā-bhavadiṭṭhiādivasena akusalapakkho netabbo. Vuttavipariyāyena amāyāasāṭheyyādiaviparītamanasikārādivasena. Tathā samathapakkhiyānaṃ saddhindriyānaṃ vipassanāpakkhiyānaṃ aniccasaññādīnañca vasena vodānapakkho netabboti ayaṃ nandiyāvattassa nayassa bhūmi.
如前所述,在已由爱、无明等涵义所摄的法中,爱即是贪,无明即是痴。当贪爱生起时,与无明相应而成就的嗔恚,犹如含有脓的血,此即嗔。如此,三种不善根悉被含摄。而从“无执取”等语句所显的对立面,三种不善根与三种善根亦自然得以成立。其中,贪、一切有漏善根,以及造作积聚之法,是集谛;由彼所生、并成为彼之所依与行境的诸取蕴,是苦谛;如这些等,应以四谛之间的关联而联结。此处,当由三解脱门来抉择果。依三种不善根,应将三种恶行、种种染污、垢秽、不平、不善想、不善思惟等,摄入不善分;同样,依三种善根,应将三种善行、平等、善想、善思惟、定、解脱门等,摄入清净分。此即“三莲聚”理趣之阶位。显示巴利原文
Tathā vuttanayena gahitesu taṇhāvijjātappakkhiyadhammesu taṇhā lobho, avijjā moho, avijjāya sampayutto lohite sati pubbo viya taṇhāya sati sijjhamāno āghāto doso iti tīhi akusalamūlehi gahitehi, tappaṭipakkhato ‘‘appatiṭṭha’’ntiādivacanehi ca tīṇi akusalamūlāni tīṇi kusalamūlāni ca siddhāni eva honti. Idhāpi lobho sabbāni sāsavakusalamūlāni āyūhanadhammā ca samudayasaccaṃ, tannibbattā tesaṃ adhiṭṭhānagocarabhūtā ca upādānakkhandhā dukkhasaccantiādinā saccayojanā yojetabbā. Phalaṃ panettha vimokkhattayavasena niddhāretabbaṃ, tīhi akusalamūlehi tividhaduccarita-saṃkilesamalavisamaakusalasaññā-vitakkādivasena akusalapakkho netabbo, tathā tīhi kusalamūlehi tividhasucarita-samakusalasaññā-vitakka-samādhi-vimokkhamukhādivasena vodānapakkho netabboti ayaṃ tipukkhalassa nayassa bhūmi.
如此,在依前述方式所摄、属于爱与无明一类的诸法中,特以爱与见之力,于不净起“净”想、于苦起“乐”想,此即是颠倒;以无明与见之力,于无常起“常”想、于无我起“我”想,亦为颠倒,当如是了知。为对治这些颠倒,由“无执取”等语句所获得的念根、精进根、定根、慧根,四念处即得成就。显示巴利原文
Tathā vuttanayena gahitesu taṇhāvijjātappakkhiyadhammesu visesato taṇhādiṭṭhīnaṃ vasena asubhe ‘‘subha’’nti, dukkhe ‘‘sukha’’nti ca vipallāsā, avijjādiṭṭhīnaṃ vasena ‘‘anicce nicca’’nti anattani ‘‘attā’’ti vipallāsā veditabbā. Tesaṃ paṭipakkhato ‘‘appatiṭṭha’’ntiādivacanehi ca laddhehi sativīriyasamādhipaññindriyehi cattāri satipaṭṭhānāni siddhāneva honti.
在这里,应当以四根来指示四人。如何指示呢?因为贪行者有软根与利根两种,见行者也是如此。其中,第一人对不净起“净”的颠倒执取,他以信力如实观察身的自性,以修习力断除该颠倒后,入正性决定。第二人对苦起“乐”的颠倒执取,他以经中所谓“不忍受已生起的欲寻”等所说的作为精进防护的精进力,驱除对立面,以修习力摧毁该颠倒后,入正性决定。第三人对无常起“常”的非如实执取,他以止力令心等持,观察诸行的刹那性,以修习力断除该颠倒后,入正性决定。第四人由于被相续、聚合、作用、所缘、密集所欺瞒,对只是触等诸法聚集体无我者起“我”的邪执,他以四角空性作意摧毁该邪执后,现证沙门果。或者,以净想、乐想等四种颠倒,应了知为集谛;以作为它们所依与所缘的五取蕴,应了知为苦谛等,这是谛的关联方式。此处的果是四种沙门果;并且此处,由四种颠倒,应导出不善分,即:四漏、四暴流、四轭、四身系、四邪行、四渴爱生起、四取、七识住、四不遍知等;同样地,由四念处,应导出清净分,即:四种禅那、四种住、四种决定、乐分法、四无量、四正勤、四神足等。这就是狮子游戏理趣的阶段。显示巴利原文
Tattha catūhi indriyehi cattāro puggalā niddisitabbā. Kathaṃ? Duvidho hi taṇhācarito mudindriyo tikkhindriyoti, tathā diṭṭhicarito. Tesu paṭhamo asubhe ‘‘subha’’nti vipariyesaggāhī satibalena yathābhūtaṃ kāyasabhāvaṃ sallakkhento bhāvanābalena taṃ vipallāsaṃ samugghātetvā sammattaniyāmaṃ okkamati. Dutiyo asukhe ‘‘sukha’’nti vipariyesaggāhī ‘‘uppannaṃ kāmavitakkaṃ nādhivāsetī’’tiādinā vuttena vīriyasaṃvarabhūtena vīriyabalena paṭipakkhaṃ vinodento bhāvanābalena taṃ vipallāsaṃ viddhaṃsetvā sammattaniyāmaṃ okkamati. Tatiyo anicce ‘‘nicca’’nti ayāthāvaggāhī samathabalena samāhitacitto saṅkhārānaṃ taṅkhaṇikabhāvaṃ sallakkhento bhāvanābalena taṃ vipallāsaṃ samugghātetvā sammattaniyāmaṃ okkamati. Catuttho santati-samūha-kiccārammaṇa-ghanavañcitatāya phassādidhammapuñjamatte anattani ‘‘attā’’ti micchābhinivesī catukoṭikasuññatāmanasikārena taṃ micchābhinivesaṃ viddhaṃsetvā sāmaññaphalaṃ sacchikaroti. Subhasaññāsukhasaññādīhi catūhi vā vipallāsehi samudayasaccaṃ, tesamadhiṭṭhānārammaṇabhūtā pañcupādānakkhandhā dukkhasaccantiādinā saccayojanā veditabbā. Phalaṃ panettha cattāri sāmaññaphalāni, catūhi cettha vipallāsehi caturāsavoghayoga-kāyagantha-agati-taṇhuppādupādāna-sattaviññāṇaṭṭhiti-apariññādivasena akusalapakkho netabbo, tathā catūhi satipaṭṭhānehi catubbidhajhāna-vihārādhiṭṭhāna-sukhabhāgiyadhamma-appamaññāsammappadhāniddhipādādivasena vodānapakkho netabboti ayaṃ sīhavikkīḷitassa nayassa bhūmi.
然而,当这三种义趣成就时,两种言说理趣自然也就成就了。因为,恰如观察方位之法称为“观方位”,将它们统合起来的则称为“钩索”,应知这五种理趣皆被运用于此。再者,应当了知:此经在十六种经建立中,以简别有学与通达分位的方式,摄取了建立之积聚;亦即属于杂染简别、有学与通达分位。而在二十八种经建立中,则应了知为:世间与出世间的七种住处,智与所知,见与修,自说与记说,善与已开许者。显示巴利原文
Imesaṃ pana tiṇṇaṃ atthanayānaṃ siddhiyā vohāranayadvayaṃ siddhameva hoti. Tathā hi atthanayānaṃ disābhūtadhammālocanaṃ disālocanaṃ, tesaṃ samānayanaṃ aṅkusoti pañcapi nayā idha niyuttāti veditabbā. Idañca suttaṃ soḷasavidhe suttantapaṭṭhāne nibbedhasekkhabhāgiyaṃ byatirekamukhena patiṭṭhānāyūhanāni gahitānīti saṃkilesanibbedhasekkhabhāgiyaṃ cāti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Aṭṭhavīsatividhe pana suttantapaṭṭhāne lokiyalokuttaraṃ sattādhiṭṭhānaṃ ñāṇañeyyaṃ dassanabhāvanaṃ sakavacanaṃ vissajjanīyaṃ kusalaṃ anuññātanti veditabbaṃ.
2.《度脱经》注疏显示巴利原文
2. Nimokkhasuttavaṇṇanā
2 「最初出现」:指依注释方式,于第一经等中最初出现的词。「义理明显」:即义理清楚。因为唯有意义难解的词才需要加以注释。「No」:在疑问句中,是与「nu」同义的助词,故说「jānāsi no(你知道吗)」即是「jānāsi nū(你知道吗)」。「度脱」:众生依之从轮回中解脱,故称度脱,此指道。又,众生由此得以解脱,故称「解脱」;而在解脱尽头所应证得的果亦称为「解脱」,犹如阿拉汉果被称为「贪尽、嗔尽、痴尽」。「他们」:指众生。「远离」:即分离、不混杂,义为消失。从此中远离苦,故为「远离」。而在第二种解释中:众生从整个轮回之苦中解脱、在其中得解脱、远离,故涅槃称为「度脱」、「解脱」、「远离」,此三者当知皆为涅槃。而「于此」应视为表示原因的处格。「确实」:是限定词,正如「确实听闻了」等处的用法。显示巴利原文
2.Paṭhamamāgatanti saṃvaṇṇanāvasena paṭhamasuttādīsu paṭhamaṃ āgatapadaṃ. Uttānatthanti pākaṭatthaṃ. Apubbaṃyeva hi duviññeyyatthañca padaṃ saṃvaṇṇetabbaṃ. Noti pucchāyaṃ nu-saddena samānattho nipātoti āha ‘‘jānāsi noti jānāsi nū’’ti. Vaṭṭato nimuccanti tena sattāti nimokkho, maggo. So ca pamuccanti tenāti pamokkho, pamuccanante pana adhigantabbattāphalaṃ ‘‘pamokkho’’ti vuttaṃ, yathā arahattaṃ ‘‘rāgakkhayo dosakkhayo mohakkhayo’’ti vuttaṃ. Teti sattā. Viviccatīti visuṃ asammisso hoti, vigacchatīti attho. Viviccati dukkhaṃ etasmāti viveko. Dutiyavikappe pana sakalavaṭṭadukkhato sattā nimuccanti ettha pamuccanti viviccanti cāti nimokkho pamokkho viveko, nibbānanti attho veditabbo. Etthāti ca nimittatthe bhummavacanaṃ daṭṭhabbaṃ. Avadhāraṇattho kho-kāro ‘‘assosi kho’’tiādīsu viya.
以喜为根本的存在,称为喜有,正如前词省略后词,而成“食树枝者即食树枝者”那样。先说以业轮为主的含义,复依烦恼与业而说以两者为主的含义,故说「以及以喜……」等。「依前一种方法」:即于“以喜为根本的业有即是喜有”这一方面。「以喜有」:即用“喜有”一词。「依三种业行」:即依福行、非福行、不动行等,或依身行、语行、意行三种业行。行蕴被包含,因为行蕴以思为主。「以想与识」:即通过“想与识之灭”等语句所说的想与识之词。「以及与彼相应者」:即与上述行蕴相应者。「二蕴」:指想蕴与识蕴。显示巴利原文
Nandīmūlako bhavo nandībhavo purimapade uttarapadalopena ‘‘sākabhakkho patthavo sākapatthavo’’ti yathā. Paṭhamaṃ kammavaṭṭapadhānaṃ atthaṃ vatvā puna kilesakammānaṃ vasena ubhayappadhānaṃ atthaṃ vadanto ‘‘nandiyā cā’’tiādimāha. Purimanayeti nandīmūlako kammabhavo nandībhavoti etasmiṃ pakkhe. Nandībhavenāti nandībhavapadena. Tividhakammābhisaṅkhāravasenāti puññābhisaṅkhārādivasena kāyasaṅkhārādivasena ca tippakārassa kammābhisaṅkhārassa vasena. Saṅkhārakkhandho gahito cetanāpadhānattā saṅkhārakkhandhassa. Saññāviññāṇehīti ‘‘saññāviññāṇasaṅkhayā’’ti evaṃ vuttasaññāviññāṇapadehi. Taṃsampayuttā cāti tena yathāvuttasaṅkhārakkhandhena samaṃ yuttā eva. Dve khandhāti saññāviññāṇakkhandhā.
难道这里没有包含受蕴吗?为了表明并非未被包含,注释者说:“然而,由他们……”等。「由三蕴」:即由想蕴、行蕴、识蕴。「即已包含」:因为彼此不相离。确实,没有任何心的生起能离开受。「非执取的」:指善与不善的。此处并非指唯作蕴的不生起。「以不生起故」:即达到了不再生的状态。「以被执取故」:由业与烦恼所执取的,故说为「所执(upādi)」,即五蕴。所执之余,称为「有余所执(upādiseso)」,与有余所执共存,就是「有余依(saupādisesa)」。涅槃被提及,因为它彰显了一切业与烦恼止息的状态。由于在下文中,两个词已包含了非执取蕴,故在此“诸受(vedanānaṃ)”处,含摄执取的部分方为合理,因此说:「诸执取受(upādiṇṇakavedanānaṃ)」。「以灭尽」:即通过灭尽对彼受的欲贪而灭尽。「以寂止」:即彻底止息、不再生起。而且,如是已作,“以及(ca)”一词的含摄便合理了。「它们的」:指那些受以及与它相应的三蕴。「以依处与所缘故」:对于作为依处的六者和显示巴利原文
Nanu ettha vedanākkhandho na gahitoti? No na gahitoti dassento ‘‘tehi panā’’tiādimāha. Tīhi khandhehīti saññāsaṅkhāraviññāṇakkhandhehi. Gahitāva avinābhāvato. Na hi vedanārahito koci cittuppādo atthi. Anupādiṇṇakānanti kusalākusalānaṃ. Na hettha kiriyākhandhānaṃ appavatti adhippetā. Appavattivasenāti anuppattidhammatāpattivasena. Nibbattanavasena kammakilesehi upādīyatīti upādi, pañcakkhandhā. Upādino seso upādiseso, saha upādisesenāti saupādisesaṃ. Nibbānaṃ kathitaṃ sakalakammakilesavūpasamatthassa jotitattā. Heṭṭhā dvīhi padehi anupādiṇṇakakkhandhā gahitāti ‘‘vedanāna’’nti ettha upādiṇṇakaggahaṇaṃ yuttanti āha ‘‘upādiṇṇakavedanāna’’nti. Nirodhenāti tappaṭibaddhachandarāganirodhavasena nirujjhanena. Upasamenāti accantūpasamena appavattanena. Evañca katvā ca-saddaggahaṇaṃ samatthitaṃ hoti. Tesanti tassā vedanāya taṃsampayuttānañca tiṇṇaṃ khandhānaṃ. Vatthārammaṇavasenāti vatthubhūtānaṃ channaṃ ārammaṇabhūtānañca sabbesampi upādiṇṇakarūpadhammānaṃ vasena.
然而,为何在下文只提到四无色蕴,而色蕴不被包含呢?由于差别之故。因为在证入有余涅槃时,确有执取色法的不生起,而无非执取色法的不生起。「于第二理趣」:即于“复次,以喜与有……”这一方面。「因喜之摄受」:由于与喜俱行,行蕴遂被包含。「为生有之依的色蕴」:那正是执取色法。而且,正因为已包含了它,由它引生的时节生、食生色,以及因含摄识而引生的心生色——应知如是为四种相续的色,在此皆被包含。「以想等」:即通过包含想、识、受,三蕴被包含,且那是不分执取与非执取、无差别地包含的。因为无差别故,五蕴的不生起即是涅槃。因此说:“如是……乃至……涅槃被提及”。因为此处「涅槃」意指不死之大涅槃。「而且唯此理趣」:即如上所说的第二种。「持诵四部者」:即持诵四阿含者。名为巴恩迪卡的长老,称巴恩迪卡长老。「如是(iti)」为总结前说。「唯依涅槃」:于第一种理趣,依有余涅槃与无余依涅槃;于第二种理趣,则依“不死之大涅槃”。无论如何,世尊都唯依涅槃而结束说法。显示巴利原文
Kasmā pana heṭṭhā cattāro arūpakkhandhāyeva vuttā, rūpakkhandho na gahitoti? Visesabhāvato. Saupādisesanibbānappattiyañhi upādiṇṇakarūpadhammānaṃ viya anupādiṇṇakarūpadhammānaṃ appavattiyeva natthi. Dutiyanayeti nandiyā ca bhavassa cāti etamhi pakkhe. Nandiggahaṇena saṅkhārakkhandho gahito taṃsahacaraṇato. Upapattibhavasaṅkhāto rūpakkhandhoti upādiṇṇakarūpadhammameva vadati. Taggahaṇeneva ca tannimittakāni utuāhārajāni, viññāṇaggahaṇena cittajānīti catusantatirūpassapettha gahitatā veditabbā. Saññādīhīti saññāviññāṇavedanāgahaṇehi tayo khandhā gahitā, tañca kho upādiṇṇā anupādiṇṇāti vibhāgaṃ akatvā avisesato. Avisesena hi pañcannaṃ khandhānaṃ appavatti nibbānaṃ. Tenāha ‘‘evaṃ…pe… nibbānaṃ kathitaṃ hotī’’ti. ‘‘Nibbāna’’nti hi idha amatamahānibbānaṃ adhippetaṃ. Imameva ca nayanti idaṃ yathāvuttaṃ dutiyameva. Cattāro mahānikāye dhāretīti catunikāyiko. Bhaṇḍikanāmako thero bhaṇḍikatthero. Itīti vuttappakāraparāmasanaṃ. Nibbānavasenevāti paṭhamanaye saupādisesanibbānassa anupādisesanibbānassa ca, dutiye pana ‘‘amatamahānibbānassā’’ti sabbathāpi nibbānasseva vasena bhagavā desanaṃ niṭṭhapesi samāpesīti.
3. 《被导至经》注释显示巴利原文
3. Upanīyasuttavaṇṇanā
3 3. 因为“界”字有多种含义,加前缀后则成为特定意义差别的表达,故说「upanīyati」即被耗尽、被灭尽,意为坏灭。或者,「upanīyati」是就生命自性而言,趋向死亡,因此说:「或为upagacchati,即次第、逐渐地趋向死亡之义」。虽然此处“upanīyati”一词所诠的行为并不明确,但正如“一切健康以病为终,一切青春以老为终,一切生命以死为终”的教导,因为说到“生命被带向死亡”,故被称为“趋向死亡”。事实上,这是从业与造作者关系的角度而说的。显示巴利原文
3. Anekatthattā dhātusaddānaṃ upasaggavasena atthavisesavācako hotīti āha ‘‘upanīyatīti parikkhīyati nirujjhatī’’ti. Vinassatīti attho. Upanīyatīti vā saraseneva jīvitassa maraṇūpagamanaṃ vuttanti āha – ‘‘upagacchati vā, anupubbena maraṇaṃ upetīti attho’’ti. Kāmañcettha ‘‘upanīyatī’’ti padaṃ apākaṭakammavisesaṃ vuttaṃ. Yathā pana ‘‘sabbaṃ ārogyaṃ byādhipariyosānaṃ, sabbaṃ yobbanaṃ jarāpariyosānaṃ, sabbaṃ jīvitaṃ maraṇapariyosāna’’nti, ‘‘upanīyati jīvita’’nti vuttattā ‘‘maraṇaṃ upetī’’ti vuttaṃ. Kammakattuvasena hetaṃ vuttaṃ.
接下来,为从业成就的角度开显意义,所以说“或者犹如”等。正如牧牛人将牛群引向所欲之处,众生依它而活命,或与它一同生起的诸法依它而活命,故称为“命”;又因它在维持这些法上具有主宰性,所以是“根”,合称“命根”。“小”即短暂,故说“一点点”。此处意在说明,生命的“死的作用”是作为维持相续的缘,因此说“也由于自性微小”等。而这里所说的“寿”(āyu),意指“极寿”(paramāyu),当依现今的时代来理解。显示巴利原文
Idāni kammasādhanavasena atthaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘yathā vā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Gopālena gogaṇo nīyati yathicchitaṃ ṭhānaṃ. Jīvanti tena sattā, sahajātadhammā vāti jīvitaṃ, tadeva tesaṃ anupālane ādhipaccasabbhāvato indriyanti āha ‘‘jīvitanti jīvitindriya’’nti parittanti ittaraṃ. Tenāha ‘‘thoka’’nti. Pabandhānupacchedassa paccayabhāvo idha jīvitassa maraṇakiccanti adhippetanti āha ‘‘sarasaparittatāya cā’’tiādi. Āyūti ca paramāyu idhādhippetaṃ, tañca ajjakālavasena veditabbaṃ.
于此佛陀出世的时代,这段开示旨在阐明生命极为短暂。依命根而判定寿尽,故说“唯有一心识生起的刹那而已”。“一心识生起的刹那”,即仅等于一个心识生起的那一刹那。现在,为以譬喻开显此义,便说了“正如”等。其中,“正在转动”是说:犹如转动中的车轮,它仅以轮辋的一部分触地而转,这便是在一刹那中的意思。“仅以一点停立”所依之例,义亦相同。“一心刹那”,意为只拥有一心刹那的长度。“在那个心识中”,指在任何一个心识中。“刚灭去时”,即于灭去状态刚刚达到的那一刻。“被称为已灭”,是指从究竟义上说,该心识所属的众生被称为已死。然而,不了知此中微细差别者,却将相续中断的现象执取为灭。为了以经文阐明所述义理,故说“正如所说”等。这段经文表明:于一切过去、未来、现在三时之中,就究竟义而言,众生的生与死唯依心识的刹那而转起。显示巴利原文
Imasmiñhi buddhuppāde ayaṃ kathāti jīvitassa atiittarabhāvadīpanaparā ayaṃ desanā. Jīvitindriyavasena jīvitakkhayaṃ niyamento ‘‘ekacittappavattimattoyevā’’ti āha, ekassa cittuppādassa pavattikkhaṇamatto evāti attho. Idāni tamatthaṃ upamāya vibhāvetuṃ ‘‘yathā nāmā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha pavattamānanti nemirathīsā vattantī ekeneva nemippadesena pavattati ekasmiṃ khaṇeti adhippāyo. ‘‘Ekeneva tiṭṭhatī’’ti etthāpi eseva nayo. Ekacittakkhaṇikanti ekacittakkhaṇamattavantaṃ. Tasmiṃ citteti tasmiṃ yasmiṃ kismiñci ekasmiṃ citte. Niruddhamatteti niruddhabhāvappattamatte. Niruddhoti vuccatīti matoti vuccati taṃsamaṅgī satto paramatthato. Avisesaviduno pana aviññāyamānantarena anusandhānassa niruddhanaṃ nirodhaṃ sallakkhenti. Yathāvuttamatthaṃ suttena vibhāvetuṃ ‘‘yathāhā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tena tīsupi kālesu sattānaṃ paramatthato jīvanaṃ maraṇaṃ cittakkhaṇavasenevāti dasseti.
“命”即命根。“自体”指除去命、受、识之外的其余诸法。“苦与乐”即苦受与乐受;舍受因具可意与不可意的性质,也含摄于这苦乐之中。“完全”谓以其自身,或以恒常的方式而不混杂其他。“与一心相应”即与单一心识结合。“刹那轻快流转”是说,如前面所述,由于仅有一心刹那那么短暂,命等诸法生灭的刹那极为轻快、极其短暂。显示巴利原文
Jīvitanti jīvitindriyaṃ. Attabhāvoti jīvitavedanāviññāṇāni ṭhapetvā avasiṭṭhadhammā adhippetā. Sukhadukkhāti sukhadukkhā vedanā, upekkhāpi idha sukhadukkhāsveva antogadhā iṭṭhāniṭṭhabhāvato. Kevalāti attanā, niccabhāvena vā avomissā. Ekacittasamāyuttāti ekakena cittena sahitā. Lahuso vattate khaṇoti vuttanayena ekacittakkhaṇikatāya lahuko atiittaro jīvitādīnaṃ khaṇo vattati.
“于临终者”是指那正在死没的众生,在死心之后应被称为已灭的诸蕴。“或在此处住立者的”则指在此世相续中住立、存续的众生,当下已抵达坏灭而灭去的诸蕴。所有这一切蕴都是相似的,它们全都同样消逝了、息灭了,因为没有结生,不会再来结生,所以叫作“离去了”。恰如死心生起的诸蕴不再生起一样,此前的诸蕴亦复如是。因此,这里意在说明:众生的生命仅是“一心刹那”而已。显示巴利原文
Ye niruddhā marantassāti cavantassa sattassa cutito uddhaṃ niruddhāti vattabbā ye khandhā. Tiṭṭhamānassa vā idhāti ye vā idha pavattiyaṃ tiṭṭhamānassa dharantassa bhaṅgappattiyā niruddhā khandhā, sabbepi sadisā te sabbepi ekasadisā gatā atthaṅgatā appaṭisandhiyā puna āgantvā paṭisandhānābhāvena vigatā. Yathā hi cutikhandhā na nibbattanti, evaṃ tato pubbepi khandhā. Tasmā ekacittakkhaṇikaṃ sattānaṃ jīvitanti adhippāyo.
“不是由未生的而生”是指并非由未生的心生起而成为已生,因为可以这样说:“在未来的心刹那中,它未曾活,现在不活,以后将活。”“以现在的心而活”是由现前运作的心生起,名为正在活,它既不是曾活,也不是将活。“心灭坏故,世间为死”:就如死心一样,由于所有每一个心的坏灭,从究竟意义上说,这个世间被称为死,因为可以这样说:“在过去的心刹那中,它曾活,现在不活,以后将不活”,已灭者是没有结生的。虽然如此,确有一种以究竟法为依的施设:正是凭借这一个个转起的心,而有“提舍活着,补沙活着”等言语的流布,它是以相续的施设为境的,而这施设在此处即是究竟的、以究竟为本质的。正如经中所说:“姓氏不老死”。显示巴利原文
Anibbattena na jātoti anuppannena cittena jāto na hoti ‘‘anāgate cittakkhaṇe na jīvittha na jīvati jīvissatī’’ti vattabbato. Paccuppannena vattamānena cittena jīvati jīvamāno nāma hoti, na jīvittha na jīvissati. Cittabhaṅgā mato lokoti cuticittassa viya sabbassapi tassa tassa cittassa bhaṅgappattiyā ayaṃ loko paramatthato mato nāma hoti ‘‘atīte cittakkhaṇe jīvittha na jīvati na jīvissatī’’ti vattabbato, niruddhassa appaṭisandhikattā. Evaṃ santepi paññatti paramatthiyā, yāyaṃ taṃ taṃ pavattaṃ cittaṃ upādāya ‘‘tisso jīvati, phusso jīvatī’’ti vacanappavattiyā visayabhūtā santānapaññatti, sā ettha paramatthiyā paramatthabhūtā. Tathā hi vuttaṃ ‘‘nāmagottaṃ na jīratī’’ti (saṃ. ni. 1.76).
“没有能救护者”是指:对于老迈之人,或依老迈之缘,或依作恶者恶业现前之缘,或依行善者爱别离之缘,以及这两类人枷锁斩断等缘而生起的种种无量身心之苦与迷乱,从这些苦中能予以拯救、能予救护的人,是不存在的。因此说道:“所谓的庇护、洞窟、皈依中,没有任何能真正胜任的。”人们因此而恐惧,故称为“恐惧”,即恐惧的原因,因此说“恐惧的事物”。由于揭示了此原因,以心之颤栗为特征的“恐惧”也就被包含在内了,因为有此相时,依相而知相的人是真实存在的。前行的思是指在单一转向或多种转向的速行心路中现起的近行禅那的思。后行的思是指为成就自在、随后再入定等而现起的安止定的思。解脱的思是指依镇伏而现起的初证安止的思。禅那之乐是指善的禅那中,仅在果报的禅那里所得的乐。此处的“乐”一词是可意的同义词。于禅那的期望即是“禅那的喜爱”,那是借由品尝禅那味的方式而转起的贪爱,那些梵天们因此从禅那出定后,说出:“啊,乐啊!啊,乐啊!”这样的话。正如诸天以乐受为多,那些也是三因结生,如此行道者方能证得禅那,而非其余。显示巴利原文
Nasanti tāṇāti jaraṃ upagatassa tato taṃnimittaṃ yaṃ vā pāpakārino pāpakammānaṃ upaṭṭhānavasena puññakārino piyavippayogavasena cittadukkhaṃ ubhayesampi bandhanacchedanādivasena vitujjamānaṃ anappakaṃ sarīradukkhaṃ sammohappatti ca hoti, tato tāyantā na santi. Tenāha – ‘‘tāṇaṃ leṇaṃ saraṇaṃ bhavituṃ samatthā nāma keci natthī’’ti. Bhāyati etasmāti bhayaṃ, bhayanimittanti āha ‘‘bhayavatthū’’ti. Taggahaṇena ca cittutrāsalakkhaṇaṃ bhayaṃ gahitameva, sati nimitte nemittaṃ santamevāti. Pubbacetananti ekāvajjanavīthiyaṃ nānāvajjanavīthiyaṃ sampavattaṃ upacārajjhānacetanaṃ. Aparacetananti vasībhāvāpādanavasena parato samāpajjanavasena ca pavattaṃ samāpatticetanaṃ. Muñcacetananti vikkhambhanavasena pavattaṃ paṭhamappanācetanaṃ. Kusalajjhānassa vipākajjhāneva labbhamānaṃ sukhaṃ jhānasukhaṃ. Iṭṭhapariyāyo cettha sukha-saddo. Jhāne apekkhā jhānanikanti. Jhānassa assādavasena pavatto lobho jhānassādo. Yena te te brahmāno jhānato vuṭṭhāya ‘‘aho sukhaṃ aho sukha’’nti vācaṃ nicchāresunti. Yathā devā sukhabahulā tihetupaṭisandhikāvāti paṭipajjantā jhānaṃ adhigantuṃ bhabbā, na itareti ‘‘kāmāvacaradevesū’’ti vuttaṃ. Kāmāvacarā ca uparidevā ca kāmāvacaradevāti ekadesasarūpekaseso daṭṭhabbo. Tena manussānampi ekaccānaṃ sabbesampi vā saṅgaho siddho hoti patthanāparikappanāya visayabhāvato. Tenāha ‘‘aho vatime ca…pe… tiṭṭheyyu’’nti. Thullāni phusitāni vipphurāni etthāti thullaphusitako, kālo, deso vā. Tasmiṃ thullaphusitake.
因为说了「你们应修福,它带来快乐」,所以说「他在说那不出离的、辗转轮回的论」。世间因为有破坏变易的意思,而食因为有应被烦恼执取的意思,所以称为「世间食」。然而,没有权宜意义的食,因为它既在世间又属于食,所以也叫「世间食」。所谓权宜,是指借着相似的状态而转起并让人明白,或者是曲说、理由,因此说「以非权宜的方式,有四种资具」;因为轮回必然是只被愚昧的世间所执取的对象,所以那才称为权宜之食。这里……是指……由于期望背离轮回的人所想要的那一种。因为舍断是可以期待四资具的。即使对于一个完全期待出离轮回者的舍断,它也能成为助缘,所以带着犹豫说「确实还是在流转」。「止息」:在这里,一切轮回之苦都止息了,它是无为界,所以说「名为涅槃」。显示巴利原文
‘‘Puññāni kayirātha sukhāvahānī’’ti vuttattā ‘‘aniyyānikaṃ vaṭṭakathaṃ kathetī’’ti vuttaṃ. Lujjanapalujjanaṭṭhena loko, kilesehi āmasitabbato āmisañcāti lokāmisaṃ. Nippariyāyāmisaṃ pana loke āmisantipi lokāmisaṃ. Pariyāyeti sabhāvato parivattetvā ñāpeti etenāti pariyāyo, leso, kāraṇaṃ vāti āha ‘‘nippariyāyena cattāro paccayā’’ti, vaṭṭassa ekantato bālalokeheva āmasitabbabhāvato pariyāyāmisatā vuttā. Idha pari..pe… adhippetaṃ vivaṭṭapaṭiyogino icchitattā. Catupaccayāpekkhañhi pahānaṃ. Ekaccassa sakalavaṭṭāpekkhappahānassapi paccayo hotīti ‘‘vaṭṭatiyevā’’ti sāsaṅkaṃ vadati. Vūpasamati ettha sakalavaṭṭadukkhanti santi, asaṅkhatadhātūti āha ‘‘nibbānasaṅkhāta’’nti.
4. 《逝去经》注释。显示巴利原文
4. Accentisuttavaṇṇanā
4 “消耗”(kālayanti)是指把时间耗尽、使其流逝,所以称为“时”(kālā)。午前等时间,仅是因为法的转起而被指称为时间,于究竟义上并不真实存在,纯属随顺世间假名而安立。由于那些已转起的种种法不会折返,这些时间就好像在把一个个法耗尽、毁灭,自身也随着那些法一同流逝一般。因此才说:“时吞噬一切众生,亦与自身一同被吞噬。”(本生经 1.2.190)“夜晚疾驰”(tarayanti rattiyo)这句,也应按照这里刚刚说过的道理来理解。因为经中说“应正观死亡中的这种恐惧”,这便指出了补特伽罗正被死亡逼迫,所以说夜晚在逼迫着(他)疾驰。在“年龄的功德”(vayoguṇā)这里,是把一份一份(koṭṭhāsā)看作功德(guṇā)。对外道而言,他们在最后一个心上,假立一个年龄集合的名称,因此说“初、中、后年龄的功德,即是积聚,这就是它的意思”。像“我披树皮衣十二年,成就十二功德”(佛种姓经 2.30)这类用法中,功德义与利益相关。而在“我将作懒惰功德,令其倍倍增长”等说法中,功德义则是显示巴利原文
4. Kālayanti khepentīti kālā. Purebhattādayo hi kālā dhammappavattimattatāya paramatthato avijjamānāpi lokasaṅketamattasiddhā tassāyeva dhammappavattiyā gatagatāya anivattanato taṃ taṃ dhammappavattiṃ khepentā vināsayantā viya sayañca tāhi saddhiṃ accentā viya honti. Tenāha – ‘‘kālo ghasati bhūtāni, sabbāneva sahattanā’’ti (jā. 1.2.190). ‘‘Tarayanti rattiyo’’ti etthāpi vuttanayeneva attho veditabbo. ‘‘Etaṃ bhayaṃ maraṇe pekkhamāno’’ti vuccamānattā puggalaṃ maraṇūpagamanāya tarayantīti attho vutto. Vayoguṇāti ettha koṭṭhāsā guṇā. Titthiyānaṃ hi carimacittena sakalacitte vayasamūhe vayasamaññāti āha – ‘‘paṭhamamajjhimapacchimavayānaṃ guṇā, rāsayoti attho’’ti. Ānisaṃsaṭṭho guṇaṭṭho ‘‘vākaciraṃ nivāsesiṃ, dvādasaguṇamupāgata’’ntiādīsu (bu. vaṃ. 2.30) viya. ‘‘Tandiguṇāhaṃ karissāmi, diguṇaṃ diguṇaṃ vaddheyyā’’ti ca evamādīsu pana tabbhāvavuttiattho guṇaṭṭho.
“具足功德的大仙人,拥有无量的名号;我依其功德列举名号,纵使要举千名,亦能举出。”(法集论注 1313;优陀那 53;无碍解道注 1.1.76)
(《法集论注》1313;《优陀那》53;《无碍解道注》1.1.76)
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Asaṅkhyeyyāni nāmāni, saguṇena mahesino; Guṇena nāmamuddheyyaṃ, api nāma sahassato’’ti. (dha. sa. aṭṭha. 1313; udā. 53; paṭi. ma. aṭṭha. 1.1.76) –
于这些处,当知“功德”之义为“赞叹”。“年龄功德渐次抛弃”(vayoguṇā anupubbaṃ jahantī)一句的意思,与“诸时就流逝了”(accenti kālā)中所说的道理完全相同。“初、中年龄”中特意举出“初”,是为显示已经过去的年龄不再返回。因此注释才说:“而在临死那一刹那,三种年龄其实全都被抛弃了。”显示巴利原文
Ādīsu pasaṃsaṭṭho guṇaṭṭho daṭṭhabbo. ‘‘Vayoguṇā anupubbaṃ jahantī’’ti ettha attho ‘‘accenti kālā’’ti ettha vuttanayo eva. Paṭhamamajjhimavayāti paṭhamaggahaṇañcettha vayassa gatassa apunarāvattidassanatthaṃ kataṃ. Tenevāha – ‘‘maraṇakkhaṇe pana tayopi vayā jahantevā’’ti.
此处,经文先以“诸时就流逝了”从总相上显示时间的迁流,再以其余两句从别相加以说明。而在注释中,为随顺钝根而说“年龄功德渐次抛弃”;为随顺中根而说“夜晚疾驰”,正是本着这一用意,才解释“时,指午前等时”。因此应知,彼处所用“等”字,所取的是午后、初夜、须臾等时分,也就是将时间细分出来的那类时分别,并不包含其他。“余下的”,指这两首偈颂的后半部分。之所以在此附带指出,是因为那部分的意思于此已得通达,并且在紧接着的下文中也提到了。显示巴利原文
Ettha ca pāḷiyaṃ ‘‘accenti kālā’’ti sāmaññato kālassa apagamanaṃ dassitaṃ, puna taṃ visesatopi dassetuṃ itaradvayaṃ vuttaṃ. Aṭṭhakathāyaṃ pana mudindriyassa vasena ‘‘vayoguṇā anupubbaṃ jahantī’’ti vuttaṃ, majjhimindriyassa vasena ‘‘tarayanti rattiyo’’ti vuttanti adhippāyena ‘‘kālāti purebhattādayo kālā’’ti vuttaṃ. Tasmā tattha ādi-saddena pacchābhattapaṭhamayāma-muhuttakālādi-kālakoṭṭhāso eva aṇupabhedo kālavibhāgo gahitoti veditabbo. Sesanti idha dvīsu gāthāsu pacchimaddho. So hi idha atthato adhigatattā anantarasutte ca vuttattā atidisito.
第五《应断何等经》注释显示巴利原文
5. Katichindasuttavaṇṇanā
5 “断”(chindanto)指彻底断除。“应断多少”(kati chindeyya):应当彻底断除多少不善法,令其不再生起。“其余句子里也是如此”(sesapadesupī),即另外两句也是如此。至于“应舍弃多少”、“应进一步修习多少”,其义即以“同样道理”(eseva nayo)一句涵盖。第四句的意思则是直接以本来面貌显示的。所谓“义上是一”,是从修习的实质而言,只是一事。既然如此,为何还要用不同的说法呢?答:“这是为了偈颂的连接……”等等。这里从意义上说,确实是重复的,所以说“避免言辞重复”。“超越执着”(saṅgaṃ atikkamayatī),即“超越执着者”(saṅgātigo),所以注释说“就是这个意思”。显示巴利原文
5.Chindantoti samucchindanto. Kati chindeyyāti kittake pāpadhamme samucchindeyya, anuppattidhammataṃ pāpeyya. Sesapadesupīti sesesupi dvīsu padesu. Jahanto kati jaheyya, bhāvento kati uttari bhāveyyāti imamatthaṃ ‘‘eseva nayo’’ti iminā atidisati. Catutthapadassa pana attho sarūpeneva dassito. Atthato ekanti bhāvatthato ekaṃ. Yadi evaṃ kimatthaṃ pariyāyantaraṃ gahitanti āha ‘‘gāthābandhassa panā’’tiādi. Atthato ettha punarutti atthevāti āha ‘‘saddapunaruttiṃ vajjayantī’’ti. Saṅgaṃ atikkamayatīti saṅgātigoti āha ‘‘ayamevattho’’ti.
“下”(oraṃ)指欲界,因以作为结生缘的方式随附于它,故称“下分结”(orambhāgiyāni)。其中,业与果报令有情受苦;以业系缚果报,以有情系缚苦,故称为“结”(saṃyojanāni),即身见、疑、戒禁取、欲贪、嗔。“上”(uddhaṃ)指四无色界,依前述方式随附于它,故称“上分结”(uddhambhāgiyāni),即色贪、无色贪、慢、掉举、无明。正是为了顺应天女提问的措辞,他才说“断五、舍五”,这样说是为了方便那位天女理解。不仅是为了顺应那位天女的措辞,也因为这些结本身就具有应以这种方式说明的道理,所以又说了“或者”等语句。由此可知,下分结被称为沉重、难以断除,因为它是坚牢的束缚,所以针对它们说“断五”。显示巴利原文
Oraṃ vuccati kāmadhātu, paṭisandhiyā paccayabhāvena tañca bhajantīti orambhāgiyāni. Tattha ca kammaṃ tabbipākaṃ satte dukkhaṃ, kammunā vipākaṃ, sattena dukkhaṃ saṃyojentīti saṃyojanāni, sakkāyadiṭṭhi-vicikicchā-sīlabbataparāmāsa-kāmarāga-paṭighā. Uddhaṃ vuccati catasso arūpadhātuyo, vuttanayena taṃ bhajantīti uddhambhāgiyāni, saṃyojanāni rūpārūparāgamānuddhaccāvijjā. Āropitavacanānurūpeneva evamāhāti ‘‘pañca chinde pañca jahe’’ti evaṃ kathesi tassā devatāya sukhaggahaṇatthaṃ. Na kevalaṃ tāya devatāya vuttavacanānurūpato eva, atha kho tesu saṃyojanesu vattabbākāratopīti dassetuṃ ‘‘atha vā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tena orambhāgiyasaṃyojanāni nāma garūni ducchedāni gāḷhabandhanabhāvato, tasmā tāni sandhāya ‘‘pañca chinde’’ti vuttaṃ.
上分结则是轻微、易断的,依循在下界已生起的修行次第,它们当被断除,故就此说‘舍五’。因此他说‘如同脚上被绑住的鸟’等。‘差别’(Visesa):指修习的差别,也就是修习观——修习它、令它生起、使它成熟、让它增长。在轮回的泥沼中,因会黏着,‘贪’本身就是黏着,所以称为‘贪黏着’(rāgasaṅgo)。对其余的法,也应依此理来理解。因为于此,贪、痴、见,以及属于它们这一类的身见、戒禁取、欲贪、无明,从真实义上说就是瀑流,其余的法与它们处在同一处所,所以世尊通过断除结与超越黏着来开示渡过瀑流。当说到世间法与出世间法时,‘应修习’(bhāvaye)是指为前分道而作的修习。显示巴利原文
Uddhambhāgiyasaṃyojanāni pana lahūni succhedāni heṭṭhā pavattitānukkamena bhāvanānayena pahātabbato, tasmā tāni sandhāya ‘‘pañca jahe’’ti vuttaṃ. Tenāha ‘‘pādesu baddhapāsasakuṇo viyā’’tiādi. Visesanti bhāvanānaṃ visesaṃ vipassanābhāvanaṃ bhāvento uppādento vipaccento vaḍḍhento ca. Saṃsārapaṅke sañjanaṭṭhena rāgo eva saṅgo ‘‘rāgasaṅgo’’. Esa nayo sesesupi. Yasmā ettha rāga-moha-diṭṭhi-tabbhāgiyasakkāyadiṭṭhi-sīlabbataparāmāsa-kāmarāgāvijjā atthato oghā eva, itare tadekaṭṭhā, tasmā bhagavā saṃyojanappahānasaṅgātikkamehi oghataraṇaṃ kathesi. Lokiyalokuttarāni kathitāni ‘‘bhāvaye’’ti pubbabhāgāya maggabhāvanāya adhippetattā.
6.《觉醒经》注释显示巴利原文
6. Jāgarasuttavaṇṇanā
6 ‘觉醒’一词是属格,并无敬称之义。因此他说‘在诸根觉醒之时’。而‘在回答的偈颂中’一语,与‘应知此义’一句相关联。其意旨是:提问偈颂的意义也应依此方式来理解。在‘醒觉者五,他们沉睡’中,若不论‘沉睡’一词,‘五’是主格;但与‘觉醒’一词相连时,依属格关系应转为‘五者的觉醒’。因此他说‘在五根觉醒之时’,意思是:在觉醒的状态下,它们没有束缚,各自专心致力于自己的作用,并具备完成各自作用的能力。之所以说他们‘沉睡’,是因为他们没有放逸之眠。为了在以补特伽罗为立足点的解说中显示那种沉睡的状态,便说了‘为何’等语。放逸:若某人有放逸,或说他有放逸,这就是放逸;其状态即是放逸性;由具备那种状态而成为放逸者,即此处的意思。显示巴利原文
6.Jāgaratanti anādare sāmivacanaṃ. Tenāha ‘‘indriyesu jāgarantesū’’ti. ‘‘Vissajjanagāthāyaṃ panā’’ti imassa padassa ‘‘ayamattho veditabbo’’ti iminā sambandho. Pucchāgāthāya pana attho imināva nayena viññāyatīti adhippāyo. Pañca jāgarataṃ suttāti ettha ‘‘suttā’’ti padaṃ apekkhitvā pañcāti paccattavacanaṃ ‘‘jāgarata’’nti padaṃ apekkhitvā sāmivasena pariṇāmetabbaṃ ‘‘pañcannaṃ jāgarata’’nti. Tenāha – ‘‘pañcasu indriyesu jāgarantesū’’ti, jāgarantesu baddhābhāvena sakiccappasutatāya sakiccasamatthatāya cāti attho. Sottaṃva suttā pamādaniddābhāvato. Tameva suttabhāvaṃ puggalādhiṭṭhānāya kathāya dassetuṃ ‘‘kasmā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Pamajjati, pamādo vā etassa atthīti pamādo, tassa bhāvo pamādatā, tāya, pamattabhāvenāti attho.
这样解释了偈颂第一句的义理后,为了解释第二句,他说了‘如此,在沉睡者中’等语。其义应依前述方式来理解。因为对于随眠作用未被断除、且为盖障所覆的有情,未生起的贪等烦恼尘垢会生起,已生起者则会增长,所以说‘正是以诸盖障来吸取烦恼尘垢’。因此他说了‘前者’等语。在此,‘吸取’是指前者成为后者辗转生起的缘。经由属于圣道的信等五根,能够从一切杂染中得以清净。由于慧根本身便含摄了未知当知根等,其余诸根亦随之而转。显示巴利原文
Evaṃ gāthāya paṭhamassa pādassa atthaṃ vatvā dutiyassa vattuṃ ‘‘evaṃ suttesū’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tassattho vuttanayena veditabbo. Yasmā appahīnasupanakiriyāvasena sanīvaraṇassa puggalassa anuppannarāgarajādayo uppajjanti, uppannā pavaḍḍhanti, tasmā vuttaṃ ‘‘nīvaraṇeheva kilesarajaṃ ādiyatī’’ti. Tenevāha ‘‘purimā’’tiādi. Purimānaṃ pacchimānaṃ aparāparuppattiyā paccayabhāvo hettha ādiyanaṃ. Pañcahi indriyehi parisujjhatīti maggapariyāpannehi saddhādīhi pañcahi indriyehi sakalasaṃkilesato visujjhati. Paññindriyameva hi anaññātaññassāmītindriyādīni, itarāni ca anvayānīti.
7.《未通彻经》注释显示巴利原文
7. Appaṭividitasuttavaṇṇanā
7 由于对流转、还灭及二者之因进行分类的法,也包含在四圣谛之中,所以他说“法即四圣谛法”。因为四圣谛也包含在四圣谛中。“未通彻”即未能以遍知、现观等方式证知。“于恶见言论中”即在被称为恶见的言论中,那些言论是由恶见所转起的。“从此以外的”即从此教内之人以外的其他人。“依法性”即依自性,意思是自然而然地。“他们行去”即他们执取恶见而安住。“被他人”即被持恶见者。“被引导”即在恶见的执取中被驱策。因此他说“在那里”等。“能觉醒”即从放逸之眠中觉醒。“行道是贤善的”,因为所宣说的法已被开显,并且为了觉醒而如理转起。显示巴利原文
7. Pavattinivattitadubhayahetuvibhāgassa dhammassapi catusaccantogadhattā āha ‘‘dhammāti catusaccadhammā’’ti. Cattāripi hi ariyasaccāni catusaccantogadhāni. Appaṭividdhāti pariññābhisamayādivasena anabhisamitā. Diṭṭhigatavādesūti diṭṭhigatasaññitesu vādesu. Diṭṭhigatehi te pavattitā. Ito paresanti ito sāsanikehi paresaṃ aññesaṃ. Dhammatāyāti sabhāvena, sayamevāti attho. Gacchantīti pavattanti diṭṭhivādaṃ paggayha tiṭṭhanti. Parenāti diṭṭhigatikena. Nīyantīti diṭṭhivādasaṅgaṇhane uyyojīyanti. Tenāha ‘‘tatthā’’tiādi. Pabujjhitunti pamādaniddāya paṭibujjhituṃ. Paṭipadā yathādesitassa dhammassa kathitatāya, paṭibujjhituṃ yoniso pavattiyamānattā bhaddikā.
“以因”即以正理。“以缘由”即以觉悟四圣谛之因。如同掌中的余甘子果一样,他了知一切所知,故为一切知者;正是以此一切知正等觉而为佛陀,故为一切知佛陀。“独觉佛”是指:各自独自觉悟,因不与他人共通,以独觉智觉悟诸谛,故为独觉佛。“四谛觉者”是指:依他人教诫而觉悟四圣谛,因为他没有自然觉悟,故唯称四谛觉者。“闻觉者”是指:以听闻及闻所成智,觉悟蕴等分类的所知,故为闻觉者。除一切知佛陀与独觉佛外,其余的上首弟子、大声闻、普通声闻、离贪者及漏尽者,前三种也适用,因有“正觉者”等语。共住即以此而住,指行仪。世间共住即世间的共同生活,在此中。于身恶行等差别之中,有不平;或因失念,而在邪恶的众生类中,有不平。他因与不平结合,故为不平;或指在贪等不平的烦恼类中。舍弃了这不平,超越了这不平之后,他们便与先前的正觉者平等、相似、相应而行持、转起。显示巴利原文
Hetunāti ñāyena. Kāraṇenāti catusaccānaṃ sambodhayuttiyā. Hatthatale āmalakaṃ viya sabbaṃ ñeyyaṃ jānātīti sabbaññū, teneva sabbaññutābhisambodhena buddhoti sabbaññubuddho. Paccekaṃ parehi asādhāraṇatāya visuṃ sayambhuñāṇena saccāni buddhavāti paccekabuddho. Paropadesena catusaccaṃ bujjhatīti catusaccabuddho. Tathā hi so sayambhutāya abhāvato kevalaṃ catusaccabuddhoti vuccati. Sutena sutamayañāṇena khandhādibhedaṃ ñeyyaṃ buddhavāti sutabuddho. Sabbaññubuddhapaccekabuddhe ṭhapetvā avasesā aggasāvakamahāsāvakāpi pakatisāvakāpi vītarāgā avasesā khīṇāsavā. Tayopi purimā vaṭṭanti sambuddhātiādivacanato. Sannivasati etenāti sannivāso, caritaṃ. Lokassa sannivāso lokasannivāso, tasmiṃ. Kāyaduccaritādibhede visame. Satisammosena visame vā sattanikāye. So hi visamayogato visamo. Rāgavisamādike visame vā kilesajāte. Taṃ visamaṃ pahāya taṃ visamaṃ ajjhupekkhitvā samaṃ sadisaṃ yuttarūpaṃ, purimakehi vā sambuddhehi samaṃ sadisaṃ caranti vattanti.
8.《善忘失经》注释显示巴利原文
8. Susammuṭṭhasuttavaṇṇanā
8 “善忘失”即极度地、过分地忘失。七有学确实是极度忘失而丧失的。然而,他们尚未证得,怎么会说是丧失了呢?因此他说“正如”等。“将会证得”即他将证得。“他说”——这是句子的关联。其余如“诸法”等词,与紧接着的下一偈所说完全相同。显示巴利原文
8.Susammuṭṭhāti suṭṭhu ativiya sammuṭṭhā. Satta sekkhā hi susammusitā vinaṭṭhā. Kathaṃ pana te anadhigatā naṭṭhā nāma hontīti āha ‘‘yathā hī’’tiādi. Adhigatassāti adhigato assa. So vadantoti sambandho. Sesanti ‘‘dhammā’’tiādi. Purimasadisamevāti anantaragāthāya vuttasadisameva.
9.《欲慢经》注释显示巴利原文
9. Mānakāmasuttavaṇṇanā
9 不舍弃慢——诸如优越等分类的慢,反而执持此慢而游行者,即名为欲求者,因此说“欲求慢者、希求慢者”。“调御”:以此调伏心——念觉支等属于定方面的法即是调御。“调御”:调伏以意为第六的诸根,即是根律仪的调御。“调御”:调伏、舍弃烦恼,即是慧的调御。“调御”:依止息而调伏身业等,即是布萨业的调御。“调御”:调伏、教导忿、恨、覆、慢等,即是安忍的调御。因此,正是由于“调御”一词仅意指定方面的诸法。另有读为“无有寂默”;对于未得定者,即是对定的排斥,此义明确。显示巴利原文
9. Seyyādibhedaṃ mānaṃ appahāya taṃ paggayha vicaranto kāmento nāma hotīti āha ‘‘mānaṃ kāmentassa icchantassā’’ti. Damati cittaṃ etenāti damo, satisambojjhaṅgādiko samādhipakkhiko damo. Manacchaṭṭhāni indriyāni dametīti damo, indriyasaṃvaro. Kilese dameti pajahatīti damo, paññā. Upavasanavasena kāyakammādiṃ dametīti damo, uposathakammaṃ. Kodhūpanāhamakkhamānādike dameti vinetīti damo, adhivāsanakhanti. Tenevāti ‘‘damo’’ti samādhipakkhikadhammānaṃ eva adhippetattā . ‘‘Na monaṃ atthī’’ti ca pāṭho. Asamāhitassāti samādhipaṭikkhepo jotito.
为说明渡过死域的彼岸,故说“牟尼即四道智”。确实,除此以外,没有其他法能成就此事。“了知”的意思是:以无痴通达的方式而通彻了悟。“死域”:死亡安立于此,故称死域,即指五蕴,因为五蕴是死法。“它的”:指死域的。“彼岸”:成为对岸的涅槃。“渡”:在此,渡是圣道的作用,故说“通彻了悟、到达”。同样,还会接着说“所谓通达之渡已被说出”。“不能渡、不能通彻了悟、不能到达”——这样的读法在此是合理的。若非如此理解,那么“这是所说的”等说明便会前后矛盾。“一人住在林野”:意思是,独自一人住在林野中。显示巴利原文
Maccudheyyassa pārataraṇassa vuccamānattā ‘‘monanti catumaggañāṇa’’nti vuttaṃ. Na hi tato aññena taṃ sambhavati. Jānāti asammohapaṭivedhavasena paṭivijjhatīti attho. Maccu dhīyati etthāti maccudheyyaṃ, khandhapañcakaṃ maraṇadhammattā. Tassevāti maccudheyyasseva. Pāraṃ paratīrabhūtaṃ nibbānaṃ. Tareyyāti ettha taraṇaṃ nāma ariyamaggabyāpāroti āha ‘‘paṭivijjheyya pāpuṇeyyā’’ti. Tathā hi vakkhati ‘‘paṭivedhataraṇaṃ nāma vutta’’nti. ‘‘Na tareyya na paṭivijjheyya na pāpuṇeyya vā’’ti ayamettha pāṭho yutto. Aññathā ‘‘idaṃ vuttaṃ hotī’’tiādivacanaṃ virujjheyya. Eko araññe viharantoti ekākī hutvā araññe viharantoti attho.
固然,依靠较低的道也能断除一部分慢,但唯有依靠最上的道才能无余断除它,因此说“以阿拉汉道断除九种慢”。“以近行安止定”:这是说以近行定与安止定两者,而不是仅以近行定来指单纯的定,因为不能以单独的语句圆满表达。实际上,绝不存在没有达到安止的出世间禅那。“善心者”:这是心与智相结合的特征用词,因此说“因与智相应故”等等。同样,还会接着说“在‘善心者’一词中,以心显示了慧”。“于一切处彻底解脱”:这是说,对于一切有等,心已脱离牵绊,对于一切种类的蕴等,已彻底脱离关联,故说“成为于一切蕴、处、界等之中得解脱”。若没有作证通达,遍知通达便不可能存在,因此说“所说的是有关三地……的道”。显示巴利原文
Kāmaṃ heṭṭhimamaggehipi ekaccassa mānassa pahānaṃ labbhati. Aggamaggeneva pana tassa anavasesato pahānanti āha – ‘‘arahattamaggena navavidhamānaṃ pajahitvā’’ti. Upacārasamādhipubbako appanāsamādhīti vuttaṃ ‘‘upacārappanāsamādhīhī’’ti, na upacārasamādhimattena samādhimattaṃ sandhāya paccekaṃ vākyaparisamāpanassa ayujjanato. Na hi appanaṃ appattaṃ lokuttarajjhānaṃ atthi. ‘‘Sucetaso’’ti cittassa ñāṇasahitatāya lakkhaṇavacananti āha ‘‘ñāṇasampayuttatāyā’’tiādi. Tathā hi vakkhati ‘‘sucetasoti ettha cittena paññā dassitā’’ti. ‘‘Sabbadhi vippamutto’’ti sabbesu bhavādīsu visaṃsaṭṭhacitto sabbaso khandhādīhi visaṃyutto hotīti vuttaṃ ‘‘sabbesu khandhāyatanādīsu vippamutto hutvā’’ti. Pariññāpaṭivedho sacchikiriyapaṭivedhena vinā natthīti āha ‘‘tebhūmaka…pe… vutta’’nti.
因依慢而造作恶行,此慢即名为戒的破坏者。因此,‘所以’是说慢为戒的对立面。通过这样称扬断除对立面,增上心学便依其自性被阐明了,这是它的本意。此处的‘以心’,是指被‘善’(su-)所殊胜的心。因此,‘所以’是说已显示了慧。以‘善心者’一词,便分别说明了增上戒学、增上心学与增上慧学。在相违的关系中,存在着能别与所别的关系,为了显示此义,先说了‘所谓增上戒,即于有戒时存在’等,然后为了详细显示那两者的区别,才说了‘因此’等。第一种解说方法是依杂合的理路展开,为了显示不杂合的理路,又说了‘再者’等这第二种解说方法。在‘已等入者’一词中,也应联系‘为希求涅槃者’来解释。即使尚未达到作为观之足处,也通过令其义生起等方式而等入,这便是此理路与前一种理路的区别所在。然而,这里的增上慧与前一理路相比并无区别,因此没有单独提出。总之,从不同术语和自性两方面涵摄一切。因为三学都已完整地说出,所以便已包含了三学,也就是已将全部教法宣说了出来。显示巴利原文
Mānaṃ nissāya duccaritacaraṇato māno nāmāyaṃ sīlabhedano. Tasmāti mānassa sīlapaṭipakkhabhāvato. Iminā paṭipakkhappahānakittanena. Adhicittasikkhā kathitā sarūpato evāti adhippāyo. Ettha cittenāti su-saddena visesitacittena. Tasmāti paññāya dassitattā. Imināti ‘‘sucetaso’’ti iminā padena. Adhisīlasikkhā adhicittasikkhā adhipaññāsikkhāti sīlādīnipi visesetvā vuttāni. Sambhave byabhicāre ca visesanavisesitabbatāti taṃ dassento ‘‘adhisīlañca nāma sīle sati hotī’’tiādiṃ vatvā tadubhayaṃ vibhāgena dassetuṃ ‘‘tasmā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Paṭhamanayo saṅkaravasena pavattoti asaṅkaravasena dassetuṃ ‘‘apicā’’tiādinā dutiyanayo vutto. ‘‘Samāpannā’’ti etthāpi ‘‘nibbānaṃ patthayantenā’’ti ānetvā sambandho. Vipassanāya pādakabhāvaṃ anupagatāpi tadatthaṃ nibbattanādivasena samāpannāti ayamattho purimanayato viseso. Adhipaññāya panettha purimanayato viseso natthīti sā anuddhaṭā. Samodhānetvāti pariyāyato sarūpato ca saṅgahetvā. Sakalasāsananti tissannaṃ kathitattā eva sikkhattayasaṅgahaṃ sakalasāsanaṃ kathitaṃ hotīti.
10.《林野经》注释显示巴利原文
10. Araññasuttavaṇṇanā
10 ‘烦恼已寂灭者’:指已经熄灭烦恼热恼的人。由于依戒等功德而生起,并由此止息了怖畏,贤士们才被称为‘寂静者’,因此说‘或者是指贤智者’。所以经典中说‘寂静者实……’等。‘行最胜行者’:指修行最胜行的人。从善凡夫开始,比丘便可算作住于道梵行的人,因此进一步说明是‘住于道梵行的人’,至于圣者们面色的澄净自然更不必说。‘根本业处’:即恒常持守的业处,也就是根本所缘。‘异分心续’:指心在各种不同所缘上转起的心相续。这种心续因散乱、混乱而不得清净,与安止等持的心续相异,故称异分心续。‘进入’:指与定相应的等同心续进入了止的轨道。‘心变得澄净’:是说专注于根本业处、乐住于彼处的修行心变得澄净后生起。‘血液变得澄净’:是因心无浑浊,血液便不浊。‘变得清净’:由于因(心)的清净,诸根门变得清净。‘面色犹如棕榈果的表面’:这是形容面色。应把‘表面’一词与句首表示脱离的词连接起来。显示巴利原文
10.Santakilesānanti vūpasantakilesapariḷāhānaṃ. Yasmā sīlādiguṇasambhavaṃ tato eva bhayasantañca upādāya paṇḍitā ‘‘santo’’ti vuccanti, tasmā vuttaṃ ‘‘paṇḍitānaṃ vā’’ti. Tenāha ‘‘santo have’’tiādi. Seṭṭhacārīnanti seṭṭhacariyaṃ carantānaṃ. Yasmā puthujjanakalyāṇato paṭṭhāya bhikkhu maggabrahmacariyavāsaṃ vasati nāma, tasmā āha ‘‘maggabrahmacariyavāsaṃ vasantāna’’nti. Ariyānaṃ pana mukhavaṇṇassa pasīdane vattabbameva natthi. Mūlakammaṭṭhānanti pārihāriyakammaṭṭhānaṃ. Visabhāgasantatīti nānārammaṇesu pavattacittasantati. Sā hi vikkhepabyākulatāya appasannā samāhitacittasantatiyā visabhāgasantati. Okkamatīti samādhisabhāgā cittasantati samathavīthiṃ anupavisati. Cittaṃ pasīdatīti kammaṭṭhānanirataṃ bhāvanācittaṃ sandhāyāha, taṃ pasannaṃ hutvā pavattati. Lohitaṃ pasīdatīti cittakālussiyassābhāvato lohitaṃ anāvilaṃ hoti. Parisuddhāni honti kāraṇassa parisuddhabhāvato. Tālaphalamukhassa viya mukhassa vaṇṇo hotīti mukha-saddassa ādimhi pamuttapadena yojetabbo. Evañhi cassa pamuttaggahaṇaṃ samatthitaṃ hoti tālaphalamukhassa vaṇṇasampadāsadisattā. Tibhūmako eva tebhūmako.
‘不追忆过去’:他们以过去所得的利养为行相,对此不忧愁、不悲叹。因渴爱而妄想分别,故说‘不希求’。‘以任何一种方式’:即随任何一种方式。‘于当下所得’:说明他们没有储存与积蓄的受用。‘依三种方式的因’:即依三种方式的因,意思是说以三种特相的知足为相。显示巴利原文
Atītaṃ nānusocanti atītaṃ paccayalābhaṃ lakkhaṇaṃ katvā na socanti na anutthunanti. Jappanataṇhāya vasena na parikappantīti āha ‘‘na patthentī’’ti . Yena kenacīti itarītarena. Taṅkhaṇe laddhenāti sannidhikāraparibhogābhāvamāha. Tividhenapi kāraṇenāti tippakārena hetunā, tilakkhaṇasantosanimittanti attho.
‘毁灭’(vināsaṃ),即导致毁灭的原因。所谓‘凡被这些所毁灭者,即为毁灭’,是指贪、瞋及与它们俱起的恶法。如同对于无色身,它同样特别是导致色身干枯的原因,因此说‘由此两种原因’。‘被割截’(luto):即被割断之义。显示巴利原文
Vināsanti vināsanahetuṃ. Vinassanti etehīti vināso, lobhadosā tadekaṭṭhā ca pāpadhammā . Arūpakāyassa viya rūpakāyassapi visesato sukkhabhāvakāraṇanti āha ‘‘etena kāraṇadvayenā’’ti. Lutoti lūno.
二、欢喜品显示巴利原文
2. Nandanavaggo
一、欢喜经注疏显示巴利原文
1. Nandanasuttavaṇṇanā
11 若说‘tatra bhagavā’,在词语的连贯性上不如说‘tatra kho bhagavā’来得顺畅,因此注释说‘为了词句的顺畅’。‘Parisajeṭṭhake’意指众中之首,即那些在那次说法中特别能领悟法义的人。‘Parisajeṭṭhake bhikkhū’即四众中最为尊长的比丘。因为比丘众是四众中最先成立的,故称尊长。‘Āmantesi’意为召唤、引起注意;而召唤即是令知晓,故注释说‘令知晓’。‘Bhadante’一词含有尊重、恭敬与随喜之意,就其含义而言,‘bhadante’即‘愿您得吉祥’,因为说话者自身已达圆满究竟,亦能为他人带来安稳。‘Bhagavato paccassosuṃ’中的‘bhagavato’为属格,但作呼格用,应依上下文义通顺理解,故注释说‘回应了世尊的话’。而此处的‘bhagavato’为随顺表达。显示巴利原文
11. ‘‘Tatra bhagavā’’ti vutte na tathā byañjanānaṃ siliṭṭhatā, yathā ‘‘tatra kho bhagavā’’ti vutteti āha ‘‘byañjanasiliṭṭhatāvasenā’’ti. Parisajeṭṭhaketi parisāya jeṭṭhake, ye tassā desanāya visesato bhājanabhūtā. Parisajeṭṭhake bhikkhūti catuparisajeṭṭhake bhikkhū. Catunnaṃ hi parisānaṃ jeṭṭhā bhikkhuparisā paṭhamuppannattā. Āmantesīti sambodhesi, sambodhanañca jānāpananti āha ‘‘jānāpesī’’ti. Bhadanteti garugāravasappatissavavacanametaṃ, atthato pana bhadanteti bhaddaṃ tava hotu attano niṭṭhānapariyosānattā paresañca santatāvahattā. Bhagavato paccassosunti ettha bhagavatoti sāmivacanaṃ āmantanameva sambandhiatthapadaṃ apekkhatīti adhippāyenāha ‘‘bhagavato vacanaṃ patiassosu’’nti. Bhagavatoti pana idaṃ patissavanasambandhena sampadānavacanaṃ yathā ‘‘devadattassa paṭissuṇātī’’ti. Yaṃ panettha vattabbaṃ, taṃ nidānavaggassa ādisuttavaṇṇanāyaṃ āgamissati.
“三十三天众”,即名为三十三天的天部。“第二天界”,指在六欲天中排在第二的天界。三十三位共同修福之人,转生到了那里。他们共同居住之处便是三十三天,而依共住之理,居于该处的天人也得名三十三天,因此注释说“以摩伽青年等”。然而,有某一种观点会由此生起嗔恚,为不加采纳而说“他们说”。为指出那种观点的过失,才说了“然而因为”等。故而后文会称“如此便成为无过失之句”。“唯是假名”指它仅是约定俗成的名称,并不依据实际意义而成立。显示巴利原文
Tāvatiṃsakāyoti tāvatiṃsasaññito devanikāyo. Dutiyadevalokoti chasu kāmalokesu dutiyo devaloko. Tettiṃsa janā sahapuññakārino tattha uppannā, taṃsahacaritaṭṭhānaṃ tāvatiṃsaṃ, tannivāsinopi tāvatiṃsanāmakā sahacaraṇañāyenāti āha ‘‘maghena māṇavenā’’tiādi. Ayaṃ pana kecivādo byāpanno hotīti taṃ arocentena ‘‘vadantī’’ti vuttaṃ. Byāpannataṃ dassento ‘‘yasmā panā’’tiādimāha. Tathā hi vakkhati ‘‘evaṃ hi niddosaṃ padaṃ hotī’’ti. Nāmapaṇṇattiyevāti atthanirapekkhattā niruḷhasamaññā eva.
“彼林”,即那片近林。于“已经进入”一处,反复提及“进入”,是为了表明:即使那些进入林中的众生遭遇了痛苦,尚且会因自身的成就而欢喜,更何况在未遭苦时,所以才开示了“于五种”等语。“被带入者”,意指通过强制进出的方式被带入场中的人。在命终时,那些身形尚现些许变坏的天人,消失时“如雪团消融”;而另有一些身形并不见变坏、倏然隐没的天人,则被说为“如灯焰熄灭”。“使喜悦”,指此园自然能使喜悦和忧恼的众生都生起欢喜。“于欢喜园”,指以此为名的欢喜园。“被围绕”,因前文出现了“天女”一词,此处虽用阴性词形,实际所指却是天子。显示巴利原文
Taṃ vananti taṃ upavanaṃ. Paviṭṭhe paviṭṭhe dukkhappattepi attano sampattiyā nandayati, pageva adukkhappatteti dassetuṃ ‘‘pañcasu hī’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Pavesitānanti pakoṭṭhavārena pavesitānampīti adhippāyo. Cavanakāleyeva thokaṃ dissamānavikārā hutvā cavanti, te sandhāya ‘‘himapiṇḍo viya vilīyantī’’ti vuttaṃ. Ye pana adissamānavikārā sahasā antaradhāyanti, te sandhāya ‘‘dīpasikhā viya vijjhāyantī’’ti vuttanti vadanti. Nandayati pakatiyā somanassitaṃ domanassitañca. Nandaneti evaṃanvatthanāmake uyyāne. Parivutāti ‘‘devatā’’ti vacanaṃ upādāya itthiliṅgavasena vuttaṃ. Devaputto hi so.
“因生于天界而为天”,故注释说“生于天界者”。从应被贪爱这一面、以欲的束缚,以及彼此互不混杂交错的自性,它们被称为欲的部分。“具足”,指到达、具备。“遍行享乐”,指周遍地游戏、乐在其中。此词若相对于“以五欲功德”而言,在表示动作者时为具格;若相对于前文而言,则为伴随义。因为游戏而行,所以说“正在游戏”。另外,“遍行享乐”也可解释为“使到处转起”,因此说“使诸根遍转”。在第一种解释中,“遍行”是受用、享受之义;在第二种解释中,则是旋转、转起之义。“而他”,即是“于其时”一语所表示的那一时。“现在”,则指如今。因此,总意是“那时,他在游行”。“以五欲功德”,这里应理解为具格。显示巴利原文
Divi bhavattā dibbāti āha ‘‘devaloke nibbattehī’’ti. Kāmetabbatāya kāmabandhanehi, tathā aññamaññaṃ asaṃkiṇṇasabhāvatāya kāmakoṭṭhāsehi. Upetāti upagatā samannāgatā. Paricārayamānāti pariramamānā. Idañhi padaṃ apekkhitvā ‘‘kāmaguṇehī’’ti kattari karaṇavacanaṃ, purimāni apekkhitvā sahayoge. Ramamānā carantīti katvā vuttaṃ ‘‘ramamānā’’ti. Paricārayamānāti vā parito samantato cārayamānāti atthoti āha ‘‘indriyāni sañcārayamānā’’ti. Paṭhamanaye hi anubhavanattho paricaraṇasaddo, dutiyanaye parivattanattho. So panāti ‘‘tāyaṃ velāya’’nti vuttakālo. Adhunāti sampati. So vicarīti sambandho. Kāmaguṇehīti hetumhi karaṇavacanaṃ. Ovutoti yathā taṃ na ñāyati, evaṃ pihitacitto. Nivuto pariyonaddhoti tasseva vevacanaṃ. Tenāha ‘‘lokābhibhūto’’ti. Āsabhinti seṭṭhaṃ ‘‘aggohamasmi lokassā’’tiādinā (dī. ni. 2.31; ma. ni. 3.207) bhāsanto bodhisatto viya.
“唯见有何义?”(仅仅见有什么意义呢?)答言:“那些……因为……”,这是指安住于欢喜园中受用欲乐的情形。“人与天”指生为人的天神,因此说“天男子”。因为太少、太多或不足的数目都不能算是真正的计数,所以说“三遍十”。本来应当说“三十三”,这是一种惯用语。这是以眷属的数量来计算的,而非以名声计算。因为名声是基于戒行等德相的。所谓“具足名声”,当想要获取赞誉时,依据“三十三天长寿、容色美丽、快乐众多”等话语,便可笼统地说他们具足名声。显示巴利原文
Kevalaṃ dassanaṃ kimatthiyanti āha – ‘‘ye…pe… vasenā’’ti, tasmiṃ nandanavane avaṭṭhitakāmabhāgānubhavanavasenāti attho. Naradevānanti purisabhūtadevatānaṃ. Tenāha ‘‘devapurisāna’’nti. Appakaṃ adhikaṃ ūnaṃ vā gaṇanūpagaṃ nāma na hotīti ‘‘tikkhattuṃ dasanna’’nti vuttaṃ. ‘‘Tettiṃsāna’’nti hi vattabbe ayaṃ ruḷhī. Parivārasaṅkhātena, na kittisaṅkhātenāti adhippāyo. Sīlācārādiguṇanemittikā hi kitti. ‘‘Tāvatiṃsā devā dīghāyukā vaṇṇavanto sukhabahulā’’ti evamādivacanena yase icchite avisesetvāva ‘‘yasena sampannāna’’nti sakkā vattuṃ.
“圣弟子女”指入流者。也有人说是指一来者。“翻转了意图”意为:法的真实本质并非如你这愚痴之人所想的那样,因此转变了那位天女的意图。“一向乐”就是指涅槃。因为欲乐是苦、是变易法,依此意而驳回了她的意图。虽然第四地的诸行也是无常,但不适合用来作观照,所以只取前三地的诸行来说明,以与观照相呼应。“成为”指先前并不存在,依靠诸缘的和合而成为、生起,这显示了它们的有分(存在的一面)。“以无有义”即从其自性灭去、坏灭的状态来说。显示巴利原文
Ariyasāvikāti sotāpannā. ‘‘Sakadāgāminī’’ti keci. Adhippāyaṃ vivaṭṭetvāti yathā tvaṃ andhabāle maññasi, dhammasabhāvo evaṃ na hotīti tassā devatāya adhippāyaṃ viparivattetvā. Ekantato sukhaṃ nāma nibbānameva. Kāmā hi dukkhā vipariṇāmadhammāti iminā adhippāyena tassā adhippāyaṃ paṭikkhipitvā. Kāmaṃ catutthabhūmakāpi saṅkhārā aniccā eva, te pana sammasanūpagā na hontīti tebhūmakaggahaṇaṃ sammasanayoggena. Hutvāti pubbe avijjamānā paccayasamavāyena bhavitvā uppajjitvā. Etena nesaṃ bhāvabhāgo dassito. Abhāvatthenāti sarasanirodhabhūtena viddhaṃsanabhāvena.
“无常”即非恒常,因此对它们不能生起“这些是我的乐”等想法,故称无常。“生灭性”指刹那刹那生灭的性质,所以说“生……的同义词”。或者说,前面的是后果之因的异名,因此说“因为……”等。“在那之后”指在那些生灭的中间。“中间处”指住时。那些认为诸行没有住时的说法是错误的。因为,如同一个法的生相与灭相被区分开来,否则就会导致一法生、另一法灭;同样地,已生的法必定存在一个趋向于灭的状态,那便是住时。因为不能说正在生起的法当下即灭。“寂灭”意指经由究竟寂灭的涅槃才是乐,并非你所希求的那些欲乐,这是此处所要表达的意思。显示巴利原文
Aniccā addhuvā, tato eva ‘‘mayhaṃ ime sukhā’’ti vā na iccāti aniccā. Uppādavayasabhāvāti khaṇe khaṇe uppajjananirujjhanasabhāvā. Tenāha ‘‘uppa…pe… vevacana’’nti. Purimassa vā pacchimaṃ kāraṇavevacananti āha ‘‘yasmā vā’’tiādi. Tadanantarāti tesaṃ uppādavayānaṃ antare. Vemajjhaṭṭhānanti ṭhitikkhaṇaṃ vadati. Ye pana ‘‘saṅkhārānaṃ ṭhiti natthī’’ti vadanti, tesaṃ taṃ micchā. Yathā hi tasseva dhammassa uppādāvatthāya bhinnā bhaṅgāvatthā icchitā, aññathā aññaṃ uppajjati, aññaṃ nirujjhatīti āpajjati, evaṃ uppannassa bhaṅgābhimukhāvatthā icchitabbā, sāva ṭhitikkhaṇo. Na hi uppajjamāno bhijjatīti sakkā viññātunti. Vūpasamasaṅkhātanti accantaṃ vūpasamasaṅkhātaṃ nibbānameva sukhaṃ, na tayā adhippetā kāmāti adhippāyo.
2. 欢喜者经注释显示巴利原文
2. Nandatisuttavaṇṇanā
12 “欢喜”:此处指伴随喜悦的欲爱的作用,故说“满足”,即因欲乐的满足而倍感欢喜。“有子”:即拥有儿子。此处的“mā”词素表示众多,故译为“多子”。为了显明多子的目的,而说“因为对他……”等。顾及到“充满”一词,“谷物的”用了属格。“如是说”:即依此义而说,意为具有如此意图。“牛主”:即拥有牛。这里的“mā”也表示众多。“得牛味成就”:指依凭牛的产品而获得的成就。“依着”:这里是复数。“hi”是表示原因的不变词。“能令欢喜”:能生起喜悦与心的愉悦,故称为能令欢喜者。虽然从究竟意义上说,欲乐因为是苦的依处,可以称为“依着”,但为了随顺那位天女的意图,而说“因为是乐的依处”。后面两句涉及烦恼与苦事的因:虽然一切轮回之苦皆以烦恼为因,但恶法尤其会导致恶趣再生,因此说“烦恼也因为是恶趣苦的依处”。“随增”:指靠近、产生。虽生为人,却因缺乏饮食衣物而多苦,如同鬼一般,这称为“人鬼”。虽生为人,却如上所说,由于无义的恶行而被他人伤害,犹如地狱众生。显示巴利原文
12.Nandatīti ettha nandanaṃ sappītikakāmataṇhākiccanti āha – ‘‘tussatī’’ti, tasmā kāmaparitosena haṭṭhatuṭṭho hotīti attho. Puttimāti puttavā. Pahūte cāyaṃ mā-saddoti āha ‘‘bahuputto’’ti. Bahuputtatāgahaṇena idaṃ payojananti dassento ‘‘tassa hī’’tiādimāha. Pūrentīti padaṃ apekkhitvā dhaññassāti sāmivacanaṃ. Iti āhāti imamatthaṃ sandhāyāha, evaṃadhippāyo hutvāti attho. Gosāmikoti gomā. Idhāpi pahūte mā-saddo. Gorasasampattinti gorasehi nipphajjanasampattiṃ. Upadhīti paccattabahuvacanaṃ. Hīti hetuatthe nipāto. Nandayanti pītisomanassaṃ janayantīti nandanā. Kāmaṃ dukkhassa adhiṭṭhānabhāvato nippariyāyato kāmā ‘‘upadhī’’ti vattabbataṃ arahanti, tassā pana devatāya adhippāyavasenāha ‘‘sukhassa adhiṭṭhānabhāvato’’ti. Kilesavatthuhetukattā sesapadadvayassa kiñcāpi sabbaṃ saṃsāradukkhaṃ kilesahetukaṃ, visesato pana pāpadhammā apāyūpapattiṃ nibbattentīti āha – ‘‘kilesāpi apāyadukkhassa adhiṭṭhānabhāvato’’ti. Upasaṃharamānāti upanentā uppādentā. Manussajātikopi dullabhaghāsacchādanatāya dukkhabahulo peto viyāti manussapeto. Manussajātikopi vuttarūpo anatthapātito parehi hiṃsito samāno nerayiko viyāti manussanerayiko.
如同以果实打落树上的果实一般。同样地,以九种方式:正如有子的人在〔过去、现在、未来〕三时中,会因儿子的毁灭、死亡、离散而忧愁;同样,有牛的人也会因为牛而以九种方式忧愁。五种欲功德的依着也会令人忧愁——应作这样的连接。“他的”:指那更向上贪求的人。“有欲乘者”:已生起欲贪的人。“有情”:即众生。如果衰败了,如果毁灭了,如同被箭射中一般。“他受苦”:即产生变异,意为忧愁。人的忧愁正是遭受愁击的缘。“无依着”:诚然,诸漏尽者由于证得圣道,已断除烦恼与行的依着,那么蕴的依着又怎样呢?即使在有余依时,那些蕴也不会成为生苦的因缘,而此处是就无余依而言,所以说“他是无依着的大漏尽者”。显示巴利原文
Phalena rukkhato phalaṃ pātento viya. Tatheva navahākārehīti yathā tīsu kālesu nāsamaraṇabhedanavasena puttimā puttanimittaṃ, tatheva gomā gonimittaṃ socati navappakārehi. Pañca kāmaguṇopadhīpi naraṃ socentīti yojanā. Tassāti yo uttari anugijjhati tassa. Kāmayānassāti jātakāmacchandassa. Jantunoti sattassa. Parihāyanti ce vinassanti ce. Sallaviddhovāti sallena viddho viya. Ruppatīti vikāraṃ āpajjati, socatīti attho. Narassa socanā sokaghaṭṭanapaccayo. Upadhayo natthīti kāmaṃ kilesābhisaṅkhārūpadhayo tāva khīṇāsavassa nattheva maggādhigamena nirodhitattā, khandhūpadhayo pana kathanti? Tepi tassa saupādisesakālepi aṭṭhuppattihetubhūtā na santeva, ayañca anupādisesakāle. Tenāha ‘‘so nirupadhi mahākhīṇāsavo’’ti.
3. 无子等经注释显示巴利原文
3. Natthiputtasamasuttavaṇṇanā
13 “子爱”:以“子”摄取,并省略了后续的词,故说“与子爱相等”。“go samitaṃ”:即“与牛相等”的意思,故说“与牛相等”。“与太阳相等的”:也就是如同太阳。此处属格表示部分与整体关系。因为经文紧接着说“随后是光辉”,由此可知,这个“部分”即指光辉,故说“与太阳的光辉相等”。“湖泊”(sarā):因以大水流流动(saranti),故称为湖泊,指巨大的蓄水池。所有这些湖泊都以大海为终极,因为对只在此岸的普通人而言,根本看不见湖的对岸。显示巴利原文
13. Puttapemaṃ puttaggahaṇena gahitaṃ uttarapadalopenāti āha ‘‘puttapemasama’’nti. Gosamitanti gohi samaṃ kataṃ. Tenāha ‘‘gohi sama’’nti. Sūriyassa samāti sūriyasamā. Avayavasambandhe cetaṃ sāmivacanaṃ. Avayavo cettha ābhā evāti viññāyati ‘‘anantaraṃ ābhā’’ti vuccamānattāti āha ‘‘sūriyābhāya samā’’tiādi. Mahoghabhāvena saranti savantīti sarā, mahantā jalāsayā. Sabbe te samuddaparamā orimajanehi adiṭṭhaparatīrattā tassa.
“没有任何爱等同于对自己之爱”这一偈颂,其义当依第一偈所说的方法来理解。意思是:没有任何一种爱,能与对自己的爱相等。可以借由这样一个故事来说明:有一女子,在无水荒漠中无法忍受酷热,她把啼哭的孩子抱在膝上,随后让孩子躺在地上,自己站到孩子上方为他遮阴,就此死去。因此他说:“父母等纵使抛弃子女,也绝不舍弃对自己的爱。”他也这样说过:显示巴利原文
Natthi attasamaṃ pemanti gāthāya paṭhamagāthāyaṃ vuttanayena attho veditabbo. Attapemena samaṃ pemaṃ nāma natthīti ayamattho. Anudakakantāre ghammasantāpaṃ asahantiyā aṅke ṭhapitaputtakaṃ kandantaṃ bhūmiyaṃ nipajjāpetvā tassa upari ṭhatvā mataitthivatthunā dīpetabbaṃ. Tenāha – ‘‘mātāpitādayo hi chaḍḍetvāpi puttadhītādayo’’ti. Tathā cāha –
以心遍游一切方所,
于任何处,终不见有比自我更可爱者;
同样地,对他者而言,各自的自我也都如此可爱,
因此,自爱之人不应伤害他人。”(《相应部》1.119;《自说》41;《导论》113)
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Sabbā disā anuparigamma cetasā, Nevajjhagā piyataramattanā kvaci; Evaṃ piyo puthu attā paresaṃ, Tasmā na hiṃse paramattakāmo’’ti. (saṃ. ni. 1.119; udā. 41; netti. 113);
无有任何财富堪与谷物等量齐观,因为依靠谷物,依食而活的众生才得以维系生命。所谓“在那样的时期”,即指饥荒时期。“仅能普照一处”:因为即便太阳,在一刹那间也没有能力将光芒遍满四大洲,何况其余光源,故说只能照亮一处。菩萨以生灭智之威力,令整个生类之田遍为光明,故说“智慧……能够……”。“破除黑暗”:指宿住智等智慧,当其运转时,能一举遍满而破除残余之一切黑暗,由此而生起。“而当雨降下时,那光明可达到发光的梵天”——这是就通常情形而言。显示巴利原文
Dhaññena samaṃ dhanaṃ nāma natthi, yasmā tappaṭibaddhā āhārūpajīvīnaṃ sattānaṃ jīvitavutti. Tathārūpe kāleti dubbhikkhakāle. Ekadesaṃyeva obhāsantīti ekasmiṃ khaṇe catūsu mahādīpesu obhāsaṃ pharituṃ asamatthattā sūriyassapi, pageva itaresaṃ. Bodhisattassa udayabbayassa ñāṇānubhāvena sakalajātikhettaṃ ekālokaṃ ahosīti āha ‘‘paññā…pe… sakkotī’’ti. Tamaṃ vidhamatīti pubbenivāsañāṇādayo paññā yattha pavattanti, tamanavasesaṃ byāpetvā ekappahārena pavattanato. ‘‘Vuṭṭhiyā pana pavattamānāya yāva ābhassarabhavanā’’ti pacuravasena vuttaṃ.
4. 《刹帝利经》的注释显示巴利原文
4. Khattiyasuttavaṇṇanā
14 从田地的争讼中护佑众生,所以称为「刹帝利」。天神是依自己的意趣而说的。「二足等」:用一个“等”字,将四足、妻子、儿子等都含摄在内。「佛陀等」:再以一个“等”字,将良骏、听受者、顺从的妻子和儿子等也包括了。所谓「二足中最胜」:此处并非意在限定“仅在二足中最胜”,而是要表达“(正自觉者)正是最胜的”。因此,正自觉者在二足众生及其它众生当中,由于他即出现于彼处,所以就是最胜的;因为没有比他更超上的存在,这就是此处的意思。所以才说:“然而当他生起时……”等等。能了知因与非因,所以称为「良骏」。「使执取」:如同使水不能沾湿那样,去执取那暴戾的大象。「不听从」,有人这样读诵。「听受者」:指具足恭敬、能接受言语的人。显示巴利原文
14. Khettato vivādā satte tāyatīti khattiyo. Vadati devatā attano ajjhāsayavasena. Dvipadādīnanti ādi-saddena catuppadabhariyaputtā gahitā. Buddhādayoti ādi-saddena ājānīyasussūsabhariyassavaputtā. Dvipadānaṃ seṭṭhoti ettha dvipadānaṃ eva seṭṭhoti nāyaṃ niyamo icchito, seṭṭho evāti pana icchito, tasmā sambuddho dvipadesu aññesu tattha ca uppajjanato seṭṭho eva sabbesampi uttaritarassa abhāvatoti ayamettha attho. Tenāha ‘‘uppajjamāno panesā’’tiādi. Kāraṇākāraṇaṃ ājānātīti ājānīyo. Gaṇhāpethāti yathā udako na temissati, evaṃ vāḷaṃ gaṇhāpetha. ‘‘Asussūsā’’ti keci paṭhanti. Āsuṇamānoti sappaṭissavo hutvā vacanasampaṭicchako.
5. 《战栗经》的注释显示巴利原文
5. Saṇamānasuttavaṇṇanā
15 「处于正午」:意思是过了上午、尚未到下午,正安住于正午时分。「皆安坐」:指为消除疲劳,全都坐了下来。其实这是将da字改作va字来指示的。因此才说“皆安坐,即安静休息”。“一切众生”:指所有靠食物维生的众生,由于暑热逼身,威仪路衰弱的时刻——也就是行、住等威仪都无力的时候。「作声如」:如同发出声音,正如所说在诵读其它大林时的情形那样。所以接着说“这就是它的相似物”,指有孔的竹节,也就是生有孔洞的风笛大竹节。因为找不到第二个同伴,由于不乐而战栗,所以这样说。「不小的乐」:指广大、殊胜的远离之乐。显示巴利原文
15.Ṭhite majjhanhiketi pubbaddhaṃ nikkhamitvā aparaddhaṃ appatvā ṭhitamajjhanhe. Sannisīvesūti parissamavinodanatthaṃ sabbaso sannisīdantesu. Da-kārassa hi va-kāraṃ katvā niddeso. Tenāha ‘‘sannisinnesu vissamamānesū’’ti. Sabbasattānanti sabbesañca āhārūpajīvitasattānaṃ ghammatāpane santattakāyānaṃ iriyāpathadubbalyakāloti ṭhānādiiriyāpathassa asamatthakālo. Saṇati viyāti saddaṃ karoti viya, yathā taṃ aññampi mahāvanaṃ vakkhamānanayena. Tenāha ‘‘tappaṭibhāgaṃ nāmeta’’nti chiddaveṇupabbānanti randhajātakīcakamahāveḷupabbānaṃ. Dutiyakaṃ sahāyaṃ alabhantī anabhiratiparitassanāya evamāha. Anappakaṃ sukhanti vipulaṃ uḷāraṃ vivekasukhaṃ.
因独自安住而进入空闲处,这里显示的是身远离。以无常随观等方法,断除了常想等颠倒想,从而使内心寂静,这显示的是心远离。在轮回中见到怖畏,因此具足这两种远离的比丘,由此更获得超越人法的喜乐。那种非人的喜,即是修习之喜。「前」:指前一部分。「后」:指后一部分。「其它」:指另外的。或者「前」指未来,意思是缘于未来;「后」指过去,因为对过去生起执取而障碍了修行。「彼」指嗔,因为它使心受到染污;「非彼」就是没有那个,指贪,如果这种贪不存在。以此来显示没有对未来的希求与对过去的追悔。「极其安乐」:由于最殊胜的盖——欲贪的离去,借由镇伏诸盖的禅那之力,成为极其安乐住。「一人住于林」:因为没有渴爱作为第二个伴侣,所以一个人住在林野中,过着远离的独住生活。其余与前说相似:这里剩余应说的内容,与第一首偈颂中所说的是同样的。显示巴利原文
Ekavihāratāya suññāgāraṃ paviṭṭhassa. Tena kāyavivekaṃ dasseti. Aniccānupassanādīhi niccasaññādippahānena santacittassa. Tena cittavivekaṃ dasseti. Saṃsāre bhayaṃ ikkhanato bhikkhuno ubhayavivekasampannassa, tato eva uttariṃ manussadhammato ratiṃ lābhino. Amānusī ratīti bhāvanārati. Puratoti purimabhāge. Pacchatoti pacchimabhāge. Aparoti añño. Puratoti vā anāgate, anāgataṃ ārabbhāti attho. Pacchatoti atīte atītaṃ ārabbha paṭipattiyā vibādhanato. Paroti kodho cittapaṭidussanatāya. Na paroti aparo, lobho, so ce na vijjati. Etena anāgatappajappanāya atītānusocanāya ca abhāvaṃ dasseti. Atīva phāsu bhavatīti nīvaraṇajeṭṭhakassa kāmacchandassa vigamena vikkhambhitanīvaraṇassa jhānassa vasena ativiya phāsuvihāro hoti. Ekassa vasato vaneti taṇhādutiyikābhāvena ekassa araññe vivekavāsaṃ vasato. Sesaṃ tādisamevāti sesamettha yaṃ vattabbaṃ, taṃ paṭhamagāthāyaṃ vuttasadisameva.
6. 《睡眠懈怠经》的注释显示巴利原文
6. Niddātandīsuttavaṇṇanā
16 在最后月,午后托钵返回,将僧伽梨衣敷为四折,右侧卧,正念正知——经典节略这些内容后,说“入眠”。这种不与唯作心相杂的有分流,属无记的睡眠。此种睡眠唯有漏尽者才会生起;在其前分与后分……生起的昏沉睡眠,才是此处所指的睡眠;对于非漏尽者,此种睡眠大多没有固定的时间。为显示其对立方必定存在的性质,所以说“因极度饥饿……等而来的怠惰”。以身怠惰为缘,成为精进对立面的四种不善蕴,名为“懈怠”。“懈怠”是从自性上说的,“懈怠状态”是从行相上说的,“成为懈怠心”指懈怠之心已生起。“怠惰”指带来怠惰的自性,“怠惰性”指成就怠惰的自性,“身舒伸”指身体的屈伸,“不善分的不乐”即属于不善分的不喜欢。“饭食所生的疲倦”如前所说,是以饮食为因、由食物的力量在身体中生起的疲劳。“染污”:由于令智慧变得羸弱,心被染污。因为心未得定,所以障碍其显现。圣道的“辉耀”即是生起,因此说“不辉耀、不显现,即是此义”。圣道其实并不是以辉耀或不辉耀来运作的。显示巴利原文
16. Pacchime māse pacchābhattaṃ piṇḍapātappaṭikkanto catugguṇaṃ saṅghāṭiṃ paññapetvā dakkhiṇena passena sato sampajānoti ettakaṃ pāṭhaṃ saṅkhipitvā ‘‘niddaṃ okkamitā’’ti vuttaṃ. Kiriyāmayacittehi avomisso bhavaṅgasoto abyākataniddā. Sā hi khīṇāsavānaṃ uppajjanārahā, tassā pubbabhāgāparabhāgesu…pe… uppannaṃ thinamiddhaṃ idhādhippetā niddā, sā akhīṇāsavānaṃ yebhuyyena aniyatakālā, tabbidhuraniyatasabbhāvaṃ dassento ‘‘aticchāta…pe… āgantukaṃ ālasiya’’nti āha. Kāyālasiyapaccayā vīriyassa paṭipakkhabhūtā cattāro akusalakkhandhā tandī nāma. Tandīti sabhāvaniddeso. Tandiyanāti ākāraniṃddeso. Tandīmanatāti tandībhūtacittatā. Ālasyanti alasabhāvāharaṇaṃ. Ālasyāyitattanti alasabhāvappatti. Kāyavijambhanāti kāyassa vināmanā. Akusalapakkhā ukkaṇṭhitatāti akusalapakkhiyā anabhirati. Bhattakilamathoti yathāvuttassa bhattavatthukassa āhārassa vasena sarīre uppajjanakakhedo. Upakkiliṭṭhoti paññāya dubbalīkaraṇena upakkiliṭṭhacitto. Cittassa asamāhitattā nivāritapātubhāvo. Ariyamaggassa jotanaṃ nāma uppajjanamevāti āha ‘‘na jotati, na pātubhavatīti attho’’ti. Na hi ariyamaggo jotiajotināmo pavattati.
“与道俱生的精进”:指与世间道和出世间道俱生的精进。这里意指混合道。“以去除故”(nīharitvā):表示去除的原因。这里的tvā声具有原因的意义,正如“以慧见已”等句中的用法。由此,“道得清净”这句话便得到了证成。也有人读作“圣道得清净”。显示巴利原文
Maggasahajātavīriyenāti lokiyalokuttaramaggasahajātavīriyena. Missakamaggo hi idha adhippeto. Nīharitvāti nīharaṇahetu. Hetuattho hi ayaṃ tvā-saddo ‘‘paññāya cassa disvā’’tiādīsu (ma. ni. 1.271) viya. Tena ‘‘maggo visujjhatī’’ti vacanaṃ samatthitaṃ hoti. ‘‘Ariyamaggaṃ visujjhatī’’ti keci paṭhanti.
7. 难行经注疏显示巴利原文
7. Dukkarasuttavaṇṇanā
17 “忍苦”(dukkhaṃ titikkhanti):指难以忍受的苦。这种苦难以承受,从着手实行来说称为“难行”,从致力于忍受来说称为“不堪忍”。“不敏者”(abyattena):因为没有能够了知对沙门性有益及无益诸法的、称为成就的慧,所以是不敏者。因此说“愚者”。有哪种法时便被称作沙门,那种法就是沙门性,故称“沙门法”。“以此”——即“难行与不堪忍,以及不敏者沙门性”这半偈——显示了如今要说之义。“已调伏者”(abhidantanti):指被征服调伏,意指上排牙齿。因为进食时,它如同臼和杵那样,特别能碾碎对方而活动。“放置”(ādhāya):即以压住的方式安放。“触喉”(tāluṃ āhacca):就像撞击上颚那样。“以心”(cetasā):指善心。而“心”(cittanti):指不善心。“如已镇伏”(abhiniggaṇhitvā):为了不让它过度现行,以镇伏的方式制止它。“至命终”(āpāṇakoṭikanti):直到命根尽处,即活到生命结束。“拥挤”(sambādheti):指……显示巴利原文
17. Dukkhaṃ titikkhanti duttitikkhaṃ. Tañca dukkhamaṃ dussahanaṃ ārambhavasena dukkaraṃ, anuyuñjanavasena duttitikkhanti. Abyattenāti sāmaññassa upakārānupakāre dhamme jānanasamatthāya veyyattiyasaṅkhātāya paññāya abhāvato na byattena. Tenāha ‘‘bālenā’’ti. Yasmiṃ dhamme sati samaṇoti vuccati, taṃ sāmaññanti āha ‘‘samaṇadhammo’’ti. Imināti ‘‘dukkaraṃ duttitikkhañca, abyattena ca sāmañña’’nti iminā gāthaddhena idaṃ dassetīti idaṃ idāni vuccamānaṃ atthajātaṃ dasseti. Abhidantanti abhibhavanadantaṃ, uparidantanti attho. So hi itaraṃ musalaṃ viya udukkhalaṃ visesato kassaci khādanakāle abhibhuyya vattati. Ādhāyāti nippīḷanavaseneva ṭhapetvā. Tāluṃ āhaccāti tālupadesamāhanitvā viya. Cetasāti kusalacittena. Cittanti akusalacittaṃ. Abhiniggaṇhitvāti yathā atisamudācāro na hoti, evaṃ vibādhanavasena niggahetvā. Āpāṇakoṭikanti pāṇakoṭipariyosānaṃ, parijīvanti attho. Sambādhetīti sambādho, antarāyiko. Bahū parissayāti ayoniso kāmavitakkādivasena.
“句”(pada):指心在此被认知,即是所缘。仅以威仪为句,故称“威仪句”。显示巴利原文
Pajjati cittametthāti padaṃ, ārammaṇaṃ. Iriyāpathaṃ eva padaṃ iriyāpathapadaṃ.
“颈与四足”:意指以颈为第五部分。或者,“它们收摄”意为收摄的原因,这是此处的含义。因此说“或收摄后”,即正确安放后,使其进入内部之义。“在自己的所缘颅盖中”,是说在其行处——内在之中。所谓收摄,即正在令其收摄。“不依止”:指对于三界中的任何法,不以渴爱、邪见与执取的方式去依止。“无害”:是由于舍离了害的因相。“以具拯救性而安住者”:即是以从戒的破损中拯拔的形式而安住,也就是具足悲悯者。因此说“缘于悲悯”。显示巴利原文
Gīvā cattāro pādāti gīvapañcamāni. Samodahanti vā samodhānahetūti ayamettha atthoti āha – ‘‘samodahitvā vā’’ti, sammā odhāya anto pavesetvāti attho. Sake ārammaṇakapāleti gocarajjhattaṃ vadati. Samodahanti samodahanto. Anissitoti tebhūmakadhammesu kañcipi dhammaṃ taṇhādiṭṭhābhinivesavasena anissito. Avihiṃsamāno vihiṃsānimittānaṃ pajahanena. Ullumpanasabhāvasaṇṭhitenāti sīlabyasanato uddharaṇarūpe saṇṭhitena, karuṇāyuttenāti attho. Tenāha ‘‘kāruññataṃ paṭiccā’’ti.
8.《惭经》注释。显示巴利原文
8. Hirīsuttavaṇṇanā
18 “遮止”:即阻挡,不令其生起。“天神问”:指天神提出问题。“除去”:即移除,意思是,如同在任何情况下都不成为辱骂的对象那样,予以回避。“觉知”:指了知御者的方式。不让自己遭受打击,因为良驹知晓合宜的作为。并没有所谓“凭不真实的辱骂而得解脱”的人,因为愚者的责难本身就有真实与不真实的区别。因此世尊说:显示巴利原文
18.Nisedhetīti nivāreti pavattituṃ na deti. Pucchati devatā. Apaharantoti apanento, yathā sabbena sabbaṃ akkosavatthu na hoti, evaṃ pariharantoti attho. Bujjhati sārathividhaṃ. Attani nipātaṃ na deti, ājānīyo hi yuttaṃ pajānāti. Abhūtena abhūtakkosena parimutto nāma natthi bālānañca janānaṃ parāpavāde yuttapayuttabhāvato. Tenāha bhagavā –
沉默者被责备,多语者也被责备;
话语不多者同样被责备,世间没有不被责备的人。
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Nindanti tuṇhimāsīnaṃ, nindanti bahubhāṇinaṃ; Mitabhāṇimpi nindanti, natthi loke anindito’’ti. (dha. pa. 227);
「少」:即很少、寥寥几个,因此说“少量”。「常具念者」:这是说明以惭来遮止的原因。「到达」:即达到、证得。由于脱离了渴爱,故称为涅槃,也就是无为界。显示巴利原文
Tanuyāti vā katipayā. Tenāha ‘‘appakā’’ti. Sadā satāti hirinisedhabhāve kāraṇavacanaṃ. Pappuyyāti patvā adhigantvā. Vānato nikkhantattā nibbānaṃ, asaṅkhatadhātu.
9.《小屋经》注释。显示巴利原文
9. Kuṭikāsuttavaṇṇanā
19 “内部”:指母胎之内。“以居住处所之义”:即把它当作居住处所的那种状态。“家族传承”:指家族代代相传的习俗、家族的传统。“以相续之义”:指由于家族相续而形成的束缚状态。如此,对于所有问句所要表达的意思,以随许的方式说“这是一个表示多重意思的不变词”。养母、抚育者、姨母摩诃波阇波提·乔达弥,因为她们都等同于母亲,所以笼统地说“由于抛开而出家”。由于抛开而出家,这些关系便不存在了——应联系起来如此理解。再者,既然已经说了没有住母胎等事,那便等于表明在轮回中其实并没有什么束缚,因此这个意思就不再单独提出来说了。据说,这位天神就像凡夫不领会佛陀的功德那样,对此并不了解,所以才说出“我绑好铠甲后……”那些话。显示巴利原文
19.Antoti kucchiabbhantare. Vasanaṭṭhānaṭṭhenāti vasanabhāvena. Kulapaveṇinti kulācāraṃ kulatantiṃ. Santānakaṭṭhenāti kulasantatiyā bandhanabhāvena . Evaṃ sabbapadehi pucchitatthassa anujānanavasena ‘‘ekaṃsavacane nipāto’’ti vuttaṃ. Āpādikā posikā mātucchā mahāpajāpati mātā evāti katvā ‘‘pahāya pabbajitattā’’ti avisesato vuttaṃ. Pahāya pabbajitattā natthīti ānetvā sambandho. Puna mātukucchivāsādīnaṃ abhāvavacaneneva vaṭṭamhi bandhanassa abhāvo dīpito hotīti na gahito. Ayaṃ kira devatā yathā puthujjanā buddhānaṃ guṇe na jānanti, evaṃ na jānāti, tasmā ‘‘mayā sannāhaṃ bandhitvā’’tiādimāha.
第10篇 《三弥提经》解释显示巴利原文
10. Samiddhisuttavaṇṇanā
20 “多婆达”:因为具有炽热的状态,拥有炽热之水,所以称为多婆达,这是那个水池的名字。因此经中说:“炽热水池的”。“从此处”:就是从龙宫里的那个水池,流出一条名为多婆达的河。那条河随后涌上地面。“变成这样”是省略的说法。所谓“饿鬼世界”,有人说在这里是指铜釜地狱。不过,在最初的水池旁、山脚下的树林间,确实住着许多饿鬼,这个含义应当结合《饿鬼事》里的特征来阐明。“它从这里”:就是从那个水池流出的。“甘水”:指味道甘甜的水。“清水”:指极为清净的水,也就是没有污浊的水。“从那儿”:指从那条多婆达河。显示巴利原文
20. Tapanabhāvena tapanodakattā tapodāti tassa rahadassa nāmaṃ. Tenāha ‘‘tattodakassa rahadassā’’ti. Tatoti nāgabhavane udakarahadato tapodā nāma nadī sandati. Sā hi nadī bhūmitalaṃ ārohati. ‘‘Edisā jātā’’ti vacanaseso. Petalokoti lohakumbhinirayā idhādhippetāti vadanti. Rahadassa pana ādito pabbatapādavanantaresu bahū petā viharanti, svāyamattho petavatthupāḷiyālakkhaṇasaṃyuttena ca dīpetabbo. Yatāyanti yato rahadato ayaṃ. Sātodakoti madhurodako. Setodakoti parisuddhodako, anāvilodakoti attho. Tatoti tapodānadito.
“具足者”:由于身体各部分圆满具足,正是通过这种圆满成就而称为善成就者。因此经中说“容貌端严”等。他致力于核心的思惟法,或者具备这种特质,所以称为“勤行者”。“坐卧具”:指那些门窗安置妥善的住处,通过关闭门窗来调节温度。显示巴利原文
Samiddhoti avayavānaṃ sampuṇṇatāya saṃsiddhiyāva sammā iddho. Tenāha ‘‘abhirūpo’’tiādi. Padhāne sammasanadhamme niyutto, taṃ vā ettha atthīti padhāniko. Senāsanaṃ suṭṭhapitadvāravātapānaṃ, tesaṃ pidahanena utuṃ gāhāpetvā.
「先使身体清凉(Pubbāpayamāno)」:如同沐浴前先作预备一般,让身体逐渐变得清凉,然后再入水。为遮止不如法的行为并开示如法的规矩,所以先说“在那里……不应下去”。「环顾四方(sabbadisāpalokanaṃ)」:是为了确认沐浴之处是否远离他人。分辨清楚树桩等物,意在将衣物等安放在近水之处。「咳嗽一声」:是为了驱赶非人。必须「俯身向下」:即使在那一刻,也要保持上半身平直,避免暴露不雅之处。应将衣服“就放在衣服上面”,不可随意丢弃。「在水边(Udakante)」:指靠近水的地方。把「出汗处(Sinnaṭṭhāna)」,即被汗水浸湿的部位,展开晾干。然后“收好再叠放起来”,这是为了下次取用时方便。入水时“仅没至肚脐深(nābhippamāṇamattaṃ otaraṇaṃ)”,因为此深度已符合水刚好覆身的规范。“不搅起波浪”等等这些言教,都是在显示一种谨慎行持的方式。显示巴利原文
Pubbāpayamānoti nhānato pubbabhāge viya vodakabhāvaṃ āpajjamāno gamento. Avattaṃ paṭikkhipitvā vattaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘tattha…pe… na otaritabba’’nti paṭhamaṃ vuttaṃ. Sabbadisāpalokanaṃ yathā nhāyanaṭṭhānassa manussehi vivittabhāvajānanatthaṃ. Khāṇuādivavatthāpanaṃ cīvarādīnaṃ ṭhapanatthaṃ udakasamīpeti adhippāyo. Ukkāsanaṃ amanussānaṃ apagamanatthaṃ. Avakujjaṭṭhānaṃ taṅkhaṇepi uparimakāyassa ujukaṃ avivaṭakaraṇatthaṃ. Cīvarapiṭṭheyeva ṭhapetabbaṃ yattha vā tattha vā aṭṭhapetvā. Udakanteti udakasamīpe. Sinnaṭṭhānanti sedagatapadeso. Pasāretabbaṃ tassa sukkhāpanatthaṃ. Saṃharitvā ṭhapanaṃ puna sukhena gahetvā nivāsanatthaṃ. Nābhippamāṇamattaṃotaraṇaṃ tāvatā udakapaṭicchādilakkhaṇappattato. Vīciṃ anuṭṭhāpentenātiādi saṃyatakāritādassanaṃ. Nivāsanaṃ parikkhipitvāti antaravāsakaṃ kaṭippadesassa yathā parito hoti, evaṃ khipitvā parivasitvā.
「肤色也变得清净(sarīravaṇṇopi vippasīdi)」:意谓在他正确地修习并随念(佛的功德)时,也获得了(身体的清净),这是言外之意。「为了调伏沙门(Samanaṃ niggahetuṃ)」:是指调伏那颗已被烦恼牵引的自心。「被贪欲所牵引(kāmūpanītā)」:指心已趋向欲乐。或者,指被烦恼欲引向长老的心。显示巴利原文
Sarīravaṇṇopi vippasīdi sammadeva bhāvanānussatimpi vindantassāti adhippāyo. Samanaṃ niggahetunti kilesavasaṃ gataṃ attano cittaṃ niggaṇhituṃ. Kāmūpanītāti kāmaṃ upagatacittā. Atha vā kilesakāmena there upanītacittā.
「不去受用(Aparibhuñjitvā)」:即不经历、不享用。由于从意义上讲,这些本就是应受之物,故说「五种妙欲(pañcakāmaguṇe)」。「你乞求(Bhikkhasī)」:即你在乞讨。正因这指的是托钵行乞的生活方式,所以接着说“你挨家挨户地乞食(piṇḍāya carasī)”。将享乐看得极重的时期,特指刚刚成年的阶段,故说「年轻力壮之时(daharayobbanakālo)」。身体「弯如弓(Obhaggena)」:指身体从中间腰背处弯曲。因为年老之时,众生的身体便会在腰部变得佝偻。显示巴利原文
Aparibhuñjitvāti ananubhotvā. Anubhavitabbanti atthato āpannamevāti āha ‘‘pañcakāmaguṇe’’ti . Bhikkhasīti yācasi. Tañca bhikkhācariyavasenāti āha ‘‘piṇḍāya carasī’’ti. Kāmaparibhogagarugamanakālo nāma visesato paṭhamayobbanāvatthāti āha ‘‘daharayobbanakālo’’ti. Obhaggenāti majjhe saṃbhaggakāyena. Jiṇṇakāle hi sattānaṃ kaṭiyaṃ kāyo obhaggo hoti.
「vo」仅仅是个不变词,如同在“ye hi vo ariyā”等句子中那样。「众生」是通称,并非专指人类。「舍身处」指弃置身体之处。它们没有相状,故称「无相」,即没有“此人能活这么久”等可辨识的相——这就是它的含义。「不被得知」即不被知晓。“从此以后”中的“以后”,是指别的时间。由此,实际上也涵盖了更早的时间。此处所指的“以后”,是接近最长寿命之际,因为此后众生便无生命。所谓「由于无有确定」,是因时间没有固定。此处的「确定」应理解为分限,而非不混杂的确定,也非决定。在“阿浮陀、闭尸”等词中,应将“时”字分别连接上去,成为“阿浮陀时、闭尸时”等。这里的「时」指上午等时分,故经文说“即使在上午”等。“即以此身应堕于此”——应如此关联。「以种种方式」是指:城中出生者在村中死去,村中出生者在城中死去,林野出生者在聚落死去,聚落出生者在林野死去等,以种种不同的方式。「从此处死没者」即是从此趣死没者。「于此」即在此趣中。“犹如系于机关的牛”。显示巴利原文
Voti nipātamattaṃ ‘‘ye hi vo ariyā’’tiādīsu viya. Sattānanti sāmaññavacanaṃ, na manussānaṃ eva. Dehanikkhepananti kaḷevaraṭṭhapitaṭṭhānaṃ. Natthi etesaṃ nimittanti animittā, ‘‘ettakaṃ ayaṃ jīvatī’’tiādinā sañjānananimittarahitāti attho. Na nāyareti na ñāyanti. Ito paranti ettha paranti aññaṃ kālaṃ. Tena orakālassapi saṅgaho siddho hoti. Paramāyuno orakāle eva cettha paranti adhippetaṃ tato paraṃ sattānaṃ jīvitassa abhāvato. Vavatthānābhāvatoti kālavasena vavatthānābhāvato. Vavatthānanti cettha paricchedo veditabbo, na asaṅkarato vavatthānaṃ, nicchayo vā. Abbudapesītiādīsu abbudakālo pesikālotiādinā kāla-saddo paccekaṃ yojetabbo. Kāloti idha pubbaṇhādivelā adhippetā. Tenāha pubbaṇhepi hītiādi . Idheva dehena patitabbanti sambandho. Anekappakāratoti nagare jātānaṃ gāme, gāme jātānaṃ nagare, vane jātānaṃ janapade, janapade jātānaṃ vanetiādinā anekappakārato. Ito cutenāti ito gatito cutena. Idha imissaṃ gatiyaṃ. Yante yuttagoṇo viyāti yathā yante yuttagoṇo yantaṃ nātivattati, evaṃ kālo gatipañcakanti evaṃ upamāsaṃsandanaṃ veditabbaṃ.
「此正当时」指这正是死时。说「后时」是指在晚年的年龄阶段。所谓「三种年龄分界」,是指已经超越了第一等三种年龄分界的人。因为完全超越了前两种年龄的分界,并且已经开始超越最后一种年龄的起始分界,所以才这样讲。在说“这位沙门法……不能做”之后,为了详细说明其中的意思,接着说“那时”等。所谓「持取」,就是通过文句和义理把法铭记在心中而受持。所谓「受用」,就是实际体验所说的法而获得护持之乐。由一人先诵出一段偈颂或者经文,当他结束之后,另一位说法者便对同一内容进行详细阐扬而说法,这称为随诵说法。顺着经文、应颂一直诵持到结束,也叫做随诵说法。当他说“勿让时超越我”的时候,他是在说:“对于修习沙门法,这正是我的时机”;之后他又说:“晚年是别的时机”。当他说“我称时……因此不存在而来乞食”的时候,他是在讲自己所修的行,以及这行具有的因和它能带来的利益果报。显示巴利原文
Ayaṃ kāloti ayaṃ maraṇakālo. Pacchime kāleti pacchime vaye. Tisso vayosīmāti. Paṭhamādikā tisso vayassa sīmā atikkantena. Purimānaṃ hi dvinnaṃ vayānaṃ sabbaso sīmā atikkamitvā pacchimassa ādisīmaṃ atikkanto tathā vutto. ‘‘Ayañhi samaṇadhammo…pe… na sakkā kātu’’nti vatvā tamatthaṃ vitthārato dassetuṃ ‘‘tadā hī’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Gaṇhitunti pāḷito atthato ca hadaye ṭhapanavasena gaṇhituṃ. Paribhuñjitunti vuttadhammapariharaṇasukhaṃ anubhavituṃ. Ekassa kathanato paṭhamaṃ gāthaṃ suttaṃ vā ussāreti, tasmiṃ niṭṭhite itaro dhammakathiko taṃyeva vitthārento dhammaṃ katheti, ayaṃ sarabhāṇadhammakathā. Suttageyyānusārena yāva pariyosānā ussāraṇaṃ sarabhaññadhammakathā. ‘‘Mā maṃ kālo upaccagā’’ti vadanto ‘‘samaṇadhammassa karaṇassa ayaṃ me kālo’’ti katheti, tato paro ‘‘pacchimavayo añño kālo’’ti katheti. ‘‘Kālaṃ vohaṃ…pe… tasmā abhutvā bhikkhāmī’’ti vadanto attanā kataṃ paṭipattiñca sahetukaṃ sānisaṃsaṃ katheti.
这是就那引发恭敬的原因而说的。这里的「此」就是指“当时那位天女站在地上”等那段叙述。因为被贪欲征服而获得,所以才说“你年轻者”等。「具足一切成就者」指财富圆满、眷属圆满等,具足一切成就。「庄饰受用」也就是进行装饰打扮。「未曾游戏者」指先前没有游戏过。而这里的游戏就是指享受欲乐,因此经文说“未曾受用者”。「未作欲乐游戏者」是指没有从事过欲乐的享受行为。“自己即被自己所见”是指现见的;现见的本身就是现见的,从自证的角度是现见的。「已得明显之时者」,那些就叫做「有时的」。显示巴利原文
Taṃ gāravakāraṇaṃ sandhāya. Etanti ‘‘atha kho sā devatā pathaviyaṃ patiṭṭhahitvā’’ti etaṃ vuttaṃ. Daharo tvantiādimāha lobhābhibhūtatāya adhigatattā. Sabbasampattiyuttoti bhogasampadā parivārasampadāti sabbasampattīhi yutto. Alaṅkāraparihāranti alaṅkārakaraṇaṃ. Anikkīḷitāvīti akīḷitapubbo. Kīḷanañcettha kāmānaṃ paribhogoti āha ‘‘abhuttāvī’’ti. Akatakāmakīḷoti akatakāmānubhavanappayogo. Sayaṃ attanā eva dissantīti sandiṭṭhā, sandiṭṭhā eva sandiṭṭhikā, attapaccakkhato sandiṭṭhikā. Pakaṭṭho kālo patto etesanti kālikā, te kālike.
“随心之后”是指随所愿之心而生起之后,以所愿、所欲的所缘为其行相。因此他说:“随心之后,即领受所愿、所欲的所缘,这是不可能的”等。“于心之后应得”是指在无间定心之后所应证得的果。“于已等持者”是指于那些已得等持者。“成满欲者”指诸欲已成就的人。“画师”是因获得色彩而作画之人,“织布师”即制作画像的人,“色形作者”指象牙雕刻师、木雕师、铜雕师等。以“等”字还包含了化作种种形色的舞者等。“于余门中”,在此则应谈及乾闼婆、花鬘师、厨师等。显示巴利原文
Cittānantaranti icchitacittānantaraṃ, icchiticchitārammaṇākāreti attho. Tenevāha ‘‘cittānantaraṃ icchiticchitārammaṇānubhavanaṃ na sampajjatī’’tiādi. Cittānantaraṃ laddhabbatāyāti anantaritasamādhicittānantaraṃ laddhabbaphalatāya. Samohitesupīti sambhatesupi. Sampannakāmassāti samiddhakāmassa. Cittakārā rūpalābhena, potthakārā paṭimākārakā, rūpakārā dantarūpakaṭṭharūpa-loharūpādikārakā. Ādisaddena nānārūpavesadhārīnaṃ naṭādīnaṃ saṅgaho. Sesadvāresūti ettha gandhabbamālākārasūpakārādayo vattabbā.
“他”指三弥提长老。“以等持之成就”是指以摄持、受用与资具的成就。“应得之苦”是指在诸欲中,因获得与守护而不可避免的身心之苦。“忧恼”是指从重劳中远离的人。有人说为“休息者”。“以省察智”是某些人的读法。所谓“在某个时候得果”,如此应当观察,实则并无固定时间,故称“无时”。“此中”是指在这九种出世间法中。“来见之法”即“你来,看看吧”这般劝请验证之法。“应被引近”或应被引导趣入的,这便是“应趣向”。“由智者”是指那些已通达圣谛的智者。他们必定是“略开知者”等类型,因此经文说“略开知者等”。对于“各自的”,应以处格义理解为“于自己身上”,故说“于自己身上、于自己身上”。显示巴利原文
Soti samiddhitthero. Samohitasampattināti saṅgāhabhogūpakaraṇasampattinā. Pattabbadukkhassāti kāmānaṃ āpajjanarakkhaṇavasena laddhabbassa kāyikacetasikadukkhassa. Upāyāsassāti daḷhaparissamassa viratassa. ‘‘Vissātassā’’ti keci. ‘‘Paccavekkhaṇañāṇenā’’ti keci paṭhanti. Asukasmiṃ nāma kāle phalaṃ hotīti evaṃ udikkhitabbo nassa kāloti akālo. Etthāti etesu navasu lokuttaradhammesu. Ehipassavidhinti ‘‘ehi passā’’ti evaṃ pavattavidhivacanaṃ. Upanetabboti vā upaneyyo, so eva opaneyyiko. Viññūhīti vidūhi paṭividdhasaccehi. Te ekaṃsato ugghaṭitaññūādayo hontīti āha ‘‘ugghaṭitaññūādīhī’’ti. ‘‘Paccatta’’nti etassa patiattanīti bhummavasena attho gahetabboti āha ‘‘attani attanī’’ti.
“与一切句相连”是说,例如“于此中如何过患更多,如何是无时的”等,应知这些是分别与每一句相关联的。显示巴利原文
Sabbapadehi sambandhoti ‘‘kathaṃ ādīnavo ettha bhiyyo, kathaṃ akāliko’’tiādinā sabbehi paccekaṃ sambandho veditabbo.
「年轻者」,是指年少、出家不久的人。凡是具足比丘尼教诫者之相的人,经中说“从二十岁开始,成为长老”。这里所说的「教法」,即含摄三学的三藏,故经文说“以法……”等。其中,依正法而调伏,不用棍棒与刀剑,这就叫做法与律;为法而调伏,非为利养,这也叫做法与律;源自正法的律,而非源自非正法的,同样叫做法与律。或者,世尊就是法,因为他是法主、法身;这位被称为“法”的导师所制的律,并非推理者所制的律,这就是法与律。在正法中调伏,不在非正法中调伏。并且,法护持依法奉行、不堕恶趣的众生,律则使一切远离染污,所以称为“法-律”。因此他说:“这两者都是教法的名称。”显示巴利原文
Navoti taruṇo na ciravasso. Ye bhikkhunovādakalakkhaṇappattā, te sandhāya ‘‘vīsativassato paṭṭhāya thero’’ti vuttaṃ. Idha sāsanaṃ nāma sikkhattayasaṅgahaṃ piṭakattayanti āha ‘‘dhammenahī’’tiādi. Tattha dhammena vinayo ettha vinā daṇḍasatthehīti dhammavinayo. Dhammāya vinayo ettha na āmisatthanti dhammavinayo. Dhammato vinayo na adhammatoti dhammavinayo. Dhammo vā bhagavā dhammassāmī dhammakāyattā, tassa dhammasaññitassa satthu vinayo, na takkikānanti dhammavinayo. Dhamme vinayo na adhamme vinayo. Dhammo ca so yathānusiṭṭhaṃ paṭipajjamāne satte apāyesu apatamāne dhāretīti, sabbe saṃkilesato vinetīti vinayo cāti dhammavinayo. Tenāha ‘‘ubhayampetaṃ sāsanasseva nāma’’nti.
所谓「法与律」,即与法相应的律,称为法与律,犹如良马所驾之车。另一说,法加上律,合称法与律,即彼法与律。因为说它们具有导师的地位,法与律各自本身即是完备的,并且法与律相互简别。阿毗达摩中也有“律”这个词,因此成立法与律的双重意义;由佛陀的宣说与制立,成就法与律。法以四种方式宣说:开示、劝导、激励、令心欢喜;律以四种方式制立:从戒行仪则乃至波罗夷。法行属于修行者自身的领域,律的制立则是佛陀的领域。以间接方式教导的是法,以直接方式制立的是律。法的教导以内在意趣的要义为主,律的制立以语言本身的字面要义为主。以胜义谛为主的是法,以世俗谛为主的是律。以内心意乐清净为主的是法,以外在行为清净为主的是律。显示巴利原文
Dhammavinayoti dhammena yutto vinayoti dhammavinayo ājaññaratho viya. Dhammo ca vinayo cāti vā dhammavinayo, taṃ dhammavinayaṃ. Dhammavinayānañhi satthubhāvavacanato dhammavinayattasaṃsiddhi dhammavinayānaṃ aññamaññaṃ visesanato. Abhidhammepi vinayavacananti dhammavinayadvayasiddhi, desitapaññattavacanato dhammavinayasiddhi. Dhammo catudhā desito sandassana-samādāpana-samuttejana-sampahaṃsanavasena, vinayo catudhā paññatto sīlācārato parājitavasena. Dhammacariyā sakavisayo, vinayapaññatti buddhavisayo. Pariyāyena desito dhammo, nippariyāyena paññatto vinayo. Dhammadesanā adhippāyatthappadhānā, vinayapaññatti vacanatthappadhānā. Paramatthasaccappadhāno dhammo, sammutisaccappadhāno vinayo. Āsayasuddhipadhāno dhammo, payogasuddhipadhāno vinayo.
由两种作用的成就,成就法与律。因为以法成就教导,以律成就教诫;以法成就说法,以律成就圣默然。由避免两种罪过,成就法与律:以法殊胜成就舍离性罪,以律成就舍离遮罪。于在家与出家者中,成就共通与不共通的二种功德。由多闻与善听二种,由教法与修习、法住与分别,由持法者与持律者的分别,成就法与律的二重;由两种皈依的成就,成就法与律的二重。在此世间,众生有两种皈依:法与自我。其中,善修的法是皈依,所谓“法确实护持行法者”;善调御的自我也是皈依,所谓“自我是自我的主人”。因此说,由两种皈依的成就,成就法与律。在此,显示法与律二者成就:“其中,以法说二藏,以律说律藏”。方才到来,即刚刚不久才抵达。显示巴利原文
Kiriyadvayasiddhiyā dhammavinayasiddhi. Dhammena hi anusāsanasiddhi, vinayena ovādasiddhi. Dhammena dhammakathāsiddhi, vinayena ariyatuṇhībhāvasiddhi. Sāvajjadvayaparivajjanato dhammavinayasiddhi. Dhammena hi visesato pakatisāvajjapariccāgasiddhi, vinayena paññattisāvajjapariccāgasiddhi. Gahaṭṭhapabbajitānaṃ sādhāraṇāsādhāraṇaguṇadvayasiddhi. Bahussutasutapasannadvayato pariyatti-pariyāpuṇana-dhammavihāra-vibhāgato dhammadharavinayadharavibhāgato ca dhammavinayadvayasiddhi, saraṇadvayasiddhiyā dhammavinayadvayasiddhi. Idha sattānaṃ duvidhaṃ saraṇaṃ dhammo attā ca. Tattha dhammo suciṇṇo saraṇaṃ. ‘‘Dhammo have rakkhati dhammacāri’’nti (theragā. 303; jā. 1.10.102; 1.15.385) hi vuttaṃ. Sudanto attāpi saraṇaṃ ‘‘attā hi attano nātho’’ti (dha. pa. 160, 380) vacanato. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘saraṇadvayasiddhiyā dhammavinayasiddhī’’ti. Tattha yatassa dhammasiddhi, yato ca vinayasiddhi, tadubhayaṃ dassento āha – ‘‘dhammena hettha dve piṭakāni vuttāni, vinayena vinayapiṭaka’’nti. Adhunā āgato idāneva na cirasseva upagato.
“置于大处”是指:为显示自身具大威神力,宣示其随从被安置于大处的状态。“以大”是指:因为远离趋前、礼拜等言行,而如理奉行。据说所有人入座时,都会避开那个座位而坐。“以令坚固”是指:为使坚固。据说这位天神虽具足智慧,却生性骄慢,因此若不舍弃骄慢,便无法证悟我所说法。故世尊为调伏其骄慢,从一开始便宣说两种所知之义,以“不可轻贱之想”等语,辨明求欲知者之“随时限等性”及法之“当见等性”,而说了两首偈颂。显示巴利原文
Mahanteṭhāne ṭhapetvāti mahesakkhatādassanatthaṃ attano parivārena mahantaṭṭhāne ṭhapitabhāvaṃ pavedetvā. Mahatiyāti upasaṅkamanavandanādivacanāpajjanavasena samāciṇṇāya. Sabbepi kira nisīdantā taṃ ṭhānaṃ ṭhapetvāva nisīdanti. Thirakaraṇavasenāti daḷhīkaraṇavasena. Ayaṃ kira devatā ñāṇasampannā mānajātikā, tasmā nāyaṃ mānaṃ appahāya mama desanaṃ paṭivijjhituṃ sakkotīti mānaniggaṇhanatthaṃ ādito duviññeyyaṃ kathento bhagavā ‘‘akkheyyasaññino’’tiādinā tāya ñātumicchitakāmānaṃ kālikādibhāvaṃ, dhammassa ca sandiṭṭhikādibhāvaṃ vibhāvento dve gāthā abhāsi.
“可宣说”是指:由于可以依在家人行相、称谓、特征等种种方式予以宣说。因此他说“作为谈论的实质”。“这些”是指众生。“已立足”是指已转起、已执着。他们执着于五种欲贪等,那么其余者呢?即使是不希求者,也会因“这究竟是什么”等而生疑,由于未舍离该处而成为执着;如是散乱者则执着于散乱事;然而对于随眠的执着状态则无可说。“死之轭”即死之系缚,意为死之法性。由于未遍知所缘,未曾超越死亡,故被死魔随意支配,被处处掷入其号令之中,因此说“造作……乃至……而来”。由于三界法在可悦之义上是“欲”,又因它们都是随时限而得,故在此以“可宣说”一词宣说为“随时限的”。因此他说:“如是此偈中说了随时限之欲”。一切三界法都是可悦的,且由于宣说了随时限之欲有如此自性。此偈也仅明此义,故说这些已被宣说。而那些于五蕴中以见、渴等执着而立足,计着“女人、男人、我、我所”而受用诸欲的众生,他们不能超越死亡。如此,在此说明了欲是“随时限的”之义,故他说“说了随时限之欲”。显示巴利原文
Akkheyyatoti gihiliṅgapariyāyanāmavisesādivasena tathā tathā akkhātabbato. Tenāha ‘‘kathānaṃ vatthubhūtato’’ti. Etesanti sattānaṃ. Patiṭṭhitāti pavattitā āsattā. Pañcannaṃ kāmasaṅgādīnaṃ vasena āsattā hontu, itaresaṃ pana kathanti? Aniṭṭhaṅgatopi hi ‘‘idaṃ nu kho’’tiādinā kaṅkhato tattha āsatto eva nāma avijahanato, tathā vikkhepagato vikkhepavatthusmiṃ, anusayānaṃ pana āsattabhāve vattabbameva natthi. Maccuno yoganti, maccubandhanaṃ, maraṇadhammatanti attho. Yasmā apariññātavatthukā anatītamaraṇattā maccunā yathāruci payojetabbā, tattha tattha uparūpari ca khipitāya āṇāya abbhantare eva honti, tasmā vuttaṃ ‘‘payogaṃ…pe… āgacchantī’’ti. Yasmā tebhūmakā dhammā kamanīyaṭṭhena kāmā, nesampi kālassa laddhabbatāya kālikatā idha akkheyyavacanena paveditā. Tenāha – ‘‘evamimāya gāthāya kālikā kāmā kathitā’’ti. Sabbepi tebhūmakā dhammā kamanīyā, yasmā ca kālikānaṃ kāmānaṃ tathāsabhāvatā kathitā. Ayampi gāthā tadatthameva dīpetīti imāya te kathitā eva honti. Ye ca sattā pañcasu khandhesu diṭṭhitaṇhādivasena patiṭṭhitā ‘‘itthī, puriso, ahaṃ, mamā’’ti ca abhinivisiya kāme paribhuñjanti, te maraṇaṃ nātivattanti. Evampettha kāmānaṃ kālikattho kathitoti āha ‘‘kālikā kāmā kathitā’’ti.
“此是所知遍知”是指:了知色无色法之相后,加以界定的智慧。因此他说“如是了知已”等。此处仅以把握所缘,即已把握他们色无色法之缘,故应了知缘之把握亦被包含在其中。衡量即比较、考察。“以四十二行相”以此显示达到顶点的大观。而他们之行相应依《清净道论》所说道理去了知。“无常随观断常想”等,于观之刹那也能获得部分断除,然而为了显示无余断除,故通过显示断遍知而说“以圣道……此是断遍知”。如是也说“以三遍知”等。显示巴利原文
Ayaṃ ñātapariññāti rūpārūpadhamme lakkhaṇādito ñāte katvā paricchindanapaññā. Tenāha ‘‘evaṃ ñātaṃ katvā’’tiādi. Padaṭṭhānaggahaṇeneva cettha tesaṃ rūpārūpadhammānaṃ paccayo gahitoti paccayapariggahassapi saṅgaho daṭṭhabbo. Tīreti tuleti vīmaṃsati. Dvācattālīsāya ākārehīti iminā matthakappattaṃ mahāvipassanaṃ dasseti. Te pana ākārā visuddhimaggasaṃvaṇṇanāya vuttanayena veditabbā. ‘‘Aniccānupassanāya niccasaññaṃ pajahatī’’tiādinā vipassanākkhaṇepi ekadesena pahānaṃ labbhateva, anavasesato pana pahānavasena pahānapariññaṃ dassento āha ‘‘aggamaggena…pe… ayaṃ pahānapariññā’’ti. Tathā ca āha ‘‘evaṃ tīhi pariññāhī’’tiādi.
“宣说者”意指应当被宣说者,而非不可说者。因此他说“以业为作者”等。所谓“作者”,也称为“能作者”。“不思”即不转起思量,此宣说者即是漏尽者。或者,“它对他不存在”是指对于那漏尽者而言,那样的原因不存在、不可得——由于见、渴爱等因,将不可说的五取蕴计着为“帝须”、“富沙”、“女人”或“男人”而说,此中义理应如此了知。因人、龙等应受恭敬之故,“夜叉”是一切天神的通称,因此天女也被称为“夜叉女”。“不可说”是指以断遍知断除之道,作为其缘的涅槃亦被把握。“不思”是指漏尽者的果证,因此他说“宣说了九种出世间法”。显示巴利原文
Akkhātāranti akkhātabbaṃ, na akkheyyakaṃ. Tenāha ‘‘kammavasena kāraka’’ntiādi. Kārakanti ca sādhanamāha. Na maññatīti vā maññanaṃ nappavatteti akkhātāranti khīṇāsavaṃ. Atha vā tañhi tassa na hotīti taṃ kāraṇaṃ tassa khīṇāsavassa na hoti na vijjati, yena diṭṭhitaṇhādikāraṇena akkheyyaṃ khandhapañcakaṃ ‘‘tisso’’ti vā ‘‘phusso’’ti vā ‘‘itthī’’ti vā ‘‘puriso’’ti vā abhinivissa vadeyyāti evamettha attho veditabbo. Manussanāgādīhi pūjanīyattā ‘‘yakkho’’ti sabbadevānaṃ sādhāraṇavacananti devadhītāpi ‘‘yakkhī’’ti vuttā. Akkheyyanti pahānapariññāya pahānamaggo, tassa ārammaṇabhūtaṃ nibbānampi gahitaṃ. Na maññatīti khīṇāsavassa assa phalappattīti āha ‘‘navavidho lokuttaradhammo kathito’’ti.
“更胜”是指依更胜的生类等,义为“更好”。“被执取”是指那三种慢被衡量时所执取。三种胜慢、三种等慢、三种劣慢,全都被执取。“此人”是指未断除思量的人,正是以那个慢作为原因。“半偈”是指前一半宣说了事欲,因此他说“宣说了有时限的欲”。显示巴利原文
Visesīti visesajātiādivasena seyyoti attho. Tesu gahitesūti tesu seyyamānādīsu tīsu mānesu gahitesu. Tayo seyyamānā, tayo sadisamānā, tayo hīnamānā gahitāva honti. So puggaloti so appahīnamaññanapuggalo. Teneva mānena hetubhūtena. Upaḍḍhagāthāyāti purimaddhena pana vatthukāmā vuttāti āha ‘‘kālikā kāmā kathitā’’ti.
“以不相似之相被区划而安立”即是类别、部分。“如何类别”即如何安立、以何种行相转起,这是它的意义。由于分别——即依于劣、等、胜等种种方式而燃烧、执持——故称为慢。“于诸慢中”是于相的意义上的处格,即是以慢为因的意思。“不动摇”即不震动,因为不舍弃自己清净的本性。显示巴利原文
Vidhīyati visadisākārena ṭhapīyatīti vidhā, koṭṭhāso. Kathaṃvidhanti kathaṃ patiṭṭhitaṃ, kena pakārena pavattitanti attho. Vidahanato hīnādivasena vividhenākārena dahanato upadhāraṇato vidhā, māno. Mānesūti nimittatthe bhummaṃ, mānahetūti attho. Na calatīti na vedhati attano parisuddhapakatiṃ avijahanato.
智慧称为“思择”,即如理审察。所谓“计算者”,是指以合计、造作等方式总合计数的计算者,此即戏论的思择,属于慢等戏论的部分。诸法依此而被正确、如实地思择而安立,故此为“思择”,即智慧。以“一、二”等进行的思择、计数与区分,称为“思择”,即计算。以部分而说,称为“思择”,即部分。以“众生”、“人”等来告知的思择,称为“思择”,即“红色”等施设。漏尽者已断除、已遍断,因为贪等已被善断。九种分类依类别而分,简略而言为三种慢,这是其义;或者,在“九种”的读法中,因有九种分类,依内部分类而有九种,这是其义。依缘的差别、女性状态等差别,胎儿于此被特别地孕育,故为“vimāna”,即子宫。不会去接近,即不会到达。因此说“在未来义中用过去语”,因为“未找到”是过去时,在“将不会去”的意义上使用。已以圣道之剑切断。正在观察诸投生处。于众生住处,即众生的投生之处。只开示了出世间法,因为宣说了阿罗汉果。显示巴利原文
Paññā ‘‘saṅkhā’’ti āgatā, paññāti yoniso paṭisaṅkhānaṃ. Saṅkhāyakoti saṅkalanapaduppādanādi-piṇḍagaṇanāvasena gaṇako papañcasaṅkhāti mānādipapañcabhāgā. Te te dhammā sammā yāthāvato saṅkhāyanti upatiṭṭhanti etāyāti saṅkhā, paññā. Ekaṃ dvetiādinā saṅkhānaṃ gaṇanaṃ paricchindananti saṅkhā, gaṇanā. Saṅkhāyati bhāgaso kathīyatīti saṅkhā, koṭṭhāso. Saṅkhānaṃ satto puggalotiādinā saññāpananti saṅkhā, rattotiādi paṇṇatti. Khīṇāsavo jahi pajahi rāgādīnaṃ suppahīnattā. Navabhedaṃ pabhedato, saṅkhepato tividhamānanti attho. Navavidhanti vā pāṭhe navabhedattā antarabhedavasena navavidhanti attho. Paccayavisesehi itthibhāvādivisesehi visesena mānīyati gabbho etthāti vimānaṃ, gabbhāsayo. Na upagacchīti na upagamissati. Tenāha ‘‘anāgatatthe atītavacana’’nti. ‘‘Nājjhagā’’ti hi atītaṃ ‘‘na gamissatī’’ti etasmiṃ atthe. Chindi ariyamaggasatthena. Olokayamānā upapattīsu. Sattanivesanesūti sattānaṃ upapajjaṭṭhānesu. Lokuttaradhammameva kathesi arahattassa paveditattā.
“为了解说偈颂的意义”这句话中,应引出“义”(attha)一词来解说。以八支圣道的方式解说时,同样采用这种方法。所谓“念与正知”,是修习善法的原因,因此说为“十善业道的原因”。显示巴利原文
‘‘Gāthāya atthaṃ kathetuṃ vaṭṭatī’’ti attha-saddo āharitvā vattabbo. Aṭṭhaṅgikamaggavasenapīti etthāpi eseva nayo. Satisampajaññaṃ nāma kusaladhammānuyoge kāraṇanti āha ‘‘dasakusalakammapathakāraṇa’’nti.
而以八支圣道的方式解说偈颂义,这就是现在所要说明的广释方法。所谓“在那个地方”,据说是在回答天神所问问题的地方。世尊观察天神的智慧成熟后,以次第说法,连同无上法的大法开示便发生了。所谓“运用了智慧”,是指通过随念导师的教导,将依清净次第转起的修习智慧连结起来。所谓“住立于入流果”,是指由于导师教导的庄严,以及自己的智慧已成熟,首先证得了果位。如此而说,即以“不应作恶”等方式说出了偈颂。正命并不单独成为一支,正如当它被扰乱时,是依语业和身业而扰乱;同样,当它具足时也是如此。它属于语业和身业,因此由这二者的摄受,它也就被摄受了。正精进、正念、正定已被摄受,因为它们属于定蕴所摄。正见、正思惟已被摄受,因为它们属于慧蕴所摄。远离两个极端,则是以其本身而被摄受,这是它的意旨。“Itīti”等是结语。显示巴利原文
Aṭṭhaṅgikamaggavasena ca gāthāatthavacane ayaṃ idāni vuccamāno vitthāra-nayo. Tasmiṃ kira ṭhāneti tasmiṃ kira devatāya pucchitaṃ pañhaṃ vissajjanaṭṭhāne. Devatāya ñāṇaparipākaṃ oloketvā anupubbiyā kathāya saddhiṃ sāmukkaṃsikadesanā mahatī dhammadesanā ahosi. Ñāṇaṃ pesetvāti satthudesanāya anussaraṇavasena pattavisuddhipaṭipāṭipavattaṃ bhāvanāñāṇaṃ bandhitvā. Sotāpattiphale patiṭṭhāyāti satthudesanāvilāsena attano ca paripakkañāṇattā paṭhamaṃ phalaṃ patvā. Evamāhāti evaṃ ‘‘pāpaṃ na kayirā’’tiādippakārena gāthamāha. Aṅgaṃ na hoti, ājīvo yathā kuppamāno vācākammantavasena kuppati, tathā sampajjamānopīti. So vācākammantapakkhiko, tasmā taggahaṇena gahitova hoti. Vāyāmasatisamādhayo gahitā samādhikkhandhasaṅgahato. Sammādiṭṭhisammāsaṅkappā gahitā paññākkhandhasaṅgahato. Antadvayavivajjanaṃ gahitaṃ sarūpenevāti adhippāyo. Itītiādi nigamanaṃ.
第一 Satti经注释显示巴利原文
1.Sattisuttavaṇṇanā
21 “Desanāsīsa”的意思为开示的指向、相状与言说,这是其意趣。“Omaṭṭha”指面部朝下给予的打击。借此因缘,为分别诸打击而说“四种”等。“站在上面”指站在象等之上。“面部朝下给予的打击”指将剑、刀等向下击打。“Ummaṭṭha”应理解为与前述相反的方式。“Vimaṭṭha”指种种打击。在说了“Omaṭṭha被抓住”之后,为了说明抓住它的理由而说“因为那”等。由于恶臭、虫等,而有内部的过失。“与床一起捆绑”的意思是:将病人牢牢绑在他所躺卧的床上,使脚端向上,头端向下,因此说“应使其头部向下”。“Paribbajeti”意为使之转。而这样的转动与修习安住相应,因此说“应住”。显示巴利原文
21.Desanāsīsanti desanāpadesalakkhaṇavacananti adhippāyo. Omaṭṭhoti adhomukhaṃ katvā dinnappahāro. Iminā eva pasaṅgena pahāre vibhāgato dassetuṃ ‘‘cattāro hī’’tiādi vuttaṃ . Upari ṭhatvāti hatthiādīnaṃ upari ṭhatvā. Adhomukhaṃ dinnappahāroti khaggakaravālādīnaṃ adhomukhaṃ katvā pahatapahāro. Ummaṭṭho vuttavipariyāyena veditabbo. Vividhappahāro vimaṭṭho. ‘‘Omaṭṭho gahito’’ti vatvā tasseva gahaṇe kāraṇaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘so hī’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Duggandhakimiādīnaṃ vasena antodoso. Mañcena saddhiṃ bandhitvāti yasmiṃ mañce vaṇikapuggalo nipanno, tattha taṃ subandhaṃ katvā pādaṭṭhānaṃ uddhaṃ karontehi sīsaṭṭhānaṃ adho kātabbaṃ. Tenāha ‘‘adhosiro kātabbo’’ti. Paribbajeti pavatteyya. Sā pana pavatti bhāvanāvihārena yuttāti āha ‘‘vihareyyā’’ti.
拔除箭,即拔箭。此处“义”被取为“少许”,因为譬喻者意在说明镇伏断。故说“再三”等。它成为随眠,是因为阐明了天神的欲贪舍断在因缘具足时即会生起。难道不应由世尊以不还道来圆满此开示吗?不,因为于其他方面,开示应随顺听者的智力而进行。法主随顺所化众生的心意而说法。显示巴利原文
Sallassa ubbahanaṃ sallubbahanaṃ. Atthaṃ parittakaṃ gahetvā ṭhitā upamākārassa vikkhambhanappahānassa adhippetattā. Tenāha ‘‘punappuna’’ntiādi. Anubandhova hoti sati paccaye uppajjanārahato devatāya kāmarāgappahānassa jotitattā. Nanu bhagavatā anāgāmimaggena desanā niṭṭhāpetabbāti? Na, itarissā ñāṇabalānurūpadesanāya pavattetabbato. Veneyyajjhāsayānukulañhi dhammaṃ dhammassāmī desetīti.
第二,《触经》的注释。显示巴利原文
2. Phusatisuttavaṇṇanā
22 “Kammaṃ aphusantaṃ”意为“不触业”,即不造业。“Vipāko na phusatī”意为“果不触”,即果报完全不会生起,因为根本没有因。如此,从否定的角度将果轮联结于业轮而解说其义后,现在纯粹从业轮的角度解说其义,故说“就是业……”等。其中,“nākaroto kariyatī”的意思是:对于不造者,业不被造,意即不存在无动机的业。现在,为了从随顺的角度显示同样的意义,接着又说“而触……”等。这里的“tato”是指以触为因。其余的部分,应依前文所说的方法来理解。为了将已说之义连同其原因以反复申说的方式清楚地彰显出来,所以又解释道“因此,触……”等。“法性”的意思是:业的果报只会追随造作者,不会追随不造作者,这就是业果的固有性质。显示巴利原文
22.Kammaṃ aphusantanti kammaphassaṃ aphusantaṃ, kammaṃ akarontanti attho. Vipāko na phusatīti vipākaphasso na phusati, vipāko na uppajjateva kāraṇassa abhāvato. Evaṃ byatirekamukhena kammavaṭṭena vipākavaṭṭaṃ sambandhaṃ katvā atthaṃ vatvā idāni kevalaṃ kammavaṭṭavasena atthaṃ vadanto ‘‘kammamevā’’tiādimāha. Tattha nākaroto kariyatīti kammaṃ akubbato na kayirati, anabhisandhikatakammaṃ nāma natthīti attho. Idāni tamevatthaṃ anvayato dassetuṃ ‘‘phusantañcā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha tatoti phusanahetu. Sesaṃ vuttanayameva. Vuttamevatthaṃ sakāraṇaṃ katvā pariveṭhitavasena vibhūtaṃ katvā dassetuṃ ‘‘tasmā phusanta’’ntiādi vuttaṃ. Dhammatāti kārakasseva kammavipākānubandho, nākārakassāti ayaṃ kammavipākānaṃ sabhāvo.
“Pacceti”意为趋近、跟随。“Pāpa”指恶业及其果报。此义当藉由一则故事来说明:在森林中,一位比丘被猎人放狗追逐,因恐惧而爬上树,袈裟掉下罩在猎人身上,猎人被自己的狗咬死。显示巴利原文
Pacceti upagacchati anubandhati. Pāpanti pāpakaṃ kammaṃ phalañca. Ayañca attho araññe luddakassa uyyojanāya sunakhehi parivāriyamānassa bhikkhuno bhayena rukkhaṃ āruḷhassa cīvare luddassa upari patite tassa sunakhehi khāditvā māritavatthunā dīpetabboti.
第三,《结缚经》的注释。显示巴利原文
3. Jaṭāsuttavaṇṇanā
23 为了说明贪爱在何种意义上被称为“结缚”,故说“具网”。因为贪爱拥有一百零八种爱行的差别,这些差别本身就是它的网,因此称为“具网”。现在,为了显示它以结缚的形态现起,接着说“因为它……”等。其中,“在色等所缘中”是指它现起的处所,因为若离色等六种所缘,贪爱便没有活动的领域。“以向下、向上的方式”是说:有时以色为所缘,有时乃至以法为所缘;有时以法为所缘,有时乃至以色为所缘,就这样向下又向上地现起。这里所说的“向下、向上”,可依据教说的次第来理解,也可依据欲贪等不同层面来理解。由于诸行刹那生灭,前后相续而生,在此便表现为彼此交织,所以说“从一再地生起来看,是以交织为义”。这是在阐明“结缚”这一譬喻与贪爱这一所譬事物之间的关系:就像那种带有藤蔓的竹丛,它的枝条以及枝条的积聚等,被自身长出的部分交织缠缚在一起,叫作“结缚”;同样,贪爱的本质也正是这种交织。显示巴利原文
23. Yena atthena taṇhā ‘‘jaṭā’’ti vuttā, tamevatthaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘jāliniyā’’ti vuttaṃ. Sā hi aṭṭhasatataṇhāvicaritapabhedā attano avayavabhūtā eva jālā etissā atthīti jālinīti vuccati. Idānissā jaṭākārena pavattiṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘sā hī’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha rūpādīsu ārammaṇesūti tassā pavattiṭṭhānamāha rūpādichaḷārammaṇavinimuttassa taṇhāvisayassa abhāvato. Heṭṭhupariyavasenāti kadāci rūpārammaṇe kadāci yāva dhammārammaṇā, kadāci dhammārammaṇe kadāci yāva rūpārammaṇāti evaṃ heṭṭhā ca upari ca pavattivasena. Desanākkamena cettha heṭṭhupariyatā veditabbā, kāmarāgādivasenapi ayamattho veditabbo. Saṅkhārānaṃ khaṇikabhāvato aparāparuppatti ettha saṃsibbananti āha ‘‘punappunaṃ uppajjanato saṃsibbanaṭṭhenā’’ti. Idaṃ yena sambandhena jaṭā viyāti jaṭāti jaṭātaṇhānaṃ upamūpameyyatā, taṃdassanaṃ. Ayañhettha attho – yathā jālinī veḷugumbassa sākhā, tāsaṃ sañcayādayo ca attano avayavehi saṃsibbitā vinaddhā ‘‘jaṭā’’ti vuccanti, evaṃ taṇhāpi saṃsibbanasabhāvenāti.
这些众生将所执取之物视为“我的”,并认为它与自身无差别,遂将它当作自身内在的一部分。“内”字有内部之义,因此,即便是对自己日常资具所生的贪爱,也称作「内结缚」。对出家人而言,钵等即是自己的资具;对在家人而言,象、马等即是自己的资具。所谓“自我”,是指于此之上生起我慢,因此名为「有身」,也就是五取蕴。有人将它解释为“身体”。当知贪爱会于自己的有身等之上生起,其表现方式为:“我的有身很美好,愿我的有身像某人那样”等等。自己的眼等诸根属于内处;自己与他人的色等所缘属于外处,有时也包含他人的一切处。另有解释说:含摄在自他相续中的眼等是内处,而色等则是外处。贪爱的内结缚性、外结缚性,也可根据它在欲有、色有、无色有中的现起来理解。因为在欲有中,一切烦恼都还未被镇伏,于任何处都未得解脱,所以它特别执取内在,因此称为“内部,也就是内”;与此相反,色有与无色有则称为“外部,也就是外”。因此世尊说:“有内结缚的补特伽罗,有外结缚的补特伽罗。”显示巴利原文
Ime sattā ‘‘mama ida’’nti pariggahitaṃ attanibbisesaṃ maññamānā abbhantarimaṃ karonti. Abbhantaraṭṭho ca anto-saddoti sakaparikkhāresu uppajjanamānāpi taṇhā ‘‘antojaṭā’’ti vuttā. Pabbajitassa pattādi, gahaṭṭhassa hatthiādi sakaparikkhāro. Attāti bhavati ettha abhimānoti attabhāvo, upādānakkhandhapañcakaṃ. Sarīranti keci. ‘‘Mama attabhāvo sundaro, asukassa viya mama attabhāvo bhaveyyā’’tiādinā sakaattabhāvādīsu taṇhāya uppajjanākāro veditabbo. Attano cakkhādīni ajjhattikāyatanāni, attano ca paresañca rūpādīni bāhirāyatanāni, paresaṃ sabbāni vā. Saparasantatipariyāpannāni vā cakkhādīni ajjhattikāyatanāni, tathā rūpādīni bāhirāyatanāni. Parittamahaggatabhavesu pavattiyāpi taṇhāya antojaṭābahijaṭābhāvo veditabbo. Kāmabhavo hi kassacipi kilesassa avikkhambhitattā katthacipi avimutto ajjhattaggahaṇassa visesapaccayoti ‘‘ajjhattaṃ anto’’ti ca vuccati, tabbipariyāyato rūpārūpabhavo ‘‘bahiddhā bahī’’ti ca. Tenāha bhagavā – ‘‘ajjhattasaṃyojano puggalo, bahiddhāsaṃyojano puggalo’’ti (a. ni. 2.37).
虽然贪爱随着所缘的差别与活动方式的不同,而有许多种类的区分,但因为其“结”的状态是共通的,所以此处将其统合,以一个“结”字称之,说成“这样生起的爱之结”。而所谓的「有情」,就是指前面所说的那些相续流转中的众生。他们在生死中一再地将那爱欲纠结、缠缚而不断现起,所以说「众生为结所缠」。事实上,从究竟义上看,整体虽然没有独立于部分之外的存在,但单独一个部分也不能称为整体。因此,为了说明有别于部分的整体,令人了知譬喻与所喻的关系,才会说“犹如以竹结等……缠绕在一起”。此处的「这个结」有连接上下文的意思。这个爱欲在三界中,无所遗漏地缠缚一切,将三界束得紧紧的。由此说明它的影响范围极为广大,而要解此结是极难行的。‘谁能解开它?’此句中‘应解开’一词,显示的是希求的语气,而非命令的语气。显示巴利原文
Visayabhedena pavattiākārabhedena anekabhedabhinnampi taṇhaṃ jaṭābhāvasāmaññena ekanti gahetvā ‘‘tāya evaṃ uppajjamānāya jaṭāyā’’ti vuttaṃ. Sā pana pajāti vuttasattasantānapariyāpannā eva hutvā punappunaṃ taṃ jaṭentī vinandhantī pavattatīti āha ‘‘jaṭāya jaṭitā pajā’’ti. Tathā hi paramatthato yadipi avayavabyatirekena samudāyo natthi, ekadeso pana samudāyo nāma na hotīti avayavato samudāyaṃ bhinnaṃ katvā upamūpameyyaṃ dassento ‘‘yathā nāma veḷujaṭādīhi…pe… saṃsibbitā’’ti āha. Imaṃ jaṭanti sambandho. Tīsu dhātūsu ekampi asesetvā saṃsibbanena tedhātukaṃ jaṭetvā ṭhitaṃ. Tenassā mahāvisayataṃ vijaṭanassa ca sudukkarabhāvamāha. Vijaṭetuṃ ko samatthoti iminā ‘‘vijaṭaye’’ti padaṃ sattiatthaṃ, na vidhiatthanti dasseti.
如是,被问及“内结缚”等问题后,世尊为了解答此义,便宣说了“安立于戒”等语。在这里,「戒」是指善戒。而这善戒,在巴帝摩卡律仪等诸类别中,特别要求其必须是清净的,所以此处说它是「四种遍清净戒」。显示巴利原文
Evaṃ ‘‘antojaṭā’’tiādinā puṭṭho athassa bhagavā tamatthaṃ vissajjento ‘‘sīle patiṭṭhāyā’’tiādimāha. Ettha sīleti kusalasīle. Taṃ pana pātimokkhasaṃvarādibhedesu parisuddhameva icchitabbanti āha ‘‘catupārisuddhisīle’’ti.
“能引导所以叫‘人’,就是指男子。”虽然确实也有女人能够解开爱欲的结,但这里为了要突出表现出精进勤奋的众生,所以刻意用「人」这个字,就像说“天神和人类的导师”一样。不过,在注疏里,为了要显示这只是‘补特伽罗’这个概念的通俗说法,不做严格区分,就直接解释说:「人,就是指众生。」因为拥有果报带来的智慧,所以称为「有智慧的人」。从生命一开始,这种智慧就顺着心相续不断地在运作,所以这个众生特别有资格被称为‘有智慧的人’。因为即使是果报带来的智慧,也会由于个人心相续的特殊性,成为未来修行智慧生起的强有力支持因素;而那些无因或二因结生的人,就缺少了这种支持。‘由业所生、在三因结生中的慧’这句话的意思是:这是在依业力投生、具有三种善因的结生时刻就带来的智慧——要注意,‘三因’这个词应该和「结生」连接在一起看,而不是和「慧」连接。因为并不存在什么‘三因的智慧’这种说法。这里说‘在结生中的慧’,是指从结生之后便开始转起的那种智慧,我们说它属于‘结生中的’,是因为它是以结生为根源的,并不是说它只在结生的那一刹那才存在。显示巴利原文
Narati netīti naro, puriso. Kāmaṃ itthīpi taṇhājaṭāvijaṭane samatthā atthi, padhānameva pana sattaṃ dassento ‘‘naro’’ti āha yathā ‘‘satthā devamanussāna’’nti, aṭṭhakathāyaṃ pana avibhāgena puggalapariyāyo ayanti dassetuṃ ‘‘naroti satto’’ti vuttaṃ. Vipākabhūtāya saha paññāya bhavatīti sapañño. Tāya hi ādito paṭṭhāya santānavasena bahulaṃ pavattamānāya ayaṃ satto savisesaṃ sapaññoti vattabbataṃ arahati. Vipākapaññāpi hi santānavisesena bhāvanāpaññuppattiyā upanissayapaccayo hoti ahetukadvihetukānaṃ tadabhāvato. Kammajatihetukapaṭisandhipaññāyāti kammajāya tihetukapaṭisandhiyaṃ paññāyāti evaṃ tihetukasaddo paṭisandhisaddena sambandhitabbo, na paññāsaddena. Na hi paññā tihetukā atthi. Paṭisandhito pabhuti pavattamānā paññā ‘‘paṭisandhiyaṃ paññā’’ti vuttā taṃmūlakattā, na paṭisandhikkhaṇe pavattā eva.
能思考、观察所缘,故称为“心”(citta),此处即指定(samādhi)。定具有特别殊胜的审察作用。如寻等心所,若无定的配合,便不能完成这种审察;而定即使无其配合,也能独自成办。由于修习令心熟练、强而有力,依诸缘而生起,故称为“心”;或因能收集自相续,也称为“心”,二者均指定。因初禅等不同阶位的心呈现种种差别,且能引发神通等心之奇妙作用,故定亦被称为“心”。即便不依赖其他解释,“心”本来就可以是“定”的同义词。但注疏中,“心”通常指识,故此处特别说明:“此处以心为代表,说八种定。”能如实地以种种方式了知,故称为“慧”。慧虽有善恶等多种,但因经文说“应当修习”,故知专指应修之慧,即:“以慧之名,说观慧。”虽然断烦恼时亦伴有热恼之感,正见等心所中也有,但如同“ātappa”一词,“ātāpa(热忱)”在习惯上专门用来指……显示巴利原文
Cinteti ārammaṇaṃ upanijjhāyatīti cittaṃ, samādhi. So hi sātisayaṃ upanijjhānakicco. Na hi vitakkādayo vinā samādhinā tamatthaṃ sādhenti, samādhi pana tehi vināpi sādhetīti. Paguṇabalavabhāvāpādanena paccayehi cittaṃ, attasantānaṃ cinotītipi cittaṃ, samādhi. Paṭhamajjhānādivasena cittavicittatāya iddhividhādicittakaraṇena ca samādhi cittanti vināpi paropadesenassa cittapariyāyo labbhateva. Aṭṭhakathāyaṃ pana citta-saddo viññāṇe niruḷhoti katvā vuttaṃ ‘‘cittasīsena hettha aṭṭha samāpattiyo kathitā’’ti. Yathāsabhāvaṃ pakārehi jānātīti paññā. Sā yadipi kusalādibhedato bahuvidhā, ‘‘bhāvaya’’nti pana vacanato bhāvetabbā idhādhippetāti taṃ dassento ‘‘paññānāmena vipassanā kathitā’’ti. Yadipi kilesānaṃ pahānaṃ ātāpanaṃ, taṃ sammādiṭṭhiādīnampi attheva, ātappasaddo viya pana ātāpa-saddo vīriye eva niruḷhoti āha ‘‘ātāpīti vīriyavā’’ti. Yathā kammaṭṭhānaṃ tāya paññāya parito harīyati pavattīyati, evaṃ sāpi tadatthaṃ yogināti āha ‘‘pārihāriyapaññā’’ti. Abhikkamādīni sabbakiccāni sātthakasampajaññādivasena paricchijja netīti sabbakiccapariṇāyikā.
此偈是依于人而说,为显示此依人的譬喻,故言“譬如有一个人”等。其中,“善磨利”即磨得极为锋利,非常锐利。刀刃变得更锋利,靠的是磨刀石;而能举起刀,则靠手臂的力量——这个譬喻同时包含了这两层含义。为阐明这二喻所指,故说:“于定之磨刀石上善磨……以慧之手举起”。这是因为依定之功德,慧才变得锋利,如经中说:“具定者能如实了知”。而精进则是支撑它、将它提起的力量。“应解”,即堪能解开。当行者进入导向出离的观智时,他便有能力解开爱欲之结。而此处所说的解开,是以彻底斩断的方式断除,故特别解释说:“应切断之、应粉碎之”。显示巴利原文
Yasmā puggalādhiṭṭhānena gāthā bhāsitā, tasmā puggalādhiṭṭhānameva upamaṃ dassento ‘‘yathā nāma puriso’’tiādimāha. Tattha sunisitanti suṭṭhu nisitaṃ, ativiya tikhiṇanti attho. Satthassa nisitatarabhāvakaraṇaṃ nisānasilāyaṃ, bāhubalena cassa ukkhipananti ubhayampetaṃ atthāpannaṃ katvā upamā vuttāti tadubhayaṃ upameyyaṃ dassento ‘‘samādhisilāyaṃ sunisitaṃ…pe… paññāhatthena ukkhipitvā’’ti āha. Samādhiguṇena hi paññāya tikkhabhāvo. Yathāha ‘‘samāhito yathābhūtaṃ pajānātī’’ti (saṃ. ni. 3.5; 4.99; 5.1071). Vīriyañcassā upatthambhakaṃ paggaṇhanato. Vijaṭeyyāti vijaṭetuṃ sakkuṇeyya. Vuṭṭhānagāminivipassanāya hi vattamānāya yogāvacaro taṇhājaṭaṃ vijaṭetuṃ samattho nāma. Vijaṭanañcettha samucchedavasena pahānanti āha – ‘‘sañchindeyya sampadāleyyā’’ti.
然而,此人在证得圣道的刹那,即说为「解开结」;到了证得无学果位的刹那,则说为「已彻底解结」,因此有「现在」等说明。结的解开依于圣道,而圣道又以涅槃为所缘,故就此而言,说为「结的解开之处」。为指出结于何处解开,即说「于彼名与色等灭尽之处」。「嗔恚与色想」——为偈颂音韵顺畅而加鼻音作释,实指「对感官刺激生起排斥的嗔恚想」,以及「对物质对象的色想」。举出嗔恚想,即已将整个欲有含摄在内,因其属于欲有的范畴。对于地遍等物质对象所产生的想,称为「色想」。此二处皆以「想」为代表而总摄相应诸心所。「以有简略说明」是说:能以「有」之状态加以概括,亦即它们共同具有「有」的特性。或者,也可以从「对物质离欲」的角度来诠解这里的「色想」;若如此理解,则此处也已将无色有包含在内。而说「名与色」时,即无余地涵括一切名色,因此其他派别的论师认为:「如此,无色有与无想有显示巴利原文
Maggakkhaṇe panesa vijaṭeti nāma, aggaphalakkhaṇe sabbaso vijaṭitajaṭo nāma. Tenāha ‘‘idānī’’tiādi. Yasmā jaṭāya vijaṭanaṃ ariyamaggena, tañca kho nibbānaṃ āgamma, tasmā taṃ sandhāyāha ‘‘jaṭāya vijaṭanokāsa’’nti. Yattha pana sā vijaṭīyati, taṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘yattha nāmañcā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. ‘‘Paṭighaṃ rūpasaññā cā’’ti gāthāsukhatthaṃ sānunāsikaṃ katvā niddeso, ‘‘paṭigharūpasaññā’’ti vuttaṃ hoti. Paṭighasaññāvasena kāmabhavo gahito kāmabhavapariyāpannattā tāya. Pathavīkasiṇādirūpe saññā rūpasaññā. Ubhayatthāpi saññāsīsena cittuppādasseva gahaṇaṃ. Bhavasaṅkhepenāti bhavabhāvena saṅkhipitabbatāya, bhavalakkhaṇena ekalakkhaṇattāti attho. Rūpe vā virajjanavasena ca vattuṃ sakkuṇeyyā idha rūpasaññāti vuttā , evampettha arūpabhavassa ca gahitatā veditabbā. ‘‘Nāmañca rūpañcā’’ti anavasesato nāmarūpaṃ gahitanti arūpabhava-asaññabhavānampettha gahaṇaṃ siddhanti apare. Pariyādiyanaṭṭhāneti pariyādiyanakāraṇe sabbaso khepananimitte nibbāne. Tenāha ‘‘nibbānaṃ…pe… dassito hotī’’ti.
4. 心防护经的注释显示巴利原文
4. Manonivāraṇasuttavaṇṇanā
24 「如是执见者」指持有这种见解的人,也就是认为「无论何种情况,心的生起皆为苦;无论何种情况,无心的状态都更殊胜,因此无论何时何地,都应防止心生起」的「如是见者」。「他」指有情。「说非导之论」指他在不如理地宣说防护心。「达到自制状态」指从爱欲的染着等中,正确地进入并安住于自制。依随法行而相续运转的心,已无丝毫爱欲等染着,无论现在或未来,皆无任何过患。这样的心于一切处皆以无过失的方式运转,故而「不」需要去「防护」。因此举出「我将布施」等为例。「从何处」指从有过失的运转处、从「不如理作意」处。「彼」心应防护,因它会带来「无义」。显示巴利原文
24.Evaṃladdhikāti sabbathāpi cittuppatti sadukkhā, sabbathāpi acittakabhāvo seyyo, tasmā yato kutoci cittaṃ nivāretabbanti evaṃdiṭṭhikā . Soti satto. Aniyyānikakathaṃ katheti ayoniso cittanivāraṇaṃ vadantī. Saṃyatabhāvaṃ āgatanti rāgavisevanādito sammadeva saṃyatabhāvaṃ otarabhāvaṃ. Dhammacariyāvasena hi pavattamāne citte natthi īsakampi rāgādivisevanaṃ, na tassa sampati āyatiñca koci anattho siyā, tasmā taṃ mano sabbato anavajjavuttito na nivāretabbaṃ. Tenāha ‘‘dānaṃ dassāmī’’tiādi. Yato yatoti yato yato sāvajjavuttito ayonisomanasikārato. Tanti mano nivāretabbaṃ anatthāvahattā.
5. 《阿拉汉经》注疏显示巴利原文
5. Arahantasuttavaṇṇanā
25 「Katāvī」意为「已作者」,指已完成遍知等所应作事而圆满安住者。故说「依四道已办者」。此义由「阿拉汉」等词的存在而得解了。如是,以「我说」等语式提问。显示巴利原文
25.Katāvīti katavā, pariññādikiccaṃ katvā niṭṭhapetvā ṭhitoti attho. Tenāha ‘‘catūhi maggehi katakicco’’ti. Svāyamattho arahantiādisaddasannidhānato viññāyati. Evaṃ ‘‘ahaṃ vadāmī’’tiādiākārena pucchati.
「于蕴等善巧者」:指对于蕴、处等,以及对于自相等,善巧了知它们依蕴聚等方式转起,并能如实知见者。
「舍弃依自所得见之论」:指舍离了依凭自我执取的言论。
「不作世俗分别者」:指他不去破坏“我了知胜义”这样的世间言说,不令其灭失,而是完全依循世间共许,称为“我”、“我所”。此中,以“诸蕴受用”等语句,开示了世俗分别并指出其中过患。显示巴利原文
Khandhādīsu kusaloti khandhāyatanādīsu salakkhaṇādīsu ca samūhādivasena pavattiyañca cheko yathābhūtavedī. Upaladdhinissitakathanti attupaladdhinissitakathaṃ hitvā. Vohārabhedaṃ akarontoti ‘‘ahaṃ paramatthaṃ jānāmī’’ti lokavohāraṃ bhindanto avināsento loke lokasamaññameva nissāya ‘‘ahaṃ, mamā’’ti vadeyya. Khandhā bhuñjantītiādinā vohārabhedaṃ, tattha ca ādīnavaṃ dasseti.
所谓「慢」,乃与「见」势均力敌。实际上,在第二道等中,正见断除及现观的对立面,是由行道成就而得以克服的。因此说:“他思惟:‘如果他并非依「见」而说,那莫非是依「慢」而说?’”
「被焚烧」:即被恼害,被智火所烧。然而它们实是被摧毁,故说「被消灭」。
至于“我执”等,以“我”为所缘,于有情相续中存在时生起,由此称为“mayo”(「想」)。mayo 即是 mayatā,因此说“mayata,即「想」”。显示巴利原文
Māno nāma diṭṭhiyā samadhuro. Tathā hi dutiyamaggādīsu sammādiṭṭhiyā pahānābhisamayassa paṭivipaccanīke paṭipattisiddhi. Tenāha ‘‘yadi diṭṭhiyā vasena na vadati, mānavasena nu kho vadatīti cintetvā’’ti. Vidhūpitāti santāpitā ñāṇagginā daḍḍhā. Te pana viddhaṃsitā nāma hontīti āha ‘‘vidhamitā’’ti. Mamaṅkārādayo mayanti sattasantāne sati pavattanti etenāti mayo, maññanā. Mayo eva mayatāti āha ‘‘mayatanti maññana’’nti.
6. 《明灯经》注疏显示巴利原文
6. Pajjotasuttavaṇṇanā
26 「Divārattinti」:并非如太阳唯照白昼,亦非如月亮唯照夜晚,而是昼夜皆照。
「Tattha tatthāti」:无论何处被点燃,即于彼处照耀,不如太阳或月亮那样遍照整个大千世界及其中空间间隙。
由于智的威力所生起的光明,称为「智光」。又,如经中所说:“诸比丘,于前所未闻之法,为我生眼、生智、生慧、生明、生光”,故道即称为智光。或依“黑暗已破,光明生起”之语,三明之光即为智光。
如初成正觉时,由喜悦洋溢,特别是在宝经堂中遍观缘起时,彼喜悦力所生身光,即是「喜光」。于转法轮时所生的“确实,憍陈如已了知”之净信光明,亦被称为「净信光」。于一切处,世尊说法能破除众生心意之暗,此即「说法光」。
总之,一切佛陀出世所生的光明,亦由此显示了弟子说法所生的法光,同为佛陀之威光。显示巴利原文
26.Divārattinti na ādicco viya divā eva, na candimā viya rattiṃ eva, atha kho divā ca rattiñca. Tattha tatthāti yattha yattha sampajjalito, tattha tattheva padese, na ādicco viya candimā viya sakalaṃ mahādisaṃ disantarāḷañca. Ñāṇānubhāvena uppannāloko ñāṇālokoti vadanti. ‘‘Idaṃ dukkhaṃ ariyasaccanti pubbe me, bhikkhave, ananussutesu dhammesu cakkhuṃ udapādi ñāṇaṃ udapādi paññā udapādi vijjā udapādi āloko udapādī’’ti (saṃ. ni. 5.1081; mahāva. 15; paṭi. ma. 2.30) pana vacanato maggo ñāṇāloko. ‘‘Tamo vihato, āloko uppanno’’ti (ma. ni. 1.386; pārā. 12) vā vacanato vijjattayāloko ñāṇāloko. Paṭhamābhisambodhiyaṃ viya sañjātapītivipphāro, visesato ratanaghare samantapaṭṭhānavicinane sañjātapītivasena uppannasarīrobhāso vā pītiāloko. Tattheva uppannapasādavasena sañjātaālokova pasādāloko. Dhammacakkapavattane ‘‘aññāsi vata, bho, koṇḍañño’’ti uppannapasādālokoti ca vadanti. Sabbattheva satthu dhammadesanā sattānaṃ hadayatamaṃ vidhamantī dhammakathāāloko. Sabbopi buddhānaṃ pātubhāvā uppanno ālokoti iminā sāvakānaṃ desanāya sañjātadhammālokopi buddhānubhāvoti dasseti.
7. 《溪流经》注疏显示巴利原文
7. Sarasuttavaṇṇanā
27 Saraṇato:因不间断地相续转起,诸蕴等的次第被称为‘流’(sarā)。故说‘这些是轮回之流’。Kutoti:即从何处、因何原因、依于何者?故说‘因何而来’?Na patiṭṭhāti:因缺乏缘,故不安住。通过‘水’等譬喻,经中以四大无安住处之说,示现那里没有欲有与色有。由此二者无有的显示,依前述方式,亦示现无色有无有;或者此处应随文句通达其义。因前二有已被摄取,且义已摄,其后义方转起。显示巴利原文
27. Saraṇato avicchedavasena pavattanato khandhādīnaṃ paṭipāṭi sarā. Tenāha ‘‘ime saṃsārasarā’’ti. Kutoti kena kāraṇena, kimhi vā? Tenāha ‘‘kiṃ āgammā’’ti? Na patiṭṭhāti paccayābhāvato. Āpotiādinā pāḷiyaṃ catunnaṃ mahābhūtānaṃ appatiṭṭhānāpadesena tattha kāmarūpabhavānaṃ abhāvo dassito. Tadubhayābhāvadassanena heṭṭhā vuttanayeneva arūpabhavassapi abhāvo dassitova hoti, yathārutavasena vā ettha attho veditabbo. Yasmā purimā dve gahitā, gahitañca atthaṃ pariggahetvāva pacchimattho pavattoti.
8. 大富者经注疏显示巴利原文
8. Mahaddhanasuttavaṇṇanā
28 Nidhīyatī:指被隐藏,故名为‘藏’(nidhāna),意为应当被隐藏、已达隐藏状态之物。Muttasārādi:指珍珠、宝珠、琉璃、珊瑚、银、金等宝物。Suvaṇṇarajatabhājanādi:指金器、银器等,‘等’字包括了钱币、谷物、库藏货物等。这些物品因以持续消耗的方式受用,故称为‘财富’(bhoga)。Aññamaññaṃ abhigijjhanti:互相贪求对方之物,故说‘渴望’。Analaṅkatā:指‘不满足、不充分’之心,被过度欲望、多欲所征服。故说‘不知足、未臻圆满’。Ussukkajātesu:在各种事务中,忙碌已生起。Nānākiccajātesu:于种种事务中,或已生起种种事务者,即那些随顺轮回之流、追逐轮回之道的众生。因渴爱的依止处,家庭被称为‘家宅’或‘非家’,故说‘与女人共居的家’。Virājiyā:表原因之词,故说‘令闪耀后’(virāje显示巴利原文
28. Nidhīyatīti nidhānaṃ. Nidhātabbataṃ gataṃ nihitanti attho. Muttasārādīti muttāmaṇiveḷuriyapavāḷarajatajātarūpādi. Suvaṇṇarajatabhājanādīti ādi-saddena kahāpaṇa-dhaññakoṭṭhabhaṇḍādiṃ saṅgaṇhāti. Tampi hi niccaparibbayavasena bhuñjīyatīti ‘‘bhogo’’ti vuccati. Aññamaññaṃ abhigijjhantīti aññamaññassa santakaṃ abhigijjhanti. Tenāha ‘‘patthentī’’ti. Analaṅkatāti na alaṃ pariyattanti evaṃ katacittā, atricchatāmahicchatāhi abhibhūtā. Tenāha ‘‘atittā apariyattajātā’’ti. Ussukkajātesūti taṃtaṃkicce sañjātaussukkesu. Nānākiccajātesūti nānāvidhakiccesu, sañjātanānākiccesu vā. Vaṭṭagāmikapasutena vaṭṭasotaṃ anusarantesu. Taṇhānivāsatāya gehantipi agārantipi vuccatīti āha ‘‘mātugāmena saddhiṃ geha’’nti. Virājiyāti hetuatthadīpakaṃ padanti āha ‘‘virājetvā’’ti, tvā-saddopi cāyaṃ hetuatthoti.
9. 《四轮经》注疏显示巴利原文
9. Catucakkasuttavaṇṇanā
29 威仪:指由身体所造作的动作,因其为这些动作生起的依止处,故称‘威仪路’,即行走等。以其不断相续转起,故称为‘轮’。因此说‘四轮即是四威仪路’。‘九门’:指业生身。此身充满头发等不净物,故说‘充满即充满不净’。‘与渴爱相应的’:即伴随渴爱。这显示不仅其自身自性不净,其所依止的法亦不净。因生于名为母胎的不净泥沼中,故称‘泥沼所生’;也因从头发等不净泥沼中生,故称‘泥沼所生’。‘出离’:即离开。于是提出问题:对于这自性不净、所依止法也不净的身体,如何能有出离?故说‘对于此’等。显示巴利原文
29. Iriyā vuccati kāyena kattabbakiriyā, tassā pavattiṭṭhānabhāvato iriyāpatho, gamanādi. Taṃ aparāparappavattiyā cakkaṃ. Tenāha ‘‘catucakkanti catuiriyāpatha’’nti. Navadvāranti karajakāyo adhippeto. So ca kesādiasuciparipūroti āha ‘‘puṇṇanti asucipūra’’nti. Taṇhāya saṃyuttanti taṇhāsahitaṃ. Tena na kevalaṃ sabhāvato eva, atha kho nissitadhammo ca asuciṃ dasseti. Mātukucchisaṅkhāte asucipaṅke jātattā paṅkajātaṃ, kesādiasucipaṅkajātattā ca paṅkajātaṃ. Yātrāti apagamo. Tena sabhāvato nissitadhammato ca asucisabhāvato kāyato kathaṃ apagamo siyāti pucchati. Tenāha ‘‘etassā’’tiādi.
「结缚」:以其捆绑与束缚的含义,在此处指忿恨,故说「结缚即忿恨」。而这忿恨在此前的阶段是忿怒,故说「在前时」等。于经典所开示的烦恼中,除去此处经典所开示的忿恨等,余下的七种烦恼——如见、疑等,因极难脱离,犹如皮带,故应知他们即是「皮带」。从执取所缘的自性来说,它只是一法,但依生起形态的差别,以希求的含义而称为「欲」,以贪染、垂涎的含义而称为「贪」。「初次生起者」:指对于同一所缘或同一场合最初生起。「随后持续生起者」:指不断反复生起。对未得的希求,也就是对尚未获得的事物生起执着,这就是贪。「拔除」:即从自身的相续中将其拔出。显示巴利原文
Nahanaṭṭhena bandhanaṭṭhena naddhīti upanāho idhādhippetoti āha ‘‘naddhinti upanāha’’nti. So pana ito pubbakāle kodhoti āha ‘‘pubbakāle’’tiādi . Pāḷiniddiṭṭheti upanāhaiccādike idha pāḷiyaṃ niddiṭṭhe kilese ṭhapetvā avasesā diṭṭhivicikicchādayo satta kilesā dummocayatāya varattā viyāti varattāti veditabbā. Ārammaṇaggahaṇasabhāvato eko evesa dhammo, pavatti-ākārabhedena pana icchanaṭṭhena patthanaṭṭhena icchā, lubbhanaṭṭhena gijjhanaṭṭhena lobhoti vutto. Paṭhamuppattikāti ekasmiṃ ārammaṇe, vāre vā paṭhamaṃ uppannā. Aparāparuppattikoti punappunaṃ uppajjamānako. Aladdhapatthanā appaṭiladdhavatthumhi āsatti lobho. Uppāṭetvāti sasantānato uddharitvā.
10. 《鹿胫者经》注释显示巴利原文
10. Eṇijaṅghasuttavaṇṇanā
30 「如麋鹿的」指如同麋鹿的腿胫。这是表示整体与部分关系的属格。因为小腿肚的肌肉周围匀称平整,所以小腿形状圆润优美。「瘦」是为了否定粗壮的状态,并非表示极度瘦削,故解释为「不粗壮,身体匀称」。「被热恼所枯萎」指因苦行而身体枯槁,这是由于诸根被热恼所烧灼。正因如此,经典中说「因苦行而枯萎」等,以及「少食、不贪婪」。如同「英勇的状态即是精进」,以英勇的状态来定义精进;同样地,由于精进而有英勇的状态,故说「英雄即是具足精进的人」。「食四五团,饮水面」(《长老偈》983;《弥兰陀问经》6.5.10),依照法将(舍利弗)所说的方式来节制食量,这就是对食物的知量。在说明「节量食」之后,为进一步开显也因定时而食而成就少食,故又说「非时……少量食」。对四种资具已断除贪求,因为在菩提树下已彻底断除了一切种类的贪求。正是由于说「于四种资具」,也就表明了一切贪求皆已远离。或者,在说明了「少食」之后再说「不贪婪」,这也是对味爱的否定。于「如狮」等句中,如同「独行」一词,「如」字在意义上也应当连接。显示巴利原文
30.Eṇimigassa viyāti eṇimigassa jaṅghā viya. Avayavīsambandhe hi idaṃ sāmivacanaṃ. Piṇḍimaṃsassa parito samasaṇṭhitattā suvaṭṭītajaṅgho. Kisanti thūlabhāvapaṭikkhepaparājotanā, na suṭṭhu kisabhāvadīpanaparāti āha ‘‘athūlaṃ samasarīra’’nti. Ātapena milātanti tapasā milātakāyaṃ indriyasantāpanabhāvato. Tenevāha – ‘‘tapo milāta’’ntiādi, tathā cāha pāḷiyaṃ ‘‘appāhāraṃ alolupa’’nti. Yathā ‘‘vīrassa bhāvo vīriya’’nti vīrabhāvena vīriyaṃ lakkhīyati, evaṃ vīriyasambhavena vīrabhāvoti āha ‘‘vīranti vīriyavanta’’nti. ‘‘Cattāro pañca ālope, abhutvā udakaṃ pive’’ti (theragā. 983; mi. pa. 6.5.10) dhammasenāpativuttaniyāmena parimitabhojitāya appāhāratā bhojane mattaññutā. ‘‘Mitāhāra’’nti vatvā puna paricchinnakālabhojitāyapi appāhārataṃ dassento ‘‘vikāla…pe… parittāhāra’’nti āha. Catūsu paccayesu loluppavirahitaṃ bodhimūle eva sabbaso loluppassa pahīnattā. ‘‘Catūsu paccayesū’’ti hi imināva sabbattha loluppavigamo dīpitovāti. Rasataṇhāpaṭikkhepo vā esa ‘‘appāhāra’’nti vatvā ‘‘alolupa’’nti vuttattā. ‘‘Sīhaṃ vā’’ti ettha ekacarasaddo viya iva-saddo atthato ‘‘nāga’’nti etthāpi ānetvā, sambandhitabboti āha – ‘‘ekacaraṃ sīhaṃ viya, ekacaraṃ nāgaṃ viyā’’ti. Ekacarā appamattā ekīkatāya.
通过五欲功德来执取色,因为它们具有色的本质。通过意来执取名,因为意具有名的本质。「不分离的法」:即指执取那些不相离的法。以「等」字包含了处、界等。由执取五欲功德,此处依色的共通性,五种色处便已被执取;由执取意,法处便已被执取;如是十二处便被执取。依照这个道理,界等的执取也应配合来理解。故说:「于此,应依五蕴等来配合处格。」「此处」指在经典中。欲的所依是处格。显示巴利原文
Pañcakāmaguṇavasena rūpaṃ gahitaṃ tesaṃ rūpasabhāvattā. Manena nāmaṃ gahitaṃ manassa nāmasabhāvattā. Avinibhuttadhammeti avinābhāvadhamme gahetvā. Ādi-saddena āyatanadhātuādayo gahitā. Kāmaguṇaggahaṇena hettha rūpabhāvasāmaññena pañca vatthūni gahitāneva honti, manogahaṇena dhammāyatanaṃ, evaṃ dvādasāyatanāni gahitāni honti. Iminā nayena dhātuādīnampi gahitatā yojetabbā. Tenāha ‘‘pañcakkhandhādivasenapettha bhummaṃ yojetabba’’nti. Etthāti pāḷiyaṃ. Kāmavatthu bhummaṃ.
四、数诵天品显示巴利原文
4. Satullapakāyikavaggo
1. 《善士经》注释显示巴利原文
1. Sabbhisuttavaṇṇanā
31 因为她们数数称扬诸善士、诸贤者所行的皈依、戒等种种层面的法,或者因为以自己忆念宿住的智慧数数称扬、宣说那种法,所以称为「数诵天」;她们是天神,她们身体的聚合即是其团体,投生在那里的天神便称为「数诵天众」。因此说「称扬善法」等。她们是通过受持而数诵,并非仅仅以赞叹、讲说而投生彼处。此处的「于彼」即指这些天神处于数诵天众那种状态。「以此事」就是以此作为原因。「航海商贾」指结伴出海的商人。「以离弦之箭般的速度」:如同箭从弓弦上离开时的速度,意指急流。「飞起」指突发的灾祸;「突发的」就是灾异中产生的祸害。「安立」是安乐的建立。「于他世能带来利益安乐者」即是无畏之因。「百胫」指一百个人。以「胫」来代称人,因为胫是与人一同行走的部分。他受持了五戒。在近缘戒与不近缘戒中,由于近缘的戒会先成熟果报,所以说「依临命终时受持之戒」。「以一组组的方式」就是按群体的方式。显示巴利原文
31. Sataṃ sādhūnaṃ saraṇagamanasīlādibhedassa dhammassa ullapanato, attano vā pubbenivāsānussatiyā tassa dhammassa ullapanato kathanato satullapā, devatā, tāsaṃ kāyo samūho, tattha bhavāti satullapakāyikā. Tenāha ‘‘sataṃ dhamma’’ntiādi. Samādānavasena ullapetvā, na vaṇṇanākathanamattena tatrāti tasmiṃ tāsaṃ devatānaṃ satullapakāyikabhāve. Idaṃ vatthūti idaṃ kāraṇaṃ. Samuddavāṇijāti saṃyattikā. Khittasaravegenāti jiyāmuttasarasadisavegena, sīghaoghenāti attho. Uppatatīti uppāto. Uppāte bhavaṃ byasanaṃ uppātikaṃ. Patiṭṭhāti hitapatiṭṭhā. Paraloke hitasukhāvahaṃ abhayakāraṇaṃ. Jaṅghasatanti manussasataṃ. Jaṅghāsīsena hi manusse vadati sahacāribhāvato. Aggahesi pañcasīlāni. Āsannānāsannesu āsannasseva paṭhamaṃ vipaccanato ‘‘āsannakāle gahitasīlaṃ nissāyā’’ti vuttaṃ. Ghaṭāvasenāti samūhavasena.
「善士」即贤善者。他们因为成就自他利益、具足可称赞的德行,以及拥有寂静的功德,所以称为「善士」。又因为他们具足智者的特征,所以说他们是「智者」。「共住」就是共同生活,此处意为「在一切威仪中」等。「友伴相交」是以慈爱来联结。慈爱以谋求众生利益为特征,当这种慈爱与智慧结合、以智慧为前导时,这种友伴相交便是无杂染的;其他缺乏智慧引导的,则属于杂染,因此说「不应与任何人建立那种杂染的交往」。「正法」指能带来现法利益等利益的、善美的法。「最胜」指能增长利益等,所以说「增长」。显示巴利原文
Sabbhīti sādhūhi. Te hi saparahitasādhanato pāsaṃsatāya santaguṇatāya ca santoti vuccati. Te pana yasmā paṇḍitalakkhaṇehi samannāgatā honti, tasmā ‘‘paṇḍitehī’’ti āha. Samāsethāti saṃvasethāti ayamettha adhippāyoti āha ‘‘sabbairiyāpathe’’tiādi. Mittasanthavanti mettisandhānaṃ. Sattānaṃ hitesitālakkhaṇā hi metti, sā ca ñāṇasahitā ñāṇapubbaṅgamāvāti mittasanthavo asaṃkiliṭṭho, itaro saṃkiliṭṭhoti āha ‘‘na kenaci saddhiṃ kātabbo’’ti. Saddhammanti diṭṭhadhammikādihitāvahaṃ sundaradhammaṃ. Seyyoti hitavaḍḍhanatādi vuttanti āha ‘‘vaḍḍhī’’ti.
「善士」在这里的意思是贤善者、智者。由于此处所指的对象与善士相反,因此将「其他」一词解释为「从别处,从愚痴的盲者那里」。「忧愁相」即忧愁之因。此处通过省略后面词语的方式,以「忧愁」一词代指「忧愁之事」。所谓「忧愁之事」,是指盗贼之类,他们通过抢夺等方式令他人产生忧愁。「随逐忧愁」即遭遇忧愁。显示巴利原文
Sataṃ sādhūnaṃ, paṇḍitānanti ayamettha attho. Tappaṭiyogavisayattā añña-saddassa vuttaṃ ‘‘aññatoandhabālato’’ti. Sokanimittaṃ sokakāraṇaṃ uttarapadalopena idha sokasaddena gahitanti āha ‘‘sokavatthūna’’ntiādi. Sokavatthūni nāma corādayo acchindanādivasena paresaṃ sokakaraṇato. Sokānugatā sokappattā.
「长老」指桑基洽长老。由于他是那些比丘尼的舅父,因此长老对她们说「你们」。他心想:「这些人在这里说『盗贼作恶了』,岂不是完全不把我们放在眼里?」于是,一部分人说:「我们杀了他。」另一部分人出于悲悯说:「我们放了他吧。」「商议」即互相讨论。显示巴利原文
Therassāti saṃkiccattherassa. Attano bhaginiyā jeṭṭhattā ‘‘tumhe’’ti āha. Ayaṃ ‘‘idha corā paṭipajjiṃsū’’ti amhe tiṇāyapi na maññatīti cintetvā ekacce ‘‘mārema na’’nti āhaṃsu. Karuṇāya ekacce ‘‘vissajjemā’’ti āhaṃsu. Mantetvāti bhāsetvā.
「曾有」即过去存在过。「在阿兰若的大林中」:指在那样的密林、大森林中的居住者,意为猎师。「机关」指网罟等陷阱。「张设」即设置。「小兔」指羚羊。「惊惧」即害怕、惊恐。「仅一夜」指仅仅一夜之间。「财损」的意思是:原本可从过往行人那里获得一些费用,现在这笔收入损失了;而且行人因此不再前来,心想:「他们连沙门都杀害,对我们还会慈悲吗?」由此,连一日本应获得的费用也得不到了。这便是其中的隐含之义。显示巴利原文
Ahu ahosi, bhūtapubbanti attho. Araññasmiṃ brahāvaneti tādise brahāvane, mahāraññe nivāsīti attho cetoti byādho. Kūṭānīti vākurādayo. Oḍḍetvāti sajjetvā. Sasakanti pelakaṃ ubbiggāti bhītatasitā. Ekarattinti ekaratteneva. Dhanajānīti paribbayavasena addhikehi laddhabbadhanato hāni, ‘‘samaṇampi nāma hanti, kiṃ amhesu lajjissatī’’ti addhikānaṃ anāgamanato ekadivasaṃ laddhabbaparibbayampi na labhissantīti adhippāyo.
“亲戚们”指父母、兄弟、姐妹等亲属。据说,这些亲戚要去阿提穆塔的姐妹那里,在半路上与阿提穆塔相遇。阿提穆塔为了守护真实语,没有将贼人的恐怖告诉他们。因此经文说“他们的”等。因为这些亲戚依止阿提穆塔出家,所以说“在阿提穆塔沙弥的近前”,并非说他成为授具足戒的戒师。因此,经文说“收为自己的弟子”。由于他守护真实语,又证得无上功德,所以他在亲戚当中格外耀眼。显示巴利原文
Ñātayopi mātāpitubhātubhaginiādike ñātake. Te kira adhimuttassa bhaginiyā santikaṃ upagacchantā antarāmagge tena samāgatā, adhimutto saccavācaṃ anurakkhanto corabhayaṃ tesaṃ nārocesi. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘tesampī’’tiādi. Taṃ nissāya pabbajitattā ‘‘adhimuttasāmaṇerassa santike’’ti vuttaṃ, na upasampadācariyo hutvā. Tenāha ‘‘attano antevāsike katvā’’ti. Saccānurakkhaṇena anuttaraguṇādhigamena ca ñātimajjhe virocati.
“恒常”即恒常地。此处的前缀 sa- 有“具有”之义,如“有贪”等词;或者说 sātata 是安乐的状态,故也说“或安乐地”。“以因”即以此因、彼因。所有那些(天人等)的话语皆是善说,而世尊所言方为最极致的善说。此义由各自对应的偈颂即可明了,为将其提炼而显明,故说“非仅”等。由此可知,亲近善士、精勤于法,是令众生增长、获得智慧的必然之因;同样,在有着忧愁悲伤的因缘时能成为无忧,在亲友中光彩照人,往生善趣,长久安住于快乐,乃至解脱轮回之苦,这些都是他人所不共的功德——此义已明,应当这样理解。显示巴利原文
Sātatanti satataṃ. Sa-saddassa hi idha sābhāvo yathā ‘‘sārāgo’’tiādīsu. Sātabhāvo vā sātatanti āha ‘‘sukhaṃ vā’’ti. Kāraṇenāti tena tena kāraṇena. Sabbāsaṃ tāsaṃ vacanaṃ subhāsitaṃ, bhagavato pana ukkaṃsagataṃ subhāsitameva. Svāyamattho taṃtaṃgāthāpadeneva viññāyatīti taṃ nīharitvā dassetuṃ ‘‘na kevala’’ntiādi vuttaṃ. Tena sappurisūpasaṃsevasaddhammābhiyogo yathā sattānaṃ vaḍḍhiyā paññāpaṭilābhassa ekantikaṃ kāraṇaṃ, evaṃ sokapaccaye sati visokabhāvassa, ñātimajjhe sobhāya, sugatigamanassa, ciraṃ sukhaṭṭhānassa, vaṭṭadukkhamocanassapi aññāsādhāraṇaṃ hotīti vuttamevāti daṭṭhabbaṃ.
第二《悭吝经》注释。显示巴利原文
2. Maccharisuttavaṇṇanā
32 “放逸”指处于放逸状态而不得善法。因此,这类人完全失去了正念,故说“以失念为特相”。在此,邪见、疑等也都包含于放逸之中。现在,为了说明因悭吝相和放逸相而不行布施,故说“有一类人”等。“将耗尽”意为财富会走向损耗。“嬉戏等”的“等”涵盖了装饰、庆典、星宿、灾祸等。“给与名声者”指给予称赞和随从的名声。“给与吉祥者”指给予光彩。“给与成就者”指给予家族、财富、容貌等成就。或者,此处的“福德”应理解为福果,正如“如是此福德增长”等处所说。应知“布施有果报”。于此应知:所施的物品并不坚固,大多时需与他人共有,自己终须舍弃它离去,若对其生起欢喜,则有过失;而布施这一行为本身,不与他人共有,能随自己到来生,由布施所生的欢喜则无过失。布施能驱除贪等恶法,成为其他福德的亲依止。应当这样来理解。显示巴利原文
32. Pamajjanākārena pavattā anupaladdhi pamādo. Tena ekantato satirahitā hontīti vuttaṃ ‘‘sativippavāsalakkhaṇenā’’ti. Diṭṭhivicikicchādayo cettha pamādeneva saṅgahitā. Idāni yathā macchariyanimittañca pamādanimittañca dānaṃ na dīyati, taṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘ekacco hī’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Parikkhayaṃ gamissatīti bhogaparihāniṃ gamissati. Khiḍḍādīti ādi-saddena maṇḍanavibhūsanachaṇanakkhattakiccabyasanādiṃ saṅgaṇhāti. Yasadāyakanti kittiyasassa parivārayasassa ca dāyakaṃ. Sirīdāyakanti sobhaggadāyakaṃ. Sampattidāyakanti kulabhogarūpabhogasampadāhi sampattidāyakaṃ. Puññanti vā idha puññaphalaṃ daṭṭhabbaṃ ‘‘evamidaṃ puññaṃ pavaḍḍhatī’’tiādīsu (dī. ni. 3.80) viya. Atthi dānassa phalanti ettha deyyadhammassa anavaṭṭhitataṃ bahulasādhāraṇataṃ, taṃ pahāya gamanīyataṃ , tabbisayāya pītiyā sāvajjataṃ, dānadhammassa anaññasādhāraṇataṃ anugāmikataṃ, tabbisayāya pītiyā anavajjataṃ, lobhādipāpadhammānaṃ vinodanaṃ, sesapuññānaṃ upanissayañca jānantenāti vattabbaṃ.
“那个正是愚者”的意思是:凡是悭吝之人,就是那个愚者。那些没有布施习惯的人是愚者。有些人由于害怕享受财富会令其耗尽,连自己都不敢享用,就像那极度吝啬的富翁一样,因此说“在此世间与彼世间之中”。显示巴利原文
Taṃyeva bālanti yo maccharī, tameva. Adānasīlā bālā. Ekacco dhanassa paribhogaparikkhayabhayena attanāpi na paribhuñjati atilobhaseṭṭhi viyāti āha ‘‘idhalokaparalokesū’’ti.
因为有一类没有布施习惯的人,看见旅人,虽看见了却如同未见;听到他们的话语,虽听到了却如同未闻;自己对他们什么也不说;他被不愿布施的固执所束缚。因此,在这些情形中,死人的特征确实已现起,所以说“因无布施之习,如同已死之人”。而在义注中,仅就布施这一项,为了显示他与死者相等,才说“正如”等语。至于具足布施者的不死相貌,则应从相反的方面来了解。“他们去”一词,主语是复数,动词却用了单数,这是语词的变通表达,所以说“他们一同去”。“具足布施等法”是从远古便有,并非今日才出现,故称为“恒常的”;此法存在于这些智者身上,所以他们便是“恒常者”。也可以解释为:此法是那些恒常智者所拥有的,故说“这是恒常智者之法”。即使所要布施的物品很少,有些人依然行布施,有些人却因悭吝而不行。“如同千施”的意思是:即使只是一次的施与,由于他生起的舍离思心极其卓越,其功德也等同千次布施。显示巴利原文
Yasmā ekacco adānasīlo puriso addhike disvā passantopi na passati, tesaṃ kathaṃ suṇantopi na suṇoti, sayaṃ kiñci na katheti, adātukamyatāthambhe baddho hoti, tasmā tattha mataliṅgāni upalabbhantiyevāti āha ‘‘adānasīlatāya maraṇena matesū’’ti. Aṭṭhakathāyaṃ pana dānamattameva gahetvā matenassa samataṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘yathā hī’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Dānasīlassa pana amataliṅgāni vuttavipariyāyato veditabbāni. Vajanti puthutte ekavacanaṃ, tasmā vacanavipallāsena vuttanti āha ‘‘saha vajantā’’ti. Dānasīlādidhammo purātano, na ajjatanoti sanantano, so etesu atthīti sanantanā, paṇḍitā, tesaṃ dhammāti tesaṃ vasenapi dhammo sanantanoti āha ‘‘sanantanānaṃ vā paṇḍitānaṃ esa dhammo’’ti. Appasmimpi deyyadhamme sati eke dānaṃ dadanti, eke na dadanti maccharibhāvā. Sahassadānasadisāti ekāpi dakkhiṇā pariccāgacetanāya uḷārabhāvato sahassadānasadisā hoti.
“难追随”是说,对于不具足此法的人而言,难以追随而行。而不追随此法,便是不圆满此法,故说“难圆满”。“应行法”——此法行是就居士而开始的,故说“行十善业道法”。因此说道“及抚养妻子”等。“拾穗”是指农夫们做完自己应做的农活后,在打谷场等处,因谷物散落而以拾穗等方式收集被遗弃的谷物。因此说“即使有人……以拾穗为生”。以此(提及十万千施者),也显示了十亿比丘的团食。将“已施”一词引来作连接。或者说,十亿迦哈巴那的团食,即是以运用十亿迦哈巴那的方式所准备的团食。这是为了说明:那些十万千施者的布施,其数量有如此巨大。“即使以拾穗为生者”的意思是:即使是以拾穗维生,即因拾穗之业。其余两句也应同理理解:即使抚显示巴利原文
Duranugamanoti asamaṅginā anugantuṃ dukkaro. Ananugamanañcassa dhammassa apūraṇamevāti āha ‘‘duppūro’’ti. ‘‘Dhammaṃ care’’ti ayaṃ dhammacariyā gahaṭṭhassa vasena āraddhāti āha ‘‘dasakusalakammapathadhammaṃ caratī’’ti. Tenāha ‘‘dārañca posa’’nti. Samuñjakanti kassakehi attanā kātabbaṃ katvā visaṭṭhadhaññakaraṇato khale uñchācariyavasena samuñjaniādinā chaḍḍitadhaññasaṃharaṇaṃ. Tenāha ‘‘yo api…pe… samuñjakaṃ caratī’’ti. Etenāti satasahassasahassayāgiggahaṇena dasannampi bhikkhukoṭīnaṃ piṇḍapāto dassito hoti. ‘‘Dinno’’ti padaṃ ānetvā yojanā. Dasannaṃ vā kahāpaṇakoṭīnaṃ piṇḍapātoti dasannaṃ kahāpaṇakoṭīnaṃ viniyuñjanavasena sampāditapiṇḍapāto. Tayidaṃ satasahassaṃ sahassayāgīnaṃ dānaṃ ettakaṃ hotīti katvā vuttaṃ. Samuñjakaṃ carantopīti samuñjakaṃ caritvāpi, samuñjakacaraṇahetūti attho. Sesapadadvayepi eseva nayo. Dāraṃ posentopi dhammaṃ carati, appakasmiṃ dadantopi dhammaṃ caratīti yojanā. Tathāvidhassāti tādisassa tathādhammacārino yā dhammacariyā, tassā kalampi nagghanti ete sahassayāgino attano sahassayāgitāya. Yaṃ tena daliddenātiādi tassevatthassa vivaraṇaṃ. Sabbesampi tesanti ‘‘sataṃsahassānaṃ sahassayāgina’’nti vuttānaṃ tesaṃ sabbesampi. Itaresanti ‘‘tathāvidhassā’’ti vuttapurisato aññesaṃ. Dasakoṭisahassadānanti dasakoṭisaṅkhātaṃ tato anekasahassabhedatāya sahassadānaṃ.
“不值十六分之一(kalaṃ nagghatī)”——这是为了说明:相较于他们的布施,此布施更为殊胜、更为广大、果报更为广远,因此才有“想知道为何这布施更具大果报”的探究。因殊胜的缘而达到广大,称为“广大(mahaggato)”,也就是殊胜的意思。所以论中说“这是广大的同义词”。“平等(samena)”指合乎正理、如法而行。“不平等(visameti)”指不平等,陷入悭吝相的状态。“摧毁(chetvā)”指压迫。为了说明那种压迫就如同打击,所以说“打击(pothetvā)”。“泣面者(assumukhā)”指泪水濡湿面庞、泪痕交错,让人哭泣的人。“大施(mahādānanti)”指如前所述,舍弃众多应施之物而行的大布施。“由于生起不清净”指意乐与求取施物方面的清净受到了染污。“另一种”指由法行所生的布施。“小施(parittadānanti)”指因所施物品微少而称为小布施。“由于自身生起的清净”指意乐与求取施物方面的清净。“如是等说”指说了“就是这样,那些千施者……”。其中,“千”指十万。为便于偈颂连缀,未取“百”字。显示巴利原文
‘‘Kalaṃ nagghatī’’ti idaṃ tesaṃ dānato imassa dānassa uḷāratarabhāvena vipulatarabhāvena vipulataraphalatāya vuttanti āha ‘‘kathaṃ nu kho etaṃ mahapphalataranti jānanattha’’nti. Paccayavisesena mahattaṃ gatoti mahaggato, uḷāroti attho. Tenāha ‘‘vipulassetaṃ vevacana’’nti. Samenāti ñāyena, dhammenāti attho. Visameti na same macchariyalakkhaṇappatte. Chetvāti pīḷetvā. Taṃ pana pīḷanaṃ pothananti dassento ‘‘pothetvā’’ti āha. Assumukhāti tintaassumukhasammissā paraṃ rodāpetvā. Mahādānanti yathāvuttaṃ bahudeyyadhammassa pariccajanena mahantadānaṃ. Uppattiyā aparisuddhatāyāti ajjhāsayassa deyyadhammagavesanāya ca suddhatāya malīnattā. Itaraṃ dhammacariyāya nibbattitadānaṃ. Parittadānanti parittassa deyyadhammassa vasena parittadānaṃ. Attano uppattiyā parisuddhatāyāti ajjhāsayassa deyyadhammagavesanāya ca visuddhatāya. Evantiādimāhāti ‘‘evaṃ sahassānaṃ sahassayāgina’’nti avoca. Tattha sahassānanti sataṃsahassānaṃ. Gāthābandhasukhatthaṃ sataggahaṇaṃ na kataṃ. Sesaṃ vuttanayameva.
善经注释显示巴利原文
3. Sādhusuttavaṇṇanā
33 “发出感兴语(udānaṃ udānesī)”:因为喜悦的力量,应该流露出来,所以发出感兴语,即宣说出来。而这句话既然是由喜悦所引生,所以又说“宣说了感兴语”。为了说明那种语言怎么就被称为“感兴语”,所以说了“正如……”等。“以信(saddhāyā)”中的“以”字表示原因。因为在布施的思心中,信是特殊的缘,没有信的人便没有这个。pi字是总结前面所说之义。应知“善哉(sāhū)”一词与“善(sādhu)”同义。“如何?”意思是布施与战争这两件事本质相违。这“二者”就是指布施与战争。“畏命者”指畏惧生命毁灭的人。“畏尽者”指畏惧财富耗尽的人。“说者”指显露出对生命有所贪恋、因此在战斗中无能为力的人。“割截”指手足等被砍断。“奋力者”指精进努力的人。“如此我将守护财富”意思是“我将这样使财富不耗尽”。“说者”在这里指显露出对财富有所贪著、因此在布施上无能为力的人。“如是”指就这样,因为对生命与财富无所顾恋,所以布施与战争相等。“具足信等者”指具足信、法命、审察、戒等功德的人。这样的人即使因施物微少而只作微少的布施,但由于自心成就和福田成就,也能增长很多殊胜的福德,克服种种贪、嗔、嫉、悭。显示巴利原文
33.Udānaṃudānesīti pītivegena uggiritabbatāya udānaṃ uggiri uccāresi. Tayidaṃ yasmā pītisamuṭṭhāpitaṃ vacanaṃ, tasmā vuttaṃ ‘‘udāhāraṃ udāharī’’ti . Yathā pana taṃ vacanaṃ ‘‘udāna’’nti vuccati, taṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘yathā hī’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Saddhāyāti ettha ya-kāro hetuattho. Pariccāgacetanāya hi saddhā visesapaccayo assaddhassa tadabhāvato. Pi-saddo vuttatthasampiṇḍanattho. ‘‘Sāhū’’ti padaṃ sādhusaddena samānatthaṃ daṭṭhabbaṃ. Kathanti dānayuddhānaṃ vipakkhasabhāvāti adhippāyo. Etaṃ ubhayanti dānaṃ yuddhanti idaṃ dvayaṃ. Jīvitabhīrukoti jīvitavināsabhīruko. Khayabhīrukoti bhogakkhayassa bhīruko. Vadantoti jīvite sālayataṃ, tato eva yujjhane asamatthataṃ pavedento. Chejjanti hatthapādādichedo. Ussahantoti vīriyaṃ karonto. Evaṃ bhoge rakkhissāmīti tathā bhoge aparikkhīṇe karissāmīti. Vadantoti idha bhogesu lobhaṃ, tato eva dātuṃ asamatthataṃ pavedento. Evanti evaṃ jīvitabhoganirapekkhatāya dānañca yuddhañca samaṃ hoti. Saddhādisampannoti saddhādhammajīvitāvīmaṃsāsīlādiguṇasamannāgato. So hi deyyavatthuno parittakattā appakampi dadanto attano pana cittasampattiyā khettasampattiyā ca bahuṃ uḷārapuññaṃ pavaḍḍhento bahuvidhaṃ lobha-dosa-issā-macchariya-diṭṭhivicikicchādibhedaṃ tappaṭipakkhaṃ abhibhavati, tato eva ca taṃ mahapphalaṃ hoti mahānisaṃsaṃ. Aṭṭhakathāyaṃ pana ‘‘maccheraṃ maddati’’cceva vuttaṃ, tassa pana ujuvipaccanīkabhāvato.
“他世(paratthā)”指他方世界。《一衣婆罗门的故事》应以顺喻的方式详述,《安古罗的故事》应以逆喻的方式详述。显示巴利原文
Paratthāti paraloke. Ekasāṭakabrāhmaṇavatthu anvayavasena, aṅkuravatthu byatirekavasena vitthāretabbaṃ.
“得法者”,即由此因缘而得法之人。其构词规则,应如理解“持火者”一语般知晓。他们说:“‘奋起’指身精进,‘精进’指心精进。”其中,“奋起”是指在生起财富时的适当努力;“精进”则是指与之相应的奋发。这是阎魔王行使命令之处。它甚至超越了灰河地狱及其他地狱。然而,他们从无间地狱开始,将无间地狱分为十种,再将其余大地狱依寿命长短的差别各分三类,如此共说为三十一种地狱。对于导致投生等活地狱等处的业,应当依其猛利、中等与薄弱,来分别了知该地狱寿命长短的三种差别。另有一派则说:“八大地狱,十六小地狱,将最初的四个寒地狱合而为一,再加其余七个寒地狱,如此共为三十一大狱。”因为此处是取“大地狱”之义,所以最初的四个寒地狱被合为一个地狱。显示巴利原文
Dhammo laddho etenāti dhammaladdho, puggalo. Aggiāhitapadassa viya saddasiddhi daṭṭhabbā. ‘‘Uṭṭhānanti kāyikaṃ vīriyaṃ, vīriyanti cetasika’’nti vadanti. Uṭṭhānanti bhoguppāde yuttapayuttatā. Vīriyanti tajjo ussāho. Yamassa āṇāpavattiṭṭhānaṃ. Vetaraṇimpi itare niraye ca atikkamma. Te pana abbudādīnaṃ vasena avīciṃ dasadhā katvā avasesamahāniraye sattapi āyuppamāṇabhedena tayo tayo katvā ekatiṃsāti vadanti. Sañjīvādinirayasaṃvattanassa kammassa tikkhamajjhamudubhāvena tassa āyuppamāṇassa tividhatā vibhāvetabbā. Apare pana ‘‘aṭṭha mahānirayā soḷasa ussadanirayā ādito cattāro sitaniraye ekaṃ katvā satta sitanirayāti evaṃ ekatiṃsa mahānirayā’’ti vadanti. Mahānirayaggahaṇato ādito cattāro sitanirayā eko nirayo katoti.
“那些”,是指经过简择而选取的资具。关于九十五种外道派别的分别,应依照《破迷障注释》中所说的方法来理解。“于彼处”,是指在这两种简择之中。他宣说了对“應施者”的抉择,因为譬喻的作用,正是为了显明所喻之义。由此,如同选取良田一样,对“應施者”的抉择也应如此理解。显示巴利原文
Tesanti vicinitvā gahitapaccayānaṃ. Pañcanavutipāsaṇḍabhedā papañcasūdanisaṃvaṇṇanāyaṃ vuttanayena veditabbā. Tatthāti tesu dvīsu vicinanesu. Dakkhiṇāvicinanaṃ āha, upamānāni hi nāma yāvadeva upameyyatthavibhāvanatthāni. Etena sukhettagahaṇatopi dakkhiṇeyyavicinanaṃ daṭṭhabbaṃ.
“于众生克制”,以此显示了十种善业道法。正如通过“于众生克制”说明了克制夺取众生的生命,克制不与取、克制欲邪行、克制虚妄语、克制离间语、克制粗恶语、克制杂秽语、克制贪求他人财物、克制损毁心、克制邪见也随即得以显示。因此他说:“开始讲述持戒的利益。”而此处粗恶语的克制,则是依同义之理而说。显示巴利原文
Pāṇesu saṃyamoti iminā dasavidhampi kusalakammapathadhammaṃ dasseti. Yathā hi ‘‘pāṇesu saṃyamo’’ti iminā sattānaṃ jīvitāvoropanato saṃyamo vutto, evaṃ tesaṃ sāpateyyāvahārato paradārāmasanato visaṃvādanato aññamaññabhedanato pharusavacanena saṅghaṭṭanato niratthakavippalapanato parasantakābhijjhānato ucchedacintanato micchābhinivesanato ca saṃyamo hotīti. Tenāha ‘‘sīlānisaṃsaṃ kathetumāraddhā’’ti. Pharusavacanasaṃyamo panettha sarūpeneva vutto.
“畏惧他人的谴责”:由于恶行,害怕被他人谴责自己。“以畏惧谴责”:即以畏惧谴责之相。他们怀着“别人怎样才不会谴责我们呢”的期望而不作恶。“就是法句”:即无为法界才是善的、最胜的。因为一切有为法是无常的、是尽法、是衰灭法、是离贪法、是灭法,所以为证得它,应当发起精进。“前”这个词表示时间的差别,所以说“又在过去迦叶佛等时”等。或者,没有时间差别,仅仅是处所义,所以说“一切”等。在这里,“一切”是指所有迦叶佛等世间依怙,他们被称为“寂静”,是因为止息了一切烦恼的热恼,具足寂静的一切功德。显示巴利原文
Parassa upavādabhayenāti pāpakiriyahetu parena attano vattabbaupavādabhayena. Upavādabhayāti upavādabhayanimittaṃ. ‘‘Kathaṃ nu kho amhe pare na upavadeyyu’’nti āsīsantā pāpaṃ na karonti. Dhammapadamevāti asaṅkhatadhammakoṭṭhāso eva seyyo seṭṭho. Yasmā sabbasaṅkhataṃ aniccaṃ khayadhammaṃ vayadhammaṃ virāgadhammaṃ nirodhadhammaṃ, tasmā tadadhigamāya ussāho karaṇīyoti dasseti. Pubbasaddo kālavisesavisayoti āha ‘‘pubbe ca kassapabuddhādikālepī’’tiādi. Puna akālaviseso apāṭiyekko bhummatthavisayovāti āha ‘‘sabbepi vā’’tiādi. Tattha sabbepi vāti ete sabbepi kassapabuddhādayo lokanāthā santo nāma vūpasantasabbakilesasantāpā santasabbhūtaguṇattā.
4. 无有经注释显示巴利原文
4. Nasantisuttavaṇṇanā
34 “可爱的”即令人喜爱的。正因为如此,这些色等才成为可爱的所缘、快乐的所缘;而那些是事欲,或者是以它们为所缘的烦恼欲。“人中没有诸欲”是此教导的纲要,确切地说,诸欲确实是无常的。“死”被安置于此,故称“死域”。不再来此,故称“不再来”。因为不趣入名为不再来的涅槃。“涅槃是……”等,是对所说之义的阐明。“被缚”指心被系缚。“放逸”是指陷于舍弃的放逸。显示巴利原文
34.Kamanīyānīti kantāni. Tato eva etāni iṭṭhārammaṇāni sukhārammaṇāni rūpādīni, te pana vatthukāmā, tadārammaṇakilesakāmā vā. ‘‘Na santi kāmā manujesū’’ti desanāsīsametaṃ, nicchayena kāmā aniccāyeva. Maccu dhīyati etthāti maccudheyyaṃ. Na puna āgacchati ettha taṃ apunāgamanaṃ. Apunāgamanasaṅkhātaṃ nibbānaṃ anupagacchanato. Nibbānaṃ hītiādi vuttassevatthassa vivaraṇaṃ. Baddhoti paṭibaddhacitto. Pamattoti vossaggapamādaṃ āpanno.
由贪爱与欲求所生,因为贪爱与欲求是它的殊胜缘。“所希求的”会伤害,所以称为“害”,即是苦。而在这里,是从无余灭尽的角度,说五取蕴是苦。“调伏欲则调伏害”,因为因灭故果灭;这样宣说了有余涅槃之后,再以“调伏害”宣说无余依涅槃。显示巴利原文
Taṇhāchandatojātaṃ tassa visesapaccayattā. Icchitaṃ hanatīti aghaṃ, dukkhaṃ. Idha pana anavasesapariyādānavasena pañcupādānakkhandhā dukkhanti. Chandavinayā aghavinayoti hetunirodhena hi phalanirodho, evaṃ saupādisesanibbānaṃ vatvā aghavinayā dukkhavinayoti anupādisesanibbānaṃ vadati.
“种种”:烦恼欲因与受、见等相应不同而有种种,又因行相差别,有恼害与无恼害之别。为加以简别,故说“所缘心”。“意图贪”是指对于以净相等意图所缘对象所生的贪。烦恼欲虽称为“欲”,此处特为成立其为“欲”之义。应依《波修罗经》“诸欲非欲”等偈来阐明,因为此经是就其所缘而说。今为简略阐明其义,故说“游行者波修罗”等。“诸欲非欲,世间种种可爱之物”:世间种种可爱的色等所缘,并非真正的欲。“你若说”:如果你仅仅将意图贪当作欲而言说。“将有”:即是“会是”之意。“听闻可爱声者,导师亦说其为享欲者”,此偈本是另一偈颂,此处仅为简略显示。“慧者”即具慧者,故说“智者”。显示巴利原文
Citrānīti kilesakāmāpi vedanādiṭṭhisampayogabhedena honti, ākārabhedena ca atthi savighātāvighātāti tato visesetuṃ ‘‘ārammaṇacittānī’’ti vuttaṃ. Saṅkappitarāgoti subhādivasena saṅkappitavatthumhi rāgo. Kilesakāmo kāmoti vutto tassevidha visesato kāmabhāvasiddhito. Pasūrasuttena vibhāvetabbo ‘‘na te kāmā’’tiādinā tassa vatthumhi āgatattā. Idāni tamatthaṃ saṅkhepeneva vibhāvento ‘‘pasūraparibbājako hī’’tiādimāha. Na te kāmā yāni citrāni loketi te ce kāmā na honti, yāni loke citrāni rūpādiārammaṇāni. Vedesīti kevalaṃ saṅkapparāgañca kāmaṃ katvā vadesi ce. Hehintīti bhaveyyunti attho. Suṇanto saddāni manoramāni, satthāpi te hehiti kāmabhogīti paccekaṃ gāthā, idha pana saṃkhipitvā dassitā. Dhīrā nāma dhitisampannāti āha ‘‘paṇḍitā’’ti.
“Tassa(他的)”:指那位已完全断除瞋怒与慢、完全超越结缚、于名色不执著、无有贪等杂染的人。摩伽罗阇长老是婆和利婆罗门的十六位侍从之一。尚未随顺脉络而通达的余义,意谓尚有应说之事。正因为他们完全解脱,诸天与人才礼敬那些依此道而行的人。他们又会如何呢?“什么也不会存在”——这是此处特殊的义理吗?这是以最高的说明来指称十力者。“Anupaṭipattiyā”:随顺于行道,依止实践。“Namassanti”:礼敬他,尊敬他。显示巴利原文
Tassāti yo pahīnakodhamāno sabbaso saṃyojanātigo nāmarūpasmiṃ asajjanto rāgādikiñcanarahito, tassa. Mogharājā nāma thero bāvarībrāhmaṇassa paricārakānaṃ soḷasannaṃ aññataro. Yathānusandhiṃ appatto sāvasesa-attho, kiñci vattabbaṃ atthīti adhippāyo . Sabbaso vimuttattāva devamanussā namassanti, ye taṃ paṭipajjanti. Tesaṃ kiṃ hoti? Kiñcipi na siyāti ayamettha atthaviseso? Dasabalaṃ sandhāyevamāha ukkaṭṭhaniddesena. Anupaṭipattiyāti paṭipattiṃ anugantvā paṭipajjanena. Namassanti taṃ pūjenti.
“了知四谛法”:即由那已被通达的四谛法而通达。同样,因佛陀的善觉悟性,他们成为无有怀疑者,故说“断除了疑”。此后,依渐次证得最上道,他们也成为超越执著者。由无学法的圆满,他们成为应受赞叹者,也成为智者所赞叹的对象。显示巴利原文
Catusaccadhammaṃ jānitvāti tena paṭividdhaṃ catusaccadhammaṃ paṭivijjhitvā. Tathā ca buddhasubuddhatāya nibbematikā hontīti āha ‘‘vicikicchaṃ pahāyā’’ti. Tato paraṃ pana anukkamena aggamaggādhigamena saṅgātigāpi honti. Asekkhadhammapāripūriyā pasaṃsiyā viññūnaṃ pasaṃsāpi hontīti.
5. 《嫌责想经》注释显示巴利原文
5. Ujjhānasaññisuttavaṇṇanā
35 「嫌责想者」:由不满而起的想,他们具有这种想,或以不满来认知,故称嫌责想者。「令作」:意指使他人做事时有所节制。「节制而作」:即有所限制地做、言辞有节制。这是以粪扫衣等为对立面而说到毛绸衣等。「采取了名称」:这表明在“嫌责想者”(ujjhānasaññikā)一词中,“ka”音即指“想”。显示巴利原文
35. Ujjhānavasena pavattā saññā etesaṃ atthi, ujjhānavasena vā sañjānantīti ujjhānasaññī. Kārayeti katānaṃ pariyantaṃ kārayeti attho. Pariyantakāritanti paricchinnakāritaṃ parimitavacananti attho. Paṃsukūlādipaṭipakkhanayena pattuṇṇadukulādi vuttaṃ. Nāmaṃ gahitanti etena ‘‘ujjhānasaññikā’’ti ettha ka-saddo saññāyanti dasseti.
「以另一种方式存在」:指实际存在而被执取的我,以不同于自己所宣称的、不清净的方式存在。「欺骗后」:即诱骗之后。「对那骗人者」:指那个骗人者。「那是四种资具的受用」:指对四种资具的受用。「遍知」:即完全了知他的行为方式。「作者」:指正确行道的实践者,也就是正确行道的人。显示巴利原文
Aññenākārena bhūtanti attanā pavediyamānākārato aññena asuddhena ākārena vijjamānaṃ upalabbhamānaṃ attānaṃ. Vañcetvāti palambhetvā. Tassa kuhakassa. Taṃ catunnaṃ paccayānaṃ paribhuñjanaṃ. Parijānantīti tassa paṭipattiṃ paricchijja jānanti. Kārakoti sammāpaṭipattiyā kattā, sammāpaṭipajjitāti attho.
「Idaṃ」:这是依性别颠倒而说,实际意思是“这个”。「法随法行道」:由于它与涅槃法相适应,故是随顺法的行道。因其在破除对立时毫不懈怠,故称坚固。「仅说与仅听」中的“而”字含有否定差别的意味,由此否定了仅仅说与听即是正确行道的特质。「世间流转」:指世间的流转,即诸行以生灭的方式转变,故说“诸行世间的生灭”。此义唯由领悟真理方能实现,因此又说“了知四谛法”。「他们这样不做」:指自己虽具功德却不显露,说“正如你们所说的,他们并不这样做”,以此表明那种做法并不存在。显示巴利原文
Idanti liṅgavipallāsena vuttaṃ, ayanti attho. Dhammānudhammapaṭipadāti nibbānadhammassa anucchavikatāya anudhammabhūtā paṭipadā. Paṭipakkhavidhamane asithilatāya daḷhā. Bhāsitamattena ca savanamattena cāti ettha ca-saddo visesanivattiattho. Tena bhāsitassa sutassa ca sammāpaṭipattivisesaṃ nivatteti. Lokapariyāyanti lokassa parividhamanaṃ uppādanirodhavasena saṅkhārānaṃ parāvuttiṃ. Tenāha ‘‘saṅkhāralokassa udayabbaya’’nti. Svāyamattho saccapaṭivedheneva hotīti āha ‘‘catusaccadhammañca aññāyā’’ti . Evaṃ na kubbantīti attani vijjamānampi guṇaṃ anāvīkaronto ‘‘yathā tumhe vadatha, evaṃ na kubbantī’’ti avijjamānataṃ byākarotīti attho.
“确实不犯作者”:指确实没有造作过失。“接受过失”名为“容忍”;当他这样向教导者告白时,便由此离于过失。因此说“请接受吧”,即“请原谅”。显示巴利原文
Akārakamevāti dosaṃ akārakameva. Accayassa paṭiggaṇhanaṃ nāma adhivāsanaṃ, evaṃ so desakena desiyamāno tato vigato nāma hoti. Tenāha ‘‘paṭiggaṇhātūti khamatū’’ti.
“Sabhāvena”:从自性上说。“Ekasadisa”:即使知晓他人心意,也表现得与不知者相同。“Parato”:之后。“Kathāya uppannāya”:当“谁无过失”等议论生起时,便以“如来、佛陀”等语阐明佛力与佛的威神力。“Khamissāmi”:我将接受过失的告白。在此,接受告白即是“堪忍”,然而导师(世尊)本身早已恒时具足忍辱。显示巴利原文
Sabhāvenāti sabhāvato. Ekasadisanti paresaṃ cittācāraṃ jānantampi ajānantehi saha ekasadisaṃ karontā. Paratoti pacchā. Kathāya uppannāyāti ‘‘kassaccayā na vijjantī’’tiādikathāya pavattamānāya ‘‘tathāgatassa buddhassā’’tiādinā buddhabalaṃ buddhānubhāvaṃ dīpetvā. Khamissāmīti accayadesanaṃ paṭiggaṇhissāmi. Tappaṭiggaho hi idha khamananti adhippetaṃ, satthā pana sabbakālaṃ khamo eva.
“Kopantaro”:内有嗔恚之人,即内心有嗔者。“Dosagaru”:应重视过失之人。或读作“Paṭimuccatī”,义同。“Accāyikakamma”:轻率而不加审察所行之事。“No cidha”:若此中无。“Idha”:仅为小品词。“Apagataṃ”:已远离、已消除。“Doso no ce siyā”:若实无过患,即根本无过失。“Na sammeyyuṃ”:不能平息。“Kusalo”:无过失者。显示巴利原文
Kopo antare citte etassāti kopantaro. Doso garu garukātabbo assāti dosagaru. ‘‘Paṭimuccatī’’ti vā pāṭho, ayameva attho. Accāyikakammanti sahasā anupadhāretvā kiriyā. No cidhāti no ce idha. Idhāti nipātamattaṃ. Apagataṃ apanītaṃ. Doso no ce siyā, tena pariyāyena yadi aparādho nāma na bhaveyyāti. Na sammeyyuṃ na vūpasameyyuṃ. Kusaloti anavajjo.
“Dhīro sadā”(恒常贤善)一词,指断轮回者。所谓“谁常为智者”,正是“由于谁的过错”等问偈的意义。在《长部》《中部》的注释中,“如来”一词已有详解,故说“由如是等因缘,如来……”。“Buddhattādīhi”(以佛陀性等):以“为佛陀性”等词,以及“觉悟众生”等(《大义释》192;《小义释·彼岸赞颂解说》97),包含了义释中所出的因由。所谓“解脱”即圣道,其终极是最高果位——阿拉汉果;随彼果而有的施设名称,即依此而说。如此阐明佛力。现在显示:散说的内容已用摄略的方式收束。显示巴利原文
Dhīro satoti padadvayena vaṭṭachindaṃ āha. Ko niccameva paṇḍito nāmāti atthoti ‘‘kassaccayā’’tiādikāya pucchāgāthāya attho. Dīghamajjhimasaṃvaṇṇanāsu tathāgata-saddo vitthārato saṃvaṇṇitoti āha ‘‘evamādīhi kāraṇehi tathāgatassā’’ti. Buddhattādīhīti ādi-saddena ‘‘bodhetā pajāyā’’tiādinā (mahāni. 192; cūḷani. pārāyanatthutigāthāniddesa 97) niddese āgatakāraṇāni saṅgayhanti. Vimokkhaṃ vuccati ariyamaggo, tassa anto aggaphalaṃ, tattha bhavā paṇṇatti, tassā vasena. Evaṃ buddhabalaṃ dīpeti. Idāni khittaṃ saṅkhepena saṃharāpitaṃ hotīti dasseti.
6. 《信经》注显示巴利原文
6. Saddhāsuttavaṇṇanā
36 “Tatvassāti”:这是将 o 音替换为 va 音,并省略 a 音后所作的解说,因此说“tato assā”(从她那里)。或读作“Tatassā”,意为从那里,即以信为因。“Nānupatantīti”:不随行。“Pamādaṃ karontīti”:放逸,指行邪道。“Lakkhaṇānīti”:无常等相。“Upanijjhāyatīti”:靠近后以智眼观察,即随观。“Āgatakiccanti”:已办之事;或者就是这个读法。“Sādhetīti”:以无迷乱的通达来完成,即观察真实相——灭谛;此义也适用于道,因为离了灭谛,无迷乱的通达便不能发生。“Kasiṇārammaṇassāti”:这是就相来说的。因为也有不以遍相为所缘的等至存在。然而,如同八种等至以及其他以彼为所缘的心,在观察时都以遍相为所缘,所缘既如此被摄取,故只说“遍相所缘的”。“Paramaṃ uttamaṃ sukhanti”:应说“最高无上乐”,即阿拉汉果。显示巴利原文
36.Tatvassāti o-kārassa va-kārādesaṃ a-kārassa ca lopaṃ katvā niddesoti āha ‘‘tato assā’’ti. ‘‘Tatassā’’ti vā pāṭho, tatoti ca saddhāhetūti attho. Nānupatantīti na vattanti. Pamādaṃ karontīti pamajjanti, micchā paṭipajjantīti attho. Lakkhaṇānīti aniccādilakkhaṇāni. Upanijjhāyatīti upecca ñāṇacakkhunā pekkhati, anupassatīti attho. Āgatakiccanti āhatakiccaṃ, ayameva vā pāṭho. Sādhetīti asammohapaṭivedhavasena nipphādeti, tathalakkhaṇaṃ nirodhasaccaṃ upanijjhāyatīti ayamattho maggepi vattabbo tena vinā asammohapaṭivedhassa asambhavato. Kasiṇārammaṇassāti idaṃ lakkhaṇavacanaṃ. Akasiṇārammaṇasamāpattiyopi hi santīti. Yathā ca kasiṇārammaṇāni aṭṭhannaṃ samāpattīnaṃ avasesānañca tadārammaṇānaṃ paccavekkhaṇavasena cittānaṃ, evaṃ tena tāni ārammaṇāni gahitānīti ‘‘kasiṇārammaṇassa’’icceva vuttaṃ. Paramaṃ uttamaṃ sukhanti vattabbato paramasukhaṃ arahattaṃ.
7. 《时经》注显示巴利原文
7. Samayasuttavaṇṇanā
37 “Udānaṃpaṭiccāti”:因甘蔗王为避免种姓混杂,依自己清净的谱系而发出感兴语(udāna),故依族姓得名为“释迦”者。如果只有一个地方,为何用复数?故说“依惯用词”。文法学者在此类场合,如同适用处一般,希望取用别的语性数;这是惯用法,例如“阿槃提”“俱卢”等;但形容它的“地方”一词,因是族姓词,故为单数。“Aropimeti”:未被种植者。显示巴利原文
37.Udānaṃpaṭiccāti ukkākaraññā jātisambhedaparihāranimittaṃ attano vaṃsaparisuddhaṃ nissāya vuttaṃ pītiudāhāraṃ paṭicca gottavasena ‘‘sakkā’’ti laddhanāmānaṃ. Yadi ekopi janapado, kathaṃ bahuvacananti āha ‘‘ruḷhīsaddenā’’ti. Akkharacintikā hi īdisesu ṭhānesu yutte viya saliṅgavacanāni icchanti, ayamettha ruḷhī yathā ‘‘avantī kurū’’ti, tabbisesane pana janapadasadde jātisaddatāya ekavacanameva. Aropimeti kenaci na ropime.
Āvaraṇenāti:谓堤堰。Bandhāpetvāti:令人用枯叶、石块、泥块等筑起坚固的堤坝后。Sassāni kārentīti:据说,在夏季最末月,因暑热炽盛,雪山的雪融化为水,渐次流入罗希尼河,人们筑堰拦水,用以耕种谷物。为阐明“触动种姓而增长争论”这一略说的含义,故接着说“拘利族的工人们说”。Niyuttaamaccānanti:指被委派守护庄稼的那些大臣。显示巴利原文
Āvaraṇenāti setunā. Bandhāpetvāti paṇḍupalāsapāsāṇamattikakhaṇḍādīhi āliṃ thiraṃ kārāpetvā. Sassāni kārentīti jeṭṭhamāse kira ghammassa balavabhāvena himavante himaṃ vilīyitvā sanditvā anukkamena rohiṇiṃ nadiṃ pavisati, taṃ bandhitvā sassāni kārenti. ‘‘Jātiṃghaṭṭetvā kalahaṃ vaḍḍhayiṃsū’’ti saṅkhepena vuttamatthaṃ pākaṭataraṃ kātuṃ ‘‘koliyakammakarā vadantī’’ti āha. Niyuttaamaccānanti tasmiṃ sassaparipālanakamme niyojitamahāmattānaṃ.
三则本生经:即以“手持斧头的人”等开始的《悸动本生经》(本生 1.13.14等)、以“极妙的尊者,发出怖声”等开始的《怖声本生经》(本生 1.4.85等)和以“大象啊,我礼敬你”等开始的《鹌鹑本生经》(本生 1.5.39等),这三部本生经。二则本生经指——显示巴利原文
Tīṇi jātakānīti ‘‘kuṭhārihattho puriso’’tiādinā phandanajātakaṃ (jā. 1.13.14 ādayo) ‘‘duddubhāyati bhaddante’’tiādinā duddubhajātakaṃ, (jā. 1.4.85 ādayo) ‘‘vandāmi taṃ kuñjarā’’tiādinā laṭukikajātakanti (jā. 1.5.39 ādayo) imāni tīṇi jātakāni. Dve jātakānīti –
善哉!众多亲属,纵是阿兰若中的树木;
风将巨大的林主也吹聚一处。”
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Sādhu sambahulā ñātī, api rukkhā araññajā; Vāto vahati ekaṭṭhaṃ, brahantampi vanappati’’nti. –
以这首偈颂开头的《树法本生经》(本生 1.1.74)。显示巴利原文
Ādinā rukkhadhammajātakaṃ (jā. 1.1.74).
“鸟儿们和合一致,带着网飞行;
一旦它们发生争吵,便会落入我的掌控。
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Sammodamānā gacchanti, jālamādāya pakkhino; Yadā te vivadissanti, tadā ehinti me vasa’’nti. (jā. 1.1.33) –
以这首偈颂开头的《和睦本生经》,即此两部本生经。显示巴利原文
Ādinā sammodamānajātakanti imāni dve jātakāni.
由自罚而生起怖畏,请看众生的纷争;
我将讲述悚惧,如我亲身所感。
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Attadaṇḍā bhayaṃ jātaṃ, janaṃ passatha medhagaṃ; Saṃvegaṃ kittayissāmi, yathā saṃvijitaṃ mayā’’ti. (su. ni. 941) –
以这首偈颂开头的《自罚经》。显示巴利原文
Ādinā attadaṇḍasuttaṃ.
“由此”(tena)指世尊。“有作诤者性”(kalahakaraṇabhāvo)指有作诤者的存在。世尊为了显示“为何为了大地而杀害高贵的刹帝利”,欲平息诤论,便以大地为譬喻,说“大地值什么?”等语。“非处”(aṭṭhāne)指无因。“结怨”(veraṃ katvā)指生起对立。她们以种种诱引之行而作努力,并传信说:“让他们生起厌离。”“在库那拉池”(kuṇāladahe)指站在库那拉池岸边。“我问,他便说法”指借着库那拉鸟王的次第提问,而讲述库那拉本生。他通过显示女人的过患,阐明欲的过患、杂秽与染污,从而消除了不乐。由“人中人”(purisapurisehi)等语,破除懈怠,增强人的精勤,心中生起:“我们不与上人共住是不对的。”其意为:不舍弃沙门的正业,不放弃对业处的专精努力。世尊心想“应当坐下”等,是结合上下文而说的。显示巴利原文
Tenāti bhagavatā. Kalahakaraṇabhāvoti kalahakaraṇassa atthibhāvo. Mahāpathaviyā mahagghe khattiye kasmā nāsethāti dassetvā kalahaṃ vūpasametukāmo bhagavā pathaviṃ nidassanabhāvena gaṇhīti dassento ‘‘pathavī nāma kiṃ agghatī’’tiādimāha. Aṭṭhāneti akāraṇe. Veraṃ katvāti virodhaṃ uppādetvā. Taṃtaṃpalobhanakiriyāya parakkamantiyo ‘‘ukkaṇṭhantū’’ti sāsanaṃ pesenti. Kuṇāladaheti kuṇāladahatīre patiṭṭhāya. Pucchitaṃ kathesi anukkamena kuṇālasakuṇarājassa pucchāpasaṅgena kuṇālajātakaṃ (jā. 2.21.kuṇālajātaka) kathessāmīti. Anabhiratiṃ vinodesi itthīnaṃ dosadassanamukhena kāmānaṃ ādīnavokārasaṃkilesavibhāvanavasena. Purisapurisehīti kosajjaṃ viddhaṃsetvā purisathāmabrūhanena uttamapurisehi no bhavituṃ vaṭṭatīti uppannacittā . Avissaṭṭhasamaṇakammantā apariccattakammaṭṭhānābhiyogāti attho. Nisīdituṃ vaṭṭatīti bhagavā cintesīti yojanā.
「在莲池」是指在莲花林中。「开敷」是指以种种功德而绽放。此处,通过“此者对此……未说”一句,显示那些比丘因为依次前来的缘故,相互羞惭,没有向世尊报告各自所证得的殊胜。接着,以“对漏尽者”等说明其中的原因。显示巴利原文
Paduminiyanti padumavane. Vikasiṃsu guṇagaṇavibodhena. Ayaṃimassa…pe… na kathesīti iminā sabbepi te bhikkhū tāvadeva paṭipāṭiyā āgatattā aññamaññassa lajjamānā attanā paṭiladdhavisesaṃ bhagavato nārocesunti dasseti. Khīṇāsavānantiādinā tattha kāraṇamāha.
「刚聚集时」是指刚来到世尊面前的时候。「圣众会」是指圣补特伽罗的集会。「由东方持双山围绕」是指从持双山的东面围绕,而非外道所说的日出山。「为了显示可爱」是指因为有佛陀出现于世的庄严,为了显示世间特别可爱的样貌。「超出」是指起身。「于如是刹那、须臾、时分」与所说相应,是为了显示月轮升起的刹那、升起的时刻、升起的时分等层层递进之相而说。显示巴利原文
Osaṭamatteti bhagavato santikaṃ upagatamatte. Ariyamaṇḍaleti ariyapuggalasamūhe. Pācīnayugandharaparikkhepatoti yugandharapabbatassa pācīnaparikkhepato, na bāhirakehi vuccamānaudayapabbatato. Rāmaṇeyyakadassanatthanti buddhuppādapaṭimaṇḍitattā visesato ramaṇīyassa lokassa ramaṇīyabhāvadassanatthaṃ. Ullaṅghitvāti uṭṭhahitvā. Evarūpe khaṇe laye muhutteti yathāvutte candamaṇḍalassa uṭṭhitakkhaṇe uṭṭhitavelāyaṃ uṭṭhitamuhutteti uparūparikālassa vaḍḍhitabhāvadassanatthaṃ vuttaṃ.
为了显示那些比丘由于种姓等因素,成为世尊的相称眷属,而说了“在那里”等。「生在大选出王族中」等,是显示家族血统的清净。「生为刹帝利胎」一句,是为了表明:虽然种姓清净,但也可能因为父母而有不清净;为了显示“他们的父母也没有不清净”,故而如此说。再者,虽胎清净,但也可能因为所作之过而有混杂,不能成为国王;为了显示“他们也没有这种过失”,而说了「王族出家者」等。显示巴利原文
Tesaṃ bhikkhūnaṃ jātiādivasena bhagavato anurūpaparivārabhāvaṃ dassento ‘‘tatthā’’tiādimāha. Mahāsammatassa vaṃse uppannotiādi kulavaṃsasuddhidassanaṃ. Khattiyagabbhe jātoti idaṃ satipi jātivisuddhiyaṃ mātāpitūnaṃ vasena avisuddhatā siyāti tesampi ‘‘avisuddhatā natthi imesa’’nti visuddhidassanatthaṃ vuttaṃ. Satipi ca gabbhavisuddhiyaṃ katadosena missakattā arajjārahatāpi siyāti ‘‘tampi natthi imesa’’nti dassanatthaṃ ‘‘rājapabbajitā’’tiādi vuttaṃ.
“周遍”指附近。“震动”指生起。“一拘卢舍量处,为声间”指一拘卢舍以内为可闻声的距离;另有人说:“听闻声音之处即为声间”。“三遍六万城”指据说赡部洲最初有大城六万座出现,第二次、第三次也是如此,由此而说“三遍六万城”。然而这些合起来,是在十万之上再加九千,即十八万。“九十九百千小港城”指九百九十千小港城。所谓小港城,是指为大城提供生计的附属城镇。“九十六百千亿港口”指六亿九千万港口。“铜掌岛等五十六宝洲”等。通过叙述城、小港、港口、宝洲等,是为了显示居住于彼处的那些天众数量众多。如果在一万轮围界中诸天已经聚集,为何在圣典中说“以十界”?为此而说:“一万……是所意欲的。”由此,应知这里的“千世界界”即为“一界”。显示巴利原文
Sāmantāti samīpe. Caliṃsūti uṭṭhahiṃsu. Kosamattaṃ ṭhānaṃ saddantaraṃ, ‘‘saddasavanaṭṭhānameva saddantara’’nti apare. Tikkhattuṃ tesaṭṭhiyā nagarasahassesūti jambudīpe kira ādito mahantāni tesaṭṭhi nagarasahassāni uppannāni, tathā dutiyaṃ, tathā tatiyaṃ. Taṃ sandhāyāha ‘‘tikkhattuṃ tesaṭṭhiyā nagarasahassesū’’ti. Tāni pana sampiṇḍetvā satasahassato paraṃ navasahassādhikāni asītisahassāni. Navanavutiyā doṇamukhasatasahassesūti navasatasahassādhikesu navutisatasahassesu doṇamukhesu. Doṇamukhanti ca mahānagarassa āyuppattiṭṭhānabhūtaṃ pādanagaraṃ vuccati. Chanavutiyā paṭṭanakoṭisatasahassesūti chakoṭisatasahassaadhikesu navutikoṭisatasahassapaṭṭanesu. Tambapaṇṇidīpādichapaṇṇāsāya ratanākaresu. Evaṃ pana nagara-doṇamukhapaṭṭana-ratanākarādibhāvena kathanaṃ taṃtaṃadhivatthāya vasantīnaṃ tāsaṃ devatānaṃ bahubhāvadassanatthaṃ. Yadi dasasahassacakkavāḷesu devatā sannipatitā. Atha kasmā pāḷiyaṃ ‘‘dasahi ca lokadhātūhī’’ti? Vuttanti āha ‘‘dasasahassa…pe… adhippeta’’nti. Tena sahassilokadhātu idha ‘‘ekā lokadhātū’’ti veditabbā.
“在铜殿”指最初建造的那座铜殿。“梵天界”指下方的梵天界。如果那些天众如此无间地聚集,后来者便无容身之地。为回应此责难,而说了“然而正如……”等语。显示巴利原文
Lohapāsādeti sabbapaṭhamakate lohapāsāde. Brahmaloketi heṭṭhime brahmaloke. Yadi tā devatā evaṃ nirantarā hutvā sannipatitā, pacchā āgatānaṃ okāso eva na bhaveyyāti codanaṃ sandhāyāha ‘‘yathā kho panā’’tiādi.
“生于净居天身者”指那些生于净居天身的众生。然而,由于净居天界是他们的住处,故又称“净居天居民”。“净居”的意思是指:由于断除了五下分结及其余诸结,清净的住处、居所为他们所有,故称净居。“知大集会”意思是了知大集会,并已前往赴会。显示巴利原文
Suddhāvāsakāye uppannā suddhāvāsakāyikā. Tāsaṃ pana yasmā suddhāvāsabhūmi nivāsaṭṭhānaṃ, tasmā vuttaṃ ‘‘suddhāvāsavāsīna’’nti. Āvāsāti āvāsaṭṭhānabhūtā. Devatā pana orambhāgiyānaṃ itaresañca saṃyojanānaṃ samucchinnaṭṭhena suddho āvāso vihāro etesanti suddhāvāsā. Mahāsamāgamaṃ ñatvāti mahāsamāgamaṃ gatāti ñatvā.
在东方轮围的边缘处降下,因为别处找不到容身之处。其余各方也是如此。「宝铠」:即由因陀罗尼蓝宝石制成的铠甲。「面向佛陀的区域是佛道」:此佛道到达轮围边缘便不能再越过。「由大佛道」:即那些前来亲近佛陀的天人与梵天所行经的佛道。显示巴利原文
Puratthimacakkavāḷamukhavaṭṭiyaṃ otari aññattha okāsaṃ alabhamāno. Evaṃ sesāpi. Maṇivammanti indanīlamaṇimayaṃ kavacaṃ. Buddhānaṃ abhimukhabhāgo buddhavīthi, sā yāva cakkavāḷā uttarituṃ na sakkā. Mahatiyā buddhavīthiyāvāti buddhānaṃ santikaṃ upasaṅkamantehi tehi devabrahmehi valañjitabuddhavīthiyāva.
「Samiti、saṅgati、sannipāto、samayo」:这几个词都指「聚集」;大聚集即大集会,故称为「大众」。「大林」指茂密增长的树林,故称为「林薮」。「天群」即天众。「令安住定」:即正确地安住、善加习入出世间定。如此安住于定中,便是以定鞭策激励,故说「以定策励」。由于远弃了一切如牛尿般弯曲不定等状态,所以自己……而成就。「导之具」即缰绳。对于未入正道的马,握住缰绳能令其入正道,故说「持缰绳而策励」;这一策励本身即是防阻,所以说「策励即防阻」。显示巴利原文
Samiti saṅgati sannipāto samayo, mahanto samayo mahāsamayoti āha ‘‘mahāsamūho’’ti. Pavaddhaṃ vanaṃ pavananti āha ‘‘vanasaṇḍo’’ti. Devaghaṭāti devasamūhā. Samādahaṃsūti samāhitaṃ lokuttarasamādhiṃ suṭṭhu appitaṃ akaṃsu. Tathā samāhitaṃ pana samādhinā niyojitaṃ nāma hotīti vuttaṃ ‘‘samādhinā yojesu’’nti. Sabbesaṃ gomuttavaṅkādīnaṃ dūrasamussāritattā attano…pe… akariṃsu. Vinayati asse etehīti nettāni, yottāni. Avīthipaṭipannānaṃ assānaṃ vīthipaṭipādanaṃ rasmiggahaṇena hotīti ‘‘yottāni gahetvā acodento’’ti vatvā taṃ pana acodanaṃ avāraṇamevāti āha ‘‘acodento avārento’’ti.
如同木桩钉入墙中或地中难以拔出,又如同横闩能阻挡入城,也如同门槛深深埋入坚固地基、难以拔出;同样地,贪等烦恼在众生相续中难以拔除,并且能阻挡进入涅槃城,因此它们被称作「桩、闩、门槛」。将其「拔出」之后,由于没有渴爱的冲动动摇,故称「不动」。因为拥有最上的满足,且心向四方无有障碍,所以能行无障碍行。以佛眼、法眼、天眼、普眼、净眼——以此五眼而观见。为什么是善调伏的呢?说「眼亦调伏」等。「以欲等」:即不依贪欲等的方式去行动、不去转起。「不来」:由于烦恼不再生起。「来」:即指过失。显示巴利原文
Yathā khīlaṃ bhittiyaṃ, bhūmiyaṃ vā ākoṭitaṃ dunnīharaṇaṃ, yathā ca palighaṃ nagarappavesanivāraṇaṃ, yathā ca indakhīlaṃ gambhīranemi sunikhātaṃ dunnīharaṇaṃ, evaṃ rāgādayo sattasantānato dunnīharaṇā nibbānanagarappavesanivāraṇā cāti te ‘‘khīlaṃ palighaṃ indakhīla’’nti ca vuttā. Ūhaccāti uddharitvā. Taṇhāejāya abhāvena anejā. Paramasantuṭṭhabhāvena cātuddisattā appaṭihatacārikaṃ caranti. Buddhacakkhu-dhammacakkhu-dibbacakkhu-samantacakkhu-pakaticakkhūnaṃ vasena pañcahi cakkhūhi. Sudantā kutoti āha ‘‘cakkhutopī’’ti. Chandādīhīti chandādīnaṃ vasena na gacchanti na vattanti. Na āgacchanti anuppādanato. Āgunti aparādhaṃ.
「Sabbasaṃyogā(一切结缚)」:这是省略了格尾的表述,意为“一切结缚”。「Visajjā(散布)」:即散布开来之后。「Evam pi(如是亦)」:即通过这首偈颂,来解释「āguṃ na karoti(不行恶)」这句话。显示巴利原文
Sabbasaṃyogāti vibhattilopena niddeso, sabbe saṃyogeti attho. Visajjāti visajjitvā. Evampīti imāyapi gāthāya vasena ‘‘āguṃ na karotī’’ti pade.
「Gatāse(已皈依者)」:就是已经皈依的人。他们不再堕入恶趣,因为他们的皈依已达究竟决定。此处指的是出世间皈依,因此说:“以无疑的皈依而成为已皈依者”。他们确实决定不会堕入恶趣,并且会令天众充满。然而,那些通过世间皈依而以佛陀为皈依处的人,只要不诽谤,也不会堕入恶趣;若其他因缘和合,他们也会在舍弃人身之后,令天众充满。因此,那位梵天说:“凡是皈依佛陀……(中略)……将令天众充满。”显示巴利原文
Gatāseti gatā eva. Na gamissanti pariniṭṭhitasaraṇagamanattā. Lokuttarasaraṇagamanañhettha adhippetaṃ. Tenāha ‘‘nibbematikasaraṇagamanena gatā’’ti. Te hi niyamena apāyaṃ na gamissanti, devakāyañca paripūressanti. Ye pana lokiyena saraṇagamanena buddhaṃ saraṇaṃ gatā, na te gamissanti apāyaṃ, sati ca paccayantarasamavāye pahāya mānusaṃ dehaṃ devakāyaṃ paripūressantīti. Tenāha so brahmā ‘‘ye keci buddhaṃ…pe… paripūressantī’’ti.
第八、《碎石经》注释。显示巴利原文
8. Sakalikasuttavaṇṇanā
38 “去往”指去往园林,这是句子的关联。“持弓者”即用弓箭射击、打击、逼迫的人。“接住了它”指他跃至那块石头的下方接住了它。由于世尊福德的威力,石头被击落后自然下落时,风也承托住了它。世尊未被击中,是因为他无可指责。不过应当知道,这也是从“业果”的角度来看的。从此以后,世尊便生起不适。这也表明:在业所生之身中,即使是不愉悦的触受也会现起,正是因为那样的业在那里成熟而得到了机会。“此住处”指灵鹫山的住处。“荒野”指不从事耕作之处。“不平”指地形高低不平。“如轿子般安置的床”指床被做成了类似轿子的样式。显示巴利原文
38.Tanti uyyānaṃ saṅkhaṃ gatanti sambandho. Dhanunā sarena gahanti pothayanti bādhentīti dhanuggahā. Taṃ sampaṭicchīti tassā silāya heṭṭhābhāgena uggantvā sampaṭicchi. Satthu puññānubhāvena upahatattā sayampi paripatantī vātaṃ upatthambheti. Abhihani satthārā anāvajjitattā. Tañca kho kammaphalavasenāti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Tato eva tato paṭṭhāya bhagavato aphāsu jātanti etenapi upādiṇṇakasarīre nāma aniṭṭhāpi samphassakā patanti eva tathārūpena kammunā katokāseti dasseti. Ayaṃvihāroti gijjhakūṭavihāro. Ujjaṅgalo na kattabbaparo. Visamoti bhūmibhāgavasena visamo. Sivikākārena sajjito mañco eva mañcasivikā.
「Bhusā(强烈)」:意指坚固、猛利。「Dukkhā(苦)」:意指痛苦的、难以忍受的。「Kharā(粗)」:意指粗糙的。「Kaṭukā(苦涩)」:意指不可意的。「Asātā(不乐)」:意指不悦意的、不可爱的。「Na appeti(不进入)」:意指不走近、不相应。「Na appāyanti(不容忍)」:意指不能忍受。由于他具备对感受的忍耐以及正念正知,对于一切众生依止之处的食之集起及其缘由生起,其过患与出离早已彻底明了,因此那些现行的感受不能压制他的心。他如此完全地建立了正念正知,所以说「以受的忍耐……乃至……成为」。「Apīḷiyamāno(不被压迫)」:意指不被逼恼。虽然被不可意的感受所接触,要说完全不被其压迫是不可能的,但因为他已遍知其本质,不随其转,因此说「不受恼害」。所以经文说「不被翻腾起伏的感受所左右」。显示巴利原文
Bhusāti daḷhā. Dukkhāti dukkhamā duttitikkhā. Kharāti kakkasā. Kaṭukāti aniṭṭhā. Asātāti na sātā appiyā. Na appetīti na upeti. Na appāyantīti na khamanti. Vedanādhivāsanakhantiyā satisampajaññayuttattā sabbasattaṭṭhitāhārasamudayavatthujātassa ādīnavanissaraṇānaṃ pageva suppaṭividitattā yathā samudācāro cittaṃ nābhibhavati, evaṃ sammadeva upaṭṭhāpitasatisampajaññattā vuttaṃ ‘‘vedanādhivāsana…pe… hutvā’’ti. Apīḷiyamānoti abādhiyamāno. Kāmaṃ aniṭṭhāya vedanāya phuṭṭho tāya apīḷiyamāno nāma natthi, pariññātavatthukattā pana tassā vase avattamāno ‘‘avihaññamāno’’ti vutto. Tenāha ‘‘samparivattasāyitāya vedanānaṃ vasaṃ agacchanto’’ti.
「狮子卧」:此处,「卧」指躺卧的姿势;像狮子一样卧,即狮子卧。或者,「狮子卧」即最殊胜的卧、无上的卧。这个含义在注释书中将会讲到。所谓「以左侧卧」,是受用欲乐者的卧法。之所以不存在右侧卧,是因为右手不适合抓取身体等动作——这是就男性而言。不能单侧长时间躺卧,是因为会产生苦受。以上所说,即是「狮子卧」。以「威光炽盛」表示狮子无恐惧。其他胆小怯弱的野兽进入巢穴后,大多充满惊恐,先战栗才睡下;而狮子无所畏惧,如同保持正念的比丘,先建立正念然后睡下。因此说「将两前足……」等。「前足」:指将左前足放在右前足上,将两前足并放在一处。「后足」:两条后足也如前并放。它审视躺卧处,正因无恐惧。至于经中提到的「抬起头……」等狮子动作,如同无有惊惧地醒来,应知这也是依其本性而成就无畏。狮子伸懒腰,为使长时间保持单一姿势的肢节灵活,胜任行走等。发出三遍狮子吼,是为……显示巴利原文
Sīhaseyyanti ettha sayanaṃ seyyā, sīhassa viya seyyā sīhaseyyā, taṃ sīhaseyyaṃ. Atha vā sīhaseyyanti seṭṭhaseyyaṃ uttamaseyyaṃ. Svāyamattho aṭṭhakathāyameva āgamissati. ‘‘Vāmena passena sentī’’ti evaṃ vuttā kāmabhogiseyyā. Dakkhiṇapassena sayāno nāma natthi dakkhiṇahatthassa sarīraggahaṇādiyogakkhamato. Purisavasena cetaṃ vuttaṃ. Ekena passena sayituṃ na sakkonti dukkhuppattito. Ayaṃ sīhaseyyāti ayaṃ yathāvuttā sīhaseyyā. Tejussadattāti iminā sīhassa abhītabhāvaṃ dasseti. Bhīrukajātikā hi sesamigā attano āsayaṃ pavisitvā utrāsabahulā santāsapubbakaṃ yathā tathā sayanti, sīho pana abhirukabhāvato satokārī bhikkhu viya satiṃ upaṭṭhapetvāva sayati. Tenāha ‘‘dve purimapāde’’tiādi. Purimapādeti dakkhiṇapurimapāde vāmassa purimapādassa ṭhapanavasena dve purimapāde ekasmiṃ ṭhāne ṭhapetvā. Pacchimapādeti dve pacchimapāde. Vuttanayeneva idhāpi ekasmiṃ ṭhāne ṭhapanaṃ veditabbaṃ. Ṭhitokāsasallakkhaṇaṃ abhīrukabhāveneva. Sīsaṃ pana ukkhipitvātiādinā vuttasīhakiriyā anutrāsapabujjhanaṃ viya abhīrukabhāvasiddhā dhammatāvasenevāti veditabbā. Sīhavijambhitavijambhanaṃ ativelaṃ ekākārena ṭhapitānaṃ sarīrāvayavānaṃ gamanādikiriyāsu yoggabhāvāpādanatthaṃ. Tikkhattuṃ sīhanādanadanaṃ appesakkhamigajātapariharaṇatthaṃ.
「卧」:在此处,不起任何造作而安住,故称为卧。第四禅那即是他的卧,称为第四禅那卧。那么,这里的第四禅那具体指什么呢?是指「入出息念的第四禅那」。世尊从此禅那出定后,增长观智,次第证得最上道,因而成为如来。也有人说:「那只是近因,并非卧,但由于《大般涅槃经》说:世尊从第四禅那出定后,随即般涅槃。所以,世间的第四禅那等至本身,就是如来之卧。」若如此理解,如来之卧只成立于般涅槃的那一刻;但实际上,如来并非恒常入于世间第四禅那等至。在此,应理解为以最上果转起的第四禅那。如同普通有情的睡眠以昏昧为特征,依有分心生起,并且多随其最初生类;世尊则依圣者生类,多数时以那最上果的第四禅那为住,应知此即「如来卧」。狮子卧即最殊胜之卧,故说为「无上卧」。显示巴利原文
Seti abyāvaṭabhāvena pavattati etthāti seyyā, catutthajjhānameva seyyā catutthajjhānaseyyā. Kiṃ panettha taṃ catutthajjhānanti? Ānāpānacatutthajjhānaṃ. Tato hi vuṭṭhahitvā vipassanaṃ vaḍḍhetvā anukkamena aggamaggaṃ adhigantvā tathāgato jātoti. ‘‘Tayidaṃ padaṭṭhānaṃ nāma, na seyyā, tathāpi yasmā ‘catutthajjhānā vuṭṭhahitvā samanantaraṃ bhagavā parinibbāyī’ti mahāparinibbāne (dī. ni. 2.219) āgataṃ. Tasmā lokiyacatutthajjhānasamāpatti eva tathāgataseyyā’’ti keci. Evaṃ sati parinibbānakālikāva tathāgataseyyāti āpajjati; na ca tathāgato lokiyacatutthajjhānasamāpajjanabahulo vihāsi. Aggaphalavasena pavattaṃ panettha catutthajjhānaṃ veditabbaṃ. Tattha yathā sattānaṃ niddupagamalakkhaṇā seyyā bhavaṅgacittavasena hoti, sā ca nesaṃ paṭhamaṃ jātisamanvayā yebhuyyavuttikā, evaṃ bhagavato ariyajātisamanvayaṃ yebhuyyavuttikaṃ aggaphalabhūtaṃ catutthajjhānaṃ tathāgataseyyāti veditabbā. Sīhaseyyā nāma seṭṭhaseyyāti āha ‘‘uttamaseyyā’’ti.
因为当时并未作意“我划定好时间界限,届时便起身”,所以巴利圣典中未提到“作意起身想”。因此说:“在此处,未说‘起身想’。”接着说明原因:“因为这是病卧。”由于这种病卧需要持续很长的时间。显示巴利原文
‘‘Kālaparicchedaṃ katvā yathāparicchedaṃ uṭṭhahissāmī’’ti evaṃ tadā manasikārassa akatattā pāḷiyaṃ ‘‘uṭṭhānasaññaṃ manasikaritvā’’ti na vuttanti āha ‘‘uṭṭhānasaññanti panettha na vutta’’nti. Tattha kāraṇamāha ‘‘gilānaseyyā hesā’’ti. Sā hi cirakālappavattikā hoti.
由于这些石头并非各自分散而来,而是合成一团、以堆聚的方式到来,所以经中说“所有的那些”。因此也说“七百”。“乃至少许变化”,是指因无法忍受剧痛而表现出的哪怕一点点动作。“如善磨之金”,即如同经过精心打磨、制作精良的黄金一般。显示巴利原文
Visuṃ visuṃ rāsivasena anāgantvā ekajjhaṃ puñjavasena āgatattā vuttaṃ ‘‘sabbāpi tā’’ti. Tenāha ‘‘sattasatā’’ti. Vikāramattampīti vedanāya asahanavasena pavattanākāramattampi. Susammaṭṭhakañcanaṃ viyāti sammaṭṭhasusajjitasuvaṇṇaṃ viya.
“法之说”指对无行而生起的自性法的言说。而“合说”这个词,仅表示具有相同语法形式的言辞。“如龙象般而行”,故称为“龙象行”,这种状态就是“龙象性”。这是省略了格语尾的表述,意即“与大龙象、大象相似”。“以贤善运作之义”,是指通过自己不断向上、善巧行事。“良骏”,指能忍受正当降临之苦,成为坚固贤明者,圆满完成自身应作之事的人。“以知因非因故”,指他知晓何为因、何为非因,即了知哪些是有效的方法,哪些不是。“即以彼义”,就是用“无同等者”这一含义来解释。“解脱者将令解脱”等描述,是依其能荷负重担之义而言。“以无垢秽之义”,是指他远离了贪欲等一切污秽毒害的状态。显示巴利原文
Dhammālapananti asaṅkhārikasamuppannasabhāvālapanaṃ. Samullapitañhi ākārasamānavacanametaṃ. Nāgo viya vāti pavattatīti nāgavo. Tassa bhāvo nāgavatā. Vibhattilopena hesa niddeso, mahānāgahatthisadisatāyāti attho. Byattuparicaraṇaṭṭhenāti byattaṃ uparūpari attano kiriyācaraṇena. Ājānīyoti sammāpatitaṃ dukkhaṃ sahanto attanā kātabbakiriyaṃ dhīro hutvā nitthārako. Kāraṇākāraṇajānanenāti niyyānikāniyyānikakaraṇañātatāya. Tenevaṭṭhenāti appaṭisamaṭṭheneva. ‘‘Mutto moceyya’’ntiādi dhuravāhaṭṭhena. Nibbisevanaṭṭhenāti rāgādivisavigatabhāvena.
“无指定之教令”是指未特别指定对象而发出的命令。尽管“定”一词有较宽泛的共通含义,但依据此论的文脉,此处有其特定义涵,故注释说“此处之定,即指阿拉汉果定”。因一切烦恼完全止息,从所有烦恼中善为解脱,故称“善解脱”。“趋入”是指心面朝所缘目标而转起的状态。“背离”是指心以远离的方式转起,即背向所缘的状态。不像世间禅那心或观禅心那样,需依凭刻意的努力与功用,以彼分断或镇伏断的方式暂时压伏烦恼后方能安立或证得;此处的定,纯粹因为烦恼已被彻底断除,所以注释才说“实因已断,故为果定所等持”。“应逾越”是指在行为仪轨上应当跨越过去。而这种跨越,就意味着冒犯、抵触,故注释再次强调为“应抵触”。显示巴利原文
Aniyamitāṇattīti anuddesikaṃ āṇāpanaṃ. Sāmaññakatopi samādhisaddo pakaraṇato idha visesatthoti āha ‘‘samādhinti arahattaphalasamādhi’’nti. Paṭippassaddhivasena sabbakilesehi suṭṭhu vimuttanti suvimuttaṃ. Abhinataṃ nāma ārammaṇe abhimukhabhāvena pavattiyā. Apanataṃ apagamanavasena pavattiyā, vimukhatāyāti attho. Lokiyajjhānacittaṃ viya vipassanā viya ca sasaṅkhārena sappayogena tadaṅgappahānavikkhambhanapahānavasena ca vikkhambhetvā na adhigataṃ na ṭhapitaṃ, kiñcarahi kilesānaṃ sabbaso chinnatāyāti āha ‘‘chinnattā vataṃ phalasamādhinā samāhita’’nti. Atikkamitabbanti ācārātikkamavasena laṅghitabbaṃ. Sā pana laṅghanā āsādanā ghaṭṭanāti āha ‘‘ghaṭṭetabba’’nti.
“五吠陀”即:梨俱吠陀、夜柔吠陀、娑摩吠陀、阿闼婆吠陀,以及历史传说,如此以历史传说为第五的诸吠陀。因“行”(cara)一词发生了词形颠倒,故说为“carantā”,意即“修苦行者”。“卑劣之形相”:因他们志向低劣,心的本质是鄙下的。由于毫无解脱之心,故而不能趋向涅槃。“困穷”即是由于他们无力完成证得阿拉汉果的修行。“被淹没者”即“被征服者”。“以那样的戒”指的是牛戒之类的戒律。“系缚者”:他们劝令他人受持后,再依那种修行方式持续追随、绑住对方。“他们修习粗劣的苦行”是指实践自我折磨。为举部分事例加以说明,故说“五火炙身”等。他们说“像这样修行的人没有解脱,像那样修行的人才能从轮回中解脱”,这实际上就是从他们自己的角度阐述了教法的导出内容,所以说“她们在宣讲教法的导出”。“Ādi(等)”是指——显示巴利原文
Pañcavedā nāma – iruvedo, yajuvedo, sāmavedo, āthabbaṇavedo, itihāso cāti evaṃ itihāsapañcamānaṃ vedānaṃ. ‘‘Cara’’nti vacanavipallāsena vuttanti āha ‘‘carantā’’ti, tapantāti attho. Hīnattarūpāti hīnādhimuttikatāya nihīnacittasabhāvā. Vimuttikatāya abhāvato nibbānaṅgamā na honti. Arahattādhigamakammassa abhabbatāya parihīnatthā. Ajjhotthaṭāti abhibhūtā. Tādiseheva sīlehīti gosīlādīhi. Baddhāti samādapetvā pavattanavasena anubaddhā. Lūkhaṃ tapanti attakilamathānuyogaṃ. Taṃ pana ekadesena dassento ‘‘pañcātapatāpana’’ntiādimāha. ‘‘Evaṃ paṭipannassa mokkho natthi, evaṃ paṭipannassa vaṭṭato mutti atthī’’ti vadantī sā attato sāsanassa niyyānabhāvo kathito nāma hotīti āha ‘‘sāsanassa niyyānikabhāvaṃ kathentī’’ti. Ādinti gāthādvayaṃ.
第九、《第一雨云女儿经》注疏显示巴利原文
9. Paṭhamapajjunnadhītusuttavaṇṇanā
39 “Cātumahārājikassa(四王天的)”:指的是属于四大王天众的。“法随觉”:四圣谛之法,是随顺着应遍知等行相而觉悟的。“我现证”:并非依从他人之说,而是自己亲身现证之后而了知。所谓“诽谤法者”,可能依音声的过失而诽谤,也可能依义理的过失而诽谤,为显示此义,故说“文字低劣……乃至……极端”等。而那位天女为了显示“这些愚昧者的诽谤,因他们带着低劣的智慧,会招致极大的损害”,故说“诸愚昧者堕入嚎叫地狱”。“别异而有”:是指别异于无间大地狱而另外存在。“以忍”:是指以智忍。“以寂止”:是指以贪等一切烦恼的彻底寂止。因此说“欢喜已”等。显示巴利原文
39.Cātumahārājikassāti cātumahārājikakāyikassa. Dhammo anubuddhoti catusaccadhammo pariññeyyādibhāvassa anurūpato buddho. Paccakkhamevāti parapattiyā ahutvā attapaccakkhameva katvā jānāmi. Dhammaṃ garahantā nāma saddadosavasena vā atthadosavasena vā garaheyyunti taṃ dassento ‘‘hīnakkhara…pe… kotivā’’ti āha. Sā pana ‘‘tesaṃ vigarahā dummedhatāya mahānatthāvahāvā’’ti dassentī devatā āha ‘‘dummedhā upenti roruva’’nti. Visuṃ hotīti avīcimahānirayato visuṃ eva hoti. Khantiyāti ñāṇakhantiyā. Upasamenāti rāgādīnaṃ sabbaso vūpasamena. Tenāha ‘‘ruccitvā’’tiādi.
第十、《第二雨云女儿经》注疏显示巴利原文
10. Dutiyapajjunnadhītusuttavaṇṇanā
40 “敬佛与法者”(buddhañ ca dhammañ ca namassamānā):指已经了知佛陀的善觉性与法的善法性之后,恭敬佛陀与法这两者的人。由于对佛陀与法有净信的人,因为了知僧团的善妙行道,必然也对僧团有净信,所以为了表明这个意义已被偈颂中的“ca”(和)字所涵盖,便说“以ca字还含摄了僧团”。“具义者”(atthavatiyo):指由于包含了世间善行与出世间道,所以具足世间与出世间之义的偈颂。“她所诵出的法”(yaṃ dhammaṃ sā abhāsi):意思是那位大拘迦那陀天女,在安住于自己通达的你们的法之后,根据自己的能力诵出的法义。“以众多”(bahunā)是指以种种方式。“以理趣”(pariyāyena)是指以理由、方法。“如是之人”(tādiso)是指:具有这种通达诸谛的相貌,在义理、法等方面善巧的人,他对于每个字句都能引出举例、理由、结论,而进行教导、宣说、施设、建立、开显、分别、阐明。因此说“此世尊”等。这是为了说明善逝(佛陀)的法具有非常广大的开展能力。“遍转”(samantato vattati):显示巴利原文
40.Buddhañcadhammañca namassamānāti buddhasubuddhataṃ dhammasudhammatañca ñatvā tadubhayaṃ namassamānā. Yasmā buddhe ca dhamme ca pasanno saṅghe ca pasanno eva hoti tassa suppaṭipattiyā vijānanato, tasmā so attho gāthāya ca-saddasaṅgahitoti dassento ‘‘ca-saddena saṅghañcā’’ti āha atthavatiyoti lokiyalokuttaraatthasaṅgahitā lokiyakusalalokuttaramaggasaṅgaṇhanato. Yaṃ dhammaṃ sā abhāsīti yaṃ tumhākaṃ dhammaṃ paṭivijjhitvā ṭhitā, sā mahākokanadā attano balānurūpaṃ abhāsi. Bahunāti nānappakārena. Pariyāyenāti kāraṇena. Tādisoti tathārūpo tathāpaṭividdhasacco atthadhammādīsu kusalo ekekaṃ padampi udāharaṇahetunigamanāni nīharanto ācikkhati deseti paññapeti paṭhapeti vivarati vibhajati uttānīkaroti. Tenāha ‘‘ayaṃ bhagavā’’tiādi. Etena ativiya vitthārakkhamo sugatadhammoti dasseti. Pariyāpuṭanti parivattitaṃ. Evaṃ vitthārakkhamaṃ dhammaṃ yasmā devadhītā ‘‘saṃkhittamatthaṃ lapayissāmī’’ti avoca, tasmā vuttaṃ ‘‘tassattha’’ntiādi.
第五·燃烧品显示巴利原文
5. Ādittavaggo
第一 燃烧经注释显示巴利原文
1. Ādittasuttavaṇṇanā
41 “首”(sīsaṁ)是指开示的指称,也就是在对其他应说之法进行开示时,以某一部分为首而作的指称。由此而说“以贪等……”。“以布施”(dānena):指通过将自己所有物施舍给他人的方式。而这种施舍是以思进行的,所以称为“以布施思”(dānacetanāya)——即布施善思(dānapuññacetanā),也就是布施所生的善思,它只属于施主,因为含摄于施主的相续之中。“已运出的货物”(nīhatabhaṇḍakaṁ):指从燃烧的家宅中搬运出来的货物。“此”(etaṁ):指“已施”等说法。在“未施”(adinne):于不致力于布施之门的财物上,也就是在尚未布施的财物上。“以终”(antena)即指命终,因此说“以死”(maraṇena)。“我所”(mamāti):由于被执取,所以成为所执取的对象,也就是财物。即使这些财物没有因盗贼等任何原因毁坏,死时也必然被舍弃,所以说“未因盗贼等而毁坏的财物”(corādīnaṁ vasena avinaṭṭhabhoge)。因为这里有殊胜、最上的色等,所以称为显示巴利原文
41.Sīsanti desanāpadeso, desanāya aññesupi vattabbesu kassacideva sīsabhāgena apadisanaṃ. Tenāha ‘‘rāgādīhī’’tiādi. Dānenāti attano santakassa paresaṃ pariccajanena. Taṃ pana pariccajanaṃ cetanāya hotīti āha ‘‘dānacetanāyā’’ti dānapuññacetanāti dānamayā puññacetanā dāyakasseva hoti taṃsantatipariyāpannattā. Nīhatabhaṇḍakanti ādittagehato bahi nikkhāmitaṃ bhaṇḍakaṃ. Etanti ‘‘dinnaṃ hotī’’tiādivacanaṃ. Adinneti dānamukhe aniyuñjite bhoge. ‘‘Antenā’’ti jīvitassa anto adhippetoti āha ‘‘maraṇenā’’ti. Mamāti pariggahitattā pariggahā, bhogā. Tepi kenaci ākārena vināsaṃ anupagatā maraṇena pahīyanti nāmāti vuttaṃ ‘‘corādīnaṃ vasena avinaṭṭhabhoge’’ti. Sobhanā aggabhūtā rūpādayo etthāti saggo, taṃ saggaṃ.
第二 施何经注释显示巴利原文
2. Kiṃdadasuttavaṇṇanā
42 「两三次不食」:指两次或三次不进食。「不能起立」:连起立都不能,更不用说身体所需做的其他事了,因为身体虚弱。「即便虚弱」:指在进食前是虚弱的,后来才变得有力。这样,从反面和正面两方面说明了食物能带给身体力量。由于施食的施主给受者带来力量,因此他自己在未来也会获得身体的力量,此力量因不被破坏而得以守护。所以世尊说:“施予力之后,便成为力的分享者。”其余诸句义理相同。「貌美」:指容貌端正美丽。「成为丑陋」:指变成令人厌恶的丑陋相貌,因为私密处没有遮蔽。这里的「车乘」是总称,「鞋履」则是具体显示。因为能无痛苦地行进,依此而有「车乘」之称,因此伞等也被视为具有车乘的意义。所以经中说:“施车乘者成为乐的施予者。”成为作眼者……显示巴利原文
42.Dve tīṇi bhattāni abhutvāti dve tayo vāre bhattāni abhuñjitvā. Uṭṭhātuṃ na sakkotīti uṭṭhātumpi na sakkotī, pageva aññaṃ sarīrena kātabbakiccaṃ dubbalabhāvato. Dubbalopi hutvāti bhuñjanato pubbe dubbalo hutvā balasampanno hoti. Evaṃ byatirekato anvayato ca āhārassa sarīre balavataṃ āha. Yasmā annado dāyako paṭiggāhakassa balado hoti, tasmā so āyatiṃ attano sarīre balado avināsavasena balassa rakkhako ca hoti. Tenāha bhagavā – ‘‘balaṃ kho pana datvā balassa bhāgī hotī’’ti (a. ni. 5.37) sesapadesupi eseva nayo. Surūpopīti abhirūpopi. Virūpo hotīti bībhaccharūpo kopīnassa acchannattā. Idañca yānanti sāmaññato vuttaṃ. Upāhanāti sarūpato dasseti. Adukkhappatto hutvā yāti vattati etenāti yānanti chattādīnampi yānabhāvo vutto. Tenāha ‘‘yānado sukhado hotī’’ti. Cakkhudo nāma hoti cakkhunā kātabbakicce sahakārīkāraṇabhāvato dīpassa.
为了详细说明前面概括的“成为一切力等施者”之义,经中说“二三个村庄”等。由于可以坐卧等而得依止,故称「依所」,也就是住处。如同被投入其中一般,因为疲劳已被消除。所谓「在外游行者」:指没有得到住处,在室外露天处游走的人。「焚烧」:即燃烧,指疲惫。由于寒、热等相违的缘,自身的相续就会变为异分相续;相反则是同分相续,应如此了知。所谓乐,是由消除苦的因缘以及生起乐的因缘而产生的;这两方面都是依靠住处获得的。为了说明这个道理,经中说“在外游行者的足……”等。「法喜乐」:指通过随念法而生起的喜与乐。「寂止乐」:指因烦恼止息而生起的乐。进入背风、窗子关好的住处,关上门安住的人会经历黑暗,所以说“犹如落入井中一般”。因此经中说“床、椅等不显现”。这其实是由于外部带来的劳苦所造成的过失,而不是住处本身的过失。因此提及「须臾」……显示巴利原文
‘‘Sabbesaṃyeva balādīnaṃ dāyako hotī’’ti saṅkhepato vuttaṃ atthaṃ vitthārato dassetuṃ ‘‘dve tayo gāme’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Nisajjādivasena patissayitabbato patissayo, vihāro. Pakkhittaṃ viya hoti parissamassa vinoditattā. Bahi vicarantassāti patissayaṃ alabhitvā bahi vivaṭaṅgaṇe vicarantassa. Jhāyatīti jhāyantaṃ hoti, kilamatīti attho. Sītuṇhādivirodhipaccayavasena sasantāne visabhāgasantati, tabbipariyāyato sabhāgasantati veditabbā. Sukhaṃ nāma dukkhapaccayaparihārato sukhapaccayuppannato ca hoti, tadubhayaṃ patissayavasena labhatīti dassento ‘‘bahi vicarantassa pāde’’tiādimāha. Dhammapītisukhanti dhammapaccavekkhaṇena uppannapītisukhaṃ. Upasamasukhanti kilesānaṃ vūpasamena pavattasukhaṃ. Nivātaṃ pihitavātapānaṃ patissayaṃ pavisitvā dvāraṃ pidhāya ṭhitassa andhakāro hotīti vuttaṃ ‘‘kūpe otiṇṇo viya hotī’’ti. Tenāha ‘‘mañcapīṭhādīni na paññāyantī’’ti. Tayidaṃ bahisamāpannaparissamadosena, na ca patissayadosena. Tenāha ‘‘muhutta’’ntiādi.
「不死」:因依靠它而不死,即证悟涅槃等成就。布施此不死,就是宣说佛法,即授予它。因此说“凡是说法者……”。“那么,如何是佛法的教导呢?”于是说“义注”等。「讲述义注」:就是对那些没有展开解释的巴利经文进行意义注释,这是它的含义。而对于从未学过经文的人,就教导他们读诵经文。在各方面解答所提出的问题,这是属于教典的责任;在修行和住处的责任方面,则指导禅修业处,并且令这两方面的人都得闻佛法。「一切布施」:即如上所说的财布施与无畏布施。「法布施」:即说法。「法乐」:在止观等法中的喜悦。「法味」:依止正法所生起的喜与欢悦。显示巴利原文
Na marati etenāti amaraṇaṃ, nibbānādhigamādayo. Tassa dānaṃ dhammūpadeso, taṃ deti. Tenāha ‘‘yo dhammaṃ anusāsatī’’ti. Tayidaṃ dhammānusāsanaṃ kathaṃ hotīti āha ‘‘aṭṭhakatha’’ntiādi. Aṭṭhakathaṃ kathetīti avivaṭapāṭhassa pāḷiyā atthasaṃvaṇṇanaṃ karotīti attho. Anadhītino pana pāḷiṃ vāceti. Tattha tattha gataṭṭhāne pucchitapañhaṃ vissajjeti, ayaṃ tāva ganthadhuro, paṭipattivāsadhure pana kammaṭṭhānaṃ ācikkhati, ubhayesampi dhammassavanaṃ karoti. Sabbadānanti yathāvuttaāmisadānaṃ abhayadānaṃ. Dhammadānanti dhammadesanā. Dhammaratīti samathavipassanādhamme abhirati. Dhammarasoti saddhammasannissayaṃ pītipāmojjaṃ.
第三《食物经》注释显示巴利原文
3. Annasuttavaṇṇanā
43 「Patthentī」:即渴望、企求。为了以事例说明其在世间较为明显的通达,便说:“如质多居士、尸婆罗长老等那样。” 「Anna」:指称为“食物”的四种资粮。将所有施主总括一处,从共通的角度说为“施主”,正如所说:“那个所谓的有情,怎么会不欣喜食物呢?”此处「有情」即众生。而且,由于共通的说法具有多种含义,故说:“凡以信心、以清净心布施此食物者,食物便会追随此人。”此处「ma」字是连接词,意为“他们(te eva)”。意即食物不会舍弃施主,而是随之而行,犹如车轮追随轮毂。显示巴利原文
43.Patthentīti pihenti. Yatthassa upagamanaṃ loke pākaṭataraṃ ahosi, te udāharaṇavasena dassento ‘‘cittagahapatisīvalittherādike viyā’’ti āha. Annanti annasaññito catubbidhopi paccayo. Sabbepi dāyake ekajjhaṃ gahetvā sāmaññato ekavasena ‘‘dāyakamevā’’ti vuttaṃ, yathā cāha ‘‘ko nāma so yakkho, yaṃ annaṃ nābhinandatī’’ti? Tattha yakkhoti satto. Sāmaññajotanā ca nāma yasmā puthuatthavisayā, tasmā ‘‘ye naṃ dadanti saddhāya, vippasannena cetasā. Tameva annaṃ bhajatī’’ti vuttaṃ. Tattha ma-kāro padasandhikaro, te evāti attho. Dāyakaṃ apariccajanameva anugacchati cakkaṃ viya kubbaraṃ.
第四《一根经》注释显示巴利原文
4. Ekamūlasuttavaṇṇanā
44 「一根」(ekamūlā):依安立之义,它有无明这一种根,故称“一根”,即那一种根。犹如对可结缚的事物,以乐味随观之力而生起渴爱;同样,由于被渴爱压伏而不能通达,故无明是渴爱之根,渴爱亦是无明之根。此理是依亲依止力而说;若依俱生力,它们互为根本的情形也是显而易见的。然而,在此偈颂中,所指的“一根”即是渴爱。其中,有渴爱依常见而转,无有渴爱依断见而转,如是便有二种轮转。所谓“俱生方面”:即就俱生方面而言,当渴爱在迷惘中生起时,亦会由于其猛利之力而有染污,更何说其他。所谓“亲依止方面”:唯就亲依止力而言,因为俱生力于此不可能存在。所谓“蔓延处”:即扩展之后而现起之处,故说“她于其中蔓延”。以海(会聚)之义而称为大海。因其不可越渡,足以令人沉坠,故为险崖;此处情形如同险崖,故亦称为“险崖”。故说“以无立足处之义”,亦即深不可测、极为深邃的意思。显示巴利原文
44. Patiṭṭhaṭṭhena avijjāsaṅkhātaṃ ekaṃ mūlaṃ etissāti ekamūlā. Taṃ ekamūlaṃ. Yathā saṃyojanīyesu assādānupassanāvasena taṇhāsamuppādo, evaṃ taṇhābhibhavavasena anavabodhoti avijjā taṇhāya mūlaṃ, taṇhā ca avijjāya mūlaṃ. Ayañhi nayo upanissayatāvasena vutto, sahajātavasena cāyaṃ aññamaññaṃ mūlabhāvo pākaṭoyeva. Idha pana imissaṃ gāthāyaṃ adhippetā ‘‘ekamūla’’nti sā taṇhā. Tattha yā bhavataṇhā, sā sassatadiṭṭhivasena āvaṭṭati parivattati, vibhavataṇhā ucchedadiṭṭhivasena, evaṃ dvirāvaṭṭaṃ. Sahajātakoṭiyāti sahajātakoṭiyāpi, pageva sammuyhaṃ āpannassa pana vattamānāya taṇhāya balavabhāvena malīnatā siyā. Upanissayakoṭiyāti upanissayakoṭiyāva sahajātakoṭiyā asambhavato. Pattharaṇaṭṭhānāti vitthatā hutvā pavattiṭṭhānabhūmi . Tenāha ‘‘tesu sā pattharatī’’ti. Samuddanaṭṭhena samuddo. Uttarituṃ asakkuṇeyyatāya patāya alaṃ pariyattoti pātālo, ayaṃ pana pātālo viyāti pātālo. Tenāha ‘‘appatiṭṭhaṭṭhenā’’ti. Agādhagambhīratāyāti attho.
第五 无等经注疏显示巴利原文
5. Anomasuttavaṇṇanā
45 「Anomanāmanti」:即并非低劣之名。世尊的名字正是依功德而起的称号。由于世尊的功德完全圆满,其名号也就并非低劣,故说“具足一切功德故”等。再者,诸如“三明”、“六通”等名,因其涉及的范围有限,故不能称为“无等之名”;而世尊的“导师”、“一切知者”、“正自觉者”等名,由于境界广大、无所欠缺,方堪称无等之名。因此说:“无缺之名”。「蕴之差别等」:即蕴的种种差别等。以智慧如实通达之义,即是“义”(attha)。「为证得随觉慧」:是为了现证出世间慧。「行道」:即止与观的行道。依烦恼欲之力而可执取之处,欲本身就是“阿赖耶”(所著)。这是就过去时间而把握“正在进行”的情形,故说为“正在行”。现在已不存在此种现象,因此说:“此依过去而说”。以大神力等故而称为“大”(mahantānaṃ)。显示巴利原文
45.Anomanāmanti anūnanāmaṃ. Guṇanemittikāni eva hi bhagavato nāmāni. Guṇānañcassa paripuṇṇatāya anūnanāmanti āha ‘‘sabbaguṇasamannāgatattā’’tiādi. Apica tathā tevijjo, chaḷabhiññotiādīni nāmāni anomanāmāni na honti paricchinnavisayattā, bhagavato pana satthā, sabbaññū, sammāsambuddhotiādīni nāmāni anomanāmāni nāma mahāvisayattā anūnabhāvato. Tenāha ‘‘avekallanāma’’nti. Khandhantarādayoti khandhavisesādike. Ñāṇena yāthāvato araṇīyaṭṭhena atthe. Anvayapaññādhigamāyāti lokuttarapaññāpaṭilābhāya. Paṭipadanti samathavipassanāpaṭipadaṃ. Kilesakāmānaṃ vasena allīyitabbaṭṭhena kāmā eva ālayo. Atītakāleyeva kamanataṃ gahetvā vuttaṃ ‘‘kamamāna’’nti. Na etarahi tadabhāvatoti āha ‘‘atītaṃ pana upādāya idaṃ vutta’’nti. Mahānubhāvatādinā mahantānaṃ.
第六 天女经注疏显示巴利原文
6. Accharāsuttavaṇṇanā
46 “被天女群喧闹围绕”这首偈颂,是那位天子依某种意图唱出的。若不借着次第解说,则不易明了,因此注释者便从这首偈的来历说起:“据说这位天子……”等等。其中,“在此教法中”是指在这位导师的教法之中。“业与业处”即业的决断。他因以法义为重、事务轻微,故生活简朴。“属于睡眠的部分”:由于昼夜中前夜分皆用于精进修行,身体疲倦,为了恢复安稳而躺下休息的部分,是得到允许的。显示巴利原文
46. ‘‘Accharāgaṇasaṅghuṭṭha’’nti gāthā devaputtena yenādhippāyena gāyitā, so anupubbikathāya vinā na paññāyatīti taṃ āgamanato paṭṭhāya kathento ‘‘ayaṃ kira devaputto’’tiādimāha. Tattha sāsaneti imasseva satthusāsane. Kammākammanti kammavinicchayaṃ. Atthapurekkhāratāya appakiccatāya ca sallahukavuttiko. Sayanassa koṭṭhāsoti divasaṃ purimayāmañca bhāvanānuyogavasena kilantakāyassa samassāsanatthaṃ seyyāya upagamanabhāgo anuññāto.
“腹中”:指腹内食物稀薄时,因饥饿而起的“如刀割之风”,即那种锋利如刀割般的刺痛之风。“就在肩上”:指在与烦恼魔战斗中肩负着责任;或指站在解脱的顶点而说法。“由于善根薄弱”:意指证悟的助缘薄弱、智慧未成熟,因此未能证得漏尽便去世了——这是文句的连接。“站在上面”:指作为资具,站立于天衣之上。“他就那样站着”:即使说了那样的话,他仍如前一般站立。“金板”:是醒悟后,通过发愿所应获得的金板。由于未曾犯戒,故说“以未破损的戒”。因为在他前来亲近导师时,那些天女也一同前来,所以说“被天女众围绕着”。显示巴利原文
Abbhantareti kucchiyaṃ bhattassa parittatāya satthakavātāti tikkhabhāvena satthakā viya kantanakā vātā. Dhurasmiṃyevāti kilesamārena yuddhe eva. Vimuttāyatanasīse ṭhatvā dhammaṃ desento vā. Upanissayamandatāya aparipakkañāṇatāya āsavakkhayaṃ appatto kālaṃ katvāti yojanā. Upari ṭhitanti parikkhārabhāvena dibbadussūpari ṭhitaṃ. Tatheva aṭṭhāsīti tāhi tathā vuttepi yathā tato pubbe, tatheva aṭṭhāsi. Suvaṇṇapaṭṭanti nibbuddhe paṭijinitvā laddhabbasuvaṇṇapaṭṭaṃ. Vītikkamassa akatattā asambhinneneva sīlena. Yasmā tasmiṃ satthu santikaṃ āgacchante tāpi tena saddhiṃ āgamaṃsu tasmā ‘‘accharāsaṅghaparivuto’’ti vuttaṃ.
“被喧闹”:会合一处而喧腾,指各处因天女们的歌声而喧哗。“把她们看做毕舍遮鬼群”:是由于他对她们已无欲贪。“由于心倾向决定性”:即心倾于正性决定。“由于尊重”:指不随她们而转,将其视为可尊重的所在。“行进”:即朝向涅槃的行进。而这种行进是出离轮回的,因此问道:“如何成为出离呢?”显示巴利原文
Saṅghositanti saṅgamma ghositaṃ, tattha tattha accharānaṃ gītasaddavasena ghositaṃ. Pisācagaṇaṃ katvā vadati acchandarāgatāya. Niyāmacittatāyāti sammattaniyāme ninnacittatāya. Garubhāvenāti tāsaṃ vase avattanato garuṭṭhānabhāvena. Yātrāti nibbānaṃ pati yātrā. Taṃ pana vaṭṭato niggamanaṃ hotīti āha ‘‘kathaṃ niggamanaṃ bhavissatī’’ti.
“极度削减烦恼而住”:即极度以削减烦恼的方式而住。“对于未修习、未着手观照者”:即未致力于修习、未开始修观的人。“对于行道者”:指遵循善逝教导、正确行道之人。“导向空性的观”:指揭示空性的观,由于远离了恶行与渴爱而独住。“其唯一之道”:意为出世间的道才是他唯一之道,因为此前的世间分道,他早已修习纯熟。显示巴利原文
Atisallekhatevāti ativiya kilesānaṃ sallekhitavuttiko. Akatābhinivesassāti bhāvanamananuyuttassa anāraddhavipassakassa. Kārakassāti sugatovādakārakassa sammāpaṭipajjato. Suññatāvipassananti suññatādīpanaṃ vipassanaṃ duccaritataṇhāya dūrīkaraṇena ekavihāritāya. Eko maggo assāti lokuttaramaggo eva assa anāgato, pubbabhāgamaggo pana kataparicayoti attho.
“身歪曲等”:由于身恶行等已被断除,因而不复存在,由此而言。“于此无畏,或证此者无所畏惧”:在这种状态中毫无恐惧,或者说,证得此处的补特伽罗再无恐惧,故名为“无畏”。“超越轮回旷野,前往涅槃安稳不死之处”:越过轮回的荒漠,驶向名为涅槃的安稳、不死之境。因为这是以善逝为御者、善加装备的车乘,所以“车不喧响”——这里指的正是八支圣道。由于它不离开法,且辗转生起,故是以法轮为轮。显示巴利原文
Kāyavaṅkādīnanti kāyaduccaritādīnaṃ abhāvato samucchindanena anupalabbhanato. Natthi ettha bhayaṃ, asmiṃ vā adhigate puggalassa natthi bhayanti abhayaṃ nāma. Saṃsārakantāraṃ atikkamitvā nibbānasaṅkhātaṃ khemaṃ amataṭṭhānaṃ gamane sugatasārathinā susajjitayānabhāvato ratho akūjanoti aṭṭhaṅgiko maggova adhippeto. Dhammato anapetatāya aparāparuppattiyā ca dhammacakkehi.
“愧”也一同被包含,因二者不相离。“Apālambo”意为无所依怙(非依止处)。“资具”:因其为造作而成,故称资具。在道的作用处,法是指其中所摄的正见。“以无常等的方式”:即依无常随观等方式而说。在清净、被断除之时。“得地之轮”:即所谓“已得地”的轮转。其中,五蕴是观智现起之处,故称为“地”;而于彼处应被生起的烦恼种类,因依于轮回之业,故称为“得地之轮”。“遍知”:是以决断的方式、以超越的方式去了知、去通达。显示巴利原文
Ottappampi gahitameva avinābhāvā. Apālamboti avassayo. Parivāroti parikkhāro abhisaṅkharaṇato. Maggassa karaṇaṭṭhāne dhammo tappariyāpannā sammādiṭṭhi. Aniccādivasenāti aniccānupassanādivasena. Sodhitesu vajjhamānesu. Bhūmiladdhavaṭṭanti bhūmiladdhasaṅkhātaṃ vaṭṭaṃ. Tattha vipassanāya pavattiṭṭhānabhāvato pañcakkhandhā bhūmi nāma, vaṭṭamayakammabhāvato tattha uppajjanārahaṃ kilesajātaṃ bhūmiladdhavaṭṭaṃ. Parijānamānāti paricchindanavasena samatikkamavasena jānamānā paṭivijjhantī.
为什么天子只安住于入流果呢?世尊宣说此法,难道不是以四道精勤为核心而说的吗?因此说‘就如……’等。显示巴利原文
Kasmā devaputto sotāpattiphaleyeva patiṭṭhāsi, nanu ca sā desanā bhagavatā catumaggappadhānabhāvena pavattitāti āha ‘‘yathā hī’’tiādi.
7. 《植树经》注释显示巴利原文
7. Vanaropasuttavaṇṇanā
47 “kesaṃ”一词本是依属格而说,在“住于法者、具足戒者”的语境中,应转为体格复数。因为依义理,语格可以灵活变化。或者,这里的“ke”(哪些人)一词,应以狮子回顾的方式引来结合,因此提问:“哪些是住于法者?哪些是具足戒者?”以此提问说明原因。由于具备果等成就,有情于此喜悦,故称为“园”。在园中种植并使它结果的人,即是“园中植树者”。林木因为荫凉等功德而为人亲近依止,故称为“丛林”。其中,凡属“近林”特征的丛林,已为“园”一词所包含;因此,为显示苦行林的特征,才又说“环绕界限”等。“不平处”指有水、泥泞的崎岖之地。人们于此饮水之处,称为“饮水处”,即水井;或水于此被饮用,故名饮水处。“池塘等”中的“等”字,包含了水渠。显示巴利原文
47.Kesanti sāmivasena vuttakasaddo ‘‘dhammaṭṭhā sīlasampannā’’ti ettha paccattabahuvacanavasena pariṇāmetabbo. Atthavasena hi vibhattivipariṇāmo. Ke janāti ettha vā vuttakesaddo sīhavilokananayena ānetvā yojetabboti āha ‘‘ke dhammaṭṭhā, ke sīlasampannā’’ti? Pucchatīti iminā tattha kāraṇamāha. Phalādisampattiyā āramanti ettha sattāti ārāmo. Ārāme ropenti nipphādentīti ārāmaropā. Vanīyati chāyāsampattiyā bhajīyatīti vanaṃ. Tattha yaṃ upavanalakkhaṇaṃ vanaṃ, taṃ ārāmaggahaṇeneva gahitanti tapovanalakkhaṇaṃ, taṃ dassento ‘‘sīmaṃ parikkhipitvā’’tiādimāha. Visameti udakacikkhallena visame padese. Pānīyaṃ pivanti etthāti papā, taṃ papaṃ. Udakaṃ pīyati etthāti vā papā. Taḷākādīti ādi-saddena mātikaṃ saṅgaṇhāti.
“就此意义而言”:以此说法,否定了业道已成就的情况。因为随念自己所造的福德,以该福德为所缘,能产生众多福德,但并非已造的福德自身会增长。“于彼法中安住”,即在植树等法中得以安立。“以此戒成就”,是指依止于如前所说的法中所行的戒而安住,同时也具足其它以身语律仪为特征的戒。圆满十善法,是由于远离了恶行。其余部分如前所述。显示巴利原文
Imamatthaṃsandhāyāti iminā kammappathappattaṃ paṭikkhipati. Attanā katañhi puññaṃ anussarato taṃ ārabbha bahuṃ puññaṃ pasavati, na pana yathā kataṃ puññaṃ sayameva pavaḍḍhati. Tasmiṃ dhamme ṭhitattāti tasmiṃ ārāmaropanādidhamme patiṭṭhitattā. Tenapi sīlena sampannattāti tena yathāvuttadhamme katasīle ṭhatvā ciṇṇena tadaññenapi kāyavācasikasaṃvaralakkhaṇena sīlena samannāgatattā. Dasa kusalā dhammā pūrenti duccaritaparivajjanato. Sesaṃ vuttanayameva.
《祇园经》注疏显示巴利原文
8. Jetavanasuttavaṇṇanā
48 因为具有所要追求的功德,也是被寻求的功德,所以称为“仙人”,也就是无学、有学和善凡夫。这些仙人组成的僧团名为“仙人僧团”,为比丘僧团所亲近依止,因此说“为比丘僧团所亲近依止”。显示巴利原文
48. Esitaguṇattā esiyamānaguṇattā ca isī, asekkhā sekkhakalyāṇaputhujjanā ca. Isīnaṃ saṅgho isisaṅgho. Isisaṅghena nisevitaṃ. Tenāha ‘‘bhikkhusaṅghanisevita’’nti.
世尊营造这座林园时,依凭香室、殿堂、尖顶阁楼等建筑,依凭丰润浓密遮荫的树木蔓草,加上整片地段的圆满成就,使得这座祇园成为独一无二、极为悦意之处,令人心欢喜;同样,也因它是圣者的住处。如此,世尊在第一首偈颂中讲述了祇园的功德后,便说:“阿拉汉所住之处,那方土地是迷人的。” “业”就是指道思,这是一种趋向减损的思,能为众生带来清净,导向业的灭尽,所以说“业即道思”。以了知四圣谛的意义以及穿透烦恼的意义,称为“明”;道慧就是正见,所以说“明即道慧”。“定相应法”就是正精进、正念和正定。正如“明”有明分,“定”同样也有定分。“他有此戒,所以是有戒者”,因此说“安立于戒中的人,他的生命最为殊胜”。见与思惟就是正见、正思惟。其中,正思惟对正见有辅助的功用,因而被称为“明分”;实际上,这个正思惟是含摄在慧蕴中的。又如正思惟等含摄在慧蕴中,正精进、正念和正定则含摄在定蕴中,所以说“正精进、正念和正定”。因为这里的“法”指的是定,正如在“那些世尊有这样的……”
},
{显示巴利原文
Taṃ kārentassa gandhakuṭipāsādakūṭāgārādivasena siniddhasandacchāyarukkhalatāvasena bhūmibhāgasampattiyā ca anaññasādhāraṇaṃ atiramaṇīyaṃ taṃ jetavanaṃ cittaṃ toseti, tathā ariyānaṃ nivāsabhāvenapīti āha ‘‘evaṃ paṭhamagāthāya jetavanassa vaṇṇaṃ kathetvā’’ti. Tenāha bhagavā – ‘‘yattha arahanto viharanti, taṃ bhūmirāmaṇeyyaka’’nti (dha. pa. 98; theragā. 991). Apacayagāmicetanā sattānaṃ visuddhiṃ āvahati kammakkhayāya saṃvattanatoti āha ‘‘kammanti maggacetanā’’ti. Catunnaṃ ariyasaccānaṃ viditakaraṇaṭṭhena kilesānaṃ vijjhanaṭṭhena ca vijjā. Maggapaññā sammādiṭṭhīti āha ‘‘vijjāti maggapaññā’’ti. Samādhipakkhikā dhammā sammāvāyāmasatisamādhayo. Yathā hi vijjāpi vijjābhāgiyā, evaṃ samādhipi samādhipakkhiko. Sīlaṃ etassa atthīti sīlanti āha ‘‘sīle patiṭṭhitassa jīvitaṃ uttama’’nti. Diṭṭhisaṅkappāti sammādiṭṭhisaṅkappā. Tattha sammāsaṅkappassa sammādiṭṭhiyā upakārabhāvena vijjābhāvo vutto. Tathā hi so paññākkhandhasaṅgahitoti vuccati. Yathā ca sammāsaṅkappādayo paññākkhandhasaṅgahitā, evaṃ vāyāmasatiyo samādhikkhandhasaṅgahitāti āha ‘‘vāyāmasatisamādhayo’’ti. Dhammoti hi idha samādhi adhippeto ‘‘evaṃdhammā te bhagavanto ahesu’’ntiādīsu (dī. ni. 2.13; ma. ni. 3.197; saṃ. ni. 5.378) viya. Vācākammantājīvāti sammāvācākammantājīvā. Maggapariyāpannā eva hete saṅgahitā. Tenāha ‘‘etena aṭṭhaṅgikamaggenā’’ti.
应当以方法、以次第来修习圣道。因此说「定相应法」。这指的是与正定相应的观法以及道法。因为“比丘们,我将为你们开示有近因、有资具的圣正定”这样的说法,所以正见等道法是正定的资具。「应择」就是应当审察、应当修习的意思。「在那里」一词,是处格,用于表示“因”的意义。因为圣道是众生清净的因,所以说“在那圣道中清净”。「应择五蕴法」就是应当对现前的五蕴进行观察。当对这些五蕴进行观察时,观智达到顶峰,以此由遍知通达证悟苦圣谛,以此由断除通达证悟集圣谛,以此由作证通达证悟灭圣谛,以此由修习通达证悟道圣谛——如此,在这四圣谛中得以清净。在这个立场上,处格是用于“相”的意义,意思是:当那些圣谛被证悟的时候。显示巴利原文
Upāyena vidhinā ariyamaggo bhāvetabbo. Tenāha ‘‘samādhipakkhiyadhamma’’nti. Sammāsamādhipakkhiyaṃ vipassanādhammañceva maggadhammañca. ‘‘Ariyaṃ vo, bhikkhave, sammāsamādhiṃ desessāmi saupanisaṃ saparikkhāra’’nti (ma. ni. 3.136) hi vacanato sammādiṭṭhiādayo maggadhammā sammāsamādhiparikkhārā. Vicineyyāti vīmaṃseyya, bhāveyyāti attho. Tatthāti hetumhi bhummavacanaṃ. Ariyamaggahetukā hi sattānaṃ visuddhi. Tenāha ‘‘tasmiṃ ariyamagge visujjhatī’’ti. Pañcakkhandhadhammaṃ vicineyyāti paccuppanne pañcakkhandhe vipasseyya. Tesu vipassiyamānesu vipassanāya ukkaṃsagatāya yadaggena dukkhasaccaṃ pariññāpaṭivedhena paṭivijjhīyati, tadaggena samudayasaccaṃ pahānapaṭivedhena paṭivijjhīyati, nirodhasaccaṃ sacchikiriyāpaṭivedhena, maggasaccaṃ bhāvanāpaṭivedhena paṭivijjhīyatīti evaṃ tesu catūsu saccesu visujjhatīti imasmiṃ pakkhe nimittatthe eva bhummaṃ, tesu saccesu paṭivijjhiyamānesūti attho.
“决定语”即确定语,意为决断。而“仅舍利弗”这一决定语,则表明在声闻弟子中唯有舍利弗最为殊胜,因为那正是大长老超胜的状态。以“烦恼止息”等语句,显示大长老具有如此这般的烦恼止息。他在声闻弟子的范围内,智慧已达于彼岸。如果这样,那么“即使有比丘已到彼岸,也无更超过此者”这句话,应当理解为是就那些在诸佛智慧领域中、智慧已达彼岸的人而说的。再者,这个决定语也是就解脱的种种差异,依三种解脱而到彼岸者来说的。因此说:“到彼岸者,即证得涅槃”等。并不是说存在比这位长老更胜上者;即使真有可得,也仅是如此而已,这便是所说的用意。显示巴利原文
Avadhāraṇavacananti vavatthāpanavacanaṃ, avadhāraṇanti attho. ‘‘Sāriputtovā’’ti ca avadhāraṇaṃ sāvakesu sāriputtova seyyoti imamatthaṃ dīpeti tassevukkaṃsabhāvato. Kilesaupasamenāti iminā mahātherassa tādiso kilesavūpasamoti dasseti. Tassa sāvakavisaye paññāya pāramippatti ahosi. Yadi evaṃ ‘‘yopi pāraṅgato bhikkhu, etāvaparamo siyā’’ti idaṃ tesaṃ buddhānaṃ ñāṇavisaye paññāpāramippattānaṃ vaseneva vuttanti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Avadhāraṇampi vimuttiyā nānattā tīhi vimuttīhi pāraṅgate sandhāyetaṃ vuttaṃ. Tenāha – ‘‘pāraṃ gatoti nibbānaṃgato’’tiādi. Na therena uttaritaro nāma atthi labbhati, labbhati ce, evameva labbheyyāti adhippāyo.
《悭吝经》注疏显示巴利原文
9. Maccharisuttavaṇṇanā
49 “悭吝者”即具足悭吝、拥有悭吝之人,因此说“以悭吝具足”。“悭吝”与“悭吝”在意义上其实是同一个词。“不礼敬”就是连下礼敬都不做,更何况是布施呢?这便是用意。“做敬奉”即是作亲切友好的款待,应如此理解。这暂且算作一种轻度的悭吝:对于那种不愿像掏出真心一样来展示自己的人,便称之为悭吝。“怎么,你的脚会痛吗?难道不正是因为你自己来来往往,脚才会痛?他们又哪里割截了你呢?”这便是用意。“连如法的行为也不做,更何况是布施?”这便是用意。“随业去往各趣者”——前去并靠近的,称为“圣者”,也就是众生。然而,这些是“卑劣的圣者”,即吝啬者、顽固悭吝的人。因为没有比悭吝更卑劣、更下劣的东西了,它摧坏一切功德;因为布施是所有财富成就等一切成就的根本,而悭吝却禁绝了布施。通过这些语句来说明。它是对自己的伤害者:随逐悭吝,它毁坏了善法和美好的转生趣成就。显示巴利原文
49.Maccharinoti maccheravanto maccherasamaṅginoti āha ‘‘maccherena samannāgatā’’ti. Maccheraṃ macchariyanti atthato ekaṃ. Na vandatīti vandanamattampi na karoti, kuto dānanti adhippāyo. Upaṭṭhānaṃ kātunti madhurapaṭisanthāraṃ karotīti yojanā. Idaṃ tāva mudumacchariyaṃ na hadayaṃ viya attānaṃ dassentassa macchariyanti katvā. Kiṃ tuyhaṃ pādā rujjanti nanu tuyhaṃyeva āgatagamanesu pādā rujjanti, kinte ime chindantīti adhippāyo. Sāmīcimpi na karoti kuto dānanti adhippāyo. Yathākammaṃ taṃtaṃgatiyo aranti upagacchantīti ariyā, sattā. Ime pana kucchitā ariyāti kadariyā, thaddhamaccharino. Macchariyasadisañhi kucchitaṃ sabbahīnaṃ natthi sabbaguṇābhibhūtattā bhogasampattiādisabbasampattīnaṃ mūlabhūtassa dānassa nisedhato. Itiādīhi vacanehi. Attano upaghātakoti macchariyānuyogena kusaladhammānaṃ gatisampattiyā ca vināsako.
由于需依善业和恶业而转生、趣向,所以称为“来世”,也就是他世。“五欲乐”是指依止于五欲而产生的乐味。“戏乐”则有三种,即身的戏乐、语的戏乐和心的戏乐。“这是异熟”:意思是如同得到粗布衣服等困苦的果报,这便是那样的异熟。“阎魔世界”即是指他世。在“再生”一词中的“iti”,是表示方式之意。由此,将经中所说的地狱和畜生道也都含摄在内了。显示巴利原文
Puññapāpavasena samparetabbato upagantabbato samparāyo, paraloko. Kāmaguṇaratīti kāmaguṇasannissayo assādo. Khiḍḍāti kāyikakhiḍḍā vācasikakhiḍḍā cetasikakhiḍḍāti evaṃ tividhā. Esa vipākoti coḷādīnaṃ kicchalābhoti esa evarūpo vipāko. Yamalokanti paralokaṃ. Upapajjareti ettha iti-saddo pakārattho. Tena pāḷiyaṃ vuttaṃ nirayaṃ tiracchānayoniñca saṅgaṇhāti.
“他们乞求”,是指圣者的乞求。正如所说:“圣者们为布施而伫立等待,这便是圣者的乞求。”(《本生》Ja. 1.7.59)那些乐于分享的人,因为通达应做之事并如实而行,故被称为“知恩者”。“以天宫之光”仅为举例;在天界,他们确实也藉由林园与如意树的光辉,乃至诸天的衣裳、严饰与身光而辉耀。也可以说,“辉耀”指声名显赫、普为人知,不似在恶趣世间那般隐没无闻。“由他人所积集的” :指并非自己积集,而是纯粹由其他有情所提供的受用乐具。因此经中说:“如自在魔般喜乐”,意思是:犹如在他化自在天中,那些如同自在魔一般具足快乐的天子那样喜悦。“如此所说的来世”即指这些天界,也就是下文所述的来世。“两者的”:如前所说,即造作恶业与造作善业的这两类人。他们从此处死后,也就是从地狱或天界等处灭没后,再生于人间。他们当中,那悭吝者再生为人时,会转生为穷人,并因过去习性的力量而仍旧十分悭吝,为养活妻子儿女等而去杀害鱼、鳖等有情,此后又将屡屡堕入地狱。而另一个心地清净者,则会因过去的习性而变得富有。显示巴利原文
Yācanti nāma ariyayācanāya. Vuttañhetaṃ ‘‘uddissa ariyā tiṭṭhanti, esā ariyāna yācanā’’ti (jā. 1.7.59). Ye saṃvibhajanti, te vadaññū nāma ñatvā kattabbakaraṇato. Vimānappabhāyāti nidassanamattaṃ, uyyānakapparukkhappabhāhi devatānaṃ vatthābharaṇasarīrappabhāhipi sagge pakāsentiyeva. Pakāsantīti vā pākaṭā honti, na apāyaloke viya apākaṭāti attho. Parasambhatesūti sayaṃ sambhataṃ anāpajjitvā pareheva sambharitesu sukhūpakaraṇesu. Tenāha pāḷiyaṃ ‘‘vasavattīva modare’’ti, paranimmitabhogesu vasavattī devaputtā viya sukhasamaṅgitāya modantīti attho. Evaṃ vuttasamparāyoti ete saggāti evaṃ heṭṭhā vuttasamparāyo. Ubhinnanti etesaṃ yathāvuttānaṃ ubhinnaṃ dukkaṭasukaṭakammakārīnaṃ. Tato cavitvā tato nirayasaggādito cavitvā manussesu nibbattati. Tesu yo maccharī manussesu nibbatto, so daliddo hutvā pubbacariyavasena maccharīyeva honto dārādibharaṇatthaṃ macchakacchapādīni hantvā punapi niraye nibbatto. Itaro suddhāsayo samiddho hutvā pubbacariyāvasena punapi puññāni katvā sagge nibbatteyya. Tenāha ‘‘puna samparāyepi duggatisugatiyeva hotī’’ti.
10. 《陶师经》的注释显示巴利原文
10. Ghaṭīkārasuttavaṇṇanā
50 50. “Upapannāse”是加上了“se”音后的表述形式,其义为“已再生”,故解释为“依再生而到达者”。“无烦”指于自所得成就中不退失,这些天众的梵天界即称作“无烦梵天界”,于此界中。“再生后立刻”指初投生的那一刹那位。“阿拉汉果的解脱”指无学解脱。至于有学解脱,则在他们再生于无烦天之前便已证得。“超越人的身体”:这是指透过去除心的杂染这一方式;因为此处是依果来显示因,故注释中说“这里所说的‘人的身体’⋯⋯等语”。“天界的”指存在于天界者,也就是称为梵身的五蕴。其中,关于结缚,经中说“天界的系缚”即指五种上分结。“他的”指这位天子的。“他舍离了人的身体,超越了天界的系缚”——你对那些人说:“您这位善巧者,因断除了一切过失,其自性即为‘无过失’。”这是将意义与音声不加区分而作的引申,因此说这是甚深之语。注释接着以“甚深义”加以解释,意在指明所深奥的是其意义,而非音声。由于彻底断除了欲贪,完全舍离了欲境,故称为“无欲染着的梵行者”,即是不来者。有他居住的一处村落。显示巴利原文
50. ‘‘Upapannāse’’ti se-kārāgamaṃ katvā niddeso, ‘‘upapannā’’icceva atthoti āha ‘‘nibbattivasena upagatā’’ti. Attano sampattito avihānato avihā, tesaṃ brahmaloko avihābrahmaloko, tasmiṃ. Upapattisamanantaramevāti paṭhamakoṭṭhāse eva. Arahattaphalavimuttiyāti asekkhavimuttiyā. Sekkhavimuttiyā pana avihūpapattito pageva vimuttā. Mānusaṃ dehaṃ samatikkamanti cittupakkilesapahānavasenāti phalena hetudassanamidanti āha ‘‘mānusaṃ dehanti idha…pe… vuttānī’’ti. Divi bhavaṃ dibbaṃ, brahmattabhāvasaññitaṃ khandhapañcakaṃ. Tattha saṃyojanakoti vuttaṃ ‘‘dibbaṃ yoganti pañca uddhambhāgiyasaṃyojanānī’’ti. Imassāti devaputtassa. ‘‘Hitvā mānusaṃ dehaṃ, dibbayogaṃ upaccagu’’nti tesaṃ tvaṃ kusalaṃ sabbāvajjappahānena anavajjataṃ bhāsatīti kusalī vadesi. Atthena saddassa abhedopacāraṃ katvā gambhīravacanaṃ vuttanti āha ‘‘gambhīrattha’’nti atthasseva gambhīrato, na saddassa. Samucchinnakāmarāgatāya sabbaso kāmavisayappahānena nirāmisabrahmacārī nāma anāgāmī. Nivāsanaṭṭhānabhūto samāno eko gāmo etassāti āha ‘‘ekagāmavāsī’’ti.
6. 《老品》显示巴利原文
6. Jarāvaggo
1. 《老经》注释显示巴利原文
1. Jarāsuttavaṇṇanā
51 因为能成就利益,故称为“善”(sādhu),即任何有意义之事物(atthajāta)。而对希求利益者而言,它应被获得、应被奉行,故称为“所得”(laddhaka);由于是美好的,所以称为“好的”(bhaddaka)。故说“sādhūti laddhakaṃ bhaddakaṃ”(“善”即所得之好的)。为以遮遣的方式阐明“戒直至老年都是善的”此句之义,而说“以此显示了此义”。“此”(idaṃ)即指该义。显示巴利原文
51. Hitassa sādhanato sādhu, yaṃ kiñci atthajātaṃ. Taṃ pana atthakāmena labhitabbato upasevitabbato laddhakaṃ, kalyāṇaṭṭhena bhaddakanti vuccatīti āha ‘‘sādhūti laddhakaṃ bhaddaka’’nti. ‘‘Sīlaṃ yāva jarā sādhū’’ti vuttamatthaṃ byatirekato vibhāvetuṃ ‘‘iminā idaṃ dassetī’’ti vuttaṃ. Idanti idaṃ atthajātaṃ.
“已住立者”(patiṭṭhitā):指在心相续中已得确立,不为任何所夺。故说“以道而来”。就“被尊重”(cittīkata)等词义而言:即应受供养等性质。这在古注中曾说过。“cittīkataṃ ratanaṃ”(被尊重的宝):所谓“宝”,是指世间中被尊重的事物,如价值千金等。又如世间所尊重的刹帝利智者、四大王、帝释天、善时分天、大梵天等,在他们之中也受尊重;由于应受皈依等故应亲近。“ratikaraṃ(令生喜乐)”:即带来喜与乐。以禅那喜乐而言,即两种禅那的喜乐。“tuletuṃ(衡量)”:为了衡量。“guṇapārami(功德的彼岸)”:功德的最高境界。“难得”:纵使流转无数无量劫,亦无法获得。“anomo(无缺的)”:不缺少、圆满。在此,特别是由于无上人所受用的缘故,故应以此随念“正自觉者世尊”,因此说了“世尊于戒是无缺的”等。显示巴利原文
Patiṭṭhitāti cittasantāne laddhapatiṭṭhā, kenaci asaṃhāriyā. Tenāha ‘‘maggena āgatā’’ti. Cittīkataṭṭhādīhīti pūjanīyabhāvādīhi. Vuttaṃ hetaṃ porāṇaṭṭhakathāyaṃ. Cittīkatanti ratananti idaṃ ratanaṃ nāma loke cittīkataṃ vatthūnaṃ sahassagghanatādivasena. Yepi loke cittīkatā khattiyapaṇḍita-catumahārāja-sakka-suyāma-mahābrahmādayo, tesaṃ cittīkato tehi saraṇanti upagantabbatādivasena. Ratikaranti pītisukhāvahaṃ. Jhānaratisukhenāti duvidhenapi jhānaratisukhena. Tuletunti paricchindituṃ. Guṇapāraminti guṇānaṃ ukkaṃsapāramiṃ. Dullabho anekāni asaṅkhyeyyāni atidhāvitvāpi laddhuṃ asakkuṇeyyattā. Anomoti anūno paripuṇṇo. Tattha visesato anomasattaparibhogato tehi ‘‘sammāsambuddho bhagavā’’ti anussaritabbatoti āha ‘‘bhagavā anomo sīlenā’’tiādi.
这里所指的正是圣道慧,故云:“但在此处,由于难得现起的意义,智慧被称为‘宝’。”由于能产生应受供养的果报,亦能清净自身的相续,故福思为福;然而,此福思在谁中生起,便唯独属于他,不与他人共有,亦不为任何他人所带来;而注疏中则说:“因为无色。”显示巴利原文
Ariyamaggapaññāyeva idha adhippetāti ‘‘idha pana dullabhapātubhāvaṭṭhena paññā ‘ratana’nti vutta’’nti āha. Pujjaphalanibbattanato, attano santānaṃ punātīti ca puññacetanā puññaṃ, sā pana yassa uppannā, tasseva āveṇikatāya anaññasādhāraṇattā kenacipi anāhaṭā, aṭṭhakathāyaṃ pana ‘‘arūpattā’’ti vuttaṃ.
2. 《无老经》注释显示巴利原文
2. Ajarasāsuttavaṇṇanā
52 “Ajīraṇena(不为老坏)”:即不陷入老坏的状态。这也是表明‘获得不灭’这一特征的说法,因此说“意为不破坏”。“应被排出”:应当被除去。显示巴利原文
52.Ajīraṇenāti jiṇṇabhāvānāpajjanena. Lakkhaṇavacanañcetaṃ avināsappattiyā. Tenāha ‘‘avipattiyāti attho’’ti. Niddhamitabboti nīharitabbo.
三、友经注疏显示巴利原文
3. Mittasuttavaṇṇanā
53 “sattho(商队)”:指“与利益同行”,即带着货物本钱,以经商的方式游历各地等人群。因此说“同行者”(saddhiṃcaro),也就是一起行走的人。“友(mitta)”:由爱的连结而具有朋友的作用。为了说明此处所指的朋友类型,所以说“在疾病生起时”等。“那样的(tathārūpe)”:指令人厌弃或困难的事情。正如外出的人通过收拾整理散落的物品,在财产损失时提供保护;同样,母亲出于对儿子的爱,在家中保护儿子,所以说“母亲是自家中的朋友”。“atthajātassa(有需要者)”:指已经生起的利益或事务,因此说“有任务者”。“samparāyahitaṃ(来世利益)”:在来世带来利益。显示巴利原文
53. Saha atthena vattatīti sattho, bhaṇḍamūlaṃ gahetvā vāṇijjavasena desantarādīsu vicaraṇakajanasamūho. Tenāha ‘‘saddhiṃcaro’’ti, sahacaraṇakoti attho. Mittanti sinehayogena mittakiccayuttaṃ . Idhādhippetappakāraṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘roge uppanne’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tathārūpeti jigucchanīye, duttikicche vā. Yathā asaṇṭhitānaṃ saṇṭhāpanavasena pavasato purisassa bhogabyasane nāthatā, evaṃ puttasinehavasena puttassa mātuyā antogehe nāthatāti vuttaṃ ‘‘mātā mittaṃ sake ghare’’ti. Atthajātassāti upaṭṭhitapayojanassāti atthoti āha ‘‘uppannakiccassā’’ti. Samparāyahitanti samparāye hitāvahaṃ.
四、事经注疏显示巴利原文
4. Vatthusuttavaṇṇanā
54 “依止(Patiṭṭhāti)”:即支撑、依靠。“秘密(Guyhassa)”:指应被隐藏的秘密。“最上朋友(paramo sakhā)”:之所以称为最上朋友,是因为处于极为亲爱的位置。显示巴利原文
54.Patiṭṭhāti avassayo. Guyhassāti guhitabbassa rahassassa. Paramo sakhā nāma atipiyaṭṭhānatāya.
五、初众生经注疏显示巴利原文
5. Paṭhamajanasuttavaṇṇanā
55 「Vidhāvatī」:指追逐种种色相,随其所欲而运作。显示巴利原文
55.Vidhāvatīti vividhaṃ rūpaṃ padhāvati, yathākāmaṃ pavattatīti attho.
6. 《第二众生经》注疏显示巴利原文
6. Dutiyajanasuttavaṇṇanā
56 「轮回之苦」(Vaṭṭadukkhato):指从轮回中所受的苦。轮回之所以流转不息,是由于烦恼、业与果报辗转相续而生。此苦仅是苦本身,由种种苦蕴集而成。显示巴利原文
56.Vaṭṭadukkhatoti saṃsāradukkhato. Saṃsāro hi kilesakammavipākānaṃ aparāparuppattitāya vidhāvati. Tañca dukkhaṃ dukkhamattāya nānāvidhadukkharāsibhāvato.
7. 《第三众生经》注疏显示巴利原文
7. Tatiyajanasuttavaṇṇanā
57 「成就」(Nipphatti):由可爱与不可爱的果报得以产生而称为“成就”。由此本身而成为依止,意思是,它是对应于成就之果报的依赖、住处与原因。显示巴利原文
57.Nipphattīti iṭṭhāniṭṭhavipākānaṃ nipphajjanato nipphatti. Tato eva avassayo, nipphattitavipākassa avassayo adhiṭṭhānaṃ kāraṇanti attho.
8. 《邪道经》注疏显示巴利原文
8. Uppathasuttavaṇṇanā
58 「非道」即非道路、非方法。「日夜消尽」是由于消尽刹那的明显性;因为所说的那个刹那本身也在消尽。其余垢染属于外在,如衣物、身体等所成。正如所说:“用灰、碱等洗涤之后,可以使其变得清净。”「污染」指被染污;由于造成了内在的染污状态,众生的相续便无法被称为清净。「女性」亦是梵行的障碍。「众生」指有情的聚集;由于不能如实见到过患,便生起执着,形成束缚。以守护根门等方式烧灼烦恼,故称为「苦行」。因此他说:“一切……”等。显示巴利原文
58.Amaggoti na maggo anupāyo. Rattindivakkhayoti tattha vayakkhaṇassa pākaṭabhāvato. Vuttakkhaṇopi hi sayaṃ khīyateva. Sesaṃ bāhiramalaṃ vatthasarīrādibhūtaṃ. Tathā hi ‘‘bhasmakhārādīhi dhovitvā sakkā sodhetu’’nti vuttaṃ. Duṭṭhoti dūsito sattasantāno na sakkā suddho nāma kātuṃ abbhantaramalīnabhāvāpādanato. Itthiyanti brahmacariyassa antarāyakarāyapi. Pajāti sattakāyo sajjati saṅgaṃ karoti yāthāvato ādīnavaṃ apassanto. Indriyasaṃvarādi kilesānaṃ tāpanato tapo, tenāha ‘‘sabbāpī’’tiādi.
9. 《第二经》的注疏显示巴利原文
9. Dutiyasuttavaṇṇanā
59 「何处」是处格,有属格之义,故说「乐于何处」。所谓「信」,其本质无有过失,能带来世间与出世间的利益与安乐,因此说:「它是前往善趣与涅槃者的伴侣。」信具有引导者的性质,以利益之行来教导。显示巴利原文
59.Kissāti bhummatthe sāmivacananti āha ‘‘kismiṃ abhirato’’ti. Saddhā nāma anavajjasabhāvā, tasmā lokiyalokuttarahitasukhāvahāti āha ‘‘sugatiñceva nibbānañca gacchantassa dutiyikā’’ti. Anusāsati hitacariyāya pariṇāyikabhāvato.
第十,《诗人经》的注疏。显示巴利原文
10. Kavisuttavaṇṇanā
60 从「伽耶底」等开始,至「乌卡提」等结束的二十六种韵律中,伽耶底等韵是偈颂的根源与生起因,故说「依此而生起」。又因为这些韵衍生出「阿努图巴」等诗律,故说「韵律为偈颂之因」。「开头的安立偈」指说法之初为令知晓、引生忆念而说出的偈颂,类似一种提醒。所谓「音素能创句子」,是指音素集合为句子,句子集合为偈颂,而此集合是由其组成元素所表显并令其现起的。因此,处于音节状态的音素,其集合即成句子;句子又反过来成为音素的表现者与创出者,故说「音素创句子」。即使音素一经发出即灭,仅存一刹那,但随后在意识心路中,以综合把握的方式将其整合为一个句子,并依约定俗成而显示义理。「句子成就偈」的道理也是如此。「偈颂照亮义趣」:被称为偈的句子集合,通过动作与动作者的关联而结合,随应说者的意图,将观察、思择而组合的义理清晰地显示出来。这一切都是依托于「大海」等施设的世俗言说,只是依循着世俗假名而运作。因此他说:「发起偈颂……」等。「意图」也叫「依靠」,故解释为「所…」。显示巴利原文
60.Gāyattiādikoti chabbīsatiyā chandesu gāyattiādiko ukkatipariyosāno chando gāthānaṃ nidānaṃ samuṭṭhānaṃ ‘‘samuṭṭhahati etenā’’ti katvā. Tehi pana anuṭṭhubhādiko hotīti āha ‘‘chando gāthānaṃ nidāna’’nti. Pubbapaṭṭhāpanagāthāti dhammakathāya ādito ārocanabhāvajānanatthaṃ satijananaṃ viya pavattitagāthā. Akkharañhi padaṃ janetīti yasmā akkharasamudāyo padaṃ, padasamudāyo gāthā, samudāyo ca samudāyīhi byañjīyati taṃpavattanato, tasmā byañjanabhāve ṭhitaṃ akkharaṃ, taṃsamudāyo padaṃ, padaṃ taṃ viyañjetā janetā viya hotīti ‘‘akkharañhi padaṃ janetī’’ti vuttaṃ. Akkharaṃ hi uccāritaviddhaṃsitāya taṃtaṃkhaṇamattāvaṭṭhāyīpi parato pavattiyā manoviññāṇavīthiyā saṅkalanavasena ekajjhaṃ katvā padabhāvena gayhamānaṃ yathāsaṅketamatthaṃ byañjeti. Padaṃ gāthaṃ janetīti etthāpi eseva nayo. Gāthā atthaṃ pakāsetīti gāthāsaññito padasamudāyo kiriyākārakasambandhavasena sambandhito kattuadhippāyānurūpaṃ ālocitavilocitaṃ saṃhitaṃ atthaṃ vibhāveti. Samuddādipaṇṇattinissitā vohārasannissayeneva pavattatīti katvā. Tenāha ‘‘gāthā ārabhanto’’tiādi. Āsayoti avassayoti āha ‘‘patiṭṭhā’’ti kavitoti vicittakathīādito.
7. 时分品显示巴利原文
7. Addhavaggo
一、名经注疏显示巴利原文
1. Nāmasuttavaṇṇanā
61 61.「名」:指通称等各类名称。「一切」:指一切施设之路、一切应知的转起之路。「Addhabhavī」:虽然在圣典中用了过去时的说法,但那只是表相而已。「征服、随转」:这两个词显示,征服与随转即是转起。不过,对於征服,此处不局限於微小的范围,而是以广大范围来显示,因此说「以化生者等」。「彼有名」:对於那棵树、那块石头等,虽本身无名,仍有共称,人们便如此认取它。这便是它的意思。显示巴利原文
61.Nāmanti sāmaññanāmādibhedaṃ nāmaṃ. Sabbanti sabbaṃ paññattipathaṃ sabbaṃ ñeyyapavattipathaṃ. Addhabhavīti kāmaṃ pāḷiyaṃ atītakālaniddeso kato, taṃ pana lakkhaṇamattaṃ. Abhibhavati anupatatīti etena abhibhavo anupatanaṃ pavatti evāti dasseti. Taṃ panassa abhibhavanaṃ appavisaye anāmasitvā mahāvisayānaṃ vasena dassento ‘‘opapātikena vā’’tiādimāha. Tassa nāmaṃ hotīti tassa rukkhapāsāṇādikassa anāmakoicceva samaññā hoti, tathā naṃ sañjānantīti attho.
二、心经注疏显示巴利原文
2. Cittasuttavaṇṇanā
62 62.「随心转者」:指那些未遍知事者,唯独指他们。「无剩余取尽」:即无余执取。因为已遍知蕴、断除烦恼之人,不会跟着心转,而是令心随自己转。显示巴利原文
62.Ye cittassa vasaṃ gacchantīti ye apariññātavatthukā, tesaṃyeva. Anavasesapariyādānanti anavasesaggahaṇaṃ. Na hi pariññātakkhandhā pahīnakilesā cittassa vasaṃ gacchanti, taṃ attano vase vattenti.
三、渴爱经的注释显示巴利原文
3. Taṇhāsuttavaṇṇanā
63 在第三部经中,“一切皆随他自在而行”的意义是:那些随渴爱而转的人,便是被完全含摄、毫无遗余。此义即以“这即是理趣”一句来显示。显示巴利原文
63. Tatiye ‘‘sabbeva vasamanvagū’’ti ye taṇhāya vasaṃ gacchanti, tesaṃ eva anavasesapariyādānanti imamatthaṃ ‘‘eseva nayo’’ti iminā atidissati.
四、结经的注释显示巴利原文
4. Saṃyojanasuttavaṇṇanā
64 “Kiṃsu saṃyojana”一句中,“su”仅是语助词,故称“kiṃ-saṃyojano”。“vicaranti etehi”意为“他们以此行走”,即“vicāraṇā”(足)。此处本应用复数,却用了单数。“Tassā”指“世间的”(lokassa)。显示巴利原文
64.Kiṃsu saṃyojanoti sūti nipātamattanti āha ‘‘kiṃ-saṃyojano’’ti? Vicaranti etehīti vicāraṇā, pādā. Bahuvacane hi vattabbe ekavacanaṃ kataṃ. Tassāti lokassa.
五、束缚经的注释显示巴利原文
5. Bandhanasuttavaṇṇanā
65 在第四部经中出现的义理,在紧接着的经中也已宣说,唯文句有别,故说:“第五部经亦是同样的理趣。”显示巴利原文
65. Catutthe āgataattho eva anantarepi vutto, byañjanameva nānanti āha ‘‘pañcamepi eseva nayo’’ti.
第六《自害经》的注疏显示巴利原文
6. Attahatasuttavaṇṇanā
66 经文作“Kenassubbhāhato”,他注释说此处的“su”仅为小品词。若读作“kenassabbhāhato”,则是省略了u音的连声。被释词“icchādhūpāyito”(为欲所焚):指被以未得之境为相的渴爱所烧灼、燃烧,故说“被欲火所燃”(icchāya āditto)。显示巴利原文
66. ‘‘Kenassubbhāhato’’ti pāṭhoti adhippāyena ‘‘su-kāro nipātamatta’’nti āha, ‘‘kenassabbhāhato’’ti pana pāṭhe u-kāralopena padasandhi. Icchādhūpāyitoti asampattavisayicchālakkhaṇāya taṇhāya santāpito daḍḍho. Tenāha ‘‘icchāya āditto’’ti.
第七《被系缚经》的注疏显示巴利原文
7. Uḍḍitasuttavaṇṇanā
67 “Ullaṅghita”:谓系缚后复跃过。“Saddādīsu”:于声等境中,耳等诸处被渴爱之绳所系缚,系缚坚固故,不能从中出离。“世间”(Loka):指处世间。依义理的联结而作解释,故亦可根据蕴等世间来联结解释。因紧接的“有”(bhava)故,并不遥远。死心之间无有间隔,仅隔一心识的“有”业不能被觉知;若尔,众生何不觉知?故说“以强力……”等等。显示巴利原文
67.Ullaṅghitoti ubbandhitvā laṅghito. Saddādīsūti saddādināgadantesu sotādīni uḍḍitāni taṇhārajjunā daḷhabandhanena baddhattā tadanativattanato. Lokoti āyatanaloko. Tathā atthayojanāya katattā khandhādilokavasenapi yojanā kātabbā. Na dūraṃ anantarabhavakattā. Cuticittaantaritattā ekacittantarabhavassa kammassa abujjhanaṃ, evaṃ sante kasmā sattā na bujjhantīti āha ‘‘balavatiyā’’tiādi.
第八《封闭经》的注疏显示巴利原文
8. Pihitasuttavaṇṇanā
68 “问”:即想要了解的意义。说为“被问”,是因为在第七经的偈颂中,将前半颂与后半颂、后半颂与前半颂互换,而第八经是由天神发问,故说“依下上次序而问”。“与问相应的回答”:经中虽未明说,其义已然成立,故不另引。显示巴利原文
68.Pañhoti ñātuṃ icchito attho. Pucchitoti sattamasutte gāthāya purimaddhaṃ pacchimaddhaṃ, pacchimaṃ purimaṃ katvā aṭṭhamasutte devatāya pucchitattā vuttaṃ ‘‘heṭṭhupariyāyavasena pucchito’’ti. Pucchānurūpaṃ vissajjananti avuttampi siddhametanti anāhaṭaṃ.
第九 渴爱经注显示巴利原文
9. Icchāsuttavaṇṇanā
69 第九经中,“为调伏”:即以调伏。此处与格表示作具义。“是什么的”:即“什么”,“su”在此为小品词。“断除一切结缚”:即断除所有十种结缚。因为一旦渴爱断除,便无任何烦恼结缚留存未断。此义极易明了,故说“一切皆明”。显示巴利原文
69. Navame vinayāyāti vinayena. Karaṇatthe hi idaṃ sampadānavacanaṃ. Kissassūti kissa, su-kāro nipātamattaṃ. Sabbaṃ chindati bandhananti sabbaṃ dasavidhampi saṃyojanaṃ samucchindati. Na hi taṃ kiñci kilesabandhanaṃ atthi, yaṃ asamucchinnaṃ hutvā ṭhitaṃ assā taṇhāya samucchinnāya. Svāyamattho suviññeyyoti āha ‘‘sabbaṃ uttānamevā’’ti.
第十 世间经注显示巴利原文
10. Lokasuttavaṇṇanā
70 “于何”:即“于何存在时”?然而,其存在唯依生起的方式而说,故云“于何生起时”。“世间生起”:因无执取,依世间共称而说。于“六处”:此处理则相同。“结交”:指于内六处生起极度的渴爱,因为内六处是渴爱的所缘事。“依止”:此处省略语词,取“转起”之义,即前时之造作相望后时之造作。何者转起?即世间,亦即世间共称。于“六处”:此处之“处”表示缘义,因为六处为缘,即是一切苦。“此”:指有情世间。“名为生起”:即作“六处生起,名为一切苦之根本”。“于外处结交”:特指对色等生起渴爱,因为色等是渴爱的所缘事。由于眼等为可喜者,色等为所执取者,世间随顺所依,故说“于六处……恼害”。显示巴利原文
70.Kisminti kismiṃ sati? Tassa pana santabhāvo uppattivasenevāti āha ‘‘kismiṃ uppanne’’ti? Loko uppannoti vuccati anupādānattā lokasamaññāya. Chasūti etthāpi eseva nayo santhavanti adhikasinehaṃ karoti adhikasinehavatthubhāvato ajjhattikāyatanānaṃ. Upādāyāti pubbakālakiriyā aparakālakiriyaṃ apekkhatīti vacanasesavasena kiriyāpadaṃ gahitaṃ ‘‘pavattatī’’ti. Kiṃ pana pavattati? Loko, lokasamaññāti attho. Chasūti idaṃ nimittatthe bhummaṃ. Chaḷāyatananimittañhi sabbadukkhaṃ. Ayanti sattaloko. Uppanno nāma hoti chaḷāyatanaṃ nāma mūlaṃ sabbadukkhānanti katvā. Bāhiresu āyatanesu santhavaṃ karoti visesato rūpādīnaṃ taṇhāvatthukattā. Yasmā cakkhādīnaṃ santappanavasena rūpādīnaṃ pariggahitattā lokassa nisevitāya saṃvattati, tasmā vuttaṃ ‘‘channaṃ…pe… vihaññatī’’ti.
第八 断除品显示巴利原文
8. Chetvāvaggo
第一 断除经注显示巴利原文
1. Chetvāsuttavaṇṇanā
71 「杀害」:即打击而灭除。「不被煎逼」:即不被压迫。由于忧恼已灭,故不悲泣,即无心的苦受之苦。「毒」:即是苦,因为不可意的状态;其根本原因是嗔,因为产生不可意的果,所以说「毒根的」即指苦的异熟。「未被骂者」:即无被骂的过失。由于骂与打在意义上相连,因此「忿怒者」一词用作表示对象的为格(受格)。当乐生起时,嗔即灭去。针对乐的生起,此嗔被称为「甘甜首」,即以乐为终结之义。显示巴利原文
71.Vadhitvāti hantvā vināsetvā. Aparidayhamānattāti apīḷiyamānattā. Vinaṭṭhadomanassattā na socati cetodukkhadukkhābhāvato. Visaṃ nāma dukkhaṃ aniṭṭhabhāvato, tassa mūlakāraṇaṃ kodho aniṭṭhaphalattāti āha ‘‘visamūlassāti dukkhavipākassā’’ti. Akkuṭṭhassāti akkosāparādhassa. Akkosapahāratthasambandhena hi ‘‘kuddhassā’’ti upayogatthe sampadānavacanaṃ. Sukhaṃ uppajjati kodhaṃ nassati. Sukhuppattiṃ sandhāya esa kodho ‘‘madhuraggo’’ti vutto, sukhāvasānoti attho.
第二 车经注显示巴利原文
2. Rathasuttavaṇṇanā
72 「慧」:即相,是观察相的方法。「见」:即见的因。正如「朱罗王的国土即称朱罗国」,国土是由国王而了知。显示巴利原文
72.Paññāṇanti lakkhaṇaṃ sallakkhaṇūpāyo. Disvāti dassanahetu. ‘‘Coḷarañño raṭṭhaṃ coḷaraṭṭha’’nti evaṃ raṭṭhaṃ raññā paññāyati.
第三 财富经注显示巴利原文
3. Vittasuttavaṇṇanā
73 「以信」:即以信为因。「家世成就」:即刹帝利等成就。因为是一切世间与出世间财富获得之因,故唯「信为财富」。在下,由于将依三门生起的一切无过失法都含摄在内,所以说「法即十善业道」。「无杂染乐」:即无漏乐。以有漏为对比,故说「无杂染」。由于具有不枯竭性,能生起喜悦,令生极喜,即使长久、极久地修习亦不带来过患,故「真实」确实更甘甜。因为真实不应说有可饮、可尝、可受用的滋味。现在,为了显示其在作用成就等方面极具价值,所以说「于真实中」等。其中,河水倒流应以大劫宾那的故事等来说明,其余应以黑岛本生、须陀素摩本生、鱼本生等来说明。「压伏」:即制伏、胜过。「更甘甜」:即更美,于最胜中之义。「慧命者」:以慧活命故为慧命者,即以慧为先导而行。为了说明「慧命者」即以慧而行、住、运作生命,所以说「凡慧命者」等。有人读作「活命者」,其义为:于活命中慧命者为最胜。显示巴利原文
73.Saddhāyāti saddhāhetu. Kulasampadāti khattiyādisampattiyo. Sabbalokiyalokuttaravittapaṭilābhahetuto saddhāvittameva. Heṭṭhā tiṇṇaṃ dvārānaṃ vasena uppannakassa sabbassapi anavajjadhammassa saṅgaṇhanato ‘‘dhammoti dasakusalakammapatho’’ti vuttaṃ. Asaṃkiliṭṭhasukhanti. Nirāmisaṃ sukhaṃ. Tameva sāmisaṃ upanidhāya sambhāvento āha ‘‘asaṃkiliṭṭha’’nti. Asecanakabhāvena abhirucijananato piyākicchakaraṇato bahuṃ sucirampi kālaṃ āsevantassa adosāvahato saccameva madhurataraṃ. Na hi taṃ pivitabbato sāditabbato anubhavitabbato rasoti vattabbataṃ arahati. Idāni tassa kiccasampattiatthehipi mahārahataṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘saccasmiṃ hī’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha nadīnivattanaṃ mahākappinavatthuādīhi (dha. pa. aṭṭha. 1.mahākappinattheravatthu; a. ni. aṭṭha. 1.1.231; theragā. aṭṭha. 2.mahākappinattheragāthāvaṇṇanā) dīpetabbaṃ, itarāni kaṇhadīpāyanajātaka- (jā. 1.10.62 ādayo) sutasoma- (jā. 2.21.371 ādayo) macchajātakehi (jā. 1.1.34, 75; 1.2.131 ādayo) dīpetabbāni. Nimmaddenti abhibhavanti. Madhurataranti sundarataraṃ seṭṭhesūti attho. Paññājīvīti paññāya jīvanasīloti paññājīvī, paññāpubbaṅgamacariyoti attho. Paññājīvīti ca paññāvasena iriyati vattati jīvitaṃ pavattetīti atthoti dassento ‘‘yo paññājīvī’’tiādimāha. ‘‘Jīvata’’nti keci paṭhanti, jīvantānaṃ paññājīviṃ seṭṭhamāhūti attho.
第四 降雨经注显示巴利原文
4. Vuṭṭhisuttavaṇṇanā
74 「向上生起者」:指从地面破土而出者。因为被称为“最胜”,故说“七种”,或以此随顺其余种类。安稳:即无饥荒等灾患,故说“丰足”。「向下落下者」:指朝下运行者。「行去者」:指有行走习性者。因为它们属于“动”类,不似树木等属于“静”类,故说“行动者”。「牛」:指母牛。依此可知也包含水牛等。「言说者」:即宣说已生起之义者。显示巴利原文
74.Uppatantānanti pathaviṃ bhinditvā uṭṭhahantānaṃ. ‘‘Seṭṭha’’nti vuccamānattā ‘‘sattavidha’’nti vuttaṃ, itaresaṃ vā tadanulomato. Khemo hoti dubbhikkhupaddavābhāvato. Tenāha ‘‘subhikkho’’ti. Nipatantānanti adhomukhaṃ pavattantānaṃ. Pavajamānānanti vajanasīlānaṃ. Te pana yasmā jaṅgamā nāma honti, na rukkhādayo viya thāvarā, tasmā āha ‘‘jaṅgamāna’’nti. Gāvoti dhenuyo. Tena mahiṃsādikānampi saṅgaho daṭṭhabbo. Vadantānanti uppannaṃ atthaṃ vadantānaṃ.
「以自忍」:指以自己的忍耐、自己的喜好而执取。另一位天神不满意她的回答,便说了以下的话。「毁他德者」:即毁坏功德者,因为这会破坏从导师教法中获得的功德。「轻率无礼」:具足轻率骄慢,例如因言语轻率而用词粗鲁,言语即表现为如此。「多言者」:即口舌粗硬者。她向十力请问,是想要听闻微细、深妙、与三宝相应的义理。世尊回答那位天神时,随顺她的意乐而说。「正在飞腾而起」:指正在飞起,即逐一拔除。「轮转根本的大无明」:这是为了显示其过患而作的如实说明。「正在沉没者」:由于对立面的作用而向下沉没,也就是正在被抬高浮举者。「成为福田者」:这是对“以脚行走者”一词进行释义时的如实说明。「无论是什么样的儿子」:这一句是因为前面天神提到了“儿子”才这样说的。显示巴利原文
Attanokhantiyāti attano khantiyā ruciyā gahitabhāvena. Itarā devatā tassā vissajjane aparitussamānā āha. Yāva padhaṃsīti guṇadhaṃsī satthudesanāya laddhabbaguṇanāsanato. Pagabbāti pāgabbiyena samannāgatā, yathā vacīpāgabbiyena akharā, tathā vācāya bhavitabbaṃ. Mukharāti mukhakharā. Dasabalaṃ pucchi saṇhaṃ sukhumaṃ ratanattayasaṃhitaṃ atthaṃ sotukāmā. Assā devatāya vissajjento ajjhāsayānurūpaṃ. Uppatamānāti uppatantī samugghāṭeti odhiso. Vaṭṭamūlakamahāavijjāti tassā ādīnavadassanatthaṃ bhūtakathanavisesanaṃ. Osīdantānanti paṭipakkhavasena adho sīdantānaṃ, ussādayamānānanti attho. Puññakkhettabhūtoti idaṃ ‘‘padasā caramānāna’’nti padassa atthavivaraṇavasena bhūtakathanavisesanaṃ. Yādiso putto vā hotūti idaṃ purimapade devatāya puttagahaṇassa katattā vuttaṃ.
《恐怖经》的注释显示巴利原文
5. Bhītāsuttavaṇṇanā
75 「今为何故怖畏」:此处,“su-idha”仅为不变词,故说“因何怖畏”?「道乃由诸处所宣说」:指以多种原因、形成种种证得之处而作宣说、教导。因此说“依三十八所缘等”。「如此存在时」:意思是,既然这条通往涅槃之道已被你们通过诸处所普遍宣说,是一条安稳可得之道,那么这些民众为何还会怖畏,而去执取邪道、生起颠倒见呢?这样,那位天神按照自己的意愿,用前半颂向导师陈述了自己内心所思的道理,用后半颂提出了自己的疑问。「多慧」:即广大的智慧。「慧增盛」:即超胜的智慧。「除其」:指节减之后。「能分享者」:指在饮食受用中善于分配的人。因此说“以指节……”等。此义即如前文所详说。显示巴利原文
75.Kiṃ sūdha bhītāti ettha su-idhāti nipātamattanti āha ‘‘kiṃ bhītā’’ti? Maggo ca nekāyatanappavuttoti anekakāraṇaṃ nānāvidhādhigamokāsaṃ katvā pavutto kathito. Tenāha ‘‘aṭṭhatiṃsārammaṇavasenā’’tiādi. Evaṃ santeti evaṃ sabbasādhāraṇānekāyatanehi nibbānagāmimaggassa tumhehi paveditattā labbhamāne kheme magge kiṃ bhītāyaṃ janatā uppathabhūtā viparītadiṭṭhito gaṇhīti attho? Evaṃ devatā yathicchāya purimaddhena attanā yathācintitamatthaṃ satthu paveditā, pacchimaddhena attano saṃsayaṃ pucchati. Bahupaññāti puthupañña. Ussannapaññāti adhikapaññā. Ṭhapetvāti saṃyametvā. Saṃvibhāgīti āhāraparibhoge sammadeva vibhajanasīlo. Tenāha ‘‘accharāyā’’tiādi. Vuttatthameva heṭṭhā.
「以意」:即以心意执取。「前净支」:即前行阶段的清净支。「于四者」:即包含在所说支中的四者。「施物资具」:即布施的资具。「于此诸法」:即于信等功德中。譬如,有信心的人,备办资具后,由于对舍物之殊胜缘、对业与他世如现见般确信,其心便柔软。心柔软者,生起悲悯,便将自己所有之物施与他人。能分享者,即使自己所有甚少,亦令他人共享。能言者,因具能言之特质,是为真实施者,能知时节,于适宜之时圆满求者之心愿。因此说“如是……于四者等”。显示巴利原文
Manenāti manogahaṇena. Pubbasuddhiaṅganti pubbabhāgasuddhibhūtaṃ aṅgaṃ. Catūsūti vuttaaṅgapariyāpannaṃ. Yaññaupakkharoti dānassa sādhanaṃ. Etesu dhammesūti etesu saddhādiguṇesu. Yathā hi saddho paccayaṃ paccupaṭṭhapetvā vatthupariccāgassa visesapaccayo kammaphalassa paralokassa ca paccakkhato viya pattiyāyanato, evaṃ muduhadayo. Muduhadayo hi anudayaṃ patvā yaṃ kiñci attano santakaṃ paresaṃ deti. Yo ca saṃvibhāgasīlo, so appakasmimpi attano santake parehi sādhāraṇabhogī hoti. Vadaññū vadāniyatāya yāginova yuttaṃ yuttakālaṃ ñatvā atthikānaṃ manorathaṃ pūretīti vuttaṃ ‘‘iti…pe… catūsūti āhā’’ti.
「语」等三支,是显示三种戒的成就。因为戒行圆满者,不会说出对他世的怖畏。「有信」这一支,是显示精进与内心意乐的清净。内心清净、安住于正精进的人,怎还会有来自他世的怖畏呢?以二法摄四支,这是二法门。「住于这四法」是指安住于按上述二法所摄的四种功德中。显示巴利原文
Vācantiādīni tīṇi aṅgāni tividhasīlasampattidīpanato. Sampannasīlo hi paralokaṃ na bhāseyya. Saddho ekaṃ aṅgaṃ payogāsayasuddhidīpanato. Suddhāsayassa sammāpayoge ṭhitassa kathaṃ paralokato bhayanti. Dukavasena caturaṅgayojanā dukanayo. Etesu catūsu dhammesu ṭhitoti etesu yathāvuttadukasaṅgahesu catūsu guṇesu patiṭṭhito.
6. 不衰老经注疏显示巴利原文
6. Najīratisuttavaṇṇanā
76 「名与姓」:例如“帝须、迦叶、乔达摩”这样的名与姓。这只是举例,因此应当理解为:这是对一切假名安立之相的说法。「不衰老」:因为它不是真实法,无有生灭,所以不至衰老。因此说“无衰老的特性”。由于名称的施设持续存在,纵经不同时代,依然以此名称称呼,故说“过去诸佛……被称为不衰老”。显示巴利原文
76.Nāmagottanti tisso kassapo gotamoti evarūpaṃ nāmañca gottañca. Nidassanamattametaṃ, tasmā sabbassa paññattiyā lakkhaṇavacananti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Na jīratīti asabhāvadhammattā uppādavayābhāvato jaraṃ na pāpuṇāti. Tenāha ‘‘jīraṇasabhāvo na hotī’’ti. Yasmā samaññābhāvato kālantarepi taṃ samaññāyateva, tasmā ‘‘atītabuddhānaṃ…pe… na jīratīti vuccatī’’ti āha.
「懈怠」:指懒惰的状态,即坚固的偷懒。因此说“由此……”等。「住」:指作用。由睡眠导致的放逸,是对应做之事的不做。由烦恼导致的放逸,则是对不应做之事的做。「于作业时」:指适宜作务的时候。「作业精勤之缺失」:指缺少策励、发起该行动的精进。这实际上是与精进相对立的不善心生起,并不仅仅是精进的缺失。「戒律仪之缺失」:即破戒。「放纵行仪」:指不符合规范的行为。「多睡眠」:即嗜睡。正因为如此,即便是在手上拿取物品时都不会疲倦的人,也可能被睡眠所征服。因此说“由她……”等。「过饥等」:以“等”字来涵盖被过度饱食等所征服的情形。「来至的懈怠」:并非前面所说的那种固有、本有的懈怠。在巴利经文中,“Te chidde”由于语法上性、数的错乱而如此表述,因此解释为“那六个漏隙”。这些之所以被称为漏隙,是因为它们令善心生起的机会断绝。因此世尊说:“那是财富无法停留之处”。意思是,以一切方式毫无保留地加以说明。显示巴利原文
Ālasiyanti alasabhāvo daḷhakosajjaṃ. Tenāha ‘‘yenā’’tiādi. Ṭhitinti byāpāraṃ. Niddāvasena pamajjanaṃ kattabbassa akaraṇaṃ. Kilesavasena pamajjanaṃ akattabbassa karaṇampi. Kammasamayeti kammaṃ kātuṃ yuttakāle. Kammakaraṇavīriyābhāvoti taṃkammakiriyasamuṭṭhāpakavīriyābhāvo. So pana atthato vīriyapaṭipakkho akusalacittuppādo, na vīriyassa abhāvamattaṃ. Sīlasaññamābhāvo dussīlyaṃ. Vissaṭṭhācāratā nāma anācāro. Soppabahulatāti niddālutā . Yato gahaṇahatthopi na kilāsupi puriso niddāya abhibhuyyati. Tenāha ‘‘tāyā’’tiādi. Aticchātādīnīti ādi-saddena abhibhuyyatādiṃ saṅgaṇhāti. Āgantukālasiyaṃ na pubbe vuttaālasyaṃ viya pakatisiddhaṃ. ‘‘Te chidde’’ti pāḷiyaṃ liṅgavipallāsena vuttanti āha ‘‘tāni cha chiddānī’’ti. Kusalacittappavattiyā anokāsabhāvato chiddāni. Tenāha bhagavā – ‘‘yattha vittaṃ na tiṭṭhatī’’ti. Sabbākārena lesamattaṃ asesetvāti adhippāyo.
7. 《自在经》注疏显示巴利原文
7. Issariyasuttavaṇṇanā
77 「导师的垢秽」:即能令导师变得污秽之物。在此,通过执取“导师的垢秽”这一概念,所取的正是那已被垢秽染污的导师本身,故而说「执持垢秽的导师」。「欲求自在」:指不论事大事小,在任何地方都想凭自己的权威发号施令、自在而住。摩尼宝由于归属于可施舍之物,因而还算不上是最殊胜的货物;而女人,即使是对一个已舍弃家族规矩的女子也是如此,因其不可舍离性,方为最殊胜的货物。因此说「女人是货物中之最胜」。因为女人是那些高贵男子(人中良骏)的出生处,是最殊胜的宝库,所以说女人是货物中最胜。「与执垢秽的导师相似」:因为障碍了觉悟的作用。如同导师的垢秽会对具足智慧的导师之功德造成破坏,所以它才叫作「智慧导师的垢秽」。灾祸称为阿浮,因为它能带来灾祸,所以叫作「阿浮陀」,即能导致毁坏的原因。有人问:拿了东西,对沙门来说不是不合适吗?回答:是合适的。为了阐明这既随顺道理、亦不违背道理,故而开示“如斯筹食等……”这样的文句。显示巴利原文
77. Satthassa malanti satthamalaṃ, yena satthaṃ malīnaṃ hoti, satthamalaggahaṇena cettha malīnaṃ satthameva gahitanti āha ‘‘malaggahitasattha’’nti. Āṇāpavattananti appake vā mahante vā yattha katthaci attano āṇāya pavattanavasena vasanaṃ issariyattamicchanti. Maṇiratanampi vissajjanīyapakkhikattā uttamaṃ bhaṇḍaṃ nāma na hoti, itthī pana pariccattakulācāritthikāyapi anissajjanīyatāya uttamabhaṇḍaṃ nāma. Tenāha ‘‘itthī bhaṇḍānamuttama’’nti. Tesaṃ tesañhi purisājānīyānaṃ uppattiṭṭhānatāya uttamaratanākarattā itthī bhaṇḍānamuttamaṃ. Malaggahitasatthasadiso avabodhakiccavibandhanato. Satthamalaṃ viya satthassa paññāsatthassa guṇābhāvakaraṇato paññāsatthamalaṃ. Abbu vuccati upaddavaṃ, taṃ detīti abbudaṃ, vināsakāraṇaṃ. Nanu haraṇaṃ samaṇassa ayuttanti? Yuttaṃ. Tassa anvayato byatirekato ca yuttataṃ dassento ‘‘salākabhattādīnī’’tiādimāha.
8. 《欲乐经》注疏显示巴利原文
8. Kāmasuttavaṇṇanā
78 由于经文中宣说了「自爱者」,所以注释者说明:「除去一切菩萨」。因为那些菩萨全然是为了利益他人而修行,是具足大悲悯者,以利他为愿望,并不以自利为愿望;即便他们那些能带来自利的修行,也纯粹只是为了利益他人。这是《古注》里所说的。因为菩萨们通过利他的修行,来圆满各个波罗蜜,在遇到相应因缘时,为了圆满般若波罗蜜,甚至将自己布施出去,所以此处也说:「除了菩萨们」。「善的」指好的。因为这是针对言语而言,所以又解释说:「柔和、温和的」。「恶的」指的是低劣的、下贱的。这也就是在彰显其体相:「粗恶语」。显示巴利原文
78. ‘‘Attakāmo’’ti pāḷiyaṃ vuttattā āha ‘‘ṭhapetvā sabbabodhisatte’’ti. Te hi sabbaso paratthāya eva paṭipajjamānā mahākāruṇikā paratthakāmā, atthakāmā nāma na honti, yā ca tesaṃ attatthāvahā paṭipatti, sāpi yāvadeva paratthā evāti. Vuttaṃ porāṇaṭṭhakathāyaṃ. Yasmā bodhisattā parahitapaṭipattiyā pāramiyo pūrentā tathārūpaṃ kāraṇaṃ patvā attānaṃ paresaṃ pariccajanti paññāpāramiyā paripūraṇato, tasmā idhāpi ‘‘sabbabodhisatte ṭhapetvāyevāti vutta’’nti āha. Kalyāṇanti bhaddakaṃ. Vācāya adhippetattā āha ‘‘saṇhaṃ muduka’’nti. Pāpikanti lāmakaṃ nihīnaṃ. Taṃ pana pharusaṃ vācanti sarūpato dasseti.
9. 《资粮经》注显示巴利原文
9. Pātheyyasuttavaṇṇanā
79 「信系资粮」:有情因死亡而踏上远路、进入大旷野、跃进大险难之时,信便系好资粮袋、备足行粮。如何成就呢?如经中所说:“生起信……”等。这便是世尊所说“信系资粮”这一偈句。「吉祥」:为修福德者所亲近、所获得,故称吉祥,即自在、财富。「依止处」:因应被依止,故名依止处,意指住处。「拉拽」:将随心所欲之人到处拖来拽去。显示巴利原文
79.Saddhā bandhati pātheyyanti saddhā nāma sattassa maraṇavasena mahāpathaṃ saṃvajato mahākantāraṃ paṭipajjato mahāviduggaṃ pakkhandato pātheyyapuṭaṃ bandhati sambalaṃ sajjeti. Kathanti āha ‘‘saddhaṃ uppādetvā’’tiādi. Etaṃ vuttanti ‘‘saddhā bandhati pātheyya’’nti etaṃ gāthāpadaṃ vuttaṃ bhagavatā. Sirīti katapuññehi sevīyati tehi paṭilabhīyatīti sirī. Issariyaṃ vibhavo. Āsayitabbato āsayo, vasanaṭṭhānaṃ niketanti attho. Parikaḍḍhatīti icchāvasikaṃ puggalaṃ tattha tattha upakaḍḍhati.
10. 《光明经注》显示巴利原文
10. Pajjotasuttavaṇṇanā
80 「光明」:因它能照亮各处或平或险之地,故称光明。灯驱散黑暗后,能直接显现色法;同样,智慧光明驱散无明之暗,显示诸法的究竟真实色法。「如觉醒的婆罗门」:即如觉醒的、漏尽的婆罗门。他因获得了念与慧的圆满成就,故恒常觉醒。「牛」:指牛类,是公牛与母牛的通称。「业」:此处表工具义,是处格形式。「生命」指活命;「共命者」意为与生命同在。因此说“与业共活者”,即指以耕田、买卖等事业维生之人。「与牛群一起」:即与牛群为伴。若无牛,耕田等业无从产生;且凭借乳制品的成就以及耕田、负重的成就,耕田业及某些买卖业方能成办。「对于有情之身」:对于依食而活的有情之身,即使以其他方式谋生,耕田仍是他们活命的根本原因,因为它是成果得以成就的因相。「威仪路」同样是指种种行为动作进行的途径。他们称“犁沟”为耕田的工作。显示巴利原文
80. Taṃ taṃ samavisamaṃ pajjotatīti pajjoto. Padīpo andhakāraṃ vidhamitvā paccakkhato rūpagataṃ dasseti, evaṃ paññāpajjoto avijjandhakāraṃ vidhamitvā dhammānaṃ paramatthabhūtaṃ rūpaṃ dasseti. Jāgarabrāhmaṇo viyāti jāgarakhīṇāsavabrāhmaṇo viya. So hi satipaññāvepullappattiyā sabbadāpi jāgaro hoti. Gāvoti gojātiyo. Idaṃ gunnaṃ goṇānañca sāmaññato gahaṇaṃ. Kammeti karaṇatthe bhummavacanaṃ. Jīvanaṃ jīvo, saha jīvenāti sajīvino. Tenāha ‘‘kammena saha jīvantāna’’nti, kasivāṇijjādikammaṃ katvā jīvantānanti attho. Gomaṇḍalehi saddhinti gogaṇena saha. Na tena vinā kasikammādīni uppajjanti, gorasasiddhiyā ceva kasanabhāravahanasiddhiyā ca kasikammaekaccavāṇijjakammādīni ijjhanti. Sattakāyassāti āhārupajīvino sattakāyassa kasito aññathā jīvikaṃ kappentassapi kasijīvitavuttiyā mūlakāraṇaṃ phalanipphattinimittattā tassa. Iriyāpatho ca iriyanakiriyānaṃ pavattanupāyo. ‘‘Sītanti naṅgalasītakamma’’nti vadanti.
11. 《无诤经注》显示巴利原文
11. Araṇasuttavaṇṇanā
81 「诤」:众生因这些烦恼而喊叫、哭泣,故称诤,即贪等。由于被它们征服,众生以种种方式喊叫、悲叹。「无诤者」:由于他们完全舍离了这些诤,故称无诤者,即无有垢染的诸漏尽者。「已住居者」:指已圆满修习梵行住之人。「属自由者」:即拥有自由身份,因此称为“非奴身”。「沙门」:指已平息诸恶的沙门,故说为“诸漏尽沙门”。在凡夫善心时,以世间遍知;有学在预备阶段以世间遍知,在省察时以世间兼出世间遍知,遍知三地所摄的五蕴而彻知。诸漏尽者则是已遍知所应遍知之人,因此他们成为主导者而受用对象。「礼敬于彼,立定者」:这是说,由于戒具足而成为应受礼敬的对象,因此“立定者”即安立于戒中之人。「在此」:指在这个世间。「刹帝利」:这是一种表示身份特征的说法,故说“不仅刹帝利”等。显示巴利原文
81. Raṇanti kandanti etehīti raṇā, rāgādayo. Tehi abhibhūtatāya hi sattā nānappakāraṃ kandanti paridevanti. Te pana sabbaso natthi etesaṃ raṇāti araṇā. Nikkilesā khīṇāsavā. Vusitavāsoti vusitabrahmacariyavāso. Bhojissiyanti bhujissabhāvo. Tenāha ‘‘adāsabhāvo’’ti. Samaṇāti samitapāpasamaṇāti āha ‘‘khīṇāsavasamaṇā’’ti. Puthujjanakalyāṇakāle lokiyapariññāya, sekkhā pubbabhāge lokiyapariññāya, paccavekkhaṇe lokiyalokuttarāya pariññāya pariññeyyaṃ tebhūmakaṃ khandhapañcakaṃ parijānanti paricchijjanti. Khīṇāsavā pana pariññātapariññeyyā honti. Tathā hi te sāmī hutvā paribhuñjanti. Vandanti naṃ patiṭṭhitanti vuttaṃ, vandanīyabhāvo ca sīlasampannatāyāti āha ‘‘patiṭṭhitanti sīle patiṭṭhita’’nti. Idhāti imasmiṃ loke. Khattiyāti lakkhaṇavacananti āha ‘‘na kevalaṃ khattiyāvā’’tiādi.